JP2019076465A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To make it possible to easily grasp whether performance is appropriate.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: used game value acquisition means (a game control device 100) capable of acquiring an amount of used game value that is a game value used for games; given game value acquisition means (the game control device 100) capable of acquiring an amount of given game value that is a game value given to a player; calculation means (the game control device 100) for calculating, every time a certain period has passed, a ratio of the amount of the used game value to the amount of the given game value during the certain period; determination means (the game control device 100) for determining whether ratios stored in storage means (the game control device 100), which stores the calculated ratios for prescribed number of times, are within a prescribed reference range; and transmission means (the game control device 100) for transmitting abnormality information to presentation control means when power is activated in the game machine, if at least one among the ratios stored in the storage means is not within the reference range. Further, on the basis of receiving the abnormality information, the presentation control means makes a notification by using a prescribed notification device.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 171

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

  Conventionally, in pachinko gaming machines, a game is played based on the winning of the gaming ball to the start winning opening, and when the result of the game becomes a specific result mode, the special gaming state in which winning in the special fluctuation winning device becomes easy What occurs is common. In addition, a predetermined winning ball is provided by the game ball winning on the winning opening provided in the game area including the starting winning opening and the special variation winning device (for example, see Patent Document 1). .

JP, 2016-140468, A

  In recent years, in order to be able to grasp whether the performance of a gaming machine such as a base value is appropriate, it is required to measure the performance with the gaming machine. An object of the present invention is to make it possible to easily grasp whether the performance is appropriate.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is:
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
Game control means for controlling the game in an integrated manner;
Providing effect control means for controlling an effect based on information from the game control means;
The game control means
A use game value acquisition unit capable of acquiring an amount of use game value which is a game value used for the game;
Granted game value acquiring means capable of acquiring an amount of a granted game value which is a game value granted to a player;
Every time a predetermined period elapses, the amount of the used gaming value acquired by the used gaming value acquiring means in the predetermined period, and the amount of the granted gaming value acquired by the provided gaming value acquiring means in the predetermined period, Calculating means for calculating the ratio value of
Storage means for storing the ratio value calculated by the calculation means a predetermined number of times;
Determining means for determining whether the ratio value stored in the storage means is within a predetermined reference range;
And transmission means for transmitting abnormality information to the effect control means when the power of the gaming machine is turned on when at least one of the ratio values stored in the storage means is not within the reference range,
The effect control means is
It is characterized by performing alerting | reporting by a predetermined alerting | reporting apparatus based on receiving the said abnormal information.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to easily grasp whether the performance is appropriate.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the discharge | emission ball | toe number display part. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a payout rate display part. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a character ratio display part. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of an effect control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of input processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a switch read-in process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of payment command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a table which shows the priority of winning a prize mouth surveillance. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the modification of a winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of winning a prize number counter update processing. It is a figure explaining an ejection ball number field, an acquisition ball number field, and an acquisition ball number field according to character. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of outd charge performance monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of game state check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payment busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting opening switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big winning a prize mouth switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of small hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2-byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing during special figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of a process in special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of a process in special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of high probability fluctuation frequency update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an effect mode information check process. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing transition setting processing 1 during fan fare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of small shift fanfare middle processing migration setting processing 1. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during a big winning opening opening. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit end process. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure usual processing transfer setting processing 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit fanfare middle process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit middle process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of small hitting remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a production | presentation command setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of design change control processing. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a common drawing normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process shift setting process during a common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process in common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process in common drawing display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process in common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general operation start shift setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a routine charge residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the end process per common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a board | substrate electric wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of main prize ball | bowl signal edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting opening signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a receiving command analysis process. It is a figure which shows the example of a layout of the display screen of a display apparatus. It is a reverse view of the gaming machine concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the payout command (payout number command) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a reverse view of the game machine concerning a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ball | bowl performance monitoring process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of the balls performance monitoring processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special drawing process shift setting process 2 which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the one-shot type | system | group command process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the count information setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the character item ratio setting process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the symbol system command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of variable system command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit system command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the production point control processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of hall / player setting mode processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a front half part of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a second half part of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display apparatus in the ending at the time of a big hit state completion | finish. In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the player setting mode while waiting for a customer. It is a front view of the game board provided with the sub display device concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the discharge ball number area | region which concerns on 4th Embodiment, the acquisition ball number area | region, and the acquisition ball number area according to role. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the payout command (payout number command) which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the one-shot system command processing concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the character item ratio setting process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the high probability (time saving) completion | finish process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of big hit system command processing concerning a 4th embodiment. FIG. 18 is a front half of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order in the fourth embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is a second half part of the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ball | bowl performance monitoring process which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the over winning a prize information processing concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a table which shows an example of a notice mode of the 1st over winning notice and the 2nd over winning notice concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a table which shows the other example of the alerting | reporting aspect of 1st over winning notification and 2nd over winning notification which concern on 6th Embodiment. In 6th Embodiment, it is a screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hall and player setting mode process which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display apparatus in the hall | hole setting mode which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol in the decoration special figure change display game by a 7th embodiment. FIG. 21 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series in the seventh embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol in the decoration special figure change display game by modification 1 of a 7th embodiment. FIG. 21 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series in Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol in the decoration special figure change display game by modification 2 of a 7th embodiment. FIG. 21 is a view showing a display screen of a display device in Modification 2 of the seventh embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display screen which applied the case of the jackpot without re-lottery, and the case of the jackpot with re-lottery of modification 2 of a 7th embodiment. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a CPU of a gaming microcomputer according to an eighth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the composition of the flag register concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process at the time of the power activation which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of game control control program program start preparation processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main processing which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the second half part of the main processing which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the timer interrupt process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 2 which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hard random number acquisition process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure starting opening switch common process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination processing which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part of program structure of the main processing which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows the program structure of the timer interrupt processing which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows a part of program structure of the starting opening switch monitoring process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows a part of program structure of the hard random number acquisition process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the procedure which detects standup information concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows a part of program structure of the special figure starting opening switch common process which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows the program structure of a part of special figure starting opening switch common process which concerns on the modification of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the special figure 1 pending storage area concerning each embodiment. It is a figure which shows the special figure 2 pending storage area which concerns on each embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows a part of program structure of the special figure reservation information determination processing which concerns on 10th Embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows a part of program structure of the special figure reservation information determination processing which concerns on the modification of 10th Embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows a part of program structure of the fluctuation | variation start information setting process which concerns on 11th Embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows a part of program structure of the gate switch monitoring process which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows a part of program structure of the segment LED edit process which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a program list which shows the conventional program structure of LED edit processing. It is a figure explaining the display data corresponding to the common drawing reservation number which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows a part of program structure of the external information edit process which concerns on 13th Embodiment. It is a program list of random number update processing 2 concerning a 14th embodiment. It is a program list explaining a part of special figure game processing concerning a 14th embodiment. It is a program list explaining a part of special figure game sequence divergence table concerning a 14th embodiment. It is a program list of modification 1 of special drawing game processing concerning a 15th embodiment. It is a program list of modification 2 of the special figure game processing concerning a 15th embodiment. It is the conventional second-half fluctuation group table for explaining the compression method concerning a 16th embodiment. It is a second half change group table concerning a 16th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the compression system concerning a 16th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the read-out format of the data which concerns on 17th Embodiment. It is a program list of fluctuation pattern setting processing concerning a 17th embodiment. It is a program list of conventional 2-byte distribution processing for explaining the compression method of the seventeenth embodiment. It is a program list of 2-byte distribution processing according to the seventeenth embodiment. It is a second half change group table concerning an 18th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the compression system of 18th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the read-out form of the data of 18th Embodiment. It is a program list of 2-byte distribution processing according to the eighteenth embodiment. It is another example of the second half fluctuation group table concerning an 18th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure starting opening switch common process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the random number storage area concerning 19th Embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows a part of program structure of the special figure starting opening switch common process which concerns on 19th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example at the time of providing the working area for prior determination separately from a random number storage area. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a shift of the random number storage area performed at the time of a fluctuation | variation start. It is a figure which shows an example at the time of providing the area | region for fluctuation | variation suspension in a random number storage area. It is a figure which shows an example at the time of providing the working area for fluctuation | variation holding | maintenance separately from a random number storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process which concerns on the modification of 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure starting opening switch common process which concerns on the modification of 19th Embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows a part of program structure of the starting opening switch monitoring process which concerns on the modification of 19th Embodiment. It is a program list | wrist which shows a part of program structure of the special figure starting opening switch common process which concerns on the modification of 19th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the balls performance monitoring processing concerning a twentieth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main processing which concerns on 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the performance determination processing which concerns on 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the one-shot system command processing which concerns on 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the performance determination processing which concerns on the modification of 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ball | bowl performance monitoring process which concerns on 21st Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. Note that the front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed from the player in the game.

[General view of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a gaming machine.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable / closable and pivotable via a hinge. The opening and closing frame is constituted by a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

  While the game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that enables visual recognition of the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, access to the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30 Can.

  Various frame components are disposed at the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  At the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light according to the game state are disposed. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate therein illumination members such as LEDs, and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The illumination members disposed inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper speaker 19a is disposed at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19 b are provided below the gaming machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19 a. The lower speaker 19 b is disposed at the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds and the like.

  In the right side portion of the glass frame 15, a projection effect unit 13 which is extended in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and which protrudes toward the front (player side) is disposed. The projecting effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emitting effect and the like according to the progressing state of the game. The illumination member disposed inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper tray unit having an upper tray 21 capable of storing gaming balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball launcher (not shown).

  The upper unit further includes a rendering operation device for receiving an input operation from a player, a ball lending operation device for receiving an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 for performing a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. .

  The effect operating device is an operating device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the upper center of the upper tray unit so that the player can easily operate it.

  By the player operating the effect operating device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special view variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select a rendering pattern (rendering mode) or to execute a preview rendering for previewing in advance the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special view variable display game, and in the case where the variable display game is simply used, this specification refers to the special view variable display game.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also when the player operates the effect operating device during the non-execution.

  The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special gaming state is, for example, a time-saving state as a specific gaming state or a state where probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) is high in a variable display game (certain change state, probability change state), a big hit state ), Small hitting game state (small hit state).

  Here, the definite change state (specific game state) is continued until the next big hit occurs (loop type), and is continued until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (count cut type, ST), and There are things (continuation lottery type) etc. which continue until it wins a predetermined probability fall lottery.

  Furthermore, it is possible to always generate a positive change state when a big hit occurs, without deciding whether or not to generate a positive change state by a big hit symbol random number, or by providing a winning device etc. provided with a specific area If the gaming ball passes through the area, a definite change state may be generated.

  The ball lending operating device is an operating device operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball lending operating device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is a card unit (not shown) disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 10 for discharging a prepaid card or the like. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED, etc., and is a device that performs light emission effects and the like according to the game state, and is provided on the front portion of the upper tray unit. The illumination member disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball emitting device (not shown) and a gaming ball can be stored under the glass frame 15 provided with the above-described upper tray unit etc. and under the front frame 12 A lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19 b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the gaming board 30. The firing speed of the gaming ball to be fired from the ball launching device is set to be faster as the turning operation amount of the operation handle 24 is larger. That is, the ball launcher can change the launch force (speed) for firing the game ball to the game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game is performed in various launch modes with different launch rates. I can shoot a ball. The firing modes include a left strike (normal strike) in which the gaming ball is made to flow down on the left side of the game area 32 and a right strike in which the game ball is made to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

  The lower tray 23 is disposed below the upper tray unit at a predetermined distance from the upper tray unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removing hole 23a penetrating the bottom of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an open / close operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball removing hole 23a. The player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball removing hole 23a, whereby the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removing hole 23a.

[Play board]
Subsequently, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10. FIG.

  As shown to FIG. 2A, the game board 30 is provided with the flat form game board main body 30a used as the attachment base of various members. The game board body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front of the game board body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball launch device into a game area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31. A windmill, an obstacle nail or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  A center case (front structure) 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached substantially at the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 (display means) as a presentation effect display device (variation display device) that variably displays (variable display) a plurality of identification information is disposed. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is disposed such that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

  A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each of the variable display areas. In addition, an image (a big hit display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, in the center case 40, an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which the gaming balls having passed the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. The stage portion 40 b of the center case 40 is disposed above the start winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so the gaming balls rolled on the stage portion 40 b are the starting winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It is easy to win a prize.

  An upper rendering unit 40c and a side rendering unit 40d are provided on the upper portion and the right side of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol start gate (common view start gate) 34 is provided. Inside the drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the gaming ball driven into the gaming area 32 passes the common drawing start gate 34, the common drawing variation display game is executed.

  In the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, a general winning opening 35 (general winning area) is arranged, and in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40, the general winning opening 35 is also arranged. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided on the general winning opening 35. In the present embodiment, there are two switches, a winning opening switch 35 a for the left general winning opening 35 and a winning opening switch 35 b for the right general winning opening 35.

  The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening (first start winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special view variation display game, and a second start winning opening (second A normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 having a start winning area) is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts the gaming ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. When the movable member 37 b is in the closed state, the gaming ball can not normally win the fluctuation prize device 37. When the gaming ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, the special view variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

  The movable member 37b is a so-called Vello-type ordinary motorized symbol, and is rotated via the common electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the common view variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. The game ball is changed to the open state (the easy-to-win prize state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball is likely to flow into the normal variable winning device 37.

  The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control apparatus 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game or making the hit probability of the common drawing fluctuation display game higher than usual, or the normal gaming state The time-saving state (general power support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific gaming state by lengthening the generation time of the easy-to-win state more than the easy-to-win state generated in. Even in the definite change state (except for the latent change), the short time state (general charge support state) occurs redundantly.

  In the game area 32 at the lower right of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the big winning opening is opened by turning the upper end side in the direction of falling to the front side by the big winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3) A special fluctuation winning device 39 having an open / close door 39c is provided. The special variation winning device 39 converts the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, By facilitating the flow of gaming balls into the mouth, a predetermined gaming value (winning balls) is given to the player. In the special winning opening, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detection means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening.

  As described above, the game area 32 is provided with the general winning opening 35 and the start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening) as a plurality of winning areas where the game ball can win without any particular condition. In addition, a normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second as a fluctuation winning device which is activated by establishment of a predetermined condition (a predetermined result of a special figure fluctuation display game or a common drawing fluctuation display game) and the gaming ball can be won. A start winning opening) and a special variation winning device 39 (big winning opening) are provided.

  When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special fluctuation winning device 39 (large winning opening), the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) receives the winning opening. The number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the ball is discharged from the payout device to the upper tray 21. In the present embodiment, awards of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening), the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening), the general winning opening 35, and the special fluctuation winning device 39 (big winning opening) The number of balls is 2, 3, 10 and 14 respectively, and increases in this order.

  In addition, in the gaming area 32 below the normal change winning device 37, an out port 30b is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a prize. An out ball detection switch 65 (see FIG. 3) is disposed as a detection means for detecting the game ball which enters the out port 30b and is discharged to the outside of the game area 32.

  In addition, the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and the common drawing fluctuation display game are executed outside the gaming area 32 and in the lower right corner of the gaming board main body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

  The collective display device 50 is a first special view fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special view fluctuation for a variable display game, which is configured of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. Display unit 52 (special figure 2 indicator, lamp D2), fluctuation display unit 53 for common drawing fluctuation display game (common drawing indicator, lamps D10, D18), start (pending) memory number of each fluctuation display game And a storage display unit for notification (special view 1 suspension display 54, special view 2 suspension display 55, general drawing suspension display 56). The special view 1 suspension display 54 is constituted by lamps D11 and D12. Special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 is formed by lamp D13 and D14. The common view holding display 56 is constituted by the lamps D15 and D16.

  In addition, the first display unit 57 (first game state indicator, lamp) informs the collective display device 50 that it is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normally hit). D8), the second gaming status display unit 58 (second gaming status indicator, lamp D9) that lights up when the hour saving condition occurs (second gaming status indicator, lamp D9), probability of jackpot probability is high when the gaming machine 10 is powered on Display the 3rd game state indicator 59 (3rd game state indicator, probability state indicator, lamp D17) to indicate that it is in the state, and the number of rounds at the big hit (number of times of opening and closing of the special fluctuation winning device 39) A round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D7) is provided.

  In the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by the variable display which repeatedly turns on and off (flickers) identification information (for example, the central segment). In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be comprised by the aggregate | assembly of not only such a segment type display part but several LED, and when performing a fluctuation display In addition, all the LEDs provided as a display all lights all lights off (simultaneous blinking of all LEDs), cyclical lighting (lights on and off in a predetermined order every predetermined time from any one LED), or plural It may be performed by lighting on / off (flickering) or cyclic lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the common map display 53, the variable display game is executed by the variable display (flashing) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Also, the common drawing indicator 53 can be appropriately configured similarly to the special view 1 indicator 51 and the special view 2 indicator 52.

  Furthermore, on the collective display device 50, a discharged ball number display unit 66 that displays the discharged ball number of the gaming machine 10, a payout rate display unit 67 that displays the payout rate of the gaming machine 10, and a prize ratio of the gaming machine 10 A feature ratio display unit 68 is provided to display. The discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 are each composed of a plurality of (or even one) seven-segment display (LED lamp) etc. The display unit constitutes display means for displaying the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio.

  In addition, the number-of-balls-in-ball display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 are not limited to the ones in which the number of ejected balls, the payout rate and the character ratio are directly displayed, The number of balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio may be displayed indirectly (for example, the countdown display of the number of discharged balls described later). That is, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 may be able to display information on the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio, respectively. Also, if the number-of-discharged balls display portion 66, the payout rate display portion 67, and the character ratio display portion 68 display the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio by means of a 7-segment display Instead, it may be displayed with a level meter or the like.

  Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32, and is the sum of the number of game balls passing through the winning opening and the number of game balls passing through the out port 30b. The number of balls discharged is basically the same as the number of balls which is the number of gaming balls shot from the ball launcher to the game area 32. In the present embodiment, the winning opening includes a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), Special variation winning device 39 (big winning opening) is included. As will be described later, counting means is provided for counting the number of discharged balls (number of fired balls). Then, the discharged ball number display unit 66 (discharged ball number display means) displays the discharged ball number, whereby the player can grasp the number of game balls discharged to the game area 32, and the convenience improves.

  The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of winning balls to the number of discharging balls (or the number of firing balls), and is calculated by (number of obtained balls / number of discharged balls) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of obtained balls per 100 discharged balls (the total number of winning balls). The payout rate according to this definition can be obtained even when the actual winning balls are not paid out because the number of winning balls is counted when winning. In addition, every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 as in the present embodiment, the payout rate may be easily obtained from the number of obtained balls until the number of discharged balls reaches 0 to 100. It may be calculated accurately from the above definition using the number of acquired balls (total number of winning balls) and the number of discharged balls accumulated from the time the power of the gaming machine is turned on to the present. Conventionally, displaying the payout rate has not been performed. However, in the present embodiment, the payout rate display unit 67 (dispensing rate display means) displays the payout rate to the player. It is possible to have the interest and interest in the general prize winning opening 35. And, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Also, the prize ratio is the jackpot state (i.e., fanfare and ending) of the total number of balls (total number of balls) obtained by winning the winning opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 until the present. Is a ratio (%) (the so-called continuous character ratio) of the number of winning balls (number of balls acquired by character) obtained by winning in the special winning opening). In addition, the character ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls (during the big hit state and the small hitting state) obtained by winning in the big winning opening out of the total winning balls number (total number of winning balls) Mouth ratio) may be, or a ratio of the number of winning balls obtained by winning in the large winning opening and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (generally used so-called feature ratio (All role ratio)) may be. Since the number of winning balls is counted at the time of winning, the feature ratio can be calculated even if the actual winning balls are not paid out due to lack of balls or the like. In this embodiment, the character ratio display unit 68 (character ratio display means) displays the character ratio, so that the interest of the game is improved, and the player has an impression that the variable winning device is easy to win (opened state This is an impression in which the player often plays the game, since the In addition, the feature ratio display is an index for determining whether the player should continue playing a game. Furthermore, since the winning combination in the general winning opening 35 affects the character ratio, the player can be made to have an interest and interest in the general winning opening 35 through the character ratio display.

  The display mode of the discharged ball number display unit 66 will be described with reference to FIG. 2B. The discharge ball number display unit 66 is composed of two 7-segment-type (8-segment-type including point portions) indicators (LED lamps). As shown in FIG. 2B (I), the number of discharged balls is counted down and displayed (100-number of discharged balls) in the number-of-discharged balls display section 66. In addition, the number of discharged balls is only counted up to 100 (predetermined number). As described later, every time the number of ejected balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the withdrawal rate displayed on the withdrawal rate display unit 67 changes the number of ejected balls from 1 to 100. Updated to the latest withdrawal rate between. As a result, if the number of acquired balls (total number of balls) is displayed as it is on the payout rate display section 67, the payout rate will be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the discharged ball number is displayed by counting down from "99" to "00" in the discharged ball number display unit 66, but may be displayed by counting up from "00" to "99". When the number of discharged balls is 100, “00” is displayed on the discharged ball number display unit 66. In the present embodiment, at the timing when “00” is displayed on the discharged ball number display unit 66, the disbursed item display of the disbursed percentage display unit 67 is updated to the latest one. After the power is turned on (including restoration of a power failure), the discharged ball number display unit 66 starts the countdown display from the display of “00”. Further, the number of discharged balls is cleared to 0 at the timing of the big hit end, and the discharged ball number display unit 66 starts the countdown display from the display of “00” after the end of the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 2B (II), in the state other than firing of the game ball and in the customer waiting demonstration state, the discharged ball number display unit 66 is in the non-displayed state by turning off the segment (light emitting unit) of the display Good. In addition, the state other than the firing of the game ball and the customer waiting demonstration state are collectively called "the customer waiting state". The state other than the firing of the gaming ball is a state in which the touch switch signal from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is an off signal. Further, when the gaming control apparatus 100 (FIG. 3) transmits a waiting for customer demonstration command to the effect control apparatus 300 (FIG. 4), the gaming machine 10 is in a waiting for customer demonstration state (a state of waiting for customer demonstration). On the other hand, in the state where the customer is not waiting for a demonstration or the state where the gaming ball is being fired, a segment (light emitting portion) of the indicator lights up in the discharged ball number display 66 so that the player in the game can recognize it. Run. Since this is a bonus for the player in the game, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 2B (III), the discharged ball number display unit 66 executes an error display (“EE” display) to notify the player during occurrence of an error or fraud affecting the game. Here, an error or fraud affecting the game is an error or fraud related to opening the glass frame or opening the front frame (glass frame opening error or front frame opening error described later), and an error related to ball breakage or overflow (full) (Shoot shot sphere error, overflow error described later) is not included. In addition, since it is possible to put the game ball into the winning opening by hand while the frame is open, the display of the discharge ball number display unit 66 is not updated, but the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine counts the number of discharge balls. .

  The display mode of the payout rate display unit 67 will be described with reference to FIG. 2C. The payout rate display unit 67 is composed of two 7-segment-type (8-segment-type including point portions) indicators (LED lamps). As shown in FIG. 2C (I), in the payout rate display section 67, the payout rate is only displayed from 0 to 99, and when the payout rate becomes 100 or more, "99" is displayed in a blinking or lit display. Display “FF”.

  In addition, as described above, the payout rate display of the payout rate display section 67 is performed until the number of discharged balls changes from 1 to 100 every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number). Updated to the latest payout rate. The payout rate display unit 67 changes the light emission color of the segment (light emitting portion) every time the payout rate display is updated, and clearly indicates that the payout rate display has been updated. In this case, the player can easily recognize the update of the payout rate. For example, the payout rate display unit 67 changes from red to green or from green to red each time the payout rate display is updated. In addition, without changing the color, a configuration in which the pop rate display unit 67 always displays the pop rate by a single color is also possible.

  In addition, the payout rate display unit 67 may change the color of the payout rate display in accordance with the payout rate based on the design value (for example, the base value 40 in the normal gaming state). In this way, it is possible to alert the user of the deviation of the payout rate from the design value. For example, the payout rate is displayed in the range of 30 to 50 in green, in the range of 10 to 29 and 51 to 60 in yellow, and in the range of 0 to 9 and 61 or more in red. In addition, since the popping rate becomes very large during the big hit, it may be displayed in another color (white or rainbow) instead of red. In the configuration in which the withdrawal rate is displayed in a single color without changing the color, the withdrawal rate display blinks when the withdrawal rate largely deviates from the design value (in a case where it is a predetermined value or more or a predetermined value or less). You may

  Furthermore, the payout rate display unit 67 displays “00” after the power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure). The payout rate is cleared to 0 at the end of the big hit, and the payout rate display section 67 displays "00".

  As shown in FIG. 2C (II), in the state other than firing of the game ball and in the customer waiting demonstration state (ie, customer waiting state), the payout rate display unit 67 turns off the segments of the display unit and hides it. It is good. On the other hand, in the state where the customer is not waiting for a demonstration or the state where the gaming ball is being fired, the segment of the indicator lights in the payout rate display unit 67, and the payout rate is displayed so that the player in the game can recognize. Since this is a bonus for the player in the game, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased. Furthermore, since the payout rate can not be obtained until the number of discharged balls reaches 100 after the game machine 10 is powered on, the payout rate display section 67 may be in a non-display state.

  In addition, conversely, in the state other than the firing of the game ball and the customer waiting demonstration state, the payout rate display unit 67 displays the payout rate, and it is out in the state in which the customer waiting demonstration is not in progress or the gaming ball is firing. It is good also as composition which makes non-display the ball rate. As a result, the player can select a gaming machine or a game platform to play in consideration of the payout rate.

  As shown in FIG. 2C (III), the payout rate display unit 67 executes an error display (“EE” display) to notify the player during occurrence of an error or fraud affecting the game. Here, an error or fraud affecting the game is an error or fraud related to opening the glass frame or opening the front frame (glass frame opening error or front frame opening error described later), and an error related to ball breakage or overflow (full) (Shoot shot sphere error, overflow error described later) is not included. In addition, since it is possible to put the game ball into the winning opening by hand while the frame is open, the display of the payout rate display unit 67 is not updated, but the payout rate is calculated (updated) by the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine. doing.

  The display mode of the item ratio display unit 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 2D. The item ratio display unit 68 is composed of three 7-segment (including 8-point segments including point portions) indicators (LED lamps). As shown in FIG. 2D (I), the character ratio display section 68 displays the value of the character ratio (%) from "00.0" to "19.9 decimal". When the feature ratio is 100%, "100" is displayed. Note that, for example, when the character ratio display unit 68 is configured of four seven-segment displays (LED lamps), the value of the character ratio (%) up to the second decimal place is displayed.

  In addition, the item ratio display unit 68 displays the item ratio according to the item ratio based on a standard value determined by the rule (for example, a continuous feature ratio of 60% which is a winning ball by the item continuous operation). You may change the color. In this way, it is possible to alert the user of the deviation of the feature ratio from the reference value. For example, when the character ratio corresponds to the continuous character ratio, the character ratio is displayed in green in the range of 00.0% to 55.0%, and yellow in the range of 55.1% to 60.0%. And display in red in the range of 60.1% to 100%. In addition, since the character ratio increases during the big hit, it may be displayed in another color (white or rainbow) or the like. Also, for example, the character ratio is obtained by winning in so-called character ratio (general award winning device 39 and ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 among the number of generally used balls) that are generally used. If it corresponds to the ratio of the number of winning balls), the symbol ratio is displayed in green in the range of 00.0% to 65.0%, assuming a standard value of 70%, from 65.1% to 70.0% In the range of 70.1% to 100%. In the configuration where the character ratio is displayed in a single color without changing the color, the character ratio display blinks when the character ratio largely deviates from the design value (when the predetermined value or more or the predetermined value or less). You may

  The prize-specific prize balls for calculating the prize proportions of the prize proportion display unit 68 (accumulated prize spheres for different prizes) are accumulated until the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off, and cleared when the power is turned on. After turning on the power (including restoration of a power failure), the symbol ratio display is displayed as "00.0". Thereafter, in the item ratio display unit 68, the item ratio is updated as needed each time a winning occurs. In addition, the special figure variation display game of the specified number of times (for example, 400 times) is set as one set, the number of balls acquired per role (also called the number of balls acquired as per role) per set is divided into a plurality of blocks (storage area of predetermined bytes) It is also possible to store in order in the ring buffer consisting of the above, but in this case, the number-of-items-acquired number of balls is held without clearing even when the power is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 2D (II), in the non-launching state of the game ball and in the customer waiting demonstration state (that is, the customer waiting state), the feature ratio display unit 68 turns off the segments (light emitting units) of the display It may be in the state of display. On the other hand, when the customer is not waiting for a demonstration or the game ball is firing, the indicator (light emitting unit) of the indicator lights on the feature ratio display unit 68, and the feature ratio is set so that the player in the game can recognize it. indicate. Since this is a bonus for the player in the game, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be increased.

  In addition, conversely, in the state other than the firing of the game ball and in the customer waiting demonstration state, the character ratio display unit 68 displays the character ratio, and the role is not performed in the customer waiting demonstration or in the state of firing the game ball. The item ratio may be hidden. As a result, the player can select a gaming machine or a game console to play a game in consideration of the property ratio.

  As shown in FIG. 2D (III), the character ratio display unit 68 executes an error display (“EEE” display) to notify the player during occurrence of an error or fraud affecting the game. Here, an error or fraud affecting the game is an error or fraud related to opening the glass frame or opening the front frame (glass frame opening error or front frame opening error described later), and an error related to ball breakage or overflow (full) (Shoot shot sphere error, overflow error described later) is not included. In addition, since it is possible to put the game ball into the winning opening by hand while the frame is open, the display of the character ratio display unit 68 is not updated, but the character ratio is calculated (updated) by the game control apparatus 100 inside the gaming machine. doing.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, and the details of the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by striking a gaming ball from a ball launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails or windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, or the special fluctuation winning apparatus 39, or flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, or the special fluctuation winning device 39, the number of winning balls according to the type of winning opening won through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper tray 21.

  The common drawing start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the common drawing start gate 34. When the gaming ball passes through the common drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the common drawing fluctuation display game is executed based on the judgment result of the hit judgment random number value extracted at this time.

  A state in which a common drawing fluctuation display game can not be started, for example, when a common drawing fluctuation display game has already been played and the common drawing fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is hit and it is normal When the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the gaming ball passes the common drawing start gate 34, the number of common drawing start memories is added (+1) if the number is lower than the upper limit number.

  A hit determination random number value is stored in the hit map start memory to determine hit hit of the hit game variation display game, and when the hit judgment random number value matches the decision value, the hit map change display is performed. The game is hit and a specific result aspect (specific result) is derived.

  The common drawing variation display game is executed by the common drawing indicator 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The common drawing indicator 53 is composed of an LED which indicates a hit in the case of the lighting state as normal identification information (general drawing), and shows a deviation in the case of the light-off state, and this LED blinks to indicate fluctuation of the normal identification information. The display is performed, and the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed.

  When the common drawing random number value extracted at the time of passing the common drawing start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the common drawing display 53 is stopped in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, the movable member 37b is converted to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) by driving the common voltage solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), and the game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is Winning is acceptable.

  The winning on the starting winning opening 36 of the gaming ball and the winning on the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball winning in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball in the special view 1 variation display game, and is stored within the predetermined upper limit number, and the game ball winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is special figure 2 It is detected as a start winning ball of the variable display game, and is stored within a predetermined upper limit number.

  When detecting the start winning balls of the special view variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, each variation pattern random number value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in the special view reserve storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control apparatus 100 as a special view start winning storage, each for a predetermined number of times (for example, at a maximum of eight times). The storage number of the special view start winning memory is displayed on the special view 1 hold display 54 or the special view 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start win number of the collective display device 50 and also on the display screen of the display 41 Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special view 1 variation display game with the special view 1 display 51 based on the winning on the start winning hole 36 or the first start storage. In addition, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variation display game with the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the normal variation prize device 37 or the second start storage.

  The special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) are identification information (special figure 1 display 51 and special figure 2 display 52) It is carried out by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after changing and displaying the special symbol and the special figure). Further, in the display device 41, a decorative special view variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special view variation display game is executed.

  In the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numerals etc. is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol) The variable display (scroll display) is started in the order of d), and symbols which are changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped to display the result of the special figure change display game. In addition, in the display device 41, various effect display such as appearance of a character is performed to improve interest.

  As a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the winning of the game ball to starting starting winning a prize opening 36 or normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is done at specified timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is big hit value) A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived by the display symbol, and becomes a big hit state (special game state). Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

  At this time, the special variation winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energization to the special winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). That is, the special winning opening provided in the special variation winning device 39 opens widely until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of gaming balls win, and during this time, a bonus is given that the player can acquire many gaming balls. Ru.

  When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hitting value), the special figure fluctuation display game A specific result aspect (small hit result aspect) is derived | led-out by display design as a result of, and it will be in a small hit state. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is a small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

  At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, the big winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state only for a predetermined short time by energization to the big winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3).

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

  A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs and it is special as a special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 39 continuously is set. If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has the meaning of

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special fluctuation winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, while in the case of a small hit, the small hitting flag is set, the special fluctuation winning device Is released.

  In addition, although the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be comprised as a separate display, and may be comprised as the same display, each special figure fluctuation display game is not performed simultaneously Is set as

  With regard to the decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on different display devices or separate display areas, or the same indication It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the special-figure variation display game corresponding to the special-figure 1 variation display game and the special-figure 2 variation display game is prevented from being simultaneously executed. The special figure 2 variation display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, and there are special figure 1 variation display games and start figures of the special figure 2 variation display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed.

  In the following description, when the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as a special view change display game.

  Also, although not particularly limited, the start opening 1 switch 36a in the start winning opening 36, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, the count switch In (39a), there is a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) which has a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. It is used. In addition, a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or a front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. It is possible to use a microswitch having various contacts.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the game machine 10. The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100 (main board), and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main board) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and is connected to a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). ), An input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. It consists of etc.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a clock serving as an operation clock of the CPU, timer interrupts, and a random number generation circuit. Oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V, and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of lower levels such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from 32 V DC. A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or reset signal notifying the game control apparatus 100 of the occurrence of power failure and recovery And the like, and a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the gaming control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate substrate or gaming control device 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply 400 or the main board. By providing it, it can be removed from the target of replacement and the cost can be reduced.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process of forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111 c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. To be done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a random access memory (RAM) 111c which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111b stores unchanged information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a working area of the CPU 111a and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111 b or the RAM 111 c.

  Further, the ROM 111 b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display areas of all the variable display areas are temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle and right variable display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the state (1) except that the special result aspect is a reach state, and display the remaining one variable display area from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as a line of reach effects, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP 1 reach) , Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, the reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is high as compared with the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the big hit of the special pattern variation display game, a big hit random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining the small hit symbol. Random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number, etc. for determining a pattern random number, a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (including an execution time of the variation display game in various reach and variation display without reach) And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. ing.

  Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one fluctuation pattern table from among a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a is a game result (big hit or break) of the special figure fluctuation display game, a probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, the number of starting memories One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired based on the above. Here, the CPU 111a serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the fluctuation pattern tables among the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the rental ball request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for dispensing the rental balls.

  A radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the common view starting gate 34, and a starting opening 1 in the first starting winning opening 36 The switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37, the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, and the special winning opening switch 39a of the special variation winning device 39, the high level supplied from these switches is 11V An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal such as 7 V at a low level and converts it to a 0 V-5 V positive logic signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Note that among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, and the special winning opening switch 39a are input to the third input port 124 Be done.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the second input port 123.

  In addition, the second input port 123, detection signal of the magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10, out ball detection switch 65 for detecting the game ball entered the out port 30b , A frame radio wave unauthorized signal output from the payout control device 200, and a payout busy signal. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the second input port 123. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12 (body frame), and the payout busy signal is a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command It is a signal which shows whether or not.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control apparatus 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals from the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by the enable signal CE2 being asserted (changed to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

  Further, in the input unit 120, a signal from a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided in the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10, a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 provided in the front frame 12, etc. Signals, chute ball disconnection switch signals indicating lack of gaming balls before payout, overflow switch signals indicating overflow, touch switch signals based on input of touch switches provided on the operating handle 24 are taken in through the data bus 140 A first input port 122 for supplying the microcomputer 111 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 for a predetermined amount or more (full).

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for outputting to the test injection test device. Is configured as.

  In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test injection test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial shot test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass the buffer. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay substrate 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  Further, the output unit 130 is opened / closed data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37 c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 39 b opening the special fluctuation winning device 39. A second output port 134 for output is provided.

  The output unit 130 also includes third output ports 135-1 and 135- for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the batch display device 50. 2. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the batch display device 50 is connected.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to the device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Furthermore, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of the common power solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134 to the output unit 130. , And second drivers 138b-1 and 138b-2 for outputting on / off driving signals of the segment lines on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output ports 135-1 and 135-2; The third driver 138 c for outputting the on / off driving signal of the digit line on the current lead-in side of the batch display device 50 output from the port 136 and the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device A fourth driver 138 d for outputting to the external information terminal 71 is provided. Note that the second driver 138 b-2 outputs the on / off drive signal of the segment line for the discharged ball number display unit 66, the ball withdrawal ratio display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 in the collective display device 50. The second driver 138 b-1 outputs the on / off driving signal of the segment lines for the other display units (displays) of the collective display device 50.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply apparatus 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

[Effect control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub substrate) will be described using FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19.

  The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 serving as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights the decoration lamp, and the motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Also, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325 ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. A decoration control command signal (rendering command) such as a decoration special drawing reserve number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the rendering control device 300 via the command I / F 331 Receive as. Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15 Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls a device 44 (for example, a movable object or the like which cooperates with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect effect).

  These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. In addition, you may provide the frame production movable body control circuit which drive-controls frame production apparatuses, such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15. As shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, an effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, a motor in the panel effect device 44 A function to detect the on / off state of the effect combination object switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting an initial position etc. and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to

  Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the common drawing based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34 The game is compared with the judgment value stored in to determine the hit / off of the common drawing fluctuation display game.

  Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, the generic image fluctuation display game in which the identification symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. If the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is a hit, the common drawing indicator displays a special result mode, and the common power solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) control to open as described above. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is out of control, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the common drawing display.

  In addition, starting winning combination (starting memory) is remembered on the basis of the input of detection signal of the game ball from starting opening 1 switch 36a which is equipped in starting winning a prize opening 36, big hit judgment of special figure 1 fluctuation indication game on the basis of starting memory The random number value for extraction is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / off of the special view 1 variation display game.

  In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 stores the starting memory, based on the starting memory, special figure 2 random display random number value of the fluctuation display game Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / off of the special view 2 variation display game.

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view 1 change display game or the special view 2 change display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52, a special view fluctuation display game in which a stop display is performed is displayed. In other words, the game control means performs game progression control of the variable display game based on winning in the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 I

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  And, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, and generates the special gaming state. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a performs control to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening, for example, by opening the opening / closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 by the special winning opening solenoid 39b. .

  Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 second) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. One round (R) is to open the big winning opening until a certain condition is achieved, and this is repeated (repetitive) control (cycle game) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 times or 4 times). That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability state) is a state in which the probability of being a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result figure of the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are high probability states.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed to set the regular drawing fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the time shortening operation state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is more than when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. In order to control so that the open time of the subtractor increases substantially, it becomes a common charge support state. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the general-purpose power transmission support is executed in the short time state repeatedly.

  For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to reduce the time to make the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above (general drawing fluctuation time) a second fluctuation display time shorter than the normal first fluctuation display time (for example, , 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shortened than usual, and time shortening fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

  Moreover, in the time saving state, the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game can be controlled to be a second stopping time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stopping time (for example, 1604 msec) It is.

  Also, in the time saving state, when the regular drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is released, the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) of the opening time (general power release time) is the normal state. It is possible to control so that the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec) that is longer than that is obtained.

  Moreover, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game It is possible to set to the 2nd open frequency (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to set the probability (popular drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be a high probability higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

  In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of common power release, the common power release time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thereby, in the time saving state, winning of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is facilitated more than in the normal gaming state, and the number of times of execution of the special view fluctuation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. Further, the movable member 37b may be set so as not to open in the normal operation state (a common drawing probability is 0). In addition, either of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected in the case of a hit. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started by turning on the power. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the sign (number) of the step is represented as "A ****".

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when the main processing is started, the gaming control apparatus 100 first executes processing for prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is performed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area for saving the values of the register etc. when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

  Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the address of the RAM is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 outputs a signal of release prohibition and sets the release permission signal to a release state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the gaming ball is prohibited. Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). Program of secondary control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer The standby time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the system starts up normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) boots up, and the slave control apparatus Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power supply delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. It can be detected. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing that. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the counting of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus ( A1008) It is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. It judges (A1010). Then, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks is not continued (the result of A1010 is "N"), the process returns to the process of determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on in step A1009.

  In addition, when the on state of the blackout monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that the blackout has occurred, the gaming control apparatus 100 is a gaming machine. Wait until the power is turned off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1009 is "N"), that is, when no power failure occurs, the game control device 100 updates the power on delay timer by -1 (A1011), It is determined whether the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

  In addition, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time is over, the game control apparatus 100 can read and write RWM (read-write such as RAM or EEPROM). Memory access is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1014).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a serial port (a port provided in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control apparatus 300 and the payout control apparatus 200 in the present embodiment) (A1015). ). Furthermore, it is determined whether the initialization switch has been turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read in advance (A1016).

  When the initialization switch is off (the result of A1016 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the blackout inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal blackout inspection area check data. (A1017). Then, if it is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

  Furthermore, if the value of the blackout inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 executes checksum calculation processing for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019) As the validity determination, it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power-off match (A1020). In addition, you may exclude the area | region (For example, a discharge ball number area | region, an acquired ball number area | region, an acquired ball number area according to articles, etc.) which memorize | stores information regarding a popping ball or an acquired ball number from the object of legitimacy determination. If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the process proceeds to the process of step A1021 of FIG. 5B, and the process in the case of normal recovery from the power failure is executed.

  In addition, when the initialization switch is on (result of A1016 is “Y”), when it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is “N”) Alternatively, if the result of A1018 is "N" and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1026 of FIG. 5B to execute the initialization process. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

  The game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery (when the power is turned on) in the area to be initialized (A1021). The areas to be initialized are areas related to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an error fraud monitoring. Further, the area to be initialized includes an after-mentioned discharge ball number area, an acquired ball number area, and an acquired ball number area for each item, and these areas are initialized by 0 clear (initial value = 0). As a result, the number of balls discharged, the number of balls acquired, the number of balls acquired by character, the bonus rate calculated from the number of balls acquired, and the bonus ratio calculated from the number of balls acquired by character also become zero. become. In addition, the structure which does not clear 0 is also possible for the number-of-items acquisition ball number area | region (as a result, a character and thing ratio). Further, the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 is ready to receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 checks the area storing the gaming state in the RWM, and determines whether the gaming state is in the high probability state (A1022).

  Here, when the gaming state is not in the high probability state (the result of A1022 is “N”), the game control device 100 skips the processing of step A1023 and step A1024, and shifts to the processing of step A1025. Also, when the gaming state is a high probability state (result of A 1022 is "Y"), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A 1023), for example, the high probability notification LED provided in the collective display device 50 The (error indicator) on (lit) data is saved in the segment area (A1024). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control board (presentation control device 300) (A1025), step A1031 Execute the process

  On the other hand, when the processing of step A1026 is executed after the execution of steps A1016, A1017, A1018 and A1020, the game control apparatus 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to access permission (A1026). Further, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1027), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1028).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of the RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1029). The area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demo area and the effect mode. Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control board (A1030), and executes the processing of step A1031.

  Note that the command for power failure recovery sent in the process of step A1025 and the command for RAM initialization sent in the process of step A1030 are model specification commands indicating the type of gaming machine, and the suspension of special views 1 and 2 The decoration special drawing 1 reservation number command and the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command which show the number, and the probability information command which shows the state of probability are included. In addition, depending on the state of power off or power on, if the special view variation display game is being executed at the time of power off, the recovery screen command, if it is waiting for the customer at power off, the customer waiting demo command If it is initialized at power on, it includes a power on command. Furthermore, a rendering mode information command indicating the state of the rendering mode depending on the model, and a time saving information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time saving state are included. The command at the time of RAM initialization also includes a command for RAM initialization.

  The game control apparatus 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1031). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After executing the CTC activation process of step A1031, the game control apparatus 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1032). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111a. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed.

  The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines

  In the present embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number register 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol) Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), random number to determine small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), random number to determine hit of common drawing (random number per hit), random number to determine hit symbol for common drawing (contact random number) Etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of RWM as an initial value (start value) (A1033), and an interrupt is permitted (A1034). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1035). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using the random number generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number is the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is the processing unit of the program. The “low-speed counter” is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC 2) different from CTC (CTC 0) of timer interrupt processing).

  In the jackpot symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value changing method" is employed in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of the random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or −1, or may be a random type update in which all values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step A1035, the game control apparatus 100 sets the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (A1036). It is determined whether the signal is on (A1037). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process of step A1035. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (A1034) before the initial value random number update process (A1035), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initially performed. It is possible to avoid pressure on interrupt processing by being made to wait by the value random number update processing.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing in step A1035, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value random number is updated in both. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update it to release the interrupt. On the other hand, when the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. Rather, it has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the power failure monitoring signal is still on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1036. It determines (A1038). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks has not continued (the result of A1038 is "N"), the process returns to step A1037, and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

  In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (result of A1038 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that the power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 interrupts once. Is inhibited (A1039), and off data is output to all output ports (A1040).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection region 1 (A1041), and saves the power failure inspection region check data 2 in the power failure inspection region 2 (A1042). Further, a checksum calculation process is performed to calculate a checksum at the time of power supply interruption of the RWM (A1043), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1044). Finally, processing for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1045), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

  As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and the slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

  Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is based on the RAM 111c capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of external operation, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111c is provided, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum calculation process. The checksum calculation process is executed in steps A1019 and A1043 of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the head address of the RWM as the start value of the calculated address (A1101). Then, the number of repetitions is set (A1102), and "0" is set as the calculated value (A1103). The number of bytes of RAM being used is set to the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, the gaming control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1104), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1105), and updates the number of repetitions by -1 (A1106). Then, it is determined whether the calculation of the checksum is completed (A1107).

  When the calculation of the checksum is not completed (the result of A1107 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 repeats the processing from step A1104 to step A1107. In addition, when the calculation of the checksum is completed (the result of A1107 is “Y”), the checksum calculation process is ended.

Initial Value Random Number Update Process
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initial value random number updating process. The initial value random number update process is executed in step A1035 of the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates the jackpot symbol initial value random number by +1 (increases by 1) (A1201), and updates the small hit symbol initial value random number by +1 (A1202). Subsequently, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1203), the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1204), and the initial value random number updating process is ended.

  Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number which becomes the initial value of the random number which decides the big hit stop symbol of the special figure, "small hit symbol initial value random number" decides the small hit stop symbol of the special figure It is the random number which becomes the initial value of the random number which In addition, "the winning initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hitting of the common drawing variation game, and "the winning design initial value random number" is a random number of determining the hitting stopping symbol of the common drawing. It is a random number that becomes an initial value.

  As described above, by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing, the randomness of the random number can be improved.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, the game control apparatus 100 first designates register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the register used in the main process. When timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes input processing from various sensors and switches, and capturing of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 39b) is executed (A1304). When the signal of emission prohibition is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, the emission permission signal is output by the output processing being performed, and the emission permission signal is set to be in the permission state. .

  Next, the game control device 100 executes payout command transmission processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in the various processing to the payout control device 200 (A1305), and further, random number update processing 1 (A1306), random number update Process 2 (A1307) is executed. Thereafter, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, and the special winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring an error (front A winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed to determine whether a frame or a glass frame is opened (A1308).

  Furthermore, the special figure game process which performs the process related to the special figure variation display game is executed (A1309), and then the popular figure game process which performs the process related to the popular figure variation display game is performed (A1310).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes segment LED editing processing which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying special game variation game display and various information related to the game to display desired content. (A1311).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process to check whether or not there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 (A1312). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check whether or not there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board (A1313).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 executes external information editing processing for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1314). Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that although restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of specification of the register bank are performed automatically at the time of timer interrupt processing return, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after external information editing processing. It is also possible to carry out the processing to be performed and the processing to return the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (A1303) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of input processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first reads the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 122 (A1401). Then, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1402).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves (stores) the read input port 1, that is, the state of the first input port 122 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Subsequently, after preparing the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (A1404), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (A1405). Subsequently, unused bit data is prepared (A1406), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1407). Then, the switch reading process is executed (A1408). Here, "prepare" in the present embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (A1409), and prepares the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 (A1410). Further, unused bit data is prepared (A1411), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1412). Further, thereafter, the switch reading process is executed (A1413), and the input process is ended.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (A1408, A1413) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the switch reading process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first reads the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1501). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1502), the bit requiring inversion is inverted (A1503), and the port input state of the target switch control area is saved (stored) ) (A 1504). After that, the process waits until the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (A1505).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the game control apparatus 100 performs the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1506). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1507), the bit requiring inversion is inverted (A1508), and the port input state of the target switch control area (first data) ) And save the inverted data (the second data) (A1509). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bit in the same state is 1 and the bit different is 0 in the first and second readings (A1510), the logical bit of the bit pattern and port input state 2 is taken, and this is fixed It is assumed that it is a bit (A1511).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 creates an indeterminate bit pattern in which the state of the same bit is 0 and the different bit is 1 in the first read and the second read (A 1512), and the indeterminate bit pattern and the previous interrupt are generated. The logical product with the fixed state is taken and it is set as the previous hold bit (A1513). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed.

  Then, the game control device 100 combines the current determination bit and the previous holding bit, and saves it as the current determination state (A1514). Furthermore, the exclusive OR of the previous and current defined states is taken and saved as a rising edge (A1515). Thereafter, the switch reading process is ended.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading changes the signal by reading the switch once each for each interrupt processing and comparing with the result of the previous reading. Although there is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been read, it may not be possible to correctly determine if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost until the next interrupt processing. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (A1304) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first outputs (resets) the off data to the ports 135-1 and 135-2 (see FIG. 3) that output the data of the segments of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, the data output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 by +1, for example, in the range of 0 to 4 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). Then, the acquired data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the digit output / external information output port 136 (A1606). Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the port 135-1 for segment output (A1608).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the touch switch signal from the touch switch (fired touch switch) provided on the operation handle 24 is an on signal (A1609). That is, it is determined whether the operation handle 24 is operated. If the touch switch signal from the touch switch is an on signal (the result of A1609 is “Y”), segment output data is loaded from the segment area corresponding to the digit counter (A1610), and segment output data is output to segment output port 2 (A It outputs to port 135-2) (A1612). The segment output data to be output here is segment output data for the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the role ratio display unit 68. Thereby, when the operation handle 24 is operated, the discharged ball number display in the discharged ball number display portion 66, the output rate display in the output rate display portion 67, and the role ratio display portion 68. Feature ratio display becomes possible.

  On the other hand, when the touch switch signal from the touch switch is an off signal (the result of A1609 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 turns off (LED off) the 7-segment display (LED lamp). The segment output data is set (A1611), and the segment output data is output to the segment output port 2 (port 135-2) (A1612). As a result, when the operation handle 24 is not operated, the discharged ball number display in the discharged ball number display unit 66, the output rate display in the output rate display unit 67, and the product ratio display unit 68. The feature ratio display is hidden.

  In step A1609, instead of determining whether the touch switch on the operation handle 24 is on, it may be determined whether or not a customer waiting demo is in progress (a customer waiting demo state). Then, when a demonstration is being performed while waiting for a customer, display is performed by the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 (A1610, A1612), and a demonstration is being performed while waiting for a customer If not, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 may be non-displayed (A1611, A1612). As described later, when the customer waiting demonstration flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration state (the customer waiting demonstration state) is set is set (A3210 in FIG. 27), that is, the game control apparatus 100 produces an effect When the customer waiting demo command is transmitted to the control device 300, it can be determined that the customer waiting demonstration is being performed.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 loads and combines data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A 1613), and further combines the combined data and the output data of the release permission (A 1614), and finally combines them. The data is output to the external information / fire permission signal output port 137 (A1615). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (A1616). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (A1617).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test device, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 The synthesized data is output (A1618). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal of the test shooting tester is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 ( A1619). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (A1620). Next, the data output to the test terminal output ports 6 and 7 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the data is synthesized on the test terminal output ports 6 and 7 on the relay substrate 70 The output data is output (A1621). The data of step A1621 is data of a payout rate. Then, data output to the test terminal output ports 8 and 9 on the relay substrate 70 for outputting a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and synthesized to the test terminal output ports 8 and 9 on the relay substrate 70 The data is output (A1622), and the output processing ends. The data of step A1622 is data of an accessory ratio.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (A1305) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout command transmission process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A 1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111 c of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10). In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments by collating these two signals.

  In these winning number counter areas, the winning number counters are set according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, 2 winning balls, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). An area is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This means that while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination, and more unsent This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 of step A1701, the game control apparatus 100 determines the number of winnings to be checked among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number. It is determined whether there is a count number other than "0" in the number counter area.

  When there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (the result of A1701 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked (A1702). Further, it is determined whether the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed (A1703).

  When all checks have been completed (the result of A1703 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 proceeds to the processing of step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1703 is "N"), the process returns to the process of step A1701, and the processes from step A1701 to step A1703 are repeated.

  In addition, when there is a count number (the result of A1701 is “Y”), the game control device 100 subtracts the count number of the target number-of-games counter area (-1) (A1704) The number of payouts corresponding to the address of is acquired (A1705). Then, the value of the winning balls remaining number area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved as a new remaining winning balls number in the remaining winning balls area (A1707). As the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before the process of step A1707, a fraction not satisfying the predetermined number serving as the reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). Then, if it is not 0 or more (the result of A1709 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, if it is 0 or more (the result of A1709 is "Y"), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (A1710), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (A1711) , And further return to the process of step A1708.

  By the above processing, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, when the payout of the game ball such as during a big hit is concentrated by outputting the main prize ball signal, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accurate occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted.

  If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 (A1712), and determines whether or not the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (A1713). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (the result of A1713 is “N”), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (the result of A1713 is "Y"), it is determined whether the payout busy signal status (flag) is in a busy state (busy state flag) (A1714).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is on (busy state) when the payout control can not be immediately started. It is assumed. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control. The payout busy signal status (flag) is information for setting whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal, and is an idle that can immediately start payout control. A state, a busy state in which the payout control can not be started immediately, or an indeterminate state in which the state is indeterminate are set.

  When the payout busy signal status is busy (result of A1714 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the payout command transmission process. The non-busy state includes the idle state and the indefinite state. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The undefined state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process when the power is turned on. In this undetermined state, the idle state or the busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time in a state indicating that the payout control can or can not be started immediately. Eliminate it with That is, even if a status signal indicating that dispensing control can be started is output from the dispensing control device 200 when a power failure occurs and returns from the power outage, the winning ball command is immediately issued to the dispensing control device 200. In response to the status signal indicating that dispensing control can be started is continuously output over a predetermined period from the dispensing control device 200 without transmitting, a winning ball command is transmitted to the dispensing control device 200. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

  When the payout busy signal status is not busy (result of A1714 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1715). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, the number of counts other than "0" is in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is.

  Then, when there is no count number (the result of A1715 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (A1716), and all the winning number counter areas are It is determined whether the check of the count number is completed (A1717). If all the checks have been completed (the result of A1717 is “Y”), the payout command transmission process is ended. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1717 is “N”), the process returns to the process of step A1715, and the processes from step A1715 to A1717 are repeated.

  In addition, when there is a counted number (the result of A1715 is “Y”), the game control device 100 subtracts the counted number of the targeted winning number counter area by 1 (A1718), and the targeted winning number counter The payout command corresponding to the area is acquired (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), an initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms, for example, is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, it is possible that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means, which is output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200), can start the payout control can start the payout control. In the case of showing it, it constitutes a winning ball command transmission means for transmitting a winning ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

  In a conventional gaming machine (e.g., the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when the power is shut off due to any reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the cost increases because the function for backing up is required. According to the present embodiment, accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the dispensing control device 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to an external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can pay out the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Further, since the prize ball instruction counter capable of storing information on the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing the information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball having different transmission timings Information on signals can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is comprehensively performed, and to the winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the general winning opening 35, the special fluctuation winning device 39) provided in the gaming area 32. Game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball, and payout control means (game control means) for performing payout control of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means Payout control device 200), and the game control means receives a prize ball command based on a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control. If a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control unit, the prize is immediately awarded. Ball command The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is continuously output over a predetermined period from the payout control means without being sent to the payout control means. It is supposed to be done.

  Further, a plurality of winning areas (a first start winning opening 36, a second starting winning opening 37, a general winning opening 35, a special variation winning device 39) having different numbers of winning balls are provided in the game area 32 to control the game control means (game control device 100) is provided with a prize ball instruction counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of specifying presence / absence of non-transmission of a prize ball instruction instructing payout control of gaming balls for each number of prize balls, and a state signal starts payout control When it is shown that it is possible and there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter, the winning ball command is sent to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the status signal indicates the payout. It will be made to specify before specification of whether or not the control means can start payout control before specifying whether or not there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter.

  In addition, based on the game ball in a predetermined winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the general winning opening 35, the special variation winning device 39) while performing game control generally. A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command, and a payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of a game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means The game control means is a prize ball command when the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. Winning ball signal transmitting means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting to the payout control means, and a winning ball signal (main prize) including information on the number of winning balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the gaming ball in the predetermined winning area Ball signal) to the gaming machine The external information output means (game control apparatus 100) for outputting to the outside, the external information output means, whether the status signal outputted from the payout control means, can be started payout control whether the payout control means The output of the winning ball signal is performed regardless of.

  In addition, even if the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) generates a power failure and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicates that payout control can be started. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It will be transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the award ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing information on the award ball command and the information on the award ball signal (main award ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) has a predetermined winning area (a first start winning opening 36, a second start winning opening 37, a general winning opening 35). , A prize ball command is generated on the basis of one winning to the special variation winning device 39), and a payout ball control means (payout command) is generated when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The winning ball command counter (game control device 100) is configured to transmit to the control device 200), and is capable of storing information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and the predetermined winning area Entry of game balls to At the same time, updating is performed in response to transmission to the award ball command to the payout control means, thereby enabling the number of award ball commands not transmitted to be stored, and the external information output means is configured to obtain predetermined winnings. It is configured to accumulate the number of winning balls determined to be paid out with the game ball to the area, and to output a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number, and the winning ball signal counter The information of the winning can be stored on the basis of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and the game ball is updated at the time of winning in a predetermined winning area, and the number of winning balls by the external information output means is accumulated. By updating in accordance with the processing, it is possible to store the number of winning balls that have not been subjected to the accumulation processing.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number updating process 1. The random number update process 1 is executed in step A1306 of the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating an initial value (start value) of a big hit symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a hit random number, and a hit symbol random number which is an object of the initial value random number update processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A 1801).

  If the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 executes the processing of step A1804 and thereafter. On the other hand, if the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is "Y"), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A1802). Then, the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number loaded is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1803).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804). If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is "N"), the processing after step A1807 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (result of A1804 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 loads the small hit symbol initial value random number as the next initial value (A1805). Then, the next initial value of the small hit symbol random number loaded is set in the register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1806).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the hitting random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1807). If the random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1807 is "N"), the processing after step A1810 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the random number is waiting for the initial value setting (result of A1807 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 loads the initial value random number as the next initial value (A1808). Then, the next initial value of the loaded random number is set in the register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1809).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for setting the next initial value (start value) (A1810). When the hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1810 is “N”), the random number updating process 1 is ended.

  On the other hand, when the winning symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1810 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 loads the initial symbol random value as the initial value next time (A1811). The next initial value of the loaded symbol random number is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A 1812), and the random number updating process 1 is ended.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number updating process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step A1307 of the timer interrupt process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1 byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2 byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and both random number update processing 2 updates It targets and switches the update target each time an interrupt occurs. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, updating of 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach variation mode determination) by random number updating process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is performed for either upper 1 byte or lower 1 byte. Are configured to

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process (A1901). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A1902). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referred based on the calculated address (A1903). In the table referred to at this time, the upper limit judgment value for each kind of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random number has made a round is stored.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the value of the M1 counter to which a random value is set (A1904).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter, and masks the value of the M1 counter (A1905). The mask value is the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number. When the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter is updated. When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower order of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited thereto.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A1906). When the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “Y”), the value left by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the added value ( Hereinafter, this is set as a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the “masked value”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (A1907), and the process shifts to the processing of step A1909.

  In addition, when the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the upper 1 byte to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte The mask update value is set (A1908), and the process proceeds to step A1909. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may be “0”, and “0” is added to avoid that the value does not change.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A1909). Then, if it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is "Y"), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (A1910), and the process proceeds to step A1912. On the other hand, if the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is “N”), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value and the lower 1 byte of the random value is updated. A value (1 byte) is set (A1911), and the process goes to step A1912.

  Whether the game control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in the process of step A1907 or A1908 to the random number value as a new random number value, and the new random value is larger than the upper limit judgment value acquired in the process of A1903 It is determined whether or not it is (A1913).

  Then, when the new random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A1913 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the new random number to a lower random number area of 1 byte random number or 2 byte random number. Save (A1915). If the new random number is larger than the upper judgment value (the result of A1913 is “Y”), a value obtained by subtracting the upper judgment value from the new random value is taken as a new random value again (A1914). The random number value is saved in the lower random number area of 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (A1915).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (A1916). Then, if it is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is "N"), the random number update process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is "Y"), a new random number value (when a new random number value is calculated again) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number. (A1917), and the random number updating process 2 ends.

  As described above, the CPU 111a updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. Therefore, the CPU 111a is a variation pattern (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of gaming balls into the starting region of the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37. Function as random number updating means for updating the variation pattern random number for determining.

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed at step A1308 in the timer interrupt process. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process monitors a winning to each winning opening, and constitutes monitoring means for executing predetermined processing when there is a winning. As the predetermined processing, the number of balls discharged is updated by +1 (added by 1), or the addition processing is performed on the number of balls obtained by the prize to calculate the payout rate (total number of balls) and the prize ratio. There are things like that.

  The game control apparatus 100 first prepares the winning opening monitor table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two pieces) in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) (A2001). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize in the big prize port despite the fact that the big prize port is not open and to detect a normal prize (A2002). Details of the fraud & prize monitoring process will be described later.

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the winning opening monitor table 2 corresponding to the other of the large winning opening switches 39a (two pieces) in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) (A2003). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process is executed to monitor the fraudulent prize and to detect a proper prize (A2004). Next, it is determined whether or not the general pressure support state is in progress, that is, whether or not the time saving state or the probability changing state (except for the latent probability changing state) is in progress (A2005).

  When the game control apparatus 100 is in the power-on support state (the result of A2005 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the start opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (A2006). ). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process is executed to monitor the fraudulent prize and to detect a proper prize (A2007). Subsequently, a winning opening monitoring table for a winning opening switch for which fraud monitoring is unnecessary is prepared (A2008). In the present embodiment, the winning opening switches not requiring fraud monitoring are the winning opening switches (SWs) 35a and 35b of the left and right general winning openings 35, and the starting opening 1 switch 36a. Next, a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is executed (A2009).

  On the other hand, when the gaming control apparatus 100 is not in the power-on support state (the result of A2005 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch for which fraud monitoring is unnecessary (A2010). In the present embodiment, the winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the winning opening switches (SW) 35a and 35b of the left and right general winning openings 35, and the starting opening 1 switch of the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening). It is 36a. Next, a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number is executed (A2011). A winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is prepared (A2012). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process is executed to monitor a fraudulent prize and to detect a proper prize (A 2013).

  FIG. 15B is a table showing the priority related to the winning opening monitoring for each gaming state. This priority is realized by the order of the winning opening monitoring in the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing (FIG. 15A) and the winning number counter updating processing (FIG. 17A) described later.

  Here, the winning opening monitoring means counting the number of winnings, updating (calculating) the number of discharged balls, and the payout rate in the fraud & prize monitoring process or the prize number counter updating process (also executed in the fraud & prize monitoring process). Calculation of the feature ratio, etc. In particular, even when there is a winning on the winning opening at the same time, based on a predetermined priority as shown in FIG. To be done. In the case of the normal gaming state and the portable power support state, since the special winning opening is not opened unless there is an irregularity, it is not added to the priority table.

  As shown in FIG. 15B (I), the priority related to the winning opening can be changed according to the game state (steps A2005 to A2013). That is, according to the determination (A2005) whether or not it is the general electric power support state, the winning number counter updating process (also executed in fraud & winning monitoring process), the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) It is possible to set (determine) which of the winning openings (general winning opening 35 and starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening)) which do not require fraud monitoring is performed first.

  In particular, in the case of the normal power support state (the result of A2005 is "Y"), the prize opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 36a) which does not require fraud monitoring with respect to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening). Before the start winning opening 36 (the first starting winning opening) having the), it is possible to execute winning opening monitoring (that is, counting the number of winnings, updating the number of discharged balls, adding the number of obtained balls, etc.). As described later, among the winning openings having a winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, priority is given to monitoring the winning opening of the general winning opening 35 prior to the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening). I shall carry out. In addition, if the normal power support state is not in progress (the result of A2005 is “N”), that is, in the normal gaming state, the special gaming state, etc., the start winning prize having the winning opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 36a) which does not require fraud monitoring. With regard to the mouth 36 (first start winning opening), it is possible to execute the winning opening monitoring prior to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second start winning opening).

  As shown in FIG. 15B (II), when the normal power support state is in progress (the result of A2005 is “Y”), among the starting winning openings of the winning opening switch for which the fraud monitoring is unnecessary, the general winning opening 35 is selected. If only the winning opening monitoring (winning number counter update processing) is executed prior to the winning opening monitoring (A2006, A2007) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second start winning opening), the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting) It is possible to prioritize the winning opening monitoring for the general winning opening 35 having a larger number of winning balls than the winning opening) than the winning opening monitoring of the normal variation winning device 37 (second start winning opening).

  In addition, in the gaming state other than the general power support state (special gaming state, normal gaming state, etc.), the winning opening monitoring is preferentially performed in the order of the winning openings having many winning balls (number of winning balls) obtained. As a result, the highest possible payout rate is preferentially determined, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, as a modification, as shown in FIG. 15C, even if the processing of steps A2005 to A2009 of the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing of FIG. 15A is deleted and the processing of steps A201 to A2013 is executed after step A2004. Good. In this case, in all the game states (without depending on the game state), the order of the winning openings (the number of winning balls) obtained (the large winning opening → the general winning opening → the first starting winning opening → In the order of the second start winning opening), it is possible to prioritize and execute winning opening monitoring. In this case, the highest possible payout rate is preferentially determined, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved. In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process of FIG. 15C, the winnings on each winning opening are monitored in descending order of the number of winning balls to be obtained, and if there is a winning, the winning balls are added to the winning percentage The monitoring means is configured to calculate (total number of winning balls) and the feature ratio.

  Then, after step A2009 or A2013, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the out ball detection switch 65 (A2014). If there is an input to the out ball detection switch 65 (the result of A 2014 is “Y”), the value of the discharged ball number area storing the discharged ball number is incremented by 1 to add 1 to the discharged ball number (A2015), The below-mentioned withdrawal ball performance monitoring processing is executed (A2016). Then, an out-of-sphere detection command indicating that there is entry into the out port 30b is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (A2017). After that, the status scan counter is updated to specify in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose status is to be monitored, such as whether an error has occurred, or which should be the target of the current monitoring ( A2018).

  In the present embodiment, the number of discharged balls is updated by +1 and counted by detecting the game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 32 by the out ball detection switch 65 and each winning opening switch (A2015, A2210). . However, since the number of firing balls fired from the ball launching device is basically equal to the number of gaming balls ejected to the outside of the gaming area 32, a switch (sensor for directly detecting the launching balls from the ball launching device) ) May be provided to count the number of discharged balls. In addition, since there is a return to the ball emitting device from the ball emitting device from the ball emitting device, the number of discharged balls is more accurate if the out ball detecting switch 65 and each winning opening switch are used as in this embodiment. It can count.

  If there is no input to the out ball detection switch 65 (the result of A 2014 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the state scan counter (A 2018). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. According to the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (A2019). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether or not an error has occurred (A2020). The details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later.

  By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection etc. 1) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of a state (shoot ball out error) based on a shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status based on the payout abnormal status signal (dispense error) Monitoring is set.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting a monitoring state according to the value of the state scan counter (A2021). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether or not an error has occurred (A2022).

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status (glass frame open error) based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch Is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. Moreover, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state (frame radio wave improper) based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal Is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2023). Then, if the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2023 is "N"), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

  Further, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2023 is "Y"), the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2024), and does an error occur, etc. The gaming machine state check process is executed to determine the state of (A2025).

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection etc. (switch abnormality 2) Monitoring is set up. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 executes a payout busy signal check process of setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control apparatus 200 can start payout control (A2026) ), And finish the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The details of the payout busy signal check process will be described later.

  Since the processing from step A2024 to A2026 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is 0, it is executed at a rate of once for four timer interrupts. . That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2024 to A2026 is performed every 16 ms.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fraud & prize monitoring process. The fraud & prize monitoring process is executed in steps A2002, A2004, A2007, and A2013 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  The fraud & prize monitoring process is a process performed on the special winning opening switch 39 a of the special variation winning device 39 and the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37 a) in the normal variation winning device 37. For the second start winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) and the big winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 39), the opening and closing members are forcibly opened using a piano wire, illegal equipment, etc. In addition to the detection of winning, it monitors fraud as it is easy for fraud to be paid out.

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring (A2101), and determines whether or not the fraud monitoring period is underway (A2102). For example, the fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special gaming state in which the special variation winning device 39 is opened when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the big winning hole switch 39a.

  Then, if it is in the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning hole switch (A2103). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (result of A2103 is "N"), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). Also, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2103 is "Y"), the number of incorrect winnings of the target is updated by +1 (A2104), and the number of incorrect winnings after addition is determined to be a target for monitoring It is determined whether it is the number (for example, 5) or more (A2105).

  The reason why the judgment number is set to 5 is that, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state is converted to the closing state, the gaming ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. Therefore, it is intended not to judge that the case of winning a prize or the case of noise on a signal is not wrong, and not to judge easily as an error although it is not wrong.

  Then, if the game control device 100 does not have the determined number or more (the result of A2105 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110). In addition, if it is more than the judgment number (the result of A2105 is “Y”), the number of wrong winnings is fixed to the number of wrong occurrence judging (A2106), the initial value (for example, 60000ms) is saved in the target wrong prize notification timer area. (A2107).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the target injustice generation command as an effect command (A2108), and further prepares an incorrect prize occurrence flag as an injustice flag (A2109). Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

  On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (result of A2102 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110), and sets the winning balls. The counter updating process is executed (A2111). Details of the winning number counter update process will be described later.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 loads the notification timer update information of the target (A2112), and determines whether or not the notification timer update is permitted (A2113). If updating of the notification timer is not permitted (the result of A2113 is "N"), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. On the other hand, when updating of the notification timer is permitted (the result of A2113 is “Y”), if the notification timer of interest is not 0, −1 is updated (A2114). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the normal variation winning device 37. In addition, the update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is one big winning opening switch 39a, and allowed when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the other big winning opening switch 39a. I will not. As a result, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently as the informing of the special variation winning device 39, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115), and if the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is "N"), that is, if the time is not up. Ends the fraud & prize monitoring process. Also, if the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2115 is "Y"), that is, if the time is up or the time is already up, prepare the fraudulent release command of the object as a rendering command (A2116) Prepare an incorrect prize cancellation flag as an incorrect flag (A2117). Then, it is judged whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

  If the value of the notification timer is 0 at the moment when the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2118 is “Y”), that is, if the value of the notification timer is 0 in the present fraud & prize monitoring process. Clears the target number of incorrect prizes (A2119).

  In addition, if the game control apparatus 100 does not finish the process of step A2119 or the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “N”), that is, the fraud & prize monitoring process before the previous time If the value of the notification timer becomes 0, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

  Then, when the prepared injustice flag matches the value of the injustice flag area of the target (the result of A2120 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the injustice & prize monitoring process. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is "N"), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (A2121), and the rendering command setting is made. The process is executed (A2122). Thereafter, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended.

  By the above processing, an unauthorized occurrence command is sent to the effect control device 300 in response to the occurrence of the injustice, and an unauthorized termination command is sent to the effect control device 300 in response to the release of the injustice. The Rukoto.

[Winning number counter update processing]
FIG. 17A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning number counter updating process. The winning number counter updating process is executed at steps A2009 and A2011 of the winning hole switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A and at step A2111 of the fraud & prize monitoring process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the number of winning opening switches to be monitored from the winning opening monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (accurately, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch. (A2202). If there is no input (the result of A2202 is "N"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2216), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (A2217). The table address is updated so that the target winning opening switch changes in the order of the left winning opening switch 35a, the right winning opening switch 35b, and the starting opening 1 switch 36a, and the winning opening of the general winning opening 35 is changed. The monitoring is executed prior to the start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening).

  On the other hand, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2202 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 loads the value of the target number-of-winning counter area 1 (A2203), and the loaded value is +1 is updated (A2204). In the winning number counter area, the count number is updated by +1 (added by 1) for each winning to the target winning opening, and the number of winnings (the number of winnings) for the target winning opening is stored. Furthermore, it is determined whether an overflow occurs according to the updated value (A2205).

  When no overflow occurs (the result of A2205 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). Next, the number of winning balls corresponding to the target winning number counter area 1 (target winning opening) is set (A2207). Then, the set winning number is added to the value of the winning number area (A2208), and the set winning number is added to the value of the target getting number field for each item (A2209), and The value is updated by +1 (A2210). After that, the game performance monitoring process (described later) is executed to execute the calculation of the payout rate and the character ratio, and the display control of the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68, etc. Do.

  In the processing of steps A2204 and A2209, when the change in the number of winnings to the general winning opening 35 or the starting winning openings 36, 37 in a predetermined period (for example, one minute) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, five), the number of winnings (The value of the winning number counter area) may not be updated by +1, and the number of winning balls may not be added to the value of the winning ball area by feature. That is, in such a case, the number of winning balls and the number of winnings for calculating the feature ratio may be stopped with respect to winnings exceeding a predetermined number. With this configuration, for example, when it is not possible to appropriately award the player a prize ball due to the occurrence of some kind of trouble, it is assumed that the number of prizes has extremely increased due to the compensation processing of the attendant of the hall (game arcade). Also, it is possible to appropriately calculate the feature ratio. In addition, it is possible to prevent an injustice in which a malicious person wins a large number of gaming balls in the general winning opening 35 etc. in a short time in order to operate the number of winnings in the general winning opening 35.

  In the present embodiment, the out ball detection switch 65 and each winning hole switch detect the game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 32, and the game control apparatus 100 updates the number of discharged balls by +1 and counts ( A2015, A2210), a discharged ball number counting means for counting the discharged ball number is configured. However, since the number of firing balls of the gaming ball to be fired from the ball launching device is basically equal to the number of discharging balls of the gaming sphere discharged to the outside of the gaming area 32, the switch for detecting the firing sphere from the ball launching device A sensor may be provided, and the discharged ball number counting means for counting the number of fired balls may be configured instead of the discharged ball number counting means by the gaming control device 100 counting the number of fired balls. In addition, since there is a return to the ball emitting device from the ball emitting device from the ball emitting device, the number of discharged balls can be accurately counted if the game ball is used by the out ball detecting switch 65 and each winning hole switch.

  After the end of the processing of step A 2211 or when an overflow occurs (the result of A 2205 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (A 2212). After that, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2213), and determines whether or not an overflow occurs based on the updated value (A2214).

  When the overflow does not occur (the result of A2214 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 2 (A2215). After the end of the process of step A2215, or when an overflow occurs (the result of A2214 is "Y"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2216). Then, it is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches has ended (A2217).

  If monitoring of all the switches has not ended (the result of A2217 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 returns to the process of step A2202 to determine whether or not there is an input on the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (the result of A2217 is “Y”), the winning number counter updating process is ended. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the information on the winning (number of winning, number of winning) is stored.

  Next, referring to FIG. 17B, a discharged ball number area storing the discharged ball number, an acquired ball number area storing the acquired ball number (total number of winning balls) per 100 discharged balls, and a power from power on Description will be made of an acquired ball number region by character storing the number of balls acquired by character. The discharged ball number area, the acquired ball number area, and the earned character number area for each item are provided in the RWM (read / write memory: RAM, EEPROM, etc.) of the game control apparatus 100.

  The number of acquired balls is used to obtain a payout rate. The number of balls acquired by character is used to calculate the character ratio. The number-of-balls acquired for each role is the number of balls acquired for each winning opening (characters) (however, for the large winning opening, it distinguishes between a big hit state and a small hit state). In addition, when the total value (total number) of the winning balls for each feature is calculated, the total winning balls obtained by winning in the winning opening can be obtained. The feature ratio is, for example, a ratio of the total of the number of winning balls by winning to the big winning opening in the big hit to the total value of the number of winning balls for each item.

  As shown in FIG. 17B (I), the discharged ball number area is a storage area of 1 byte size, and is used to store a value of 0 to 99 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 17B (II), the acquisition sphere number area is a storage area of 2 bytes in size, and is used to store a value of 0 to 1,500.

  As shown in FIG. 17B (III), each bonus item acquisition sphere number area is a storage area of 2 bytes in size, and is used to store a value of 0 to 65535. In addition, the winning ball number area for each bonus item may be a storage area having a size of 3 bytes or more. If the upper limit is exceeded, the upper limit (65535) is held. The winning ball number area for each feature is an area for storing the total number of winning balls by winning in a plurality of general winning openings 35, the total of winning balls by winning in the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) An area to memorize the area, an area to memorize the total number of prize balls by winning in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (starting opening 2), an area to memorize the total number of prize balls by winning to the big winning opening in the big hit It corresponds to the area which memorizes the total of the number of winning balls by the winning to the big winning opening during hit (except during the big hit).

[Dumped ball performance monitoring process]
FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the out-of-pocket performance monitoring process. Outgoing ball performance monitoring processing is executed in step A2211 of the winning number counter updating processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the number of discharged balls is 100 (predetermined number) or more (A 2301). If the number of discharged balls is smaller than 100 (the result of A 2301 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A 2313. When the number of discharged balls is 100 or more (the result of A 2301 is “Y”), the number of acquired balls region (RWM) is updated in order to update the payout rate displayed in the payout rate display unit 67 to the latest withdrawal rate. Load the value in (A2302). In the acquired ball number area, the number of acquired balls per 100 discharged balls (total number of balls), that is, the payout rate is stored. Then, it is determined whether the number of acquired balls is 100 or more (A2303).

  When the acquired ball number is smaller than 100 (the result of A2303 is "N"), the game control device 100 indicates the light emission color (red or green in this embodiment) of the segment (light emission unit) of the payout rate display unit 67. The value of the segment color number area (within RWM) storing the color number is updated (A2304), and the segment data corresponding to the acquired ball number (ie, the percentage of ball withdrawal) is saved in the segment area corresponding to the color number (A2305) ). The segment area not corresponding to the color number is cleared to 0. In this manner, in the payout rate display section 67, the luminescent color can be changed to display the payout rate display updated (for example, from red to green), and the player is notified that the payout rate has been updated. It can be made to recognize.

  As described above, the payout rate (total number of earned balls and prize balls) is updated and displayed on the payout rate display section 67 every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number) by the processing of steps A2301 to A2305. it can. In the case where a plurality of winning openings are made simultaneously at a plurality of winning openings at the timing when the number of balls discharged reaches 100, a plurality of winning openings are determined based on a predetermined priority for each winning opening as shown in FIG. 15B. Among the winnings, a winning to a winning opening with a high priority is adopted, and the number of winning balls adopted is added to calculate the payout rate (total number of winning balls, number of winning balls) (Priority calculation means ). As a result, especially in the normal gaming state and the special gaming state, the highest possible payout rate is obtained at the timing when the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), and the player's expectation for the game can be improved. Further, in the specific gaming state (general power support state), since there are a lot of wins on the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, winning on the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is preferentially adopted. In addition, the number of winning balls due to the winning among the plurality of winnings is added to the payout rate (total number of winning balls, number of winning balls) in the payout performance monitoring process in the next timer interrupt process.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 15C, the winning openings are in the order of the winning openings (the number of winning balls) obtained (large winning opening → general winning opening → first starting winning opening → second starting winning opening). When priority is given to monitoring (calculation of payout rate), the payout rate as high as possible is obtained at the timing when the number of discharged balls reaches 100, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved.

  When the acquired ball number is 100 or more (the result of A2303 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 sets the value of the segment color number area to the initial value (for example, corresponding to red) (A2306), "99" The segment data for blinking display of is stored in the segment area corresponding to the color number (A2307). Since the withdrawal rate can be displayed only from 0 to 99 in the withdrawal rate display section 67, when the number of acquired balls (outgoing rate) reaches 100 or more in this way, "99" blinks in only one color (for example, red) Let In particular, the payout rate is 100 or more in the special game state (big hit), but even when the payout rate display is updated, the color of the payout rate display is prevented from changing frequently. In the special game state (big hit), it is also possible to turn off the payout rate display unit 67 to hide the payout rate, but in this case, the number of earned balls (dispense rate) is When updating the payout rate display at 100 or more, the color change of the payout rate display may be performed.

  The game control apparatus 100 prepares a command corresponding to the acquired ball number as a rendering command (A2308), and executes rendering command setting processing (A2309). As a result, the effect control device 300 can display the payout rate (the number of obtained balls) on the display device 41. The command in this case corresponds to the payout rate (the number of obtained balls) (a range of 1 byte) of a numerical value less than 100 displayed in the payout rate display section 67.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves signal data relating to the payout rate in a test signal output data area in the RWM (A 2310). As a result, signal data relating to the ball out rate is output to the relay substrate 70 and to the external test shot test device via the output process (A1621 in FIG. 11) as the game information output means. And it can be checked whether an error (mismatch) has not occurred by comparing the expulsion rate output to the test injection test device with the expulsion rate obtained by the test injection test device. The payout rate here may be a value of 100 or more, using the value loaded from the acquired ball number area as it is. In addition, as signal data regarding the payout rate, information indicating that a specific winning opening has been won and the data of the number of discharged balls are directly output to the external test shot test device, and the test shot test device calculates the payout rate. Configuration is also possible. In addition, when the payout rate is an abnormal value equal to or greater than a predetermined value or less than a predetermined value, not the signal data (numerical value) related to the dispense rate but signal data (on signal) notifying an abnormality is included in the test signal output data area. It is also possible to save and output to the trial shot test device (off signal when the value is normal). Next, the acquired ball number region is cleared to 0 (A2311), and the discharged ball number region is cleared to 0 (A2312).

  After the step A2312, or when the number of discharged balls is smaller than 100 (the result of A2301 is "N"), the game control device 100 obtains the value of the number-of-ears acquired ball number region shown in FIG. 17B (III). The total value (full prize ball number) of the is calculated (A2313). Next, load the character acquisition ball number (large winning opening (big hit part)) which is the sum of the number of winning balls by the winning to the big winning opening during the big hit state (A2314), the number of winning balls (high winning) Based on the mouth (for the big hit), (character item acquisition number of balls / total value) × 100 (%) is calculated as the character ratio (A2315). Here, the total value is the sum of the number of balls obtained for each item, and corresponds to the total number of balls obtained by winning in the winning opening. Although the feature ratio is calculated to the first decimal place, since the decimal is difficult to handle, a value 10 times the feature ratio may be calculated.

  In addition, in the number-of-items acquisition ball number used for calculation of the character ratio, not only the number-of-ears acquisition ball number (large winning opening (big hit portion)), but also the number of winning characters obtained ball number And / or a character acquisition ball number (normal fluctuation winning device) may be included. In addition, the number of winning balls (large winning opening (small hitting part)) is the sum of the number of winning balls obtained by winning the large winning opening during the small hitting state, the number of winning balls (general The fluctuation winning device) is a total of the number of winning balls obtained by winning in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second start winning opening).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves the segment data corresponding to the calculation result in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the character ratio display section 68 (A2316). As a result, the character ratio can be displayed on the character ratio display unit 68 through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11). Next, a command corresponding to the calculated result (A2315) of the combination ratio is prepared as a rendering command (A2317), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A2318). Thus, the effect control device 300 can display the role ratio on the display device 41. The command in this case may correspond to a value (0 to 1000) (range of 2 bytes) 10 times the character ratio.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves signal data relating to the item ratio in the test signal output data area (A2319). As a result, through the output process (A1622 in FIG. 11) as the game information output means, the signal data relating to the item ratio is output to the relay substrate 70 and further to the external shot test device, and the information relating to the item ratio )it can. And it can be checked whether an error (mismatch) has occurred by comparing the character product ratio output to the test injection test apparatus and the product property ratio calculated by the test injection test apparatus. It is also possible to output the data of the number of balls obtained for each combination as it is as signal data concerning the ratio of the combination to the external test shot test device and calculate the ratio of the combination by the trial shot test device.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 loads the value of the discharged ball number area (A2320), calculates the value of (100-discharged ball number) (A2321), and discharges the segment data corresponding to this calculation result. It saves in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the number display section 66 (A2322). Thereby, the number of discharged balls is displayed in a countdown display in the discharged ball number display unit 66 through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11). In addition, what is necessary is just to save the segment data corresponding to the value of a discharge ball | number area | region area | region in a segment area | region as it is, when carrying out count-up display. Further, a command corresponding to the calculation result is prepared as a rendering command (A2323), and rendering command setting processing is executed (A2324). Thereby, the effect control device 300 can display the number of discharged balls on the display device 41 by the countdown display. The command in this case corresponds to the number of balls discharged (number of 1 byte) less than 100 displayed in the number-of-discharged balls display section 66. Thereafter, the processing for monitoring the performance of the balls is ended.

  In addition, as a modification, the value of the number of balls discharged, the value of the number of balls acquired, and the value of the number of ball regions acquired by each part are transmitted as data to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 The item ratio may be calculated. Also, in steps A2310 and A2319, signal data relating to the payout rate and character ratio, and signal data notifying that the payout rate and character ratio is an abnormal value (a predetermined value or more or a predetermined value or less) Output as an external information signal to an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal control device (hall computer)) installed in the game arcade, and information on the payout rate and May be notified (displayed).

[Pachislot machine state check process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine state check process is executed at steps A 2020, A 2022 and A 2025 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2401). The status scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming status. The relation between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the signal to be checked is on (A2402). If the signal to be checked is not on (result of A2402 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is off, prepare the state off flag as the state flag (A2403), and obtain the target state off command And prepare (A2404). Further, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2405). The state off flag indicates a normal state with respect to an error-based signal, and indicates a no touch state with respect to a touch switch signal.

  On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (result of A2402 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2406), acquires the state on command of the object, and prepares. (A2407). Furthermore, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2408). The state on flag indicates an abnormal or incorrect state with respect to an error-based signal, and indicates a touch-on state with respect to a touch switch signal.

  When the process of step A2405 or step A2408 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2409). If they match (the result of A2409 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2412. If they do not match (the result of A2409 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2410), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2411).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2412). Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2413). If the value of the updated state monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A 2413 is “N”), the gaming machine state check process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2413 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 updates the state monitoring timer by -1, and the timer comparison value- Stay at the value of 1 (A2414). Further, it is determined whether the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2415). If they match (the result of A 2415 is “Y”), the gaming machine state check processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A 2415 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2416). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2417), and the gaming machine state check process is ended. The rendering command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error system command, the effect control device 300 is made to start an error notification.

[Discharge busy signal check process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout busy signal check process. The payout busy signal check process is executed in step A2026 in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG. 15A.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether a payout busy signal input from the payout control apparatus 200 is on (A 2501). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 can not start the payout control.

  When the payout busy signal is not on (result of A2501 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares an idle state flag as a determination status (A2502), and sets an off determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec). (A2503). On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is on (result of A2501 is "Y"), a busy status flag is prepared as a determination status (A2504), and an on determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (A2505) ).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state (on / off) of the current payout busy signal (A2506). If they match (the result of A2506 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2509. If they do not match (the result of A2506 is "N"), the state of the current payout busy signal is saved in the busy signal state area (A2507), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (A2508).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by +1 (A2509), and determines whether the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (A2510). If the monitoring timer is less than the timer comparison value (the result of A 2510 is “N”), the payout busy signal check process is ended.

  If the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (the result of A 2510 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by −1 and keeps the value smaller than the timer comparison value by 1 (A 2511) The prepared status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (busy signal status area) (A 2512), and the payout busy signal check process is ended.

  The payout busy signal check process sets a payout busy signal flag (busy signal status) based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not immediately changed, and the busy signal flag is changed when the state which has changed over the timer comparison value continues. It is hard to be influenced by

  In addition, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and is in an undefined state until one of the signal states continues over the timer comparison value. As a result, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout control device 200 immediately outputs the winning ball command even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. And the payout ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1309) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special view game process, the monitoring of the input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the control of the entire processing related to the special view variation display game, and the setting of the display of the special view are performed.

  The game control apparatus 100 first executes start opening switch monitoring processing for monitoring winning of the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when the game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers etc.) are extracted, and the special drawing fluctuation display based on the winnings A game result pre-determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the game. The details of the starting opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the gaming ball with the count switch 39a provided in the special variation winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, if the special-purpose game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates −1 (subtracts 1) (A 2603). The special view game processing timer is clocked by an interruption period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 updating. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is “N”), it moves to the processing of step A2619.

  The game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure game process number when the special figure game process timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or has already been up. A special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to processing is set in a register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call according to the special figure game process number is made, and the game branching process according to the special figure game process number is executed (A2607).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the special view fluctuation display game, and sets the start of fluctuation of the special view fluctuation display game, setting of the effect, Special figure normal processing is executed to set information required to perform special figure variation processing (A2608). The details of the special view ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “1” at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the stop display time of the special view, sets the information necessary for performing the special view display process, etc. The process during the figure fluctuation is executed (A2609). The details of the special figure variation in-progress process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number of the game control number 100 is “2” in step A2607, if the game result of the special view fluctuation display game is a big hit, the game control apparatus 100 sets the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, and each big hit The special figure display process is executed to set the fan fare time in accordance with the special winning opening pattern, and to set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process (A2610). The details of the special view display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "3" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and the information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process. The fanfare / interval processing for setting etc. is executed (A2611). The details of the fanfare / in-interval process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “4” at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if the big round is the final round, A special winning opening open processing is performed to set information required to perform the special winning opening residual ball processing (A2612). The details of the special winning opening open process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is "5" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets a time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged if the big hit round is the final round, A big winning opening remaining ball process is performed to set information required to perform the big hit end process (A2613). The details of the special winning opening residual ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "6" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a big hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special view routine process (A2614). The details of the big hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "7" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and sets the information necessary for performing the small hit, etc. Perform a small hit fanfare medium process (A2615). The details of the small hit fanfare medium process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “8” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a small hitting middle process for setting information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball process (A2616). The details of the small hit middle process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “9” at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes small hit remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing small hit end processing (A2617). The details of the small hit residual ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "10" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes small hitting end processing for setting information necessary for executing the special view ordinary processing (A2618). The details of the small hitting end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing based on the special view game process number is completed, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares a special view 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special view 1 display 51 (A2619), and then the special view 1 display The symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2620). And after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2621), the symbol fluctuation control processing concerning the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2622). The details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special view game process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first prepares a prize monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A 2701), executes hard random number acquisition processing (A 2702), and determines whether there is a winning for the starting winning opening 36 It is determined (A2703). If there is no winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, when there is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is in the short (in the general power support state) (A2704).

  When it is determined that the special control time is not in the middle (in the power transmission support state) (the result of A2704 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A2707 and thereafter. On the other hand, if it is in the special view time short (during general power support state) (result of A2704 is "Y"), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as a rendering command (A2705), and rendering command setting processing is executed ( A2706).

  That is, in the case of the universal power support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed. . In the case of the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless the driver hits the start winning opening 36 left, and does not win the normal fluctuation prize device 37 unless the driver hits the right. In addition, the game ball does not pass through the common view start gate 34 unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the general electric power support state (time saving state), right-handed driving is more advantageous than left-hand driving, but there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 during the general electric power support state (that is, (In the case of left-handed), the right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing the right-handed operation by the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes the special view start port switch common process (A2708). Then, a prize monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), hard random number acquisition processing is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning for the second starting winning opening It is determined (A2711). If there is no winning on the second start winning opening (the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.

  On the other hand, when there is a winning on the second start winning opening (result of A2711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is in operation. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is activated to be in an open state where winning of the gaming ball is possible (A2712). If the ordinary motor-operated combination is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"), the process shifts to the processing of step A2714.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary motorized role is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the common electric charge is in progress (A2713). If the number of incorrect winnings on the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the general electric power is in the process of being created. In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball is in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a game ball which has won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of incorrect prizes. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

  After the game control apparatus 100 prepares a table for setting information of suspension by the second start winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) when the common electric power fraud is not occurring (result of A2713 is "N") (A2714) The special view starting opening switch common processing is executed (A2715), and the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended. Also, when it is determined in A2713 that a common power charge is in progress (the result of A2713 is “Y”), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated further.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (A 2702, A 2710) in the starting opening switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets start-up-no-commitment absence information indicating that there is no start-up opening winning (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input on the target switch (A2802), and when there is no input on the target switch (the result of A2802 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. The target switch is the start port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the start port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710.

  If there is an input to the target switch (result of A2802 is "Y"), the gaming control apparatus 100 reads the random number latch register status (the state of the random number latch register), and whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register It is determined (A2803, A2804). If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition processing is ended.

  If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 loads and prepares the jackpot random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register (A2805), and the start opening The start-up winning combination information indicating that there is a winning is set (A2806). In addition, the prepared big hit random number is used by special figure starting opening switch common processing.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common processing (A2708, A2715) in the starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view starting opening switch common process. The special view starting opening switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a.

  The game control apparatus 100 first outputs the information on the number of winnings on the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36 a and the starting opening 2 switch 37 a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The number of starting opening signal outputs is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the RWM start opening signal output number area (A2904), and the process shifts to processing of step A2905. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the process of step A2905 is performed. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the number of to-be-updated special views (number of starting memories) corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit. It is determined (A2905). If the number of to-be-updated special views is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special view starting port switch common processing is ended. In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special views is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of to-be-updated special views (to-special number 1 or special number 2) is updated by 1 Then (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special drawing reservations (A2908), and stores the big hit random number prepared in step A2805 as the big hit random number of RWM. Save to the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random numbers of the starting opening switch to be monitored are extracted and prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2912). If it is not a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, if it is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is "Y"), small hit symbol random numbers are extracted, prepared (A2913), and saved in RWM small hit symbol random number storage area (A2914 ).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2915), and executes the special view holding information determination process (A2916). Then, prepare a decoration special view reservation number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the number of special view reservations as a rendering command (A2917), execute the rendering command setting process (A2918), and common to the special view starting opening switch. End the process.

  Here, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 and the start winning area of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start storage means is provided for storing a predetermined number at the upper limit as start storage. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) sets various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as the first start storage with the predetermined number as the upper limit. It stores and stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view holding information determination process (A2916) in the starting opening switch common process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special map hold information determination process. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetching (pre-judging) process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks the starting opening winning flag saved in step A2907, and determines whether or not it is a winning to the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A3001). If it is not a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3004. On the other hand, if it is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during the general electric support state) (A3002).

  If the special control time is short (in the power transmission support state) (the result of A3002 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the special view hold information determination process. On the other hand, when the special drawing time is not in progress (the result of A3002 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the big hit or the small hit is in progress (A3003). If the jackpot is medium or small (medium as a result of A 3003 is “Y”), the processing for determining the special feature reservation information ends.

  On the other hand, when the big game control device 100 is not in the big hit medium or small hit (the result of A3003 is “N”), the big hit decision processing which decides whether it is the big hit depending on whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit decision value. Is executed (A3004). Then, if the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3005 is "Y"), set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting opening switch (A3006), and in the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2910 The corresponding stop symbol information is acquired (A3007), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (A3008). If it is not a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is "N"), the stop symbol information of out is set (A3013), it moves to the processing of step A3014.

  When it is a winning to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether it is a small hit by whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not The hit determination processing is executed (A3009). Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (the result of A3010 is "N"), stop symbol information of the outset is set (A3013), and the process shifts to the process of step A3014. On the other hand, if the judgment result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is "Y"), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143. Information is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares as a rendering command a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to a target starting opening switch and stop symbol information (A3014), and executes a rendering command setting process (A3015). Next, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed (A3016), and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is executed (A3017) ).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 prepares as a performance command a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a first half fluctuation number indicating a first half fluctuation pattern and a second half fluctuation number indicating a second half fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation pattern of a special figure fluctuation display game (A3018 ), The rendering command setting process is performed (A3019), and the special map hold information determination process is ended. The special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process.

  With the above processing, the prefetch pattern command including the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and the prefetch fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared And sent to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start storage in the start storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start storage (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained) Etc.) make a pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening is being processed (A3101). When the special winning opening open process is being performed (the result of A3101 is “Y”), the process moves to the process of step A3105. If the special winning opening is not being processed (the result of A3101 is "N"), the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress. It determines (A3102).

  When the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (the result of A3102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A3105. If the special winning opening game is not being processed (the result of A3105 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, the small hit is being processed. (A3103). When the small hitting medium is being processed (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the process moves to the process of step A3105. If the small hit is not being processed (the result of A3103 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "9", that is, the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress ( A3104). Since the special figure game process number does not shift next until the special figure game process timer becomes 0, it is possible to check the progress of the game by the special figure game process number.

  When the small hit residual ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3104 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. If the small hit residual sphere process is being performed (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the process moves to a process of step A3105. Then, 0 is set to the winning counter (A3105), and it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (one large winning opening switch 39a) (A3106).

  When there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a) (A3110). When the special winning opening switch 1 is input (the result of A3106 is "Y"), a special winning opening count command is prepared as a rendering command (A3107), and a rendering command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3109), and it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 39a) (A3110).

  If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (result of A3110 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114). When the special winning opening switch 2 has an input (the result of A3110 is "Y"), the special winning opening count command is prepared as a rendering command (A3111), and a rendering command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3113), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

  When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3114 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (A3115). If the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (the result of A3115 is "Y"), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and the special winning opening residual ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3115 is "N") It is determined whether or not the remaining ball processing is in progress (A3116).

  If the game control device 100 is in the small hit residual ball processing (result of A3116 is "Y"), the large winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, if the small hit residual ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3116 is " N "), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the large winning opening count number (A3117), the large winning opening count is the upper limit value (the number of gaming balls that can be winning in one round. For example," 9 " ) Is judged (A3118).

  When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (the result of A3118 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 ends the special winning opening switch monitoring process. If the special winning opening count is equal to or higher than the upper limit (the result of A3118 is "Y"), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (A3119), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether the small hit is being processed (A3121).

  If the game control device 100 is not processing during the small hit (the result of A 3121 is “N”), the big winning hole switch monitoring processing is ended, and when processing during the small hit is in progress (the result of A 3121 is “Y”) The value of the small hit opening end is saved in the special winning opening control pointer area (A3122), and the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special view ordinary processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the number of special views 2 reservations (the second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). If the special figure 2 pending number is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 pending number (first start storage number) is 0 or not (A3205). Then, when the number of special drawing 1 reservations is 0 (the result of A3205 is “Y”), it is judged whether or not the customer waiting demo is started (A3209), and the customer waiting demo is not started (A3209) The result of “N” sets a customer waiting demonstration flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration state (state waiting for a customer demonstration) is in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3210).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as a rendering command (A3211), performs rendering command setting processing (A3212), and sets "0" related to the special processing routine processing as the processing number ( A3213). On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has been started in step A3209 (the result of A3209 is "Y"), "0" relating to the special processing is also set as the processing number (A3213). Thereafter, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A3214), and the variation symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216), and the special view routine processing is ended.

  Thus, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted when the special drawing 1 holding number (first start memory number) and the special drawing 2 holding number (second starting memory number) is 0, and the customer waiting demo command is received. The effect control device 300 performs setting for displaying the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like. The game control apparatus 100 may be configured to transmit the customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 is an off signal.

  In addition, when special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is N), game control control 100 executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202), the special feature 2 which corresponds to the special figure 2 reservation number A figure reserve number command (decorative special figure 2 reserve number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), an effect command setting process is executed (A3204), and the special figure ordinary process is ended.

  In addition, when special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3205 is “N”), game control control 100 executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3206), the special feature 1 which corresponds to special figure 1 reservation number A figure reserve number command (decorative special figure 1 reserve number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3207), an effect command setting process is executed (A3208), and the special figure ordinary process is ended.

  As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed when the special figure 2 pending number is not 0 by checking the special figure 2 pending number before the special figure 1 pending number check. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is the variable display based on the first start memory It is a priority control means that is executed prior to the game.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (A3206) in the special view normal process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 1 change start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

  The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, the big hit flag 1 setting processing for setting the shift information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure information setting process of setting special figure information that is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404). Details of the special view information setting process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405 ). After that, the game control apparatus 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process of setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the special view 1 fluctuation display game (A3406). Details of the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a fluctuation start information setting process of setting information on the fluctuation start of the special view 1 fluctuation display game (A3407), and ends the special view 1 fluctuation start process. Details of the change start information setting process will be described later.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 sets "1" related to the special figure variation process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special view 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, save the in-fluctuation flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and start the blink control timer (special figure 1 indicator 51 blink period timer) initial value (for example, special figure 1 blink control timer area) 100 ms) is set (A 3413). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 2 change start process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the process similar to the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, the big hit flag 2 setting processing for setting the shift information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information) (A 3503). Further, special drawing information setting processing for setting special drawing information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is prepared (A3505).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process of setting a fluctuation pattern of the special view 2 fluctuation display game (A3506). And the fluctuation start information setting processing which sets the information of fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation indication game is executed (A3507).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 first sets "1" related to the special figure variation process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A 3512), and in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area, an initial value (for example, a timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) 100 ms) is set (A 3513). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special view 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves the misplacement information in the small hit flag area (A3601), and saves the misplacement information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A 3603), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3604). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit (A3605).

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is a big hit (result of A3606 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 overwrites the big hit information in the big hit flag 1 area where the outlier information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607), and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3606 is "N"), whether the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value The small hit determination processing to determine whether or not is executed (A3608).

  When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 performs the small hit information in the small hit flag area where the outlier information is saved in step A3601. Overwrite and save (A3610), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (the result of A3609 is "N"), the big hit flag 1 is set while saving the outlier information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. End the process. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special view 1 variable display game is one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “deterioration”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special view 2 change start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process. In this processing, processing similar to the processing in the big hit flag 1 setting processing shown in FIG. 30 is performed for the second start storage.

  First, the gaming control apparatus 100 saves shift information in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3701). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) of RWM and prepared (A 3702), the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3703). It should be noted that the one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit (A3704).

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 overwrites the big hit information in the big hit flag 2 area where the outlier information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706), and end the big hit flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not a big hit (the result of A3705 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended while the big hit flag 2 is saved. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special view 2 variable display game is either “big hit” or “losing”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the big hit determination process (A3605, A3704) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special view suspension information determination process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value (A3801), and judges whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (A3802). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A3802 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets out (other than the jackpot) as the judgment result (A3807) and ends the jackpot judgment processing Do.

  Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3802 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit occurrence probability is a high probability state (probability state). (A3803). Then, in the case of the high probability state (the result of A3803 is “Y”), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, if it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3803 is “N”), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (A3805).

  After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A3806). If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3807). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is "N"), the big hit is set as the judgment result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hitting determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special view suspension information determination process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hitting lower limit judgment value (A3901). Note that being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit.

  Naturally, the range of small hit judgment values (between the small hit lower judgment value and the small hit upper judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game becomes a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In the present embodiment, the small hit random number is not uniquely provided, and the big hit random number is used for the small hit determination, but a unique small hit random number may be provided.

  When the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (result of A3901 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 sets a gap as a judgment result (A3903), small hit The determination process ends.

  In addition, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (result of A3901 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100, the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is the small hit upper limit judged value It is determined whether it is larger (A3902). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "Y"), a gap is set as a judgment result (A3903). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "N"), the small hit is set as the judgment result (A3904). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process is ended.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a procedure of special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A4001). If it is a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y"), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) ) From the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4003).

  Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). This process selects the type of special result (the type of big hit).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4007).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires time shortening determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the time shortening determination data area (A4008). The time shortening determination data includes information on the presence or absence of the general-purpose power support state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit state.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares an ornament special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018).

  The effect mode shift information is information for shifting the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y") and is used in the big hit end processing described later. That is, it is possible to shift the effect mode on the occasion of a big hit by the effect mode shift information. In addition, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the stop pattern pattern of the big hit (probable variation big hit symbol / normal big hit pattern or not etc), so the type of big hit symbol (type of big hit), big hit end The transition destination of the effect mode to be shifted later will change. Further, since the effect mode transition information is set according to the probability state as described above, the transition destination of the effect mode is also influenced by whether or not the special figure high probability state (probability change state) is currently in progress.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and a small hit (a result of A4011). "Y"), small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) (A4011). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4012), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4013).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), and saves the effect mode shift information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4015). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A 4010 is “Y”), and the effect mode can be shifted in response to a small hit. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4018).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is "N"), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4016) and the off stop symbol pattern is stopped symbol pattern Save in the area (A4017), and prepare a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4019), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A4020). The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4021), clear 0 of the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) (A4022), and special figure 1 small hit The symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4023), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A 3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4101). If it is a big hit (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 pending) ) From the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (A4102). Next, special figure 2 big hit design table is set (A4103). Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). This process selects the type of special result (the type of big hit).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets a special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4105), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4107).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4108). The time shortening determination data includes information on the presence or absence of the general-purpose power support state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit state.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A 4101 is “Y”) and is used in the big hit end processing described later. Then, the game control device 100 prepares an ornament special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A 4101 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection in special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A 4110) and the disconnection stop symbol pattern Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4111), and an ornament special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4112). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4113), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A4114). The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4115) and clear 0 of the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4116) and the special figure 2 stop symbol End the setting process.

[Special map information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (A3404, A3504) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special drawing information setting process. In this embodiment, the probability state (low probability / high probability, presence / absence of time reduction) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, but the effect mode managed by the game control apparatus 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence or absence of a time saving state, the progress status of the special view variation display game, and the like.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the first half fluctuation group selection pointer table (A4201), and acquires the first half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202). Next, the first half variation group selection offset table is set (A 4203), and the target special drawing reserve number (special figure 1 reserve number or special figure 2 reserve number) and offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern are acquired (A 4204) .

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 adds the first half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (A4206). As a result, in the variable distribution information 1 area, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation mode before the start of reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, although depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when the number of reservations is large, it is only in the case of loss, and as a result, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation group is selected, and one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a second half fluctuation group selection pointer table (A4207), and acquires a second half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4208). Then, the second half fluctuation group selection offset table is set (A4209), and the offset data corresponding to the number of the special figure reservations and the stop symbol pattern of interest are acquired (A4210).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 adds the second half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), saves the value obtained by the addition in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (A4212), and sets the special drawing information. End the process. As a result, in the variable distribution information 2 area, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (including the type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of reservations only in the case of an outfall (the reach incidence rate decreases when the number of reservations is large). Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern setting process (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variation pattern setting processing.

  The fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reaching state, and the second half fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation aspect from the reaching state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game The second half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the variation group selection address table (A4301), acquires the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 and prepares (A4302), the target variation pattern random number Load the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from 1 storage area (for number of reservations 1) and prepare (A4303). In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half fluctuation group table is different in structure between a hit and a break. Specifically, it has a 1-byte size for hit and a 2-byte size for release. Since the rate of occurrence per hit is lower than the rate of occurrence of departure and even one byte is sufficient, the footprint is one byte in size from the viewpoint of saving of data capacity. Therefore, the hit time uses only the lower value of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1. In addition, the rate of occurrence of outliers is higher than the incidence rate of hits, and in order to make various renditions appear, the size for the removal is 2 bytes.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the result of the special view variation display game is an out (A4304), and in the case of an out (a result of A4304 is "Y"), performs 2-byte distribution processing (A4305) Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. If not (when the result of A4304 is “N”), the distribution process (A4306) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A4307.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the address of the second half variation selection table (the second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution, prepares (A4307), and stores the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (pending Load the variation pattern random number 2 from the equation 1) and prepare (A4308). Then, distribution processing is executed (A4309), and the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half fluctuation number area (A4310). By this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4311), and calculates a table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4313), and the variation pattern random number is stored from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1). Load 3 and prepare (A4314). Thereafter, distribution processing (A4315) is performed, and the first-half fluctuation number obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and saved in the first-half fluctuation number area (A4316), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

[2-byte distribution process]
Next, details of the 2-byte distribution process (A4305) in the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the 2-byte distribution process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks whether the data at the top of the selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without allocation (ie, "0") (A4401). Here, although the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, the second half specifies only the second half fluctuation selection table in which the second half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the fluctuation group table (for example, a part of fluctuation group table when the result is out), since there is no need to distribute, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the head .

  Then, when the first data of the selection table (second half change group table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the result of the distribution. Then (A4407), the 2-byte distribution process ends. On the other hand, if the first data in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "N"), one distribution initially defined in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) Obtain a value (A4403).

  Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4403 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A4303 (A4404), and the calculated new random number value Is smaller than "0" (A4405). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4405 is “N”), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403 and Perform the following processing. That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and thereafter, the distribution value is subtracted from the random value already determined in the previous step A4405, and a new disturbance is generated. A numerical value is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number is smaller than “0” (A4405).

  The above process is executed until it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"). Thereby, any one second half fluctuation selection table is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table). Then, if it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (A4407), and 2 bytes End the distribution process.

[Distribution process]
Next, details of distribution processing (A4306, A4309, A4315) in the fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the distribution process. In the distribution process, the second half variation pattern of the special view variation display game is selected from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 or the first half variation selection table ( It is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  The game control apparatus 100 first generates the head data of the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313) Is checked if it is a code without allocation (ie, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number) or first half variation pattern (first half variation number) In the case of a selection table that stores the distribution value of, but does not require distribution, the distribution value "0", that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

  Then, if the game control apparatus 100 determines that the first data of the target selection table (the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is “Y”), The address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (A4507), and the distribution process is ended. On the other hand, when the first data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table or first half fluctuation selection table) is not a code without distribution (result of A4502 is “N”), the target selection table (second half fluctuation One distribution value defined first in the group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table) is acquired (A4503).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random number values (the values of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2 and fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in step A4303 or A4308 or A4314. Then, a new random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “N”), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the process proceeds to step A4503 and Perform the following processing.

  That is, the distribution value defined next in the target selection table (the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the disturbance determined in the previous step A4505 is obtained. A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). The above process is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). Thereby, at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number) or first half variation pattern (first half variation pattern) defined in the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table or first half variation selection table) Any one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number) and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from the variation numbers).

  When the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), the address is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result. (A4507), the distribution process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (A4603). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (A4605).

  Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A4606), and saves the addition value in the special-figure game processing timer area (A4607). Thereafter, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as a rendering command (A4609), and rendering command setting processing is performed (A4610) ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (A4611), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free space after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process is ended.

  Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game A variation command including information on a pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of a stop time may be mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the process in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first prepares a symbol stop command (special figure 1 symbol stop command or special figure 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to a symbol in motion as a rendering command (A4701), and executes a rendering command setting process. (A4702). The symbol during variation can be determined from the variation symbol determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag). The effect control device 300 having received the symbol stop command stops the corresponding decoration special figure variation display game (the decoration special figure 1 variation display game or the decoration special figure 2 variation display game).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A 4703), and saves the set display time in the special-purpose game processing timer area (A 4704). In the case of the present embodiment, 800 msec is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, and 2000 msec is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a process number "2" related to the special figure display process (A4705), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4706).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A4707) A4708).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) to a symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting a symbol determination frequency signal relating to the execution frequency of the special view variation display game to the external information terminal. Save (A4709).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 controls the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop at the special view 1 display 51 as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51. Save (A4710). Furthermore, as information for controlling the special view 2 change display game in the special view 2 display 52, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 2 display 52 is saved in the special view 2 change control flag area (A4711) , Special processing during process transition setting processing ends.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (A2610) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during special view display. FIG. 42A shows the first half of the special view display processing, and FIG. 42B shows the second half of the special view display processing.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first loads the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special view 1 fluctuation start process (A5101), and clears the small hit flag area of the RWM (A5102). Subsequently, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded And clears the jackpot flag 1 area and the jackpot flag 2 area of the RWM (A 5104).

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A5105), and if it is a big hit (the result of A5105 is “Y”), the second special figure fluctuation display game of big hit Test signal related to the start of (special figure 2 big hit) (for example, signal ON during condition device operation, signal ON during continuous operation device operation, signal ON for special symbol 2) in test signal output data area of RWM After saving (A5108), a round number upper limit table is set (A5109).

  On the other hand, if the result of the check of the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (result of A5105 is "N"), the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A5106), If there is a case (result of A5106 is "Y"), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is on, the feature continuous operation device operating) regarding the start of the big hit (special image 1 large hitting) of the first special view fluctuation display game The signal is turned on and the special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5107), and the process of setting the round number upper limit table is executed (A5109).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the round number upper limit value (for example, 4, 16) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information, and saves it in the RWM round number upper limit value area (A5110). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5111).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 loads the decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepares it as an effect command (A5112), and executes an effect command setting process (A5113) ). After that, a probability information command relating to information for making the probability to be a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared as a rendering command (A5114), The setting process is executed (A5115). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the round number upper limit is prepared as an effect command (A5116), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5117).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 outputs large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, and a signal corresponding to the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game outside the RWM. Save in the information output data area (A5118). In the present embodiment, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the big winning opening opening information and the probability. The on / off of the big hit 2 signal and the big hit 3 signal is determined by the big winning opening open information and the state of probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is on when there is a big hit with popped out (big winning opening open information is other than the big winning opening open information 1), a big hit without popping out (so-called "very sure big hit etc. Big winning opening open" If the information is a large winning opening opening information 1), it will be on if it is a big hit in the time saving state, it will be off otherwise. Also, the jackpot 3 signal is on when the jackpot is a jackpot with a ball, and is off when the jackpot is a jackpot without a ball.

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 performs the big hit fanfare time (e.g., 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the winning probability opening information and the probability of being hit in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game. Is set (A5119), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5120). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (A5121). As a result, information on the probability state of the special view and the time saving state (general power support state) when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the large winning opening fraudulent winning number area of the large winning opening (special variation winning device 39) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information (A5122), the large corresponding to the large winning opening opening information An out-of-fair monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the winning opening (A5123). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process shift setting process 1 is executed (A5124), and the special figure display process is ended. That is, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special fluctuation winning device 39 into the open state based on the result being a special result in any of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game. It is a special game state generating means that generates a state.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A5106 is "N"), the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (A5125). If the small hit flag is a small hit (result of A5125 is "Y"), the high probability change number updating process of updating the high probability change number of managing the execution number of the special figure change display game in the special figure high probability state Execute (A5126). Subsequently, the presentation mode information check process regarding the setting of the presentation mode is executed (A5127) and it is during the special figure high probability (is the probability of occurrence of the special result (big hit) of the special figure fluctuation display game being the high probability state) It is judged whether or not it is (A5128).

  When not being in the special figure height probability (result of A5128 is "N"), game control control equipment 100 loads decoration special figure command from the decoration special figure command field, prepares as a production command (A5129), production command setting, The process is executed (A5130). Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5131), an effect command setting process is executed (A5132), and the process proceeds to step A5133.

  Further, when the special figure height probability is in progress (the result of A5128 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to the process of step A5133. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special figure high probability (during the definite change state), the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is made to the player. In order not to be conscious, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads the special figure game mode flag, and saves the loaded flag in the special figure game mode flag save area (A5133). Thereafter, the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (A5134) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A5125 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes high probability change count updating process (A5135) and effect mode information check process regarding setting of effect mode ( A5136). Then, the switch preparation remaining rotation number (switch preparation remaining game number) corresponding to the effect mode number is set (A5137), and whether or not the effect remaining rotation number (effect remaining game number) matches the switch preparation remaining rotation number. It is determined (A5138). Note that the switching preparation remaining rotational speed may be a different value (rotational speed) in all the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes, or the same value in any of the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes.

  When the effect remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number do not match (the result of A5138 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets “0” related to the special processing routine processing as the processing number (A5141).

  On the other hand, when the effect remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number coincide with each other (the result of A5138 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares the effect mode switching preparation command as an effect command (A5139), After the command setting process (A5140) is performed, "0" related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (A5141). The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several revolutions before the effect mode is switched (several games before), and by transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, It is possible to avoid contradiction etc. in the production across the modes.

  Thereafter, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A5142), the variation symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A5143), and the special figure display processing is ended.

[High probability change frequency update processing]
Next, the details of the high probability variation count update process (A5126, A5135) in the special view display process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the high probability variation count update process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure high probability (during a probability change state) is in progress (A5201). If the special figure height probability is not in progress (the result of A5201 is “N”), the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended.

  When the special figure height probability is in progress (the result of A5201 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the high probability fluctuation number by −1 (subtracts one) (A5202), and the high probability fluctuation number is 0 It is determined whether it has become (A 5203). If the high probability fluctuation number is not 0 (the result of A5203 is "N"), that is, if the high probability state continues even in the next special figure fluctuation display game, the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended.

  When the high probability change frequency becomes 0 (the result of A5203 is “Y”), that is, when the high probability state ends in the special figure change display game of this time, the game control apparatus 100 the high probability notification flag The area is cleared (A5204), and a signal related to the end of the high probability state (for example, 2 large hit off signals) is saved in the external information output data area (A5205).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 signals the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is off, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5206). Note that, even during the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the common drawing, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal motorized combination 1 open extension state signal are always off. Thereafter, a number with no time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (A5207), and a common drawing low probability flag is saved in the common drawing game mode flag area (A5208).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the special figure low probability & time saving none flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A5209). Then, save a signal (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is off) relating to the leftward command in the test signal output data area (A5210) and turn off the first gaming state display section 57 in the game state display number 2 area. The number in the left-handed state is saved (A5211), and the high probability change number update process is ended.

[Demonstration mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (A5127, A5136) in the special view display process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect mode information check process. The effect mode information check process is executed when the result of the special view variation display game is other than the big hit (small hit or break).

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the next mode transition information is the no update code (A5401). If the next mode shift information is the no update code (the result of A5401 is “Y”), the effect mode information check process is ended. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of special view variation display games that have been executed, and for example, the effect mode which continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

  In addition, when the next mode transition information is not the code without update (the result of A5401 is “N”), the game control device 100, the remaining number of rotations, which is the number of executable times of the special figure fluctuation display game until the change of the effect mode. Is updated by -1 (A5402), and it is determined whether or not the effect remaining number of revolutions has become 0 (A5403). If the effect remaining number of rotations is not zero (the result of A5403 is “N”), the effect mode information check process is ended. Also, when the effect remaining number of rotations becomes 0 (the result of A5403 is "Y"), that is, when changing the effect mode from the next special figure fluctuation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (A5404) The address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (A5405).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred, saves it in the effect mode number area in the RWM (A5406), and obtains the remaining effect rotation number (initial value) of the effect mode to be transferred. Then, the game is saved in the effect remaining rotation number area in the RWM (A5407), next mode shift information of the effect mode to shift is acquired, and saved in the next mode shift information area in the RWM (A5408). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (A5409), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (A5410). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (the result of A 5410 is “Y”), that is, if the state of probability has not changed, the rendering mode information check process is ended.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (the result of A5410 is “N”), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A5411 And effect command setting processing (A5412).
Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5414).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a high probability change frequency command corresponding to the high probability change frequency as an effect command (A5415), and executes an effect command setting process (A5416). Next, it is determined whether the new rendering mode is a left-strike mode (A5417), and if it is not a left-strapping mode (the result of A5417 is "N"), the rendering mode information check process is ended. If the mode is left-handed (the result of A5417 is "Y"), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as a rendering command (A5418), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A5419), the rendering mode End the information check process. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of giving notice of switching from before the specified number of revolutions of switching of the effect mode. As described above, by managing the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100, for example, control such as generating a specific reach can be performed only in a specific effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1 (A5124) in the special view display processing will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process transfer setting process 1 during fanfare / interval.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "3" which is a processing number relating to fanfare / interval processing (A5501), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5502).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 outputs a signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, 1 signal on big hit (output in big hit + small hit), 4 signal on big hit (output in big hit) external information Save to the output data area (A5503), signals about the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (eg, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state The signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5504). Note that, even during the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the common drawing, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal motorized combination 1 open extension state signal are always off. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (A5505), and a number with no time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (A5506). The general drawing low probability flag is saved (A5507).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 clears the variable symbol determination flag area (A5508), and turns off the game state display LED (third game state display unit) 59 provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The high probability notification flag area is cleared (A5509), and the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A5510). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A5511), and the special view fluctuation display executable in the high probability state Clear the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of games (A5512). Thus, the high probability state and the short time state (general power support state) are ended.

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves the effect mode 1 number in the effect mode number area (A5513), clears the effect remaining rotation speed area (A5514), and saves the no update code in the next mode transition information area. (A5515). Then, a signal relating to a right-handling instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5516), and the display LED (first gaming state display unit 57) during right-handing is lit. The game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the right-handed state (A5517), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is ended. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state (big hit state).

[Small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (A5134) in the special figure display process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process 1.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "7" for the small hit fanfare middle processing as the processing number (A5601), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5602).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A 5603), and the signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, 1 large hit signal ON ( Save the big hit + small hit))) in the external information output data area (A 5604), and save the signal related to the start of the small hit game (eg, special symbol 1 small hit signal on) in the test signal output data area (A5605).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 clears the special winning opening illegal prize number area (A5606), and saves the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A5607). Next, save the signal related to the right-handed command (the launch position designation signal 1 is on) in the test signal output data area (A5608), and turn on the right-handed display LED (first gaming state display unit 57). The number in the right-handed state is saved in the state display number 2 area (A5609), and the small hitting fanfare middle processing transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, details of the fanfare / in-interval process (A2611) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing a procedure of fanfare / during interval processing.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first updates the number of rounds (R) in the special gaming state by +1 (A5701), and prepares a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state (big hit state) as a presentation command (A5702) , Performs an effect command setting process (A5703).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets a special winning opening operation determination table (A5704), and acquires an open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number (A5705). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the special gaming state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (A5706). If the number of rounds is larger than the release switching determination value (the result of A5706 is “Y”), save the special opening for short opening (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A5707) If the number of rounds is equal to or less than the release switching determination value (the result of A5706 is "N"), the special opening game opening time (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5708).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets the processing number to “4” for processing during the opening of the special winning opening (A5709), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5710). After that, save the signal related to the opening start of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric combination 1 operation signal ON) in the test signal output data area (A5711), and save the number of winning on the special winning opening The information in the mouth count number area is cleared (A5712). Then, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5713), and the fanfare / interval processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, large winning opening opening information 1 (4R: all short opening), large winning opening opening information 2 (16R: all long opening), large winning opening as large winning opening opening information indicating a big hit pattern Opening information 3 (16R: 1 to 4R long opening, 5 to 16R short opening), large winning opening opening information 4 (4R: all long opening), large winning opening opening information 5 (16R: all long opening), large Prize opening opening information 6 (16R: 1 to 8R long opening, 9 to 16R short opening), large winning opening opening information 7 (16R: 1 to 4R long opening, 5 to 16R short opening) is set There is.

  Therefore, in the special winning opening operation determination table, the special winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value "0", the large winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value "16", the special winning opening The release information 3 data and the release switching determination value "4", the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the release switching determination value "4", the big winning opening release information 5 data and the opening switching determination value "16" The special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the special winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4”. Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, the open operation is performed such that the open operation is short open when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value.

[Big winning opening open processing]
Next, details of the special winning opening open process (A2612) in the special view game process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special winning opening open process of this embodiment.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the special gaming state being executed with the number of rounds upper limit value of the RWM upper limit number area A5901). Then, if it is not the final round (the result of A5901 is "N"), the special winning opening operation determination table is set (A5902), the open switching determination value corresponding to the special opening opening information is obtained (A5903), and special It is determined whether the number of rounds in the gaming state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (A5904).

  When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (result of A5904 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) to the special view game processing timer The game is saved in the area (A5905), an interval command relating to the interval between rounds is prepared as a rendering command (A5907), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A5910).

  When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value (result of A5904 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) to the special view game processing timer area Save (A5906), prepare an interval command as a rendering command (A5907), and execute rendering command setting processing (A5910).

  When it is the final round (the result of A5901 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the remaining ball processing time (for final) (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A5908), An ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared as a rendering command (A5909), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A5910).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets the processing number to “5” related to the special winning opening residual ball processing (A5911), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5912). Thereafter, off data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5913), and the special winning opening open processing is ended.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A2613) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special winning opening residual ball processing.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the special gaming state being executed with the number of rounds upper limit value of the RWM upper limit number area A6101).

  Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (the result of A6101 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 sets the special winning opening operation determination table (A6102), and corresponds to the special winning opening information. The release switching determination value to be set is acquired (A6103), and a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (A6104).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the number of rounds in the special gaming state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (A6105), and the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (A6105) As a result, the process proceeds to step A6109. If the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value (the result of A6105 is "N"), it is determined whether the special winning opening open information is a rank down effect type value (step A6106).

  Here, the rank down effect is a round continuation notification effect for notifying whether or not the big hit round continues, and an effect for notifying that the big hit round is not continued in the round continuation notification effect corresponds. Specifically, the large winning opening opening information showing the big hit pattern, large winning opening opening information 2 (16R: all long opening) and large winning opening opening information 3 (16R: 1 to 4 R is long opening, 5 to 16 R When any of the short opening) is selected, a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the big hit round, and a round continuation informing effect is executed at the 4Rth. If the large winning opening opening information is large winning opening opening information 2, round continuation is notified in the round continuation informing effect, the large winning opening is opened long opening also in the round after the 5R eyes, the large winning opening opening information is In the case of the large winning opening opening information 3, the round non-continuation is notified in the round continuation informing effect, the large winning opening will be opened in a short opening in the 5R and subsequent rounds.

  If the special winning opening open information is not a rank down effect value (the result of A6106 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 proceeds to the processing of step A6109. When the special winning opening information is a rank down effect value (the result of A6106 is “Y”), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 4R) (A6107). If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (the result of A6107 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A6109.

  In addition, when the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (the result of A6107 is “Y”), for example, when the number of rounds is 4R, the game control device 100 sets an interval time for rank down effect (for example, 3. 6) is set (A6108), and the process proceeds to step A6109. In addition, the number of special rounds is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 saves the interval time set in step A6104 or A6108 in the special figure game processing timer area (step A6109), and sets "3" which is a processing number related to the fanfare / interval processing. (A6110). Next, save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A6111), and test the signal related to the open end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) (for example, turn off the signal during special electric prize 1 operation) Save in the signal output data area (A6122), and finish the special winning opening residual ball processing.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the final round (result of A6101 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 saves the special view game mode flag storing the effect mode when the special result is derived. The flag is loaded from the area (A6112), the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the special winning opening opening information and the stop symbol pattern is set (A6113), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is selected. The game is saved in the game processing timer area (A6114).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets "6" as a process number related to the big hit end process (A6115), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6116). After that, clear the information of the large winning a prize opening count number territory which remembers the winning a prize to the special winning a prize opening (A6117), clear the information of the round number territory which remembers the round number of special gaming state (A6118) The information of the round number upper limit value area storing the upper limit value of the round number of the gaming state is cleared (A6119).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 clears the information of the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for upper round value determination of the round number (A6120), and the big winning combination storing the flag for the open information determination of the big winning opening Clear the information in the mouth opening information area (A6121) and set the signal related to the opening end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) (for example, turn off the signal during special electric combination 1 operation) to the test signal output data area Save (A6122) and finish the special winning opening residual ball processing.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end process (A2614) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the time reduction determination data is time reduction operation data (A6201). When it is not time saving operation data (result of A6201 is "N"), big hit end setting processing 1 is executed (A6202), when it is time saving operation data (result of A6201 is "Y"), big hit ending setting processing 2 Is executed (A 6203).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets the rendering mode information address table (A6204), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the rendering mode shift information set in the stop symbol setting process (especially A4009, A4109) at the start of fluctuation. Then (A6205), the effect mode number (effect mode number) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state (big hit state) is acquired and saved (A6206).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires and saves the effect remaining rotation speed (initial value) of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state (A6207), and the effect mode set after the end of the special game state The next mode transition information of is acquired and saved (A6208).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number (A6209), and saves the prepared probability information command as a rendering command in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A6210) And effect command setting processing (A6211).

  Here, the probability information command includes the probability state after the end of the special gaming state (big hit state), the presence or absence of time saving (general power support), and information of the effect mode. As the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands further including information of the rendering mode in any of “high probability / time short” and “high probability / no time short”. In the present embodiment, when the big hit is over, a definite change is always made (it becomes always the so-called ST state). Therefore, as a probability information command, "high probability · time reduction · rendering mode A", "high probability · time reduction · presentation mode There are B, "high probability, time reduction, rendering mode C", and "high probability, time reduction none, rendering mode A". In addition, although not used in this process, there are "low probability, no time saving, rendering mode A", "low probability, no time saving, rendering mode B", and "low probability, no time saving, rendering mode C".

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number as an effect command (A6212), and executes an effect command setting process (A6213). Then, a high probability change frequency command corresponding to the high probability change frequency is prepared as an effect command (A6214), and an effect command setting process is executed (A6215).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is time saving (general power support) after the big hit (A6216). If there is a time delay (general power support) (the result of A6216 is "Y"), the processing moves to step A6219. If there is no time reduction (general power support) (result of A6216 is "N"), a left-handed command notification command is prepared as a rendering command (A6217), rendering command setting processing is executed (A6218), and processing of step A6219 is performed. Transition.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes special processing routine processing transition setting processing 2 (A6219), and ends the big hit end processing.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 1 (A6202) in the big hit end process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 1.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves a signal relating to no time saving state (for example, the big hit 2 signal off) in the external information output data area (A6301), and a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time non saving state (for example, Special symbol 1 high probability state signal on, special symbol 2 high probability state signal on, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal off, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal off, normal symbol 1 high probability status signal Save) in the test signal output data area (A6302).

  Next, save the number with no time saving state in the gaming state display number area (A6303), save the common drawing low probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (A6304), and make special drawing in the special drawing game mode flag area. Save the high probability & time saving none flag (A6305). Thereafter, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number area (A6306), and the signal related to the left hitting instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6307) To turn off the right hitting display LED (the first gaming state display unit 57), save the number in the left hitting state in the gaming state display number 2 area (A6308), and end the big hit end setting process 1 .

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 2 (A 6203) in the big hit end process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 2.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves a signal (for example, 2 big hit signals on) regarding the start of the time saving state in the external information output data area (A6401). A signal relating to the start of the short time state is saved from inside the big hit and is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner. Then, a signal related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is on, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is on, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is on, the special symbol 2 fluctuation The time saving status signal is on, and the normal symbol 1 high probability status signal is on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6402).

  Next, save the number with time saving state in the gaming state display number area (A 6403), save the common drawing high probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (A 6404), and make special drawing in the special drawing game mode flag area. Save the high probability & short time flag (A6405). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number area (A6406), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended. In the case of the present embodiment, the right hitting mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right hitting mode is set from the big hit, the setting regarding the right hitting is not performed in the big hit end setting processing 2.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting process 2]
FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special view ordinary process transition setting process 2. The special view ordinary process shift setting process 2 is executed in step A6219 in the big hit end process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets “0” as a process number related to the special figure normal process (A6501), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6502).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal off, the big hit 3 signal off, the big hit 4 signal off) in the external information output data area (A6503). Save the signal about the end (for example, the condition device in operation signal off, the item continuous operation device in operation signal off, the special symbol 1 signal off and the special symbol 2 signal off) in the test signal output data area (A6504).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 clears the information of the time reduction determination flag area (A6505), clears the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit (A6506), and Clear the information (A6507). Then, the information on the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (A 6508), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (A 6509).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 clears the RWM discharge ball number area to 0 (A6510), and saves the segment data of the “00” discharge ball number display in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the discharge ball number display 66. (A6511). As a result, through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11), the number of discharged balls can be displayed as “00” in the discharged ball number display unit 66 at the end of the big hit.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 clears the acquired ball number area of RWM to 0 (A 6512), and sets the value of the segment color number area to an initial value (for example, corresponding to red) (A 6513). The segment data of "" is saved in the segment area (for example, red display area) corresponding to the color number (A6514). The segment area (for example, the green display area) not corresponding to the color number is cleared to 0. As a result, through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11), the pop-out rate display portion 67 can display the pop-out rate as “00” at the end of the big hit. After that, the special view processing shift setting process 2 ends.

  In the big hit state (special game state), the number of winning balls (i.e., the payout rate), which is the sum of the number of winning balls per 100 discharged balls, is very large. For this reason, at the end of the jackpot state, the discharged ball number area (thus, the discharged ball number) and the acquired ball number area (thus, the ball withdrawal rate) are cleared to 0, and the ball number obtained (i.e., the ball withdrawal rate) is accurate again. Start measuring. Further, at the end of the jackpot state, the discharged ball number display and the withdrawal rate display are reset to "00" display. However, since it is more accurate to measure the character ratio continuously from the power-on of the gaming machine 10, even after the end of the jackpot state, the ball number area acquired by character (the character ratio) is not cleared to zero. Then, the item ratio display is continuously displayed before and after the big hit without being reset.

  As described above, the processing of steps A6510 to A6514 is the number of discharged balls, the number of balls discharged (total number of balls won), the number of discharged balls, and the number of balls displayed at the time of big hit end (at the end of big hit). To set an initial value (here, 0 or "00").

[Small hit fanfare medium processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle process (A2615) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the procedure of small hit fanfare middle processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "8" for the small hit middle processing as the processing number (A6701), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A6702).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game in the special figure game processing timer area (A6703), and a signal regarding the start of the small hit operation (for example, The special motorized part 1 operating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A 6704). Next, in order to open the open / close door 39c of the special variation winning device 39, on data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6705).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 clears the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the number of winning to the large winning opening (A6706), and the small hitting middle control pointer area has a small hitting operation initial value (for example, "0"). ) (A6707), and the small hit fanfare medium end processing is ended.

[Small hit during processing]
Next, details of the small hit middle process (A2616) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the small hit middle process.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first loads the value of the small hit middle control pointer (A6801), and determines whether the loaded value is equal to or more than the small hit operation end value (for example, "6") (A6802) . If the loaded value is not equal to or less than the small hit operation end value (the result of A6802 is “N”), the small hit middle control pointer is updated by +1 (A6803), the small hit operation transition setting process is executed (A6804), small End processing during hit.

  On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting operation end value (the result of A6802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads a flag from the special view game mode flag save area (A6805), It is judged whether or not the flag is a flag related to the special figure height probability middle (A6806). Thereby, it is determined whether or not the small hit in the special map height probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the time saving state is in progress.

  When the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (the result of A6806 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “9” for the small hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (A6809). Also, if the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (result of A6806 is "N"), prepare a small hit end screen command as a rendering command (A6807) and execute rendering command setting processing (A A6808), “9” for the small hit residual ball processing is set as the processing number (A6809).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6810). Next, save the small ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A6811), save the off data in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A6812), and End the process.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting operation shift setting process (A 6804) in the small hitting medium process will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the small hitting operation shift setting process.

  The game control device 100 first executes branch processing in accordance with the control pointer (small hit middle control pointer) (A6901). If the control pointer is 0, 2, or 4, save the wait time (for example, 1500 msec) corresponding to the control pointer in the special view game processing timer area (A6902), and save the off data in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. (A6903), the small hit operation shift setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the control pointer is 1, 3 or 5, the game control apparatus 100 saves the special winning opening open time (for example, 200 msec) corresponding to the control pointer in the special figure game processing timer area (A 6904). The on data is saved in the mouth solenoid output data area (A6905), and the small hitting operation shift setting process is ended.

  Here, in the case of this embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 msec, the opening of 200 msec and the closing of 1500 msec are alternately performed, and the small hit middle control pointer is sequentially updated at the end of opening and at the end of closing. . Specifically, at the end of the first 200 ms opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 ms opening to the first 1500 ms closing), the small hit middle control pointer is updated to 0, and the first 1500 ms closing is performed. The control pointer is updated to 1 during the small hit at the end (that is, when switching from the first closing of 1500 msec to the opening of the second 200 ms) and the control pointer is updated to 2 during the small opening of the second 200 msec. The control pointer is updated to 3 at the end of the second 1500 ms closing, and the control pointer is updated to 4 at the end of the third 200 ms opening, and the small hits at the end of the third 1500 ms closing. The middle control pointer is updated to five. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 msec opening, the small hit middle control pointer is updated to 6, and the small hit state is ended after the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 msec and the small hit ending time of 100 msec thereafter. Therefore, since it is closed for 2000 msec after the fourth 200 msec opening, the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (A2617) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of a small hit residual ball processing procedure.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "10" for the small hit end process as the process number (A7201), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A7202).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the small hitting ending time (for example, 0.1 second) in the special figure game processing timer area (A7203), and a signal regarding the end of the small hitting operation (for example, special electric bonus 1) Save the operation signal (off signal) in the test signal output data area (A7204). Next, the information in the large winning opening count number area is cleared (A7205), the information in the small hit middle control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0 cleared) (A7206), and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hitting end process (A2618) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the small hitting end process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first loads a flag from the special figure game mode flag save area (A7301), and determines whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (A7302). If the loaded flag is not the flag related to the special figure high probability (the result of A7302 is "N"), the effect mode information address table is set (A7303), it is set at the time of fluctuation start (at the time of stop symbol setting) The address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information is acquired (A7304).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred, saves it in the effect mode number area in the RWM (A 7305), acquires the effect remaining rotation number of the effect mode to transfer, It saves in the effect remaining rotation speed area of (A7306), acquires the next mode transition information of the transition to the effect mode, and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A7307). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (A7308), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (A7309). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (the result of A7309 is “Y”), the process moves to a process of step A7319.

  When the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (the result of A7309 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares the prepared probability information command for the power failure recovery transmission command area. Save (A7310), and execute rendering command setting processing (A7311). Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number is prepared as an effect command (A7312), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7313). Further, a high probability change frequency command corresponding to the high probability change frequency is prepared as an effect command (A7314), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7315).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the new effect mode is the mode to hit the left (A7316), and if it is not the mode to hit the left (result of the A7316 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A7319. Do. In the case of the left-handed mode (the result of A7316 is “Y”), the left-handed command notification command is prepared as a rendering command (A7317), and after performing rendering command setting processing (A7318), step It transfers to the process of A7319.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads a flag from the special figure game mode flag save area (A7319), and determines whether the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure time short (during the short time state) (A7320). If the loaded flag is a flag relating to special figure time reduction (result of A7320 is “Y”), the process moves to a process of step A7323. Also, if the loaded flag is not the flag related to the special drawing time (the result of A7320 is "N"), save the signal related to the left hitting instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is off) in the test signal output data area ( A7321) Save the number in the left state in the game state display number 2 area in order to turn off the display LED (the first gaming state display section 57) in the right strike (A7322), shift to the processing of step A7323 Do.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” for special processing normally processing as the processing number (A7323), and saves the processing number in the special processing game processing number area (A7324). Save the signal related to the small hit end (for example, the big hit 1 signal off) in the external information output data area (A7325) and test the signal related to the small hit end (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal off) Save to the output data area (A7326).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 clears information on the variation symbol determination flag area (A7327), clears information on the effect mode transition information area (A7328), and clears information on the special view game mode flag save area. (A7329). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A7330), and the small hitting end processing is ended.

[Processing command setting process]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a procedure of effect command setting processing for setting an effect command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in the process executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A7401). Further, it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (A7402).

  When the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A7402 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 writes command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A7403).

  If the transmission buffer is full (the result of A7402 is “Y”), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A7401.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A7404), and determines whether the transmission buffer is full (A7405). If the transmission buffer is full (the result of A7405 is “Y”), the process returns to the process of step A7404.

  In addition, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A7405 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 writes the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A7406), and then sets the rendering command. End the process.

  As described above, by transmitting the effect command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced, and analysis of the effect command can be made difficult. In addition, the timing of command transmission can be advanced, and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300 as well, it is not necessary to capture a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 60 shows symbol variation control processing (A2620, A2622) in the special drawing game processing described above, and symbol variation control processing in the common drawing game processing described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol (the first special figure, the second special figure, etc.) or the normal symbol (the common figure) and setting the display data of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the variation control flag applied to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the common figure) is fluctuating (A7501, A7502). In the case of this embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621 and step A7614 The address for stop) and the address for display table 1 (for variation) are defined.

  The game control apparatus 100 acquires a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (A 7503) when the variation flag according to the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating (the result of A7502 is "Y"). ). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621 and step A7614.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the blink control timer to be controlled by -1 (A 7504), determines whether the blink control timer after the update is 0 (A 7505), and the blink control timer after the update When it is not 0 (the result of A7505 is "N"), the display data which corresponds to the value of the fluctuation design number territory of control object is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A 7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  If the blinking control timer after updating is 0 (the result of A7505 is "Y"), the blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target blinking timer area is saved (A7506), and the fluctuation symbol number of the control object Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A 7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation flag concerning the symbol to be controlled is not changing (result of A7502 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled. (A 7509). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621 and step A7614. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  As the blinking control timer initial value saved in step A7506, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the blinking control timer initial value. The blinking control timer initial value is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the fluctuation time.

  Further, the corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variation symbol number reaches the upper limit value by updating the variation symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the variation symbol number is set to 0, and the variation symbol number is 0 to 0 (variation symbol number upper limit judgment value -1 It is updated sequentially in the range of). In steps A7508 and A7511, display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variation symbol number is set to be acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the variation symbol number upper limit judgment value. Will be repeatedly displayed.

  By defining the blinking control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed as described above, the interval and the display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are round The number of updates to be made can be set for each game.

[Puppet game processing]
Next, the details of the regular game processing (A1310) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the common-play game process. In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a, control of the entire processing concerning the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of common drawing, and the like are performed.

  The game control device 100 first executes gate switch monitoring processing for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). The details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 executes a general prize winning switch monitoring process of monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A7602). The details of the Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the −1 by subtracting 1 by subtracting 1 from the common game processing timer (A7603). Note that the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the common-play game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

  If the value of the common-play game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, if the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 A common drawing game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding processing is set in the register (A7605).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the common drawing game processing number based on the set common drawing game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call according to the common drawing game processing number is made, and a game branching process corresponding to the common drawing game processing number is executed (A7607).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of change of the common view change display game, and sets the start of change of the common view change display game and sets the effect, The common drawing routine processing for setting the information necessary for performing the common drawing fluctuation processing is executed (A7608). The details of the common drawing routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game processing number is “1” in step A 7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a general-diagram changing processing that performs setting of information necessary for performing the general-diagram display processing ((1) A7609). The details of the general drawing variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "2" at step A7607, if the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit, the game control apparatus 100 performs the common power according to whether or not the time saving state is in progress. The general drawing display processing is executed to set the open time, set the information necessary for performing the common processing per processing (A 7610). The details of the process of displaying the common drawing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "3" at step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 generally continues processing during a general drawing, or performs setting of information necessary for performing a general electric residual ball processing, etc. The process is executed during each drawing (A7611). The details of the in-progress process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, when the game processing number is “4” in step A 7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes generalization residual ball processing to set information necessary for performing end processing per common drawing (A 7612) ). Details of the common drawing residual ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game processing number is “5” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes the end processing per common drawing, which performs setting of information necessary for performing the common processing (A7608). (A7613). Details of the end processing per common drawing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a common drawing fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuation of the normal symbol by the common drawing indicator 53 (A7614). Thereafter, the symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the common drawing display 53 is executed (A7615), and the common drawing game process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value of the common-play game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is "N"), that is, if the time is not up, the game control apparatus 100 executes the processing of step A7614 and subsequent steps.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed at step A7601 in the common-play game process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). Then, if there is an input on the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not it is a game state in which the player strikes the right (A7702). The game state to hit right is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a short time state (general power support state). If it is in the gaming state in which the player strikes the right (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process shifts to the processing of step A7705. If the game state is not right-handed (the result of A7702 is "N"), a left-handed command notification command (left-handed command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed command notification command executes, using the display device 41 or the like, a notification (warning) instructing to hit the left.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 acquires the common drawing reservation number and determines whether the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) (A 7705). When the common drawing reserve number is less than the upper limit (the result of A 7705 is “Y”), the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the common drawing reserve number by +1 (A 7706), and corresponds to the updated common drawing reserve number. The address of the random number storage area is calculated (A7707). The random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (A7708), and the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is ended.

  On the other hand, if there is no input to the gate switch 34a (result of A7701 is "N"), or if it is determined that the number of general drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is " N "), end the gate switch monitoring process.

[Puden prize winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the routine power winning switch monitoring process (A7602) in the routine game processing will be described. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the routine power winning switch monitoring process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the regular drawing is in a hit state, that is, whether the regular drawing change display game is in a hit state and the normal change winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of opening operations. (A7801). Then, if it is in the middle of the drawing (if the result of A7801 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (A7802). If there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "Y"), the count number of the common charge counter is updated by +1 (A7803).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the updated count value of the common charge counter has reached the upper limit (for example, 6) (A 7804). Then, when the count number reaches the upper limit (the result of A7804 is "Y"), the control pointer area is hit during the common drawing, and the value (for example, 4) of operation completion is saved (A7805).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the loaded pointer in the control pointer area during the hit per drawing (A 7805). Finally, the general drawing game processing timer is cleared (A 7806), and the general electric winning switch monitor processing ends. In other words, if there is a general prize winning above the upper limit in the hit state of the common drawing, then hit the common processing control pointer area per common drawing at that point and save the end value, and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 closes. It is made for the hit state of the common drawing to be finished halfway.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control apparatus 100 is not in the region of a drawing (the result of A7801 is "N"), it is determined that the start opening 2 switch 37a is not input (the result of A7802 is "N") Or, if it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit (the result of A7804 is “N”), the routine power prize switch monitoring process is ended.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (A 7608) in the common drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the common drawing routine processing.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether the number of lay figures held is 0 (A7901). If the common drawing reservation number is 0 (the result of A7901 is “Y”), “0” is set as the processing number for shifting to the common drawing normal processing (A7921), and the processing number is common drawing game processing Save in the number area (A7922). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (A7923), and the routine drawing routine processing is ended.

  In addition, when the number of block diagrams reserved number is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), the game control device 100 loads a random number from the random number storing area per block diagram of RWM (for number of suspension 1), RWM The symbol random number is loaded from the symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common drawing of the symbol (A7902). Then, the common random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the common drawing random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (A7903). Furthermore, whether or not the probability that the hit result will be hit in the common drawing variation display game is during the common drawing high probability (high probability state) higher than normal, ie, it is a short time state (general power support state) It is determined (A7904). Note that the probability per spread in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per spread in the low probability is 0/251.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251), which is the lower limit judgment value in the general drawing low probability, when the general drawing high probability is not in progress (the result of A7904 is "N") (A7905) If the standard drawing high probability is in progress (the result of A7904 is “Y”), a high probability lower limit judgment value (1 in this case) which is a lower judgment value in the general drawing high probability is set (A7906) Transfer to processing.

  The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or more than the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7907). Note that the upper limit judgment value here is common to the medium and low probability. If the hit random number is equal to or more than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "Y"), that is, if it is a loss, the process moves to the processing of step A7909. If the per-random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "N"), it is determined whether the per-random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7908).

  If the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A 7908 is “Y”), that is, if the hit random number is out, the game control apparatus 100 saves the shift information in the hit flag area (A 7909). Further, the out-of-order stop symbol number is set as the common view stop symbol number (A7910), the out-of-shape symbol information is saved in the common view stop symbol information area (A7911), and the process proceeds to step A7915.

  If the random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A7908 is "N"), that is, in the case of a hit, the game control device 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7912) and loads the hit symbol random number. The corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A7913), the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information area (A7914), and the process proceeds to step A7915. In addition, there may be several types of hit stop symbols.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the common drawing stop symbol area (A7915), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7916), shifts the random number storage area per common drawing (A7917) After the empty area after shift is cleared to 0 (A7918), the number of general drawing reservations is updated by -1 (A7919).

  That is, when the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 is executed, the rankings of the common drawing reservation numbers 2 to 4 held by common drawing reservation number 1 or later are advanced one by one. As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to the number 3 for general drawing reservation It will be done. Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 of the random number storage area per common drawing is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 executes the processing shift setting processing during the general drawing fluctuation (A7920), and ends the general drawing normal processing. In addition, the processing shift setting processing during the general drawing fluctuation will be described later.

[Processing setting setting process during general drawing fluctuation]
FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process shift setting process during the common drawing fluctuation. The processing shift setting processing during the common drawing fluctuation is executed in step A7920 in the common drawing routine processing shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets “1” as a processing number for shifting to processing during general drawing fluctuation (A8101), and saves the processing number in the general drawing game processing number area (A8102).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves the common drawing fluctuation time (for example, 500 msec) in the common drawing game processing timer area (A 8103). The spread map fluctuation time here is common to the spread map high probability and the spread map low probability. Save the signal related to the start of the common drawing fluctuation display game (normally, signal 1 fluctuation is on) in the test signal output data area (A8104), and draw the fluctuation flag showing that the common drawing fluctuation display game is changing. It is saved in the figure fluctuation control flag area (A8105). Then, save the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the common drawing indicator, in the common drawing blinking control timer area (A8106), and change the initial value to the symbol number area in the common drawing fluctuation Here, “0” indicating a blank symbol is saved (A 8107), and then the processing shift setting processing during common drawing variation is ended.

[During processing of common map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general drawing fluctuation processing (A7609) in the common drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the processing during common use variation.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the processing number to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the processing during the general drawing display (A8301), and saves the processing number in the common drawing game processing number area (A8302). After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves the common drawing display time (for example, 0.6 seconds) which is the display time of the common drawing fluctuation display game result in the common drawing indicator in the common drawing game processing timer area (A8303) .

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal (normally, the signal during the symbol 1 fluctuation is turned off) regarding the end of fluctuation of the common drawing in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the common drawing fluctuation control flag area (A8305), and the common drawing fluctuation middle process is ended.

[Process while displaying a common map]
Next, the details of the common drawing display processing (A7610) in the common drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing a procedure of processing during display of a common drawing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first loads a hit flag (hit information or out information) set in the ordinary drawing routine processing (A8401), and clears the RWM hit flag area (A8402). Then, it is determined whether the hit information is set in the loaded hit flag (A8403).

  When the hit information is not set in the hit flag (the result of A8403 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the process number for shifting to the common processing routine (A8414). The process number is saved in the common drawing game process number area (A8415). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8416), and the processing during the routine drawing display is ended.

  On the other hand, when the hit information is set to the hit flag (result of A8403 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 sets the in-hit processing setting table (A8404) and corresponds to the common drawing stop symbol information. The hit start pointer value (here, 0, 2, or 4) is obtained and saved in the control pointer area during the hit (A 8405). Next, a common power program open time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 msec) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (A8406). By the above processing, the opening mode of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time state is set, and for example, the opening operation can be performed three times.

  Subsequently, the gaming control apparatus 100 sets "3" as a processing number for shifting to processing during a common drawing hit (A8407), and saves the processing number in the common drawing game processing number area (A8408). After that, save the signal related to the hit of the common drawing fluctuation display game (Normal signal is on during 1 per symbol) and the signal related to the start of the common power operation (Normal signal is on during the operation of electric character 1) in the test signal output data area. (A8409). Further, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the common solenoid, on data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (A8410).

  Further, the game control device 100 clears the information of the common charge count number area storing the winning number to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (A8411), and the winning number to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the general monitoring period. Clear the information on the area for the number of unfair prize winning prizes to be stored (A 8412). Finally, a flag for defining the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal change winning a prize apparatus 37 is saved in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8413), and the processing of the common drawing is ended.

[Every time per popular map]
Next, the details of the common drawing in-game processing (A7611) in the common drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of per-diagram processing.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first loads and prepares the control pointer during the normal drawing per shot (A8601), and the value of the control pointer during the common drawing per window is the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the general drawing (A8602).

  Then, if the value of the control pointer during the common drawing does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit area during the common drawing (the result of A8602 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 performs the control during the common drawing. The pointer is updated by +1 (A8603). Further, the routine operation shift setting process is executed (A8604), and the routine is ended during the routine. In addition, the details of the routine operation shift setting process will be described later.

  In addition, if the value of the control pointer during the common drawing reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit area during the common drawing (the value of the end of the hit) (the result of A8602 is “Y”) The general operation shift setting process is executed (A8604) without executing the process of updating (+1) the middle processing control pointer area in step A8603 and the middle processing in the common drawing end.

[Puppet operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the general-purpose power transition setting process (A8604) in the middle-round process will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the routine operation transition setting process. The routine operation shift setting process is a process of controlling the drive of the routine power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and branches the process according to the value of the control pointer.

  The game control device 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (A8701). If the value of the control pointer is either 0 or 2, the process proceeds to step A8702 to control the closing of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, so the closing of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 corresponding to the control pointer The subsequent wait time (for example, 200 msec) is saved in the common game processing timer area (A8702).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 sets the off data in the common power solenoid output data area to turn off the common power solenoid 37c (A8703), and ends the common power operation transition setting process.

  Further, when the value of the control pointer is either 1 or 3, the game control device 100 corresponds to the control pointer in order to shift to the processing of step A8704 and control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The normal power game open time (for example, 1700 msec) which is the open time of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A8704). Further, in order to turn on the common voltage solenoid 37c, ON data is set in the common voltage solenoid output data area (A8705), and the common power operation transition setting process is ended.

  Furthermore, when the value of the control pointer is any of 4, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A8706 and terminates the control for opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and performs the general electric power remaining ball processing (A7612) In order to execute step 4, "4" is set as the processing number (A 8706), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (A 8707).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves the routine charge residual ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the regular game processing timer area (A8708). Thereafter, the off data is saved in the power solenoid output data area in order to set the power solenoid 37c to off (A8709), and the power shift operation setting process is ended.

[Puden residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the general game residual ball processing (A7612) in the common drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the routine charge residual ball processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a processing number “5” related to the end processing per common drawing (A8901), and saves the processing number in the common drawing game processing number area (A8902). After that, the common drawing ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (A8903).

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the completion of the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the signal during the normal electric character 1 operation is off) in the test signal output data area (A8904). Subsequently, the common charge count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is cleared (A8905), and further, the control pointer area in the common drawing is cleared (A8906). Thereafter, the routine charge residual ball processing is finished.

[End processing per popular map]
Next, the details of the end-of-round-drawing processing (A7613) in the common-play game processing will be described. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the end processing per common drawing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a process number "0" related to the ordinary drawing normal process (A9101), and further saves the process number in the ordinary drawing game process number area (A9102). Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of hit of the common drawing fluctuation game (normally, the signal is off during one per symbol) is saved in the test signal output data area (A9103).

  Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a flag (in fraud monitoring period flag) defining the fraud monitoring period of the normal change winning a prize device 37 in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (A9104), and thereafter, processing per finish drawing Finish.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the segment LED editing process. In the segment LED editing process, the special view 1 reserve display 54, the special view 2 reserve display 55, the general drawing reserve display 56, the first gaming state display unit 57, and the second gaming state display provided in the collective display device 50. The setting related to the driving of the segment LED constituting the unit 58, the third gaming state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 is performed.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates the blink control timer by +1 (A9201), and determines whether it is an output on timing (A9202). When the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1, it is determined that the output on timing is reached. In the present embodiment, since the specific bit is bit 5, it is possible to create a blinking cycle of 128 ms (see FIG. 2B).

  If the game control device 100 has output on timing (the result of A9202 is "Y"), it sets general drawing reservation number display table 1 (A9203), and if it is not output on timing (the result of A9202 is "N") The common drawing reservation number display table 2 is set (A9204), display data corresponding to the common drawing reservation number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the common drawing reservation display 56 (lamps D15 and D16) (A9205). If the number of reservations is 0 to 2, the display data will be the same in both tables of the number of general-purpose drawings suspension display table 1 and 2, so the general-image suspension display 56 does not blink, but if the number of reservations is 3 to 4, Since the display data of the figure holding number display table 1 and the display data of the common drawing holding number display table 2 are different, the common drawing hold display 56 blinks (see FIG. 2B).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the output on timing is reached (A9206). If the output on timing is set (result of A9206 is "Y"), the special figure 1 pending number display table 1 is set (A9207), and if the output on timing is not set (result of A9206 is "N"), the special figure 1 pending The number display table 2 is set (A9208), display data corresponding to the special drawing 1 reservation number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the special drawing 1 reservation display 54 (lamps D11 and D12) (A9209).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the output on timing is reached (A9210). If the output on timing is set (result of A9210 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation number display table 1 is set (A9211), and if the output on timing is not set (result of A9210 is "N") The number display table 2 is set (A9212), display data corresponding to the special drawing 2 reservation number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the special drawing 2 reservation display 55 (lamps D13, D14) (A9213).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 sets a round display LED display table in which the display mode in the round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D7) is defined (A9214), and acquires display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer Then, the image data is saved in the segment area of the round display unit 60 (A9215).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display mode of the second game state display unit 58 (lamp D 9), the third game state display unit 59 (lamp D 17), etc. A9216). Further, display data corresponding to the gaming state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area of each gaming state display unit (A9217).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 sets the gaming state display table 2 in which the display mode of the first gaming state display section 57 (the lamp D8) is defined (A9218). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 57 (A9219). Thereafter, the segment LED editing process is ended.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process performed in the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring process. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and the start or the end of fraud notification is set.

  In the gaming control apparatus 100, the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is turned on, ie, abnormal, from the state of the detection signal which is output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2). It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (A9301).

  When the magnet sensor is on (the result of A9301 is "Y"), that is, when the game control device 100 detects an abnormal magnetism, it increments the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the detection period of the abnormal magnetism by +1. After updating (A9302), it is determined whether the timer has timed out (A9303).

  The game control apparatus 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (the result of A9303 is “Y”), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a fixed period ( A9304) The magnet fraud alert timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud alert timer area (A9305).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a command of magnet informing notification as a rendering command (A9306), and prepares a magnet injustice occurrence flag indicating that a magnet injustice has occurred as a magnet injustice flag (A9307). Furthermore, it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (A9313). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously on for a predetermined period (for example, eight interrupts) set by the magnet fraud monitoring timer, it is determined that an abnormality occurs.

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (result of A9301 is "N"), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer. (A9308). Then, if the magnet fraud notification timer defining the notification time of the magnet fraud is not 0, -1 is updated (A 9309). The minimum value of the magnet fraud alert timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is 0 (A9310). Also in the case where the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (the result of A9303 is “N”), the processing shifts to the processing of step A9309.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A9310 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, the game control apparatus 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process.

  In addition, when the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is 0 (the result of A9310 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is a period for fraud alert If the informing notification is not performed from the beginning or the command of the magnet informing notification end is prepared as an effect command (A9311).

  Further, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet fraud release flag as the magnet fraud flag (A9312), and determines whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A9313).

  Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A9313 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. On the other hand, if the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A9313 is "N"), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (A9314), and the rendering command setting is made. Execute the process (A9315). Thereafter, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing a procedure of board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is judged based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) of the game board, and the start and the end of the fraud notification are set.

  In the gaming control apparatus 100, the radio wave sensor 62 is turned on from the state of the detection signal which is output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 121. It is determined whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (A9401). If the radio wave sensor is on (the result of A9401 is “Y”), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the radio wave fraud alert timer is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area ( A9402).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a command of board radio wave informing notification as a rendering command (A9403), and prepares a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag indicating that a board radio wave fraud has occurred as a board radio wave fraud flag (A9404). Further, it is determined whether the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region (A 9409). That is, unlike the case of the magnetic fraud, in the case of the radio wave fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (result of A9401 is "N"), that is, when the abnormal radio wave is not detected, the game control apparatus 100 defines the radio wave informing timer for defining the notification time of the radio wave injustice. If is not 0, -1 is updated (A9405). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is 0 (A9406). If the value of the radio wave injustice timer is not 0 (the result of A9406 is "N"), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave improper monitoring process is ended.

  Further, when the value of the radio wave informing timer is 0 (the result of A9406 is “Y”), that is, the time is up or the time is already up, and the game control apparatus 100 is a period of informing of fraud. If the informing notification has not been performed from the beginning, the radio wave informing notification end command is prepared as a rendering command (A9407). Further, a board radio wave fraud release flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (A9408), and it is determined whether the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region (A9409).

  Then, when the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (the result of A 9409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. If the values do not match (the result of A 9409 is “N”), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (A 9410), and rendering command setting processing is executed (A 9411). After that, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is ended.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the external information editing process. FIG. 75A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 75B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, information based on the monitoring result in payout command transmission process (A1305), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (A1308), magnet fraud monitoring process (A1312), and board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313) Information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or a game arcade internal control device or a test shot test device is created and set in an output buffer.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9501). If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9501 is “N”), it is determined whether the main body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502). If the main frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9502 is "N"), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), the off data of security signal is external information output data Save to area (A9504).

  If a glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9501 is “Y”), or if a main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9502 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 is a door and a door. The on data of the frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

  After steps A9504 and A9506, if the security signal control timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates −1 (A9507), and it is determined whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time is up or not). It judges (A9508). As the initial value of the security signal control timer, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch or the like (A1029 of the main processing). Then, the security signal control timer is clocked from the time of RAM initialization.

  If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 saves the on data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9509), and shifts to the processing of step A9510. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). When the magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag region, it can be determined that the magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9510 is “N”), it is further determined whether board radio fraud is occurring (A9511). When the board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio wave fraud is occurring.

  When the board radio wave irregularity is not occurring (the result of A9511 is “N”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (A9512). If frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A 9512 is “N”), it is further determined whether a general electric power fraud is occurring (A 9513). If the common use fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether a big winning opening fraud is occurring (A9514). It should be noted that if the incorrect winning occurrence flag for the special winning opening is saved in the incorrect flag area, it can be determined that a special winning opening injustice is occurring. If the special winning opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is "N"), the off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9515).

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 generates a frame radio wave irregularity when a magnet fraud is occurring (result of A9510 is “Y”) and a board radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A9511 is “Y”) Medium (if the result of A9512 is "Y"), if the general electric power fraud is occurring (the result of A9513 is "Y"), or if the big winning opening fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is " Y "), save the on data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9516), and save the on data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (A9517). By setting the on data of the security signal, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer).

  After steps A9515 and A9517, the game control apparatus 100 executes main prize ball signal editing processing for setting information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out (A9518). Details of the main prize ball signal editing process will be described later. Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 executes start opening signal editing processing for editing the winning combination signal of the start opening (A9519). Details of the starting opening signal editing process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game, if it is not 0, it updates -1 (A9520). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A 9521). When the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is 0 (the result of A 9521 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is external information output data Save to the area (A9522), and complete the external information editing process.

  Further, when the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not 0 (the result of A 9521 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 sets the on data of the symbol determination frequency signal to the external information. The file is saved in the output data area (A9523), and the external information editing process is ended.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A9518) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main prize ball signal editing process. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs, to an external device, a main prize ball signal generated each time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (here 10). It is a process.

  If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, the gaming control apparatus 100 first updates −1 (A9601). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the main winning ball signal output control timer is 0 (A9602).

  When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A9602 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 further determines whether the number of times of main prize ball signal output is 0 or not. (A9603).

  Then, when the main prize ball signal output number is not 0 (the result of A9603 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball signal output number by -1 (A9604), and the main prize ball signal output The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved in the control timer area (A9605).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves on data for turning on the main winning ball signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A 9607), and ends the main winning ball signal editing process. Also, if the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (the result of A9603 is “Y”), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. The main prize ball signal editing process is ended (A9608).

  On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9602 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period or not. Is determined (A9606). Here, that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 msec).

  When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on interval (the result of A9606 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs on data for turning on the main prize ball signal to the external information of RWM. Save to the data area (A 9607). Also, when the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (result of A9606 is "N"), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is RWM external information output data After saving in the area (A 9608), the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

[Starting mouth signal editing process]
Next, details of the starting opening signal editing process (A9519) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the starting opening signal editing process. The start opening signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates −1 if the starting opening signal output control timer is not 0 (A9701). The minimum value of the starting opening signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is 0 (A9702).

  If the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A9702 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the number of times of starting opening signal output is 0 (A9703). Then, when the number of start opening signal outputs is not 0 (the result of A9703 is "N"), the number of start opening signal outputs is updated by -1 (A9704), and the start opening signal output control in the start opening signal output control timer area The timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved (A 9705).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves on data for turning on the starting opening signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A9707), and ends the starting opening signal editing process.

  In addition, when the number of start opening signal outputs is 0 (the result of A9703 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs the external data of the RWM to the off data for turning off the start opening signal for the external device. The data is saved in the data area (A9708), and the start opening signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9702 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period or not. (A9706). In addition, that a starting opening signal output control timer is in an output ON area is that the value of a starting opening signal output control timer is more than predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

  When the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on interval (the result of A9706 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 turns on the starting opening signal ON data to the external information output data area of RWM. (A9707), and the start opening signal editing process is ended.

  In addition, when the starting opening signal output control timer is not in the output on section (result of A9706 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets off data for turning off the starting opening signal for the external device to RWM. The external information output data area is saved (A 9708), and the starting opening signal editing process is ended.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which production control device 300 performs with the program for production control is explained.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main process performed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (effect microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the sign (number) of the step is represented as "B ****".

  When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (B1001). Next, initialization of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 is executed (B1002, B1003), and an interrupt is permitted (B1004). When the interruption is permitted, it becomes possible to execute the command reception interruption process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100.

  Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B1005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B1006). Then, an initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears WDT (watch dock timer) (B1008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initialization (B1002) and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a predetermined period, the WDT times up and the CPU 311 is reset.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B1009). Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process is executed to receive operations (operations of operation means such as the effect button 25) such as changing the brightness of the LED or liquid crystal, volume, etc. by the player or game shop (hall) person concerned (B1010). Also, in the hall / player setting mode, the player can customize the display and effects on the display device 41.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process of executing addition and clearing of effect points (B1011). For example, information on effect points is processed so that effect points are added by performing effects or operations to be added to effect points, and effect points can be carried over to the next game, for example. And the like can be displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating random numbers such as effect random numbers (B1012), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process (B1013). Details of the reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content (effect) to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or sets the rendering to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer The process is executed (B1014). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within the frame period 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 msec). Then, preparation for drawing on the display frame buffer is completed, and setting for ending drawing command preparation is executed (B1015).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether it is the frame switching timing (B1015). When it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B1016 is "N"), the processing of B1016 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes, and when it is the frame switching timing (the result of B1016 is "Y") The screen drawing is instructed (B1017). Since the frame period in the present embodiment is 1/30 second, frame switching is performed when, for example, periodic V blank (image update) every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period) is executed twice. . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 seconds.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B1018).

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) formed of an LED or the like (B1019). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is performed.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling the effect device (panel effect device 44) such as a motorized product driven by a motor and a solenoid (B1020). In the movable body control process, for example, a solenoid is driven to execute a bonus game operation presentation.

  Then, when the process of B1020 described above is finished, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B1008. Thereafter, the processing from B1008 to B1020 is repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, details of the received command check process (B1013) in the above-described main process (FIG. 78) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reception command check process performed by the effect control device 300.

  In order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of command receptions (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). If the command reception number is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control apparatus 100 (the result of B 1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the reception command check process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the number of received commands is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 receives the command reception counter of the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the receive command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, data is not overwritten even if a new command is received during copying.

  Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command readout index by +1 (adds 1) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to be able to store up to 32 received commands. The received command is stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31. Here, the received command is read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that at the timing when the copying to the analysis command area is completed, the storage area of the reception command buffer corresponding to the read command reading index is cleared.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether the copy of the command reception number loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N “), Repeat the processing of steps B1104 to B1106.

  When the effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, analysis of the received command is separately performed in the command area for analysis. When the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always securing a free area in the reception command buffer without performing analysis directly, it is possible to prepare for mass reception of commands.

  Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command contents of the analysis command area (B1107) and analyzes the contents. Processing is executed (B1108) Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to Fig. 80. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). It is judged whether the analysis of the command for the number of received command loaded in is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the processing from step B1107 to B1110 is performed. repeat. If the analysis is completed (the result of B 1110 is “Y”), the reception command check process is ended.

[Receive command analysis process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 79) described above will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as the MODE portion and the lower byte as the ACTION portion (ACT portion) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE part (MODE command) and an ACTION part (ACTION command), and is usually transmitted continuously from the MODE part indicating the type of command. Ru. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether it is a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type) which can be taken by the MODE section indicating the type of command. Then, if the MODE part is in the normal range (the result of B 1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION part is in the normal range (B 1203). That is, it is determined whether it is a value (value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific rendering instruction or the like). Then, if the ACTION part is in the normal range (the result of B 1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B 1204). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION part is a possible value of the command of the type specified by the MODE part. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B 1204 is “Y”), command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B 1205.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE section is within the range of the fluctuation system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decoration special symbol, and includes variation commands (A4608 and A4609). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a variable system command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable system command process is executed (B1206), and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a change system command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is in the range of a big hit system command (B1207). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to effects during a jackpot, for example, fanfare command (A5116), round command (A5702), interval command (A5907), It is an ending command (A5909) or the like. Then, if the MODE section indicates a big hit system command (the result of B 1207 is “Y”), the big hit system command process is executed (B 1208), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a big hit system command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is in the range of the symbol system command (B1209). The symbol system commands include decoration special drawing commands (A4018, A4112) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, if the MODE section indicates a symbol system command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol system command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a symbol system command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of a one-shot system command (B1211). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a single-shot system command (the result of B 1211 is “Y”), single-shot system command processing is executed (B 1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a command (A2323 in FIG. 18) relating to the number of discharged balls, a command (A2308 in FIG. 18) corresponding to the payout rate (number of balls obtained), and a command A2317) in FIG. 18 may be received as a rendering command (single-shot system command), and in single-shot system command processing, display setting processing may be performed to display the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio. In addition, the effect control device 300 may back up (store) the number of balls discharged, the ball withdrawal rate, and the feature ratio in the FeRAM 323 capable of holding stored contents even at the time of a power failure.

  Besides, in the one-shot system command processing, the effect control device 300 executes, for example, the following processing. When the MODE section represents a command for RAM initialization, a RAM initialization setting process is performed to notify the RAM initialization and the like. When the MODE section represents a command at the time of power failure recovery or a customer waiting demo command, a power failure restoration setting process for power failure restoration and a customer waiting demonstration setting process for displaying a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41 etc. . When the MODE section indicates the decoration special drawing 1 reservation number command and the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command, the special drawing 1 holding information setting process and the special drawing 2 holding information setting process are executed. When the MODE unit represents a probability information command, probability information setting processing is executed. When the MODE section indicates an error / illegal command, an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling an error or a fraud is executed. Examples of error / illegal commands include a fraud occurrence command (A2108), a fraud release command (A2116), a state off command (A2404), and a state on command (A2407). When the MODE unit represents a command for effect mode switching, the effect mode switching setting process is executed.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B 1211 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the symbol system command read ahead (B 1213) . The pre-reading symbol system command includes the pre-reading stop symbol command (A3014) described above. Then, if the MODE section indicates a pre-reading symbol system command (the result of B 1213 is “Y”), pre-reading symbol system command processing is executed (B 1214), and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch symbol system command (the result of B 1213 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the prefetch variation system command (B 1215) ). The prefetch variation system command includes the above-described prefetch variation pattern command (A3018). Then, if the MODE portion indicates the prefetch change command (the result of B 1215 is “Y”), the prefetch change command process is executed (B 1216), and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch change system command (result of B1215 is “N”), the effect control device 300 can receive an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode) Because there is a problem, the reception command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is not within the normal range (the result of B1202 is “N”), if the ACTION part is not within the normal range (the result of B1203 is “N”), or the ACTION part for the MODE part is not the correct combination ( The result of B 1204 is “N”), and the received command analysis process is ended.

[Example of layout of display screen]
FIG. 81 is a view showing a layout example of a display screen (display unit) of the display device 41. As shown in FIG.

  The display screen of the display device 41 is provided with a discharged ball number display portion 691 for displaying the number of discharged balls, a payout rate display portion 692 for displaying the payout rate, and a character product ratio display portion 693 for displaying the character ratio. . In FIG. 81, values of 57, 36, and 59.3 are displayed for the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio.

  In addition, even if the number of balls discharged, the rate of balls out, and the character ratio are displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 at any time, for example, an error message (glass frame opening error, In addition to the display of the front frame opening error), the number of discharged balls, the ball withdrawal rate, and the feature ratio may be displayed.

  In addition, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010) for accepting an operation by a player or the like, the number of balls discharged, the payout rate, or the symbol ratio is switched by selection by the player or the like; It may be possible to select which of the payout rate and the item ratio to be displayed. In addition, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010), it may be possible to select whether the display ball number is to be counted down or to be counted up by the display device 41 according to the selection by the player or the like. The selection may be made by displaying an option on the display device 41 and operating the operation means such as the effect button 25 by the player.

  Furthermore, during the customer waiting demonstration, the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the feature ratio on the display device 41 may be hidden. In addition, during the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, the latest (latest) number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the feature ratio may be displayed, but in this case, the display size is displayed only during the customer waiting demonstration. If it is made larger than the other cases, it can appeal to the shopkeepers who are not playing games.

  The display screen of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610a, right area 610b, middle area 610c), a first special symbol in the left area 610a, and a second special symbol in the right area 610b. In the middle area 610c, the third special symbol is variably displayed (in FIG. 81, the stop symbol is displayed). In addition, although the discharge ball number display part 691, the payout rate display part 692, and the character ratio display part 693 are provided above the fluctuation display area 610, it is not limited to this.

  Also, the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio may be hidden or reduced in display size when it interferes with variable display of the variable display area 610 or other effects on the display device 41. It may be displayed or the display size may be increased only when the variation display is stopped and the stop symbol is displayed.

  Similarly, in the plurality of variable display areas 615 in the lower right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, the three decorative reduced designs (special symbols smaller than the decorative special symbol) are variably displayed. When a movie-based reach effect or the like is performed at the center of the display screen, the decorative reduced symbol may be variably displayed in the variation display area 615. Also, in the variable display area 615, the ornament reduced design may be constantly displayed in a variable manner. The variable display area 615 is commonly used in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. The large decorative special symbol of the variable display area 610 and the small special symbol of the variable display area 615 may be similar or completely different.

  The hold display 633 (starting memory display) displayed on the hold display unit 630 (starting memory display unit) is a special drawing 1 holding information set from the decoration special drawing 1 holding number command and a decoration special drawing 2 holding number command The screen is drawn based on the set special-image 2 hold information (B1014-B1017). The hold display 633 shows a hold (starting memory) related to the special view variable display game before execution. As the suspension display 633, the special view 1 suspension display and the special view 2 suspension display are arranged and displayed on the suspension display unit 630 in the winning order (order of suspension occurrence).

  In the hold display unit 630, a spherical (circular) hold display 633 is displayed in a mode in which the left side is lowered and the hold display 633 is arranged in an inclined bowl 635. Furthermore, the suspension correspondence display 633a (relocation display during fluctuation) corresponding to the suspension (retention in process of digesting) related to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is displayed in the reserve consumption region 640 imitating the frame of the globe (frame As the earth within). The reserve display 633 displayed on the reserve display unit 630 moves from the left side of the bowl 635 to the reserve consumption area 640 each time the special-image variation display game starts.

  Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, a special figure 1 reserve number display section 650 displaying the special figure 1 reserve number as a number and a special figure 2 reserve number display displaying the special figure 2 reserve number as a number The part 660 is provided.

  At the lower center of the display screen of the display device 41, a navigation character 670 is displayed. The navigation character 670 is normally arranged adjacent to the holding correspondence display 633a (the holding digestion area 640) indicating the holding during digestion. The navigation character 670 includes, in addition to the main body 670a, a display portion 670b of a character name and a meter display portion. In addition, a serif (which may be a serif notice) which is displayed to be emitted by the navigation character 670 in association with the navigation character 670 is displayed on the speech display unit 680. The speech may be output not only as a display but also as a voice. Also, depending on the action on the screen of the navigation character 670, may be displayed the number of balls discharged, the rate of balls out, the ratio of features (the number of balls discharged by the navigation character 670, the rate of balls out, ratio of items) Make an effect to display).

[Operation and Effect of First Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the payout control means (the payout control device 200 etc.) is the game ball in the winning area (general winning opening 35 or starting winning opening 36) or the fluctuation winning device (normal fluctuation winning device 37 or special fluctuation winning device) When the player wins the apparatus 39), it is possible to pay out a winning ball of the number of winning balls determined for each of the winning area and the variable winning device. The display means (the character ratio display section 68, the display device 41, etc.) is a ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by winning in the variable winning device among the total number of prize balls paid out Can be displayed. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved, and the player has an impression (impression that many open states are generated) that the player easily wins the prize in the variable winning device, and thus the motive (indicator) becomes a player's continued playing.

  The counting means (the game control apparatus 100 executing the processing of steps A2015 and A2210 etc.) is the number of balls discharged, which is the number of game balls discharged from the game area, or the number of game balls discharged to the game area Count the number of balls fired. The display means (dispense rate display unit 67, display device 41, etc.) can display the ratio (dispense rate) of the total number of winning balls obtained by winning to the number of discharged balls or the number of fired balls. Therefore, the player can be made to have an interest and interest in the general winning opening 35. And, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The display means (discharged ball number display unit 66, payout rate display unit 67, character ratio display unit 68, display device 41, etc.) are the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, etc., when the gaming machine is waiting for customers. The feature ratio may be hidden. That is, only when the gaming machine is not in the customer waiting state, the display means may display the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the feature ratio. This is a bonus for the player in the game and can increase the operation of the gaming machine 10.

  Each time the number of gaming balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the display means (dispense rate display unit 67, display device 41, etc.) sums the number of winning balls obtained by the predetermined number of gaming balls. Can be displayed. Therefore, the payout rate can be easily displayed as the total number of winning balls. In addition, the player can be made to have an interest and interest in the general winning opening 35, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The calculation means (the game control switch 100 which executes the winning opening switch / status monitoring process) is a prize when each prize area and the variable prize apparatus are simultaneously prized at a predetermined number of times. The total number of winning balls is calculated by adding the number of winning balls obtained by one of the plurality of winnings based on the area and the priority determined for the variable winning device. Therefore, in particular, in the normal gaming state and the special gaming state other than the general-purpose support state, the total possible number of winning balls (the payout rate) at the timing when the number of gaming balls counted by the counting means becomes the predetermined number Can be improved, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved.

  Calculation means (game control device 100 etc which executes winning opening switch / state monitoring processing), the winning area of the target which adds the number of winning balls depending on whether or not the specific gaming state (general charge support state) has occurred. It is possible to change the priority of (each winning area or variable winning device). Therefore, in the specific gaming state (general power support state), since there are a lot of wins on the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, winning in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 can be prioritized and adopted, and the total number of winning balls can be calculated.

  The reset means (the game control apparatus 100 executing the process of steps A6510 to A6514, etc.) can reset the total number of winning balls (outgoing ball rate) and set the initial value at the end of the special game state. . In the big hit state (special game state), although the total number of winning balls is very large, it is possible to start accurate measurement of the total number of winning balls after the end of the big hit state. In addition, the reset means is the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out by winning in the variable winning device among the total number of prize balls paid out at the end of the special game state (feature ratio) Keep as it is without resetting. As a result, regardless of the jackpot state (special game state), it is possible to accurately measure the item ratio.

  The game information output means (the game control device 100 or the like that executes output processing) can output the information on the total number of winning balls (the payout rate) and the information on the character ratio to an external device. Therefore, is there a discrepancy between the sum of the number of winning balls output to an external device such as a test firing test device (delivery rate) and the total of the number of winning balls obtained with an external device (delivery rate)? It can confirm.

  When the monitoring means (game control device 100 etc which executes winning opening switch / status monitoring processing) monitors and monitors winnings on each winning area and the variable winning device in descending order of the number of winning balls obtained. If there is a winning, the number of winning balls is added to calculate the total number of winning balls. Therefore, the sum of the number of winning balls as much as possible (payout rate) is preferentially determined, and the player's expectation for the game can be improved.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. In the second embodiment, the display control is executed by the payout control device 200 in addition to the discharged ball number display portion 66, the withdrawal rate display portion 67, and the character ratio display portion 68 for which display control is executed by the game control device 100. The number of discharged balls display portion 851, the payout rate display portion 852, and the character ratio display portion 853 are provided. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 are provided in the collective display device 50 on the front of the gaming machine 10, as in the first embodiment. The discharged ball number display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, and the character ratio display unit 853 are provided in the payout control device 200 provided on the back of the gaming machine 10. Note that the invention is not limited to this, and the discharged ball number display unit 851, the ball withdrawal rate display unit 852, and the character ratio display unit 853 which are display-controlled by the payout control device 200 may be provided in the upper tray unit. As described above, when provided in the payout control device 200 or the upper tray unit, the discharged ball display portion 851, the payout rate display portion 852, and the character ratio display portion 853 replace the game board 30 with another game board. Even if it is not discarded, it can be used as it is, leading to cost reduction.

  The number of discharged balls display portion 851, the output rate display portion 852, and the character ratio display portion 853 are the same as the number of discharged balls display portion 66, the output rate display portion 67, and the property ratio display portion 68 respectively. It consists of a display (LED lamp, display device) of 7 segments type (2 or 3) (8 segments type including the point portion).

  FIG. 82 is a reverse view of the gaming machine 10. On the back surface of the game board 30, the game control apparatus 100 (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner via the switch base 738 is disposed, and the game control apparatus 100 via the control base 733 above the switch base 738. The effect control apparatus 300 which controls display apparatus 41 grade | etc., Based on the production control instruction | command transmitted from is arrange | positioned. Behind the effect control device 300, a protective cover 737 is provided which covers the back surface of the effect control device 300 and the upper surface of the back surface of the game control device 100. In a state where the gaming board 30 configured in this way is stored in the storage section of the front frame 12, the protective cover 737 and the game control device 100 disposed on the back of the gaming board 30 project rearward of the front frame 12. Do.

  In the upper part of the back surface of the front frame 12, a storage unit 750 for storing gaming balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) provided in the island facility and for arranging and flowing down the stored gaming balls is disposed. . A payout unit 790 for dispensing the gaming balls having flowed down from the storage unit 750 onto the upper tray 21 (see FIG. 1) is disposed on one inner side of the front frame 12.

  In the lower part of the back of the front frame 12, a payout control device 200 for controlling the operation of the payout unit 790 based on data transmitted from the gaming control device 100, and a gaming ball based on the turning operation of the operation handle 24. A ball emitting device 742 to be launched, a connection terminal 743 connected to a card unit (not shown), and a power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices are disposed.

  Ejected ball number display portion 851, disbursed percentage display portion 852, and character ratio display portion 853 are disposed on the rear surface (rear surface) of the payout control device 200 (disbursed control substrate), and the discharged sphere number display portion 66 Unlike the display portion 67 and the character ratio display portion 68, the visual recognition is possible only from the back side of the gaming machine 10. The discharged ball number display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, and the character ratio display unit 853 can be viewed only by the game arcade (employee etc.) without showing them to the general player. The discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 are visible only from the front side of the gaming machine 10.

  If you do not want the general player to show the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio, the number-of-balls display section 66 on the front of the gaming machine 10, the payout rate display section 67, the character The ratio display unit 68 can be omitted. In this case, only from the back side of the gaming machine 10, the number of discharged balls, the percentage of discharged balls, and the ratio of items are confirmed by the discharged balls number display portion 851, the percentage of discharged balls display portion 852, and the character ratio display portion 853. it can.

  Further, the payout control device 200 calculates the number of ejected balls, the payout rate (total number of earned balls, total number of winning balls), and the prize ratio based on the payout command, and the ejection control provided in the payout control device 200. Display control is performed to display on the number-of-balls display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, and the character ratio display unit 853. Note that the payout command here includes both a payout command (A1719) and an out-of-sphere detection command (A2017) in units of one winning on the winning opening (winning area). In addition, the payout control device 200 receives the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio calculated by the game control device 100, and the number-of-discharged ball display portion 851 and the payout rate display provided in the payout control device 200. A configuration is also possible in which the part 852 and the character ratio display part 853 are displayed.

  The payout control device 200 is composed of a memory such as a CPU (microcomputer) and a RAM, and as in the game control device 100, a discharged ball number area storing the discharged ball number, an acquired ball number per 100 discharged balls The acquired ball number area storing the sum of the ball numbers) and the symbol acquired ball number area for each item storing the acquired ball number for each item are provided in the memory (see FIG. 17B). The method of calculating the number of discharged balls, the payout rate (the number of obtained balls, the total number of winning balls), and the feature ratio is the same as in the first embodiment. The out-of-sphere detection command is used to update the number of discharged balls by +1.

FIG. 83 shows a configuration example of a payout command (payout number command). The payout command is composed of 1 byte (8 bits). In the payout command, the most significant bit (first bit) is an out ball flag indicating that there is a ball entering the out port 30b, and the second to fourth bits have a prize in the winning opening In this case, the winning opening information for specifying the winning opening is shown, and the fifth to eighth bits indicate the number of winning balls as they are. The winning opening information of the second bit to the fourth bit, “001” is the general winning opening 35, “010” is the starting opening 1 (starting opening 36), “011” is the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (starting opening) 2), "100" indicates a large winning opening (winning during a big hit), "101" indicates a large winning opening (wining other than during a big hit such as a small hit). In the case where the out ball flag is set to 1 (on), that is, when there is entering the out port 30b, the number of winning balls is 0. As in the first embodiment, the total number of winning balls is stored in the number-of-earnings field, and the total number of winning balls for each winning opening is stored as the number-of-features-acquired ball in the number-of-features-acquired number of balls Ru.

  For example, if the payout command is expressed in hexadecimal notation, the 10 prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 35 are "1AH", and the 3 prize balls for winning in the starting opening 1 are "23H". Two prize balls by winning in mouth 2 are "32H", 14 prize balls (big hit) by winning in big prize mouth is "4EH", 14 prize balls by winning in big prize mouth ( The small hit) is "5EH", and the notification by the out-of-sphere detection (out-sphere detection command) is "80H".

[Operation and Effect of Second Embodiment]
In the second embodiment described above, the same function and effect as those of the first embodiment can be obtained, and the number-of-discharged-balls display portion 851, the ball-out rate display portion 852, and the prizes arranged on the rear surface (rear surface) of the payout control device 200. The ratio display portion 853 makes it possible to visually recognize the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio even from the back side of the gaming machine 10.

Other Modifications of the First Embodiment and the Second Embodiment
An embodiment in which the first embodiment and the second embodiment are modified as follows is also possible.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 controlled by the game control apparatus 100 are not on the front of the gaming machine 10 but on the back of the gaming machine 10. It may be arranged. In FIG. 84, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 are provided on the back surface (back surface) of the game control apparatus 100 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine 10. It is visible only from the back side of. In this case, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 can also be shown only to the game arcade personnel (employees, etc.) without showing them to the general player. . In addition, if the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 are disposed on the back of the gaming machine 10, there is also a possibility that the appearance of the gaming machine 10 will not be impaired for general players. is there. Further, the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 are installed on the substrate (main substrate) of the game control apparatus 100. Since the substrate (main substrate) of the game control apparatus 100 is sealed so that it can not be opened in the case (because it is crimped), the number of discharged balls display 66, the payout rate display 67, the feature ratio display You can not do anything wrong with the 68 display.

  The number of balls discharged, the payout rate, and the character ratio are displayed on the display unit 50 provided at the front of the gaming machine 10 (the number-of-balls display portion 66, the payout rate display portion 67, the character ratio display portion 68) And the display unit provided in the payout control device 200 on the back side of the gaming machine 10 (discharged ball number display unit 851, disbursement percentage display unit 852, character ratio display unit 853), and not all of the display device 41 You may display only one or two. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that at least one is displayed without displaying all of the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio. That is, one of the discharged ball number display unit 66, the payout rate display unit 67, and the character ratio display unit 68 is omitted, and the discharged ball count display unit 851, the payout rate display unit 852, the character ratio display unit 853 One of these may be omitted. In addition, the number of 7-segment displays (LED lamps) is increased, and a first display unit for displaying a continuous character ratio as the character ratio display unit 68, and a so-called character ratio generally used ( It is also possible to provide two in the second display portion for displaying the total winnings ratio) and simultaneously display both the continuous winning ratios and the so-called winnings ratio (total winnings ratio) at the same time. In addition, by turning on the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) (A1016) by pressing, it is possible to be able to alternate display switching of all part ratio and continuous part ratio in the part ratio display unit 853 .

  Furthermore, a common display in which four 7-segment displays are arranged in the horizontal direction without separately providing the discharged ball number display 66, the payout rate display 67, and the character ratio display 68 is provided. It is also possible to provide only one and display the number of balls discharged, the rate of withdrawal, and the feature ratio. In such a common display, each time the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) is turned on, which one of the number of discharged balls, the ball out rate, and the character ratio is displayed is sequentially switched. In this case, in the common display, any one of the number of discharged balls, the payout rate and the feature ratio is displayed together with an identification symbol (alphabet etc.) indicating what is being displayed. For example, the number of discharged balls is "h55", the payout rate is "d30", the total character ratio is "y50.8", and the continuous character ratio "r58.4".

  In addition, the number of balls discharged, the payout rate, and the character ratio are held as information in the gaming control apparatus 100 of the gaming machine 10 or the microcomputer (CPU) of the payout control apparatus 200, and the display unit or display of the gaming machine 10 The device 41 does not display the number of balls discharged, the rate of balls out, or the ratio of characters, but simply outputs (or displays) the number of balls discharged, the rate of balls out, or the ratio of pieces to an external device (such as a test shooting test device). It is good (of course, it may be outputted to an external device while displaying the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, the character ratio on the display unit of the gaming machine 10 or the display device 41).

  Furthermore, as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and the character ratio are determined by the user program in the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the effect control device 300. In addition to the calculation, the CPU of the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the effect control device 300 itself has a calculation function (hard calculation function) to set parameters in the internal register ( The number of balls discharged, the payout rate, and the feature ratio may be automatically calculated by setting (for example, setting information every time a game ball is discharged (discharged) and a winning is detected). Then, the game control device 100, the payout control device 200, and / or the number of balls discharged by the hardware calculation function (calculation means) to the external device (such as the inspection device 500) from the effect control device 300 It is also possible to output the rate and character ratio.

  As a bonus when the total number of balls discharged from the power-on exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5000) or when the number of times the variable display game has been executed since the power-on exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 100) It may be configured to display the payout rate and the feature ratio. In this way, there is a possibility that the operation of the gaming machine will rise immediately after the game store is opened, etc., and an accurate feature ratio can be displayed.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the character item ratio is calculated with respect to the number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present time. It may be calculated with respect to the number of winning balls acquired in the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times). For example, the predetermined period is a period associated with one big hit (from the normal gaming state before the big hit to the end of the big hit), or a period related to one consecutive chan (continuously linked) (from the normal gaming state before the big hit) The time may be short (until the power support is completely completed), and the feature ratio may be separately calculated for each predetermined period.

  The effect control device 300 receives the payout command (A1719) and the out ball detection command (A2017), and calculates the number of balls discharged, the payout rate (total number of obtained balls, the number of obtained balls), and the feature ratio by itself. You may In this case, the effect control device 300 may back up (store) the calculation results of the number of discharged balls, the ball withdrawal rate, and the feature ratio in the FeRAM 323 capable of holding stored contents even at the time of a power failure. In this way, it is possible to display the number of balls discharged, the ball withdrawal rate, and the feature ratio on the display device 41 immediately after power failure recovery (after power on). Further, in this case, in the hall / player setting mode (B1010), the effect control device 300 is selected by switching the calculation method of the accessory ratio to be displayed on the display device 41 by the selection by the player or the like. The feature ratio may be calculated according to the calculation method and displayed on the display device 41. As mentioned above, the method of calculating the character ratio is based on the character ratio only by the percentage (%) of the number of winning balls obtained by winning in the large winning opening during the big hit state. However, it differs depending on whether the percentage (%) of the number of winning balls obtained by winning in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the large winning opening in the small hit state is included.

  In addition, the winning ball number (payout ball number) 100 pieces as one set (one unit), the number of balls obtained by the set per set (number of balls obtained for the set) and the number of balls obtained by the winning opening other than the set. It is possible to store (the number of winning prize winning balls) in a ring buffer and use it for calculating the ratio of prizes and the like, and the like. The characters here are the special variation winning device 39 (large winning opening) and the normal variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening), and the winning openings other than the winning combination are the general winning opening 35 and the starting winning opening 36 (First start winning combination). The ring buffer can not be cleared to prevent fraud, and always accumulates the number of acquired balls regardless of the time or the number of times of special feature variation display game. It is possible to flexibly calculate the feature ratio, the payout rate, and the like for each of a predetermined period and a predetermined winning ball number (dispensing winning ball number) according to the number of winning balls and the winning hole winning ball stored in the ring buffer.

  In addition, as a preservation | save form, both a character item acquisition ball | bowl number and a prize-winning hole acquisition ball number may be made into a set (block) of a total of 2 bytes, for example, 1 byte each, and may be preserve | saved in a ring buffer. In addition, since one can be calculated by subtracting one from 100 for the winning ball number for winning features and the winning ball number for winning openings, only one of the winning ball numbers for winning characters and winning hole numbers can be stored in the ring buffer. Good. Furthermore, the number of balls acquired per feature (see FIG. 17B) for each of the above-mentioned prizes (prize opening) may be stored in the ring buffer as the number of balls for acquiring prizes and the number of balls for winning prize winnings.

  The ring buffer may be provided in a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory mounted on any of the game control device 100 (main substrate), the payout control device 200 (payout substrate), and the effect control device 300 (sub substrate). As a result, it is not necessary to specially back up the feature number acquisition ball number and the winning opening number acquisition ball number. The size of the ring buffer is, for example, 600 sets. Assuming that the number of balls fired per minute by the ball launcher is about 100 and the payout rate is 100%, there will be 100 balls (one set) per minute, so if there are 600 balls, the payout rate will be 100% Can save about 10 hours worth of balls.

  If there is a vacancy in the ring buffer, that may be notified. The effect display device 41 may display a notification indicating that the ring buffer is available on the screen to notify. This notification may be performed only during a game (other than the customer waiting state), the customer waiting state, or the hall setting mode. In addition, a dedicated LED may be provided in the collective display device 50, the game control device 100, and the like, and notification by lighting or blinking may be performed. The notification may be made by providing an existing LED with a lighting mode (color or blinking) different from the normal one without providing a dedicated LED. Vacancy information indicating that the ring buffer is vacant may be transmitted as a test shot test signal or an external information signal, and may be displayed on the trial shot test device or an external device to notify that the ring buffer is vacant. In addition, notification may be performed by the sound of the upper speaker 19a or the lower speaker 19b.

Third Embodiment
The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the structure common to 1st Embodiment or 2nd Embodiment is applicable to the structure except describing below.

  In the third embodiment, at the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and / or the short end timing, the display device 41 displays the character ratio (all character ratio (so-called character ratio) and continuous character ratio). Be done. In addition, as for the feature ratio, the value (value reset and measured at the end of each special game) divided into each special game (big hit) consisting of round games of a predetermined number of rounds is stored in the big hit history information about special games , And can be displayed on the display device 41 by being included in the jackpot history information.

[Dumped ball performance monitoring process of the third embodiment]
FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a to-do-ball performance monitoring process according to the third embodiment. The game performance monitoring process is executed by the game control apparatus 100 in step A2211 of the winning number counter update process (FIG. 17A). In addition, the step of the same content as the ball-outgoing performance monitoring process of FIG. 18 makes the step number the same, and omits explanation.

  In step A2313, the game control device 100 calculates the total value (total prize ball number) of the values of the acquired number-of-items ball area shown in FIG. Load from the ball number area acquired by character (A9801). The number of winning balls for each prize here is the sum of winning balls from the big winning prize in the big hit, the sum of winning balls from the big winning bit in the small hit (except for the big hit), ordinary It is the total of the number of winning balls by the winning on the variable winning device 37 (starting opening 2).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 calculates (character product winning ball count / total value) × 100 (%) as a product ratio based on the product winning ball count (A9802). Here, as the feature ratio, the so-called continuous feature ratio (proportion of the number of winning balls obtained by winning in the big winning opening during the big hit state) and the so-called feature ratio generally used (All role ratio: Ratio (%) of the number of winning balls obtained by winning in the large winning opening and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is both calculated. When calculating the continuous character ratio, the sum of the number of winning balls by winning to the big winning opening during the big hit is used as the number of winning balls. When calculating the overall character ratio, the sum of the number of prize balls from the big win in the big hit in the big win as the number of winning balls in the big win, the prize from the big win in the small hit (other than big hit) The sum (total number) of the sum of the number of balls and the sum of the number of prize balls resulting from the winning on the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (starting opening 2) is used. It should be noted that here, in addition to the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio, the large winning opening ratio (a prize obtained by winning the large winning opening during the big hit state and the small hit state among the total number of balls Other item ratios may be calculated, such as the ratio of the number of balls).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 displays segment data corresponding to the one calculated result in order to display one calculated result out of the calculated results of the continuous product ratio and the total product ratio on the product ratio display unit 68. , And is saved in the segment area corresponding to the segment of the feature ratio display section 68 (A9803).

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit end timing is currently (A9804). Here, the big hit end timing can be set variously as long as it can be recognized that the big hit state (special game state) has ended. For example, the big hit end timing is determined to be the final round in the big winning hole remaining ball processing (FIG. 49) when the remaining ball processing time (for the final) has passed (A5908) (the result of A6101 is "Y" And the timing at which the processing of steps A6112 to A6122 is performed (at the start of ending). Also, the big hit end timing may be during the ending or at the end of the ending, that is, when the ending time (A6114) has elapsed.

  The game control apparatus 100 prepares a command corresponding to the calculation result (A9802) of the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio (A9802) as the effect command when the big hit end timing is currently (Y in A9804). A2317) The effect command setting process is executed (A2318).

  As a result, at the timing when the special game state ends (big hit end timing), the effect control device 300 can display the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio (so-called character ratio) on the display device 41. It should be noted that during the special gaming state (big hit state), the opening of the special variation winning device 39 (big winning opening) changes the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio more than in the normal gaming state, so the character here Even if the ratio is displayed, the player is only confused and wasteful. Therefore, the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio are displayed at the big hit end timing immediately after the large change.

  When it is not currently the big hit end timing (the result of A9804 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether it is currently the high probability end timing or the time reduction end timing (A9805). Here, the high probability end timing or the time reduction end timing (specific gaming state end timing) can be set variously as long as it can be recognized that the high probability state or the time reduction state (general power support state) has ended. As in the first embodiment, when the big hit always ends up in a definite variation state (so-called ST state), the high probability end timing and the time saving end timing are the same timing, for example, the high probability fluctuation number is It becomes 0 (result of A5203 is "Y"), and it is the timing to which processing from step A5204 to A5211 was performed. Note that, unlike the first embodiment, in the model in which the time saving state (general power support state) with low probability exists, there is a time shortening end timing different from the high probability end timing.

  If the game control device 100 is currently at the high probability end timing or the time reduction end timing (the result of A9805 is “Y”), the game control device 100 produces a command corresponding to the calculation result (A9802) of the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio. The command is prepared (A2317), and the rendering command setting process is executed (A2318).

  Thus, at the timing when the specific gaming state ends (high probability end timing or time shortening end timing), the effect control device 300 can display the continuous part ratio and the total part ratio (so-called part ratio) on the display device 41. . In the special game state, the change of the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio becomes larger than the normal gaming state by the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) by the general power support, here Even if the ratio is displayed, the player is only confused and wasteful. Therefore, the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio are displayed at the specific gaming state end timing immediately after the large change.

  If neither the high probability end timing nor the time short end timing is currently present (the result of A9805 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 proceeds to step A2319 without executing the processing of step A2317 and step A2318.

  By the above processing, when the ball-out performance monitoring processing is executed (when a winning occurs), the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio are always calculated, the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and The effect control device 300 can display the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio on the display device 41 at the time saving end timing (timing immediately after the character ratio changes significantly). The continuous character product ratio and the total character product ratio may be displayed on the display device 41 only at any of the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time reduction end timing.

  In addition, when big hit end setting processing 1 (Figure 51) is executed, it becomes latent probability change state with high probability and no time saving (without PV support), but it becomes latent change state after big hit and special figure fluctuation display of specified number of times When the game is executed, a command corresponding to the calculation result (A9802) of the continuous product ratio and the total product ratio may be prepared as a rendering command (A2317), and the rendering command setting process may be executed ((2) A2318).

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the ball performance monitoring process according to the third embodiment.

  In FIG. 86, the order of steps A9804 and A9805 and steps A2313 and A9801 to A9803 are interchanged, and the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio are determined only at the big hit end timing, high probability end timing, and time shortening end timing. Calculation (A9802), a command corresponding to the calculation result is prepared as a rendering command (A2317), and rendering command setting processing is executed. In FIG. 86, when the out-of-the-ball performance monitoring process is executed, the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio are not always calculated, and the calculation load is reduced.

  As described above, at the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time reduction end timing (the timing immediately after the character ratio changes significantly), the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio are calculated, and the effect control device 300 Can display the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio on the display device 41. Alternatively, the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio may be calculated and displayed on the display device 41 only at any of the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time reduction end timing.

[Special view of the third embodiment normal processing shift setting process 2]
FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special view processing shift setting process 2 according to the third embodiment. The special view ordinary process transition setting process 2 is executed by the game control apparatus 100 in step A6219 of the big hit end process (FIG. 50). The steps having the same contents as in the special view processing shift setting process 2 of FIG. 53 have the same step numbers, and the description thereof is omitted.

  At the end of the big hit, in steps A6510 to A6514, the game control apparatus 100 clears (resets) the discharged ball number area and the acquired ball number area to 0, and initially displays the discharged ball number and the payout rate display ("00 Set to ")".

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 clears (resets) all the acquired bonus ball areas by role to 0 (A6515), and displays the segment data of the initial display of the bonus ratio "00.0" as the bonus ratio display section 68. Save to the segment area corresponding to the segment of (A6516). As a result, through the output process (A1610 in FIG. 11), it is possible to display the bonus ratio as “00.0” in the bonus ratio display section 68 at the end of the big hit.

  In addition, every special character winning area is cleared to 0 every time a special game (big hit) ends, so the special ball number area for each bonus is at the end of the previous special game (the first special game Before the end, the number of winning balls from the time of power on of the gaming machine 10 is stored. Therefore, the character ratio (continuous character ratio and total character ratio) calculated in step A9802, and the character ratio (continuous character ratio and total character ratio) transmitted to the effect control device 300 in step A2318 are This is a feature ratio (feature ratio reset and measured for each special game) divided into special games each consisting of a round game of a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the character ratio divided for each special game (big hit) is from the end of one special game (from the time the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on before the end of the first special game) to the end of the next special game Or it is a bonus ratio calculated with respect to the number of winning balls in the period until the end time of the specific gaming state (high probability state or time saving state).

  It is required by the rules etc. that the role ratio (continuous role ratio and total role ratio) should be below the reference value (for example, 60% in continuous role ratio, 70% in total role ratio), The item ratio to the number of winning balls in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present is not stable unless the operating time of the gaming machine 10 is long. For example, when a special game (big hit) occurs while the operation time is short and the character ratio exceeds the reference value, the player is considered to indicate that the character ratio to the number of winning balls in the whole period is an abnormal value. Etc. may be misjudged.

  On the other hand, it is known in advance that the character ratio divided into special games is an unstable value and can be a value far from the reference value. Therefore, the player or the like is not limited to the reference value, but by calculating the symbol proportion divided into special games from the beginning and displaying it on the display device 41 from the beginning. Based on the knowledge and information of the above, it is determined whether or not the symbol ratio is an abnormal value, and erroneous determinations are reduced.

  As in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the game control apparatus 100 executes the special processing routine processing transition setting process 2 (without steps A6515 and A6516) of FIG. The feature ratio may be calculated with respect to the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls) in the entire period from the input to the present. In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with an area for accumulating and storing the number-of-items acquisition balls of each number-of-items acquisition number-of-balls region corresponding to each number-of-items acquisition number-of-balls region in the RWM. The feature ratio to the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls) in the whole period from the power-on of the machine 10 to the present may be calculated together with the feature ratio divided into each special game (big hit).

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the one-shot command process according to the third embodiment. The one-shot command process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1212 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 80).

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section indicates a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section indicates a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a model specification command (the result of B1301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). Then, if the MODE unit represents a command for initializing the RAM (the result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization etc. is executed (B1304), and the one-shot system command process is performed. finish.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command for initializing the RAM (the result of B1303 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a command at the time of a power failure recovery. (B1305). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is “Y”), the power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command ( B1307). Then, if the MODE section indicates a customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit represents the decoration special view 1 reservation number command (A3207) next. It is determined (B1309). Then, if the MODE section indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B 1309 is “Y”), the special figure 1 holding information setting process is executed (B 1310), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special drawing 1 reservation number command (the result of B 1309 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next, the MODE unit displays the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command (A3203) It is determined whether or not to represent (B1311). Then, if the MODE section indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B 1311 is “Y”), the special figure 2 holding information setting process is executed (B 1312), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command (the result of B 1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents the probability information command or not. (B1313). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a probability information command (the result of B 1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting processing is executed (B 1314), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the probability information command (the result of B 1313 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents an error / illegal command ( B1315). Examples of error / illegal commands include a fraud occurrence command (A2108), a fraud release command (A2116), a state off command (A2404), and a state on command (A2407). Then, if the MODE section indicates an error / illegal command (the result of B 1315 is “Y”), an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling an error or a false notification is executed (B 1316), End one-shot command processing.

  If the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B 1315 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 causes the MODE unit to be a command for effect mode switching (for example, the effect of A5139). It is determined whether or not the mode switching preparation command is displayed (B1317). Then, if the MODE unit indicates a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "Y"), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 counts the large winning opening of the command (A3107, A3111) where the MODE unit is counting. It is determined whether it represents a command (B1319). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a command of counting (the result of B 1319 is “Y”), count information setting processing is executed (B 1320), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. Details of the count information setting process will be described later.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the command of counting (result of B1319 is "N"), then the effect control device 300 responds to information on the prize ball (result of calculation of the role ratio of A2317). (B1321). Then, if the MODE section indicates information on the winning balls (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the character-item-ratio setting processing is executed (B1322), and the one-shot command processing is ended. Details of the role ratio setting process will be described later.

  If the MODE unit does not represent information on a winning ball (the result of B1321 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a symbol stop command (B1323). ). The command for symbol stop includes, for example, the symbol stop command of the special view 1 and the symbol stop command of the special view 2. Then, if the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (the result of B1323 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the command of the MODE section is a normal command ( B1324).

  If the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1324 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special view (B1325), and the game is performed after all symbols have stopped. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1326), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the process of B1326, as an example, the gaming state flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing at which this processing is executed, the gaming state flag is a flag of "during variation", "big hit" and "small hit" Is set.

  On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent a command for symbol stop (the result of B1323 is "N") or when the command of the MODE unit is not normal (the result of B1324 is "N"), the effect control device In step 300, the one-shot command processing ends.

[Count information setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, details of the count information setting process (B1320) in the above-described one-shot system command process (FIG. 88) will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the count information setting process performed by the effect control device 300. The count information setting process is for counting the number of winning balls obtained in the special game state, and is executed when the MODE section represents a count among the commands received as a one-shot system command.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received command of the count (large winning opening count command) is a normal command (B1401). If the command is normal (the result of B 1401 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the current gaming machine 10 is in a big hit operation (during a big hit state) ( B 1402).

  When the big hit is in operation (the result of B 1402 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 updates the count number in the current round by +1, and the winning ball number of the big winning opening to the winning ball number ( Here, 14) is added (B1403, B1404). At the end of the jackpot ending, the number of balls obtained is cleared to zero. The number of balls obtained is stored in the number-of-balls area in the RAM (for example, in the RAM 322).

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs update setting of the number-of-payouts display (B1405), and ends the count information setting process. As display of the number of balls, the number of balls obtained is displayed on the display device 41 or the like.

  On the other hand, if the received command is not normal (result of B1401 is "N"), or if the current gaming machine 1 is not in big hit operation (result of B1402 is "N"), count information setting processing finish.

[Parts ratio setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the details of the accessory ratio setting process (B1322) in the above-described one-shot system command process (FIG. 88) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a procedure of an accessory ratio setting process executed by the effect control device 300. The role ratio setting process is to store the total character ratio (so-called character ratio) and the continuous character ratio, and display and set these, and the effect control device 300 is information on the winning balls as a single-shot system command ( It is executed when the command corresponding to the calculation result of the character item ratio of A2317 is received.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received command of the information on the winning balls is a normal command (B1501). If the command is not normal (the result of B1501 is "N"), the character-to-item ratio setting process is ended.

  If the command is normal (the result of B 1501 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the overall winning combination (B 1502). If the received command does not correspond to the calculation result of the overall winning combination (the result of B1502 is "N"), the process proceeds to step B1505. If the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the total role ratio (the result of B1502 is “Y”), the total role ratio is stored in the RAM (B1503), and the total role ratio is displayed on the display device 41 Execute display settings for (B1504).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the continuous winning combination (B1505). If the received command does not correspond to the calculation result of the continuous winning combination (the result of B1505 is "N"), the winning combination setting process is ended. If the received command corresponds to the calculation result of the continuous combination ratio (the result of B1505 is "Y"), the continuous combination ratio is stored in the RAM (B1506), and the continuous combination ratio is displayed on the display device 41 The display setting for the game is executed (B1507), and the bonus ratio setting process is ended.

  In addition, the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio received at the big hit end timing, in the RAM as one set, together with the number of winning balls obtained at the big hit ending timing (final number of winning balls in the big hit) ( For example, it is stored in the jackpot history area in the RAM 322) (B1503, B1506). In the jackpot history area, the jackpot history 1, jackpot history 2, jackpot history 3, ... are stored in the order of jackpots generated from the power-on of the gaming machine 10, and all jackpots are stored for each jackpot history. The ratio, the continuous character ratio and the number of winning balls are stored as a set. Further, the overall winning item ratio and the continuous winning item ratio are displayed on the display device 41 as a big hit history at the big hit end timing by the display setting (B1504, B1507). The character ratio displayed at the end of the big hit is from the end of one special game (when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on before the end of the first special game) to the end of the next special game (big hit). It is a feature ratio calculated with respect to the number of winning balls obtained in the period.

  Further, in the RAM, all the winning symbol ratios and the continuous winning symbol ratios received at substantially the same timing at the high probability end timing and the time shortening end timing are associated and stored as one set (pair). Further, the overall winning item ratio and the continuous winning item ratio are simultaneously displayed on the display device 41 at the high probability end timing and the time saving end timing by the display setting (B1504, B1507). The prize ratio displayed at the high probability end timing or the time reduction end timing is the number of balls obtained during the period from the end of the previous special game to the end of the specific gaming state (high probability state or time reduction state) It is a feature ratio calculated with respect to.

[Design system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, details of symbol system command processing according to the third embodiment will be described. The symbol system command processing is executed in step B1210 of the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 80). FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the procedure of symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 sets the special view type corresponding to the MODE portion of the received symbol system command (the special decoration 1 command or the special decoration 2 command) (B1801). The special drawing type is special drawing 1 or special drawing 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area in the RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of symbols changes in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a table is used for each MODE to set the symbol type. In the present embodiment, the symbol types include an off symbol, a 4R positive variation big hit symbol, a 16R positive variation big hit symbol and the like.

[Variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the details of the variable system command processing according to the third embodiment will be described. The variation system command process is executed in step B1206 in the received command analysis process (FIG. 80). FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special view type (special view 1 or special view 2) of the received variation command (variation command) is unconfirmed (B1901). If the special drawing type is unconfirmed (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variation system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not yet determined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and it is determined whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, "mismatch" means contradiction in rendering, for example, when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received even though a variation system command of an off-set has been received. If the variation system command and the symbol type do not match (the result of B 1903 is “Y”), variation system command processing ends.

  If the variation system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1904), and the effect during variation is A change effect setting process for setting a certain change effect is executed (B1905). Note that multiple effects exist for the same variable system command. Subsequently, the special view variation is set to the gaming state flag indicating the gaming state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907). Then, the special figure fluctuation number is updated by +1 (B1908), and the variation system command processing is finished. The special figure fluctuation number is the execution number (start number) of the special figure fluctuation display game from the power-on of the gaming machine 10, and the special figure fluctuation number after updating is the special figure in the RAM (for example, in the RAM 322). It is stored in the fluctuation count area.

[Big hit system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, details of the jackpot system command processing according to the third embodiment will be described. The jackpot command processing is executed in step B1208 in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80). FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the MODE part of the received big hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). If the MODE section of the big hit system command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, if the big hit system command is a fanfare command, the fanfare effect setting process for setting fanfare effect is executed (B2102) . The fanfare command includes information of the upper limit value of the number of rounds of the present big hit. Subsequently, the fanfare in progress is set to the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2103), and the big hit system command processing is ended. The round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

  If the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the big hit system command represents a round ( B2104). If the MODE section represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, if the big hit system command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes a round effect setting process, and the gaming machine 10 of the current game 10 The game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) is set to "round" (B2105, B2106), and the big hit system command processing ends.

  When the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent a round (the result of B 2104 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the big hit system command represents an interval ( B2107). If the MODE section indicates an interval (the result of B2107 is "Y"), that is, if the big hit command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes an interval effect setting process, and the gaming machine 10 of the current time has 10 games During the interval is set in the gaming state flag indicating the state (P machine state) (B2108, B2109), and the big hit system command processing ends.

  If the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent an interval (the result of B 2107 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the big hit system command represents an ending ( B2110). If the MODE part indicates ending (the result of B2110 is “Y”), that is, if the big hit system command is the ending command, the effect control device 300 produces an effect corresponding to the feature ratio and the number of balls obtained in the big hit. Point addition effect display is set as effect display when adding points (B2111). In addition, in the point addition effect display, for example, the display device 41 is made to appear a character.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect corresponding to the character and character ratio (both or any of the character and character ratio) (B2112). The gaming state flag indicating the gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 is set to ending ending (B2113), and the big hit system command processing is ended. In addition, the ending effect may be set in correspondence with the final acquired ball number as well.

  In addition, when the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not indicate ending (the result of B 2110 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the big hit system command processing without executing any processing. Do.

[Effect point control processing]
Next, details of the effect point control process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The effect point control process is executed in step B1011 in the main process (FIG. 78). FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of an effect point control process performed by the effect control device 300. The effect points include owned points that are the total of points earned from the past game to the present, and in-game earned points that are points earned during the current game (predetermined period).

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not pre-reading effect of the effect point object (object to which the effect point is given) has been executed (B2501). The pre-reading effect is an effect that is executed based on the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variation system command, and is an effect such as continuous effect (continuous advance notice), pending change advance notice, pre-reading zone advance notice, and the like. When pre-reading effect of the effect point object is not executed (the result of B2501 is N), it moves to the processing of step B2504. If the pre-read effect for the presentation point target is executed (the result of B 2501 is “Y”), the point corresponding to the presentation is added to the owned point number (B 2502), and the point corresponding to the presentation is added to the acquired point number during the game To do (B2503).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the change effect of the effect point object has been executed (B2504). Here, the change effect is an effect (such as an advance notice effect) associated with the result of the special view change display game currently being executed. When the variation presentation of the presentation point object is not executed (the result of B 2504 is “N”), the process proceeds to the process of step B 2507. When the variation effect for the presentation points is executed (the result of B2504 is "Y"), the points corresponding to the presentation are added to the possess points number (B2505), and the points corresponding to the effects are added to the points acquired during the game Yes (B2506).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the input condition to be the effect point target is satisfied (B2507). When there is an effect button operation for the effect point to which the effect point is provided, it is determined that this input condition is satisfied. If the input condition to be the effect point target is not satisfied (the result of B2507 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B2510. When the input condition to be an effect point is satisfied (the result of B2507 is "Y"), the point corresponding to the input (here, effect button operation) is added to the owned point number (B2508), and the acquired point number during the game A point corresponding to the input (here, effect button operation) is added (B2509).

  Thereafter, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the addition timing in the big hit ending (B2510). When it is not the addition timing at the big hit ending (the result of B 2510 is “N”), the process proceeds to the process of step B 2513. If it is the end timing of the big hit (the result of B 2510 is “Y”), the number of possessed points to the feature ratio (all feature ratio and / or continuous feature ratio) and the winning result at this big hit Points corresponding to the number of balls are added (B 2511), and the number of points earned during game is corresponded to the feature ratio (total feature ratio and / or continuous feature ratio) and the number of balls obtained at this big hit Add points (B2512).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether a character level increase condition has been established regarding the number of points acquired during the game (B2513). For example, when the number of points earned during game is equal to or more than a predetermined value, it can be determined that the character level increase condition is satisfied. If the character level increase condition is not satisfied (the result of B 2513 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B 2516. When the character level up condition is satisfied regarding the number of points acquired during the game (the result of B 2513 is “Y”), the character level (Lv) corresponding to the character mode (eg costume) is updated (B 2514). The drawing setting of the character level up rendering related to the level up (mode change) is performed (B2515). Note that the character level up effect may be a level up of the above-mentioned navigation character 670 or may be used for a level up of aspects of characters other than the navigation character 670.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether a point recovery condition by password input is satisfied (B2516). The password input is, for example, an input by the operation of the effect button 25, and the password can be acquired by a portable terminal (such as a portable telephone) by a portable terminal interlocking service. The point revival condition is, for example, that the password is correct. If the point revival condition is not satisfied (the result of B 2516 is “N”), the process moves to step B 2519. If the point revival condition is satisfied (the result of B2516 is "Y"), the owned point number is set to a value corresponding to the password content (B2517), and the character level (Lv) or effect customization information corresponding to the password content Restore (B2518). The effect customization information is information for each model.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether a two-dimensional code drawing operation for drawing a two-dimensional code on the display device 41 has been made (B2519). For example, the two-dimensional code drawing operation is a predetermined operation (such as an operation on the touch panel or a pressing operation) of the effect button 25. If there is no two-dimensional code drawing operation (the result of B2519 is "N"), the effect point control process is ended. When there is a two-dimensional code drawing operation (the result of B2520 is "Y"), a password is generated based on the number of owned points, the character Lv, and the presentation customization information (B2520), and the two-dimensional code corresponding to the generated password Make drawing settings (B 2521). Thereafter, the effect point control process is ended.

[Hole / player setting mode processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 95, the details of the hall player setting mode process (B1010) according to the third embodiment in the above-described main process (FIG. 78) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing a procedure of hall / player setting mode processing executed by the effect control device 300. In the hall / player setting mode processing, a hall setting mode in which a person in charge of a hall (gaming shop) can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10 or a player setting mode in which the player can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10 is activated. be able to.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the hole setting mode is in progress (B2701). When the flag in the hole setting mode described later is set, it can be determined that the hole setting mode is in progress. When in the hall setting mode (the result of B 2701 is “Y”), the process of B 2706 to B 2716 is performed to operate the effect button 25 (effect button switch 25 a, touch panel 25 b) by a person in charge of the hall (game shop) Make various settings and various adjustments based on.

  When the hall setting mode is not in progress (the result of B 2701 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode is in progress (B 2702). When the player setting mode in progress flag described below is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is in progress. When the player setting mode is in progress (the result of B2702 is "Y"), the processing of B2720-B2725 is performed, and various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the player's operation of the effect button 25.

  When the player setting mode is not in progress (the result of B 2702 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied (B 2703). For example, when an operation of the effect button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B1009) while waiting for a guest, it can be determined that the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied. Note that “waiting for a customer” means, for example, the above-mentioned waiting for a customer state, and includes a customer waiting demonstration state in which a video for waiting for a customer (a customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41. When the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B2703 is "N"), the processing of B2717 is executed.

  When the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B 2703 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 draws a screen for starting screen drawing (drawing of the hole setting screen) on the display device 41 in the hole setting mode. The start setting is made (B2704). Then, a flag is set during the hole setting mode (B2705).

  Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by a person in the hall or the like (B2706), the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration Hall LED brightness adjustment process (B2707) to adjust the brightness of the LED of the device 46, liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (B2708) to adjust the brightness of the display unit (liquid crystal display etc.) of the display device 41, power saving setting to save power The setting process (B2709) is executed.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes logo color setting processing for setting the issue color and the like of the logo combination (B2710). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B2711). When the operation signal by the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected in the effect button input process (B1009), it can be determined that the setting confirmation operation has been input. When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B2711 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode process is ended.

  If there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B2711 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the setting at the time of factory shipment has been confirmed (B2712). When there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting at the time of shipment from the factory is confirmed. If it is not determined by the factory default settings (the result of B2712 is "N"), the process proceeds to B2714. When it is decided by the factory default setting (the result of B2712 is "Y"), the factory default setting process is performed to perform various settings and adjustments in the factory default setting (B2713). The factory default settings are default settings stored in a memory such as the ROM 321. Next, hole setting data (or hole adjustment data) such as volume and various luminances determined in B2706-B2710 and B2713 are written in the backup memory (for example, FeRAM 323) (B2714).

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the hole setting mode (B2715). Then, the flag in the hole setting mode is cleared (B2716).

  If the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B2703 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B2717). It can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied, for example, when an operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B1009) while waiting for a guest. Note that “waiting for a customer” means, for example, the above-mentioned waiting for a customer state, and includes a customer waiting demonstration state in which a video for waiting for a customer (a customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41. When the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B2717 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process is ended.

  When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B 2717 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting to start screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B2718). In addition, the menu display for making various selections and the character ratio (continuous character ratio and all character ratio) by this screen drawing, the volume adjustment display (gauge, meter, etc.) for volume adjustment, LED brightness adjustment Together with the brightness adjustment display (gauge, meter, etc.) for the display. Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B2719).

  Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, the player volume adjustment process (B2720), the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration A player LED brightness adjustment process (B2721) for adjusting the brightness of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect customization processing for customizing (individual setting) effects based on an operation of the effect button 25 or the like by the player (B2722). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B2723). If there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B2723 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process is ended. When the setting confirmation operation is input (the result of B2723 is "Y"), the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B2724). Then, the flag during the player setting mode is cleared (B2725). In addition, since player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as volume and brightness determined in B2720-B2721 may be erased, it is not written in the backup memory.

  In the above, it is assumed that the rendering update setting (such as the update of the highlight item in the menu display) after entering the hole setting mode or the player setting mode is performed by the effect button input process (B1009).

[Screen transition]
FIG. 96A and FIG. 96B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the third embodiment, which is an example of the screen transition of the entire game.

  (A) of FIG. 96A is a display screen immediately before the start of the special view variable display game. In the plurality of change display areas 610 (the left area 610a, the right area 610b, and the middle area 610c), a lost stop symbol of the previous special view change display game is displayed. In addition, a holding frame 640 with a rectangular frame is displayed at the lower center of the display screen.

  In the third embodiment, the hold display unit 630 (start storage display unit) displays a first hold display unit 630a that displays the first start memory as a first hold display (first start memory display), and a second start memory. It consists of the 2nd reservation display part 630b displayed as a 2nd reservation display (2nd starting memory display). Three hold displays 633 are displayed on the first hold display unit 630 a as the first hold display. At the moment, the hold display 633 is not displayed in the second hold display unit 630b. The hold display 633 b (black) is a hold display in which the color is changed from the normal mode due to the hold change notice.

  The special figure 1 reserve number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserve number display section 660 at the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 respectively show the number “3” indicating the special figure 1 reserve number and the special figure 2 reserve number The numeral "0" is displayed.

  (A) is a display screen at the timing of starting the special figure variation display game. An effect is performed such that the hold display 633 at the right end of the first hold display unit 630 a is moved to the hold region 640. Thereafter, the suspension correspondence display 633 a (display during fluctuation suspension display) indicating the suspension (the start memory which has become the right to execute this special view variation display game) relating to the special view variation display game being executed is displayed in the reserve digestion area 640 It will be done. Then, the variation of the decoration special symbol (↓) starts in the variation display area 610, and at the same time, the variation (↓) of the decoration reduced pattern starts in the variation display area 615. Further, in the special figure 1 pending number display section 650, the number indicating the special figure 1 pending number decreases to "2". In addition, when the result of the special view fluctuation display game is a big hit, the stop result (stop symbol) of the fluctuation display area 615 and the fluctuation display area 610 becomes a common aspect (common numeral), but in the case of a disjunction, It may not be a common aspect.

  After that, in (c), the same decorative special symbol (identification information) is stopped in the left area 610a and the right area 610b, and the reach occurs. Then, after various reach effects are executed, the stop symbol of the big hit is displayed in (D), and thereafter, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the special variation winning device for a predetermined number of rounds (here 16 times) By repeating the 39 open / close times, round games for a predetermined number of rounds are executed.

  (E) shows the 8R display screen in the middle of the jackpot state (special game state). Here, a jackpot round effect is performed, and the number of balls obtained (B1404 and B1405 in FIG. 89) acquired during the jackpot state is updated and displayed each time a winning in the big winning opening occurs. (F) shows the screen of the last round (16R).

  (K) of FIG. 96B shows the display screen of the display device 41 during ending when the big hit state ends. During the ending, as the big hit history, the number of winning balls obtained during the big hit, the whole character ratio and the continuous character ratio received by the presentation control device 300 at the big hit end timing are displayed on the big hit history display section 760 There is. The jackpot history display portion 760 includes a character ratio display area 800 for displaying a character ratio. In addition, since it is a so-called character ratio generally used, the total character ratio is displayed as "character ratio". The property ratio displayed here was obtained from the end of one special game (when the power of the gaming machine 10 was turned on before the end of the first special game) to the end of the next special game (big hit). Although it is a prize ratio calculated with respect to the number of prize balls, it may be a prize ratio calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained in the whole period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the end of each special game.

  Also, for the big hit history (history information), although the three most recent (here, big hit history 1, big hit history 2, big hit history 3) are displayed, how many big hit histories are displayed on the big hit history display section 760 The player can set the player in the player setting mode. The big hit history (the number of winning balls, the total character ratio, the continuous character ratio) is displayed so as not to overlap with the other display, or is displayed preferentially on the front side even if it overlaps. In addition, it is also possible to display the whole character ratio and the continuous character ratio not as a number but as a circle graph or a bar graph.

  In addition, as a point addition effect at the time of adding effect points according to the number of winning balls and jackpot ratio during the big hit, for example, while displaying the character 770 of the character 770 while displaying the character 770 of the character 770 In the part 770a, the added value (100 points in this case) of the number of balls obtained and the effect point is displayed. The character 770 and the form thereof may be set in accordance with the addition value of the presentation points (and the number of balls obtained and the feature ratio).

  Furthermore, as an ending effect (B2 112 in FIG. 93) executed during the ending, a effect (decoration) such as a falling star flows is displayed. The ending effect (including the background) may be set according to the information related to the winning balls such as the number of winning balls obtained and the feature ratio. The effect according to the character ratio makes it possible to judge the character ratio and further the state of the gaming machine, and the interest of the game is improved. In the end effect, the LED (panel decoration device 46) provided in the vicinity of the center case 40 of the gaming board 30 has a color (for example, "green", "yellow", "blue") according to the feature ratio. A decoration effect may be included, in which the feature ratio is lowered in turn). In addition, since there is a possibility that the number of special figure variation display games digested up to the big hit may increase as the feature ratio is lower, the ending effect giving a good impression to the player is set in order to vie for labor. Good. In addition, an ending effect may be set which gives a good impression to the player in order to win as the number of balls obtained is larger. In addition, the structure which sets production (for example, fluctuation production) other than ending production according to a thing and thing ratio is also possible.

  (G) shows a display screen when a specific gaming state (high probability state or time saving state) "RUSH" occurs after the big hit state ends. In the special game state, the special figure 1 special figure variation display game or the special figure 2 special figure variation display game is being executed. One hold display 633 is displayed on the first hold display unit 630a as a first hold display. In the second hold display unit 630b, two hold displays 633 are displayed as the second hold display.

  (K) shows a display screen of the display device 41 at the end of the specific gaming state (high probability state or time saving state) “RUSH”. In the specifics game state end timing (high probability end timing or short time end timing), the overall character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio received by the effect control device 300 are displayed in the character ratio display area 800. The specific gaming state end timing is, for example, a timing at which the high probability variation count is zero. The character ratio displayed here is the character ratio calculated with respect to the number of prize balls obtained in the period from the end of one special game to the end of the specific game state, but It may be a bonus ratio calculated with respect to the number of winning balls obtained in the entire period from the power-on to the end of the specific gaming state. In addition, at this particular game state end timing, it is possible to execute the production which responds to the feature ratio.

  In addition, since it is a so-called character ratio generally used, the total character ratio is displayed as "character ratio". The total character ratio and the continuous character ratio may be displayed so as not to overlap with other displays, or may be displayed on the front side even if they overlap. In addition, it is also possible to display the whole character ratio and the continuous character ratio not as a number but as a circle graph or a bar graph. After that, it shifts to the normal game state.

  FIG. 97 corresponds to (G) of FIG. 96B and shows another example of the display screen of the display device 41 in the ending at the end of the big hit state. In FIG. 97, in addition to the number of winning balls, the total character ratio, and the continuous character ratio, the number of starts which is the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the power on of the gaming machine 10 (B1908 in FIG. The figure fluctuation frequency is displayed on the big hit history display section 760. As a result, the player or the like judges whether or not the character-item ratio is an abnormal value based on the number of starts other than the reference value, thereby reducing erroneous judgments. For example, if a big hit occurs when the number of starts is small (for example, 10 in FIG. 97), the character ratio exceeds the standard value (for example, 60% in continuous character ratio, 70% in total character ratio) Even if, it can be judged that it is not abnormal.

  In this case, the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio received at the big hit end timing, together with the number of balls obtained and the number of starts at the big hit end timing, as one set, in the RAM (for example, in the RAM 322) It is stored in the big hit history area (B1503, B1506).

  Further, in FIG. 97, since the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio may not be familiar to the player, the navy character 670 appears and the serif display portion 680 is continuous with the total character ratio. The explanation and definition of the feature ratio are displayed. As a result, the player becomes interested in the feature ratio.

  In addition, also in (ko) of FIG. 96B, on the display screen of the display device 41 at the time of the end of the specific gaming state (high probability state or time reduction state) "RUSH", it is added to the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio The start number may be displayed in the feature ratio display area 800.

[Display screen of customer waiting]
FIG. 98 shows an example of a display screen in the player setting mode (B2718 in FIG. 95) waiting for a customer. The big hit history is displayed on the big hit history display unit 760. The continuous character ratio and the total character ratio (indicated as “character ratio”) are displayed in the character ratio display area 800 in the big hit history display section 760. A volume adjustment display 810 (gauge) for volume adjustment and a brightness adjustment display 815 (gauge) for LED brightness adjustment are displayed on the display screen.

  The effect control device 300 displays the continuous role ratio and the total role ratio on the display screen of the display device 41 only while waiting for a customer (in a customer waiting state), and is in a state other than waiting for a customer, that is, waiting for a customer The continuous character ratio and the total character ratio may not be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 in a state that is not in a demonstration state or in a state in which the gaming ball is in the process of being launched. That is, a configuration is also possible in which B1504 and B1507 in the character ratio setting process (FIG. 90) are omitted.

  Furthermore, on the display screen of the display device 41, a first selection unit 820 for selecting the number of display of the big hit history and a second selection unit 825 for selecting the display content (display mode) of the role ratio are displayed as menu display. ing. How many of the big hit histories (the number of winning balls, the total prize ratio, the prize ratio, the continuous prize ratio, and the number of starts) stored in the big hit history area in the RAM by the first selection unit 820 It is possible to select or display the jackpot history (three in FIG. 96B, FIG. 97, and FIG. 98). The second selection unit 825 can select to display either or both of the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio.

  The player performs a touch operation based on the movement of the finger in the up and down direction on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25 (the movement of the touch portion), and selects an object to be set. By this touch operation, a setting target item (setting item) displayed in a specific display mode such as highlight display (see the black frame of the volume adjustment display 810) is selected. That is, items displayed in a specific display mode such as highlight display are changed by the touch operation. The update of the highlight item in the first selection unit 820 and the second selection unit 825 as the menu display is executed in the effect button input process (B1009). In addition, selection (B2720 and B2721 in FIG. 95) of the volume and the brightness is performed by the touch operation based on the movement of the finger in the left and right direction (movement of the touch part). Further, the displayed value or the selection of the character may be determined by touching the central portion of the touch panel 25b (B2723 in FIG. 95, etc.). Further, the LED 690 part of the effect button 25 may be lighted to prompt the movement of the finger in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

  As described above, in the player setting mode while waiting for a customer, the player can select the display content (display mode) of the number of displayed big hit histories and the feature ratio by the menu display. Further, in the player setting mode waiting for a guest, the volume adjustment display 810 (gauge) and the brightness adjustment display 815 (gauge) are displayed, and the volume and brightness can be adjusted to the player's favorite.

[Sub display device]
FIG. 99 shows a game board 30 provided with a sub display device 830. In the above description, an example is shown in which the overall character ratio and the continuous character ratio etc. are displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. However, as shown in FIG. A configuration is also possible in which the character ratio and the continuous character ratio etc. are displayed. The sub display device 830 (movable role) is controlled by the effect control device 300 as the board effect device 44.

  In the normal position, the sub display device 830 is accommodated in the space on the back side of the upper effect unit 40c and most of the sub display device 830 can not be visually recognized in front view, but moves to the front side of the display device 41 in the operation position. It is visible. Then, at the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and the short time end timing, the effect control device 300 causes the sub display device 830 to move to the operation position, and the continuous display ratio and total service ratio in the sub display device 830. indicate. Therefore, at the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and the short time end timing, the player pays attention to the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio displayed on the sub display device 830.

[Operation and Effect of Third Embodiment]
In the above third embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) transmits the information related to the winning balls to the effect control means (effect control device 300). The effect control means (effect control device 300) is the total number of award balls paid out by the payout control means (disbursement control device 200 etc.), the number of prize balls paid out due to winning in the variable winning device. Can be displayed on the display means (for example, the display device 41 or the sub display device 830). Note that the information related to the winning balls is the calculation result of the symbol ratio itself, information for calculating the symbol ratio (number of winning balls serving as the basis of the symbol ratio), and the like.

  Therefore, it is possible to determine the state of the gaming machine (whether it is easy to win the variable winning device, whether it is easy to win the general winning port 35, etc.) by displaying the character ratio. Further, since the interest of the game is improved and the player has an impression (impression that many open states occur) that the player can easily win the prize, the player can be a motive (index) to play the game continuously. Furthermore, when the item ratio is low, there are relatively many wins on the general winning opening 35 etc. Therefore, by displaying the item ratio on the display means, the player has an interest in the general winning opening 35 as well. And the interest of the game is improved.

  The effect control means (effect control device 300) can display history information (big hit history) about the special game for a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) on the display means (for example, the display device 41 or the sub display device 830). In this case, it is possible to display the percentage of bonus items divided for each special game consisting of a round game of a predetermined number of rounds in the history information. Here, the symbol ratio divided into each special game includes the symbol ratio reset and measured each time the special game ends.

  Therefore, by calculating the symbol ratio (known in advance to become an unstable value) divided into the special game instead of the symbol ratio in the whole period, and displaying it on the display means, The player or the like is prompted to determine whether the character ratio is an abnormal value based on his / her knowledge or information other than the reference value, and erroneous determinations are reduced.

  In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) may generate a specific game (high probability state or time saving state) during a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of special figure change display games when a predetermined condition is satisfied. . Furthermore, the game control means (game control device 100) calculates the character ratio, and when the special game or the specific game is over, the effect control means (effect It may be sent to the control device 300). In this case, the symbol ratio can be displayed at the timing immediately after the symbol ratio changes significantly (the timing at which the special game or the specific game is ended). In addition, when the calculated item ratio is directly transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300) and displayed on the display means, the number of transmissions from the game control means (game control device 100) to the effect control device 300 is minimum. And the transmission load is reduced.

Fourth Embodiment
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 106. The configurations other than those described below can be applied to the configurations common to any of the first to third embodiments.

  The fourth embodiment is based on the third embodiment, but unlike the third embodiment, the effect control device 300 outputs a payout command (FIG. 101) (payout command (A1719) and an out-sphere detection command (A2017). 2.) receiving both) and calculate the character ratio (continuous character ratio and total character ratio) by itself. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 may calculate (count) the total number of winning balls in the general winning opening 35 and the number of winnings, or may calculate the general winning opening ratio. The general winning opening ratio is a ratio of the number of winning balls obtained by winning in the general winning opening 35 to the total winning balls (total number of winning balls). The processing (steps A9804, A9805, A2317, and A2318) for transmitting the calculation result of the character item ratio to the effect control device 300 in the payout performance monitoring process of FIG. 85 is unnecessary, and is not executed in the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining an ejected ball number region, an acquired ball number region, and an acquired ball number region by feature according to the fourth embodiment. The discharged ball number area, the acquired ball number area, and the earned character number area for each item are provided in RWM (read / write memory: RAM, EEPROM, etc.) of the game control apparatus 100. The same as in FIG. 17B of the first embodiment, but with respect to the general winning opening 35, two areas, ie, the left general winning combination, are the same as FIG. 17B of the first embodiment. There is provided an area for storing the total number of winning balls by winning in the opening 35 and an area for storing the total winning balls in the general winning opening 35 on the right. Thereby, the game control apparatus 100 can calculate (count) the sum total of the number of winning balls in the general winning opening 35 separately on the left and right.

  FIG. 101 is a view showing a payout command according to the fourth embodiment. Unlike the payout command of FIG. 83 of the second embodiment, the payout command according to the fourth embodiment (FIG. 101) has two types of payout commands by winning on the regular winning opening 35 corresponding to the left and right regular winning openings. is there. For example, in the winning opening information, "000" indicates the left general winning opening 35, "001" indicates the right general winning opening 35, and the payout command is represented by a hexadecimal number. The ten prize balls are “0AH”, and the ten prize balls obtained by winning on the right general winning opening 35 are “1AH”.

  In the fourth embodiment, the game control device 100 transmits the payout command of FIG. 101 not only to the payout control device 200 but also to the effect control device 300. In step A1719 of the payout command transmission process (FIG. 12), the game control apparatus 100 prepares not only the payout command to be sent to the payout control apparatus 200 but also the payout command to be sent to the production control apparatus 300 as a production command. In the payout command transmission process, an effect command setting process (FIG. 59) is executed. Similarly, in step A 2017 of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (FIG. 15A), the game control apparatus 100 transmits not only the out sphere detection command transmitted to the payout control apparatus 200 but also the out sphere detection transmitted to the effect control apparatus 300 A command is prepared as an effect command, and thereafter, an effect command setting process (FIG. 59) is executed in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. Note that the payout command and the out-of-ball detection command transmitted to the effect control device 300 are provided with a MODE portion that indicates that the information is related to the winning ball.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the effect control device 300 stores the number-of-ears-acquired ball number area for storing the number-of-ears acquired ball number obtained from the payout command (FIG. 101) in the RAM (in FIG. For example, in the RAM 322).

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure of one-shot command processing according to the fourth embodiment. The one-shot command process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1212 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 80). The same processing as that of the single-shot system command processing (FIG. 88) according to the third embodiment is assigned the same step number and the description is omitted.

  The information on the winning balls of FIG. 102 according to the fourth embodiment is the payout command of FIG. 101 transmitted from the game control apparatus 100, and the information on the winning balls of FIG. 88 according to the third embodiment is a bonus This is different from the command corresponding to the calculation result of the ratio.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command for symbol stop (the result of B1323 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit represents a high probability fluctuation number command corresponding to the high probability fluctuation number. Are determined (B1327). When the MODE portion indicates the high probability change number of times command (the result of B1327 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes high probability (time reduction) end processing (B1328), and ends the one-shot system command processing. If the MODE unit does not represent the high probability change frequency command (the result of B1327 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the one-shot system command processing as it is.

[Parts ratio setting process]
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing a procedure of an accessory ratio setting process according to the fourth embodiment. The feature ratio setting process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1322 of the one-shot system command process (FIG. 103).

  In the accessory ratio setting process according to the fourth embodiment, the effect control device 300 sets the bonus ball number region for each accessory in the RAM of the effect control device 300 based on the number of winning balls indicated in the payout command. Add and accumulate the number of balls acquired. Then, in addition to the overall character ratio and the continuous character ratio, the left and right general winning combination ratio is calculated and stored. The feature ratio setting process is executed when the effect control device 300 receives a payout command (FIG. 101) as information on the winning balls.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received payout command (FIG. 101) is a normal command (B3001). If the payout command is not normal (the result of B3001 is "N"), the bonus ratio setting process is ended. When the payout command is normal (the result of B 3001 is “Y”), the number of balls acquired per feature corresponding to the payout command (ie, the winning opening information indicated in the payout command) in the RAM of the effect control device 300 The number of winning balls indicated in the payout command is added to the value of the area (B3002). Next, the total character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are calculated from the value of each winning character classified ball area, and are stored in the total character product ratio area and the continuous character product ratio area in the RAM (B3003).

  In addition, the effect control device 300 adds and accumulates the character acquisition ball number (character number award ball number) to the character number acquisition ball number region in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. It is possible to calculate a feature ratio to the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls) in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. When the special game (big hit) ends all cleared game ball areas (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) by 0 every time it is 0 (reset), the effect control device 300 is for the previous special game. It is possible to calculate the feature ratio in the period from the end (from the time the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on before the end of the first special game) to the present.

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 calculates the left general winning opening ratio and the right general winning opening ratio from the value of the winning ball number region for each of the left and right general winning openings, and calculates the left general winning opening ratio in the RAM. The area and the right general winning opening ratio area are stored (B3004). Here, the left general winning combination opening ratio and the right general winning combination opening ratio are ratios of the number of winning balls obtained by winning on the left and right general winning openings 35 among the number of all winning balls, respectively. Note that the total number of winning balls is the sum of the values of all winning balls by feature.

  The effect control device 300 can calculate the general winning opening ratio in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present time. When the special game (big hit) is cleared to 0 for all the winning ball number area (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) every time it is finished, the effect control device 300 starts from the end of the previous special game. It is possible to calculate the general winning opening ratio in the period up to the present (from when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on before the end of the first special game).

  In addition, in step B3004, the general winning opening ratio may be calculated by adding the left general winning opening ratio and the right general winning opening ratio. Furthermore, in addition to the general winning opening ratio on the left and right, the winning opening ratio of each winning opening (starting opening 1, starting opening 2, large winning opening) other than the general winning opening is calculated and stored in the corresponding area in RAM. You may Here, the winning opening ratio is a ratio of the number of winning balls obtained by winning in the corresponding winning hole among the total winning balls.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the winning ball number region by feature to which the winning ball number has been added in step B3002 is for the winning balls of the left or right general winning opening 35 (B3005 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the left or right general winning opening 35 has a winning. If the added bonus ball area for each feature is not for the winning balls of the general winning opening 35 (the result of B3005 is "N"), that is, if there is no winning on the left or right general winning opening 35, End the item ratio setting process.

  In the case where the added bonus ball number area for the winning combination is for the winning ball of the general winning opening 35 (the result of B3005 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the left or right general winning opening 35. If there is a prize, the value of the earned ball number region for each product added in step B3002 is displayed and set (B3006). Here, the added bonus ball area for each item is the bonus ball area for the winning ball of the left general winning hole 35 when the left general winning hole 35 has a prize, and the right general prize When the prize 35 is awarded to the mouth 35, it is a field number acquisition ball number field for the winning balls of the right general prize mouth 35. The value of the added bonus ball area for each feature is the sum of the number of winning balls by winning on the left or right general winning opening 35. Note that even when only one general winning opening 35 has a prize, the value of the winning ball number area by combination of both general winning openings 35 may be displayed and set. Also, here, not only the sum of winning balls in the left or right general winning opening 35 but also the number of winnings on the left or right general winning opening 35 or the number of winnings on all the general winning openings 35, A configuration for display setting is also possible.

  As described above, when the winning combination 35 has a prize and the winning number is added to the value of the winning ball number area for the winning combination for the regular winning opening, at least the winning number of the winning combination 35 at which there is at least the current prize. The total (acquired ball number) can be displayed on the display device 41 (or the sub display device 830 in FIG. 99).

  The effect control device 300 can display the total number of winning balls of the general winning opening 35 in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present time. When the special game (big hit) is cleared to 0 for all the winning ball number area (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) every time it is finished, the effect control device 300 starts from the end of the previous special game. It is possible to display the total number of winning balls of the general winning opening 35 in the period up to the present (from the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on before the end of the first special game).

  Subsequently, an effect setting for performing an effect corresponding to the winning on the general winning opening 35 is executed (B3007), and the role ratio setting process is ended. As effects corresponding to the winning on the general winning opening 35, an LED (panel decoration device 46) provided in the vicinity of the general winning opening 35 emits light, a sound is output from a speaker, a movable role (panel producing device 44 ) Works. This effect can enhance the interest of the game and increase the player's interest in the general winning opening 35.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is a combination that is also added when the winning ball number area classified by feature of each winning opening (starting opening 1, starting opening 2, large winning opening) other than the general winning opening 35 is added. You may display and set the value of the number acquisition ball number area according to thing. As a result, the total number of winning balls (number of winning balls) of each winning opening can be displayed on the display device 41 (or the sub display device 830 in FIG. 99).

  Furthermore, in the feature ratio setting process, the effect control device 300 may calculate the number of discharged balls and the payout rate based on the payout command. In this case, the effect control device 300 has, in the RAM, a discharged ball number region storing the discharged ball number, and an acquired ball number region storing the total number of winning balls (acquired ball number). The number of balls discharged corresponds to the number of times the payout command (FIG. 101) is received, and the payout rate is the ratio (percentage)% of the number of all balls to the number of balls discharged.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 may back up the calculation results (value of the winning ball number area for each item, the item ratio, the general winning opening ratio, etc.) in the item ratio setting process to the FeRAM 323.

[High probability (time reduction) end processing]
FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the high probability (short) end process according to the fourth embodiment. The high probability (time saving) end process is executed by the effect control device 300 in step B1328 of the one-shot system command process (FIG. 103).

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the received high probability change number command is a normal command (B3201). If the high probability change frequency command is not normal (the result of B3201 is “N”), the high probability (time saving) end processing is ended. If the high probability change frequency command is normal (the result of B3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether the high probability change frequency is 0 (B3202). In the present embodiment, the number of times of high probability variation is also the number of short time variations.

  If the number of times of high probability fluctuation (the number of short time fluctuations) is not 0 (the result of B3202 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the high probability (time short) end processing as it is. On the other hand, when the high probability change frequency (time change frequency) is 0 (the result of B3202 is "Y"), the display setting of character combination ratio (continuous character ratio and all character ratio) and left and right general winning opening ratio To finish the high probability (short) termination process. The sum of the left and right general winning opening ratios may be displayed and set as the general winning opening ratio.

  In this manner, the effect control device 300 always calculates the character ratio (the continuous character ratio and the total character ratio) and the left and right general winning opening ratio each time the payout command is received, and the high probability end timing, And, at the time saving end timing, it is possible to display the character item ratio and the left and right general winning opening ratio on the display device 41 and the sub display device 830.

[Big hit system command processing]
FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the procedure of the jackpot command processing according to the fourth embodiment. The jackpot command processing is executed in step B1208 in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 80). The steps having the same contents as the big hit system command processing (FIG. 93) of the third embodiment have the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the big hit system command represents an ending (B2110). If the MODE part indicates ending (the result of B2110 is “Y”), that is, if the big hit system command is the ending command, the effect control device 300 produces an effect corresponding to the feature ratio and the number of balls obtained in the big hit. Point addition effect display is set as effect display when adding points (B2111).

  Next, the effect control device 300 sets the final acquired payout number as a set of big hit history in the RAM together with the character ratio (continuous character ratio and all character ratio) and the left and right general winning character ratio. It saves in the history area (B3401). Then, an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect is executed (B3402). In the ending effect setting process, as part of the ending effect, the setting of the display of the character ratio (continuous character ratio and total character ratio) and the left and right general winning opening ratio is also executed. The sum of the left and right general winning opening ratios may be displayed and set as the general winning opening ratio. The ending effect may be set in correspondence with the final acquired payout number, the feature ratio, and the left and right general winning opening ratio.

  In this manner, the effect control device 300 always calculates the character ratio (continuous character ratio and all character ratio) and the left and right general winning opening ratio each time a payout command is received, and the big hit end timing (ending) In the display unit 41 and the sub display unit 830, the bonus item ratio and the left and right general winning opening ratio can be displayed.

  The effect control device 300 calculates the character ratio and the left and right general winning opening ratio only at the big hit end timing, the high probability end timing, and the time reduction end timing, and the character products in the display device 41 or the sub display device 830. It is also possible to display the ratio and the left and right general winning opening ratio.

[Screen transition]
FIG. 106A and FIG. 106B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the fourth embodiment, which is an example of the screen transition of the entire game. Since FIG. 106A (A)-(C) and FIG. 106B (C)-(C) correspond to FIG. 96A (A)-(C) and FIG. 96B (C)-(C) respectively, they are described below. The configuration is the same as in FIGS. 106A and 106B except for the configuration.

  In (C) of FIG. 106A, since the left general winning opening 35 has a prize, the value of the winning ball number area (in the RAM of the effect control device 300) for the winning balls of the left general winning opening 35 is displayed. (B3006 in FIG. 103). That is, the total number of winning balls obtained by winning in the left general winning opening 35 is displayed by the total winning ball number display “total left winning prize opening ball total 122”. Here, a configuration is also possible in which the number of winnings on the left common winning opening 35 is displayed. In addition, although the total prize ball number display is displayed so as not to overlap with other effects (here, reach effect), when the display range is overlapped with other effects and interferes, the total number of balls sphere total display is displayed It does not have to be done.

  In addition, also when there is a prize in each prize mouth (starting mouth 1, starting mouth 2) other than a general prize mouth, the total of the number of prize balls acquired by the prize for each prize mouth and the number of times of prize are displayed. It is also good.

  106B, a general winning opening ratio display area 842 for displaying the left and right general winning opening ratios is provided in the big hit history display portion 760 of FIG. 96B, and the general at the big hit end timing (ending) The winning opening ratio display area 842 displays the left and right normal winning opening ratios. In addition, the number of winning prizes, the character ratio (continuous character ratio and total character ratio), and the left and right general winning combination opening ratio are included and stored in one big hit history (B3401 in FIG. 106). Moreover, although the display of the continuous character ratio is omitted, it may be displayed. Furthermore, in the player setting mode (FIG. 98) waiting for a customer, it may be configured to be able to select whether or not to display the general winning opening ratio by the menu display (the second selection portion 825).

  The general winning opening ratio may be calculated based on the number of winning balls obtained by winning on the general winning opening in the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the end of each special game, or one special game. From the end of the game (before the end of the first special game is from the time the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on), it is calculated for the number of prize balls obtained by winning in the general winning opening during the period until the end of the next special game It may be something.

  In (f) of FIG. 106B, since the right general winning opening 35 has a prize, the value of the winning ball number area (within the RAM of the effect control device 300) for the winning ball of the right general winning opening 35 is displayed. (B3006 in FIG. 103). That is, the total of the number of winning balls obtained by the winning on the right general winning opening 35 is displayed by the total number of winning balls display “total 152 right general winning openings prize balls”. Here, a configuration is also possible in which the number of winnings on the right general winning opening 35 is displayed.

  In (G) of FIG. 106B, at the end of the specific gaming state (high probability state or time saving state), in addition to the prize ratio, the left and right general winning opening ratios are displayed in the general winning opening ratio display area 842 Ru. In addition, although the display of the continuous character ratio is omitted, it may be displayed. The general winning opening ratio may be calculated with respect to the number of winning balls obtained by winning on the general winning opening during the entire period from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the end of the specific gaming state, or the end of the special game It may be calculated with respect to the number of winning balls obtained by winning in the general winning opening during the period from the time before the end of the specific gaming state (from when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on before the end of the first special game).

[Operation and Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment described above, the game control means (game control device 100) transmits a payout command (FIG. 101) to the effect control means (effect control device 300) as the information related to the winning balls. The effect control means (effect control device 300) receives the payout command (FIG. 101), calculates the role ratio by itself, and can display it on the display means (display device 41 or sub display device 830). Therefore, it is possible to determine the state of the gaming machine (whether it is easy to win the variable winning device, whether it is easy to win the general winning port 35, etc.) by displaying the character ratio. In addition, since the winnings to the general winning opening 35 and the like are relatively large when the character ratio is low, the player is interested in the general winning hole 35 by displaying the character ratio on the display means. Become.

  Furthermore, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can calculate the general winning opening ratio from the received payout command and can display it on the display means. Therefore, the player is also interested in the general winning opening 35. In addition, when there is a prize in the general winning opening 35, it is possible to calculate the total number of winning balls and the number of winnings in the general winning opening 35 from the received payout command and display it on the display means. This increases the interest of the player to the general winning opening 35.

Fifth Embodiment
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as the configurations of the first to fourth embodiments.

  FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 107, with respect to the game board of FIG. 2A, while the discharged ball number display portion 66, the payout rate display portion 67, and the character ratio display portion 68 of the batch display device 50 are deleted, A first item ratio warning display unit 844 (first display) and a second item ratio warning display unit 846 (second display) are provided.

  Note that the effect control device 300 displays the specific values of the number of discharged balls, the payout rate, and / or the character ratio on the display device 41 as shown in FIGS. 81 and 96-98. In this case, the effect control device 300 displays the feature ratio on the display screen of the display device 41 only while waiting for a customer (in the customer waiting state), and other than waiting for customers, ie, not waiting for demonstrations In the state in which the gaming ball is being fired, the feature ratio may not be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. That is, a configuration is also possible in which step B1504 and B1507 in FIG. 90, high probability (short and short) end processing in FIG. 104, display setting of the bonus ratio in step B3402 in FIG.

  The first item ratio warning display unit 844 as a first warning notification unit is composed of one LED (light emitting unit), and lights up when all the item ratios exceed the reference value (predetermined value 70%). , And execute a warning display indicating that the total role ratio has exceeded the reference value. The second item ratio warning display unit 846 as a second warning notification unit includes one LED (light emitting unit), and lights up when the continuous combination product ratio exceeds a reference value (predetermined value 60%). , And executes a warning display indicating that the continuous character ratio has exceeded the reference value.

  The number of discharged balls display portion 66, the payout rate display portion 67, and the character ratio display portion 68 are constituted by a 7-segment type display unit to display numerical values, and the cost is high. Since the ball ratio display unit 67 and the character ratio display unit 68 are eliminated and the first character ratio warning display unit 844 (LED) and the second character ratio warning display unit 846 (LED) are provided, the cost is reduced. Further, the first character ratio warning display portion 844 and the second character ratio warning display portion 846 of the collective display device 50 are controlled by the game control device 100 (main board) to be inspected by the test shooting test engine. Therefore, the credibility of the display is secured.

  The first character ratio warning display unit 844 and the second character ratio warning display unit 846 are provided on the rear surface (rear surface) of the game control apparatus 100 provided on the rear surface of the gaming machine 10, and the rear surface side of the gaming machine 10 It may be visible only from the Then, the first feature ratio warning display unit 844 and the second feature ratio warning display unit 846 may be installed on the substrate (main substrate) of the game control apparatus 100. In this case, since the substrate (main substrate) of the game control apparatus 100 is sealed so as not to be opened in the case (as it is crimped), the first character ratio warning display portion 844 and the second character ratio The display on the warning display portion 846 can not be made unauthorized.

  In addition, the warning of the ratio is displayed, for example, when the glass frame or the front frame is opened, the warning of the ratio is displayed together with an error message (display of glass frame opening error, front frame opening error). You may do it.

[Dumped ball performance monitoring process]
FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a to-do-ball performance monitoring process according to the fifth embodiment. The game performance monitoring process is executed by the game control apparatus 100 in step A2211 of the winning number counter update process (FIG. 17A). FIG. 108 is obtained by replacing step A9803 of FIG. 85 with steps A9803a and A9803b. In addition, the step of the same content as the processing for monitoring the performance of the broken ball in FIG. 85 has the same step number and the description is omitted.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets a warning display when the calculation result exceeds the reference value after calculating both the total character ratio and the continuous character ratio based on the character acquisition ball number (A9801, A9802) (A9803a). A warning display is set to light the first item ratio warning display unit 844 (LED) when the calculation result of the all item ratio exceeds the reference value (70%). When the calculation result of the continuous combination rate exceeds the reference value (60%), a warning display is set to light the second combination ratio warning display part 846 (LED). When the calculation result of the total role ratio and the continuous role ratio exceeds the respective reference values, the first role ratio warning display portion 844 (LED) and the second portion ratio warning display portion 846 (LED) Set the warning display to light both.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the segment data corresponding to the warning display in the segment area. Thereby, when warning display is performed, the first item ratio warning display unit 844 and / or the second item ratio warning display unit 846 is lighted.

  In addition to the first item ratio warning display unit 844 and the second item ratio warning display unit 846, as in the second embodiment, the first item ratio for which display control is executed by the payout control device 200. A warning display unit and a second item ratio warning display unit may be provided in the payout control device 200 as well. The payout control device 200 calculates the symbol ratio based on the payout command, and when the calculation result of the symbol ratio exceeds the reference value, the first symbol ratio warning display unit and the second symbol ratio warning display Turn on the unit. The first character ratio warning display unit and the second character ratio warning display unit may be provided on the upper tray unit.

  Further, a warning notification unit (the first item ratio warning display unit 844 and / or the second item ratio warning display unit 846) is provided on the display screen of the display device 41, and the combination ratio is a reference value (predetermined value). When it exceeds, a warning display may be displayed on the warning notification unit of the display device 41, which indicates that the accessory ratio has exceeded the reference value. In this case, the effect control device 300 determines whether the character ratio calculated by itself based on the payout command (FIG. 101) or the character ratio received from the game control device 100 exceeds the reference value, When the object ratio exceeds the reference value, a warning display is displayed on the warning notification unit of the display device 41. Furthermore, the upper speaker 19a and / or the lower speaker 19b may be used as a warning notification unit, and the effect control device 300 may be configured to notify by voice from the warning notification unit when the character ratio exceeds a reference value. is there. In addition, when the item ratio exceeds the reference value, an external device (such as a hall computer) may be notified via the external information terminal 71 that the item ratio exceeds the reference value.

[Operation and Effect of Fifth Embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment described above, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can notify that the character ratio exceeds the predetermined value when the character ratio exceeds the predetermined value. As described above, when it is notified (displayed) that the character item ratio has exceeded the predetermined value, the state of the gaming machine (is it easy to win the fluctuation winning device or the general winning character by the notification (display) regarding the character object ratio It becomes possible to judge whether it is easy to win the mouth 35 or the like. In addition, when it is informed that the feature ratio has exceeded the predetermined value, there is a possibility that there is little possibility of winning in the general winning opening 35 or the like, so the player will also have an interest in the general winning opening 35, The interest of the game is improved.

  The warning display unit (the first item ratio warning display unit 844 and / or the second item ratio warning display unit 846) is controlled by the game control unit (the game control apparatus 100) and the combination ratio exceeds the predetermined value. It is possible to display that. The warning display means can be configured of, for example, a single LED, but the display (character ratio display section 68) for directly displaying the numerical value of the character ratio is not necessary, and the cost can be reduced. In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) transmits information related to the winning balls to the effect control means (effect control device 300), and the effect control means (effect control device 300) displays the character ratio. Can also be displayed. Therefore, the player or the like can check the character ratio by numerical values, but the display means controlled by the effect control means (effect control device 300) is provided to a normal gaming machine, and the cost increase is significant. Absent.

  The effect control means (effect control device 300) may display the role ratio on the display screen of the display means (the display device 41 or the sub display device 830) only while waiting for a customer (in a customer waiting state). In this case, the item ratio is shown only to the player or the like who is selecting the gaming machine (game table) to be used, and the symbol ratio is not displayed during the game. Therefore, the display of the feature ratio does not get in the way of the effect of the display device 41 during the game. Further, the control of the effect control means (effect control device 300) is simple.

  In addition, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can display history information (big hit history) about the special game for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) on the display means (for example, the display device 41 or the sub display device 830) is there. In this case, it is possible to display the percentage of bonus items divided for each special game consisting of a round game of a predetermined number of rounds in the history information. Here, the symbol ratio divided into each special game includes the symbol ratio reset and measured each time the special game ends.

  Therefore, by calculating the symbol ratio (known in advance to become an unstable value) divided into the special game instead of the symbol ratio in the whole period, and displaying it on the display means, The player or the like tries to determine whether or not the feature ratio is an abnormal value based on his / her knowledge and information other than the reference value, thereby reducing erroneous determinations.

Sixth Embodiment
The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 113. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as the configurations of the first to fifth embodiments.

  In the sixth embodiment, the special winning opening count number, which is the number of winnings in one big hit round to the special winning prize opening of the special variation winning device 39, exceeds the upper limit (for example, 9) to the first threshold (for example 10 to 10). When 11) is reached, a first over prize notification is performed to notify that an overkill (so-called over winning) has occurred. Furthermore, when the special winning opening count exceeds the first threshold and reaches the second threshold (e.g., 12; even if the first threshold is 10, it may be 11), the second for warning of an abnormal overtone. Give an over prize notification. The second over winning notification is a notification of a mode different from the first over winning notification. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the over winning notification is performed in two steps according to the special winning opening count number.

[Over winning notification process]
FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the over winning notification processing according to the sixth embodiment.

  The over winning notification process is executed by the effect control device 300 each time a game ball wins the special winning opening of the special variation winning device 39. In the over winning notification process, in step B1319 of the one-shot system command processing (FIG. 88, FIG. 102) described above, the count command (big winning opening count command) is received as information regarding winning on the big winning opening, counting The information processing may be executed after the count number (large winning opening count number) in the current round is updated by 1 in the information setting process (B1320: FIG. 89) (after step B1403). The special winning opening count means the number of winnings on the special winning opening in one open state (open state, round). Further, the special winning opening count number is equal to the number of receptions by the effect control device 300 or the number of transmissions from the game control device 100 of information on winning to the special winning opening in one big hit round.

  In addition, the over prize winning notification process, when the payout command (Figure 83, Figure 101) is received as information on the winning ball (information on winning of the game ball) in step B1321 of the single-shot system command process (Figure 102) It may be executed in the ratio setting process (B1322: FIG. 103). That is, instead of the count number in the count information setting process (FIG. 89), it is possible to use the number of times of receiving the payout command corresponding to the winning to the special winning opening in the current round as the special winning opening count.

  Also in the sixth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a payout command (FIG. 101) not only to the payout control apparatus 200 but also to the effect control apparatus 300. That is, the game control device 100 prepares a payout command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 in step A1719 of the payout command transmission processing (FIG. 12), and executes the effect command setting processing (FIG. 59).

  In the over winning notification process, the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not there is +1 update of the large winning opening count number (count number), that is, whether or not there is a winning on the large winning opening (B3801). If there is no +1 update of the special winning opening count, that is, if there is no winning to the special winning opening (the result of B3801 is "N"), the over winning notification processing is ended. The big winning opening count number is cleared to 0 each time one big hit round is completed.

  If there is a +1 update of the special winning opening count number, that is, if there is a winning to the special winning opening (result of B3801 is "Y"), the effect control device 300, the special winning opening count is more than the first threshold It is determined whether or not (B3802). The first threshold is a value (e.g., 10 to 11) larger than the upper limit (e.g., 9) of the special winning opening count number. When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the first threshold (the result of B 3802 is “N”), the over winning notification process is ended.

  When the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the first threshold (the result of B 3802 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines the over-pricing number (over-prize number) from which the number of over-winning balls is displayed. The number of winning balls (14 in this case) of the special winning opening is added (B 3803). The number of over winning prizes is the sum of the number of winning balls paid out by the over winning during one big hit (during a predetermined gaming state). At the end of the jackpot ending, the number of over winnings is cleared to zero.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the second threshold (B3804). The second threshold is a value larger than the first threshold of the special winning opening count number (for example, 12; it may be 11 if the first threshold is 10), and the hall / player setting mode processing is performed as described later. It is possible to change the person concerned with the hall such as the staff of the (game arcade).

  When the special winning opening count is not more than the second threshold (the result of B3804 is "N"), that is, when the special winning opening count is above the first threshold and less than the second threshold, the special winning opening count is the upper limit A first over prize notification is issued to notify that (for example, 9) has been exceeded (that is, occurrence of over prize) (B3805). The process of step B3805 constitutes a first notification unit. Further, the upper limit value is a special winning opening count number at which the special variation winning device 39 (big winning opening) starts closing.

  On the other hand, when the special winning opening count is equal to or larger than the second threshold (the result of B3804 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 further sets the second winning threshold when the large winning opening count exceeds the first threshold. For example, if it reaches 12), a second over prize notification is issued to alert the user of an abnormal over prize (excess prize) (B3806). The process of step B3806 constitutes a second notification unit.

  Even if the player is playing a normal game, the large winning opening count may reach the first threshold by chance. In addition, as the effect during the big hit round, the game ball is made to stay for a predetermined period in the holding portion arranged at the upper part of the special fluctuation winning device 39, and then the holding portion is opened to drop the gaming ball into the special fluctuation winning device 39 at once. There is a gaming machine of such a configuration, but in the case of having such a configuration, the large winning opening count number reaches the first threshold relatively easily. However, in the second threshold, the player performs anomalous hitting as a special hitting method, or makes the gaming ball attached with a thread enter the special variation winning device 39 and repeatedly puts in and out the big winning opening. It is difficult to reach without fraud.

[Over winning notification mode]
FIG. 110A is a table showing an example of a notification mode of the first over winning notification and the second over winning notification. For example, the first over winning notification and the second over winning notification are performed using voice and / or image display as a notification method.

  In the first over prize notification, the effect control device 300 causes the voice of the character A (for example, "Wow!") To flow from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b, and the character A and its serif (for example, "Wow! !] Is displayed as an image. In the second over prize notification, the effect control device 300 causes the voice of the character B (for example, "KOLLER!") To flow from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b, and the character B and its serif (for example, "KOLLER!") To the display device 41. ) To display an image. The character A and the character B are different characters. For example, the characters A and B may be the main character and its enemy character in the motif (subject) of the effect.

  As described above, the second over winning notification is a notification of a different mode in which the first over winning notification is a different form, and the first over winning notification gives the player an impression of being comfortable, whereas the second over winning notification is: An unpleasant impression is given to the player and it becomes a warning.

  In addition, you may use not a voice but a simple sound and music as an audio | voice. For example, even if the first over prize notification is informed by a blessing sound (sound causing the player to have a pleasant feeling) and the second over prize notification is notified by a warning sound (a sound causing the player to have an unpleasant feeling). Good.

  FIG. 110B is a table showing a light emission mode of the LED that illuminates the inside of the special winning opening, as another example of the notification modes of the first over winning notification and the second over winning notification. The first over prize notification and the second over prize notification may be executed using the light emission of the LED that illuminates the inside of the special winning opening in addition to voice, image display, voice or image display as a notification method. . An LED for illuminating the inside of the special winning opening is provided in the special variation winning device 39 as one of the board decoration devices 46.

  In the first over winning notification, the effect control device 300 brightens the LED that illuminates the big winning opening yellow in the meaning of congratulating the over winning, and in the second over winning notification, warns the over winning in the large winning The LED that illuminates the mouth emits red light. In addition, the LED that illuminates the inside of the special winning opening usually emits light in white. In another light emission mode, the LEDs can be blinked in different modes as the first over prize notification or the second over prize notification.

[Screen transition]
FIG. 111 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the sixth embodiment, and is an example of the screen transition at the time of the big hit end to the big hit end (at the time of ending).

  (S) of FIG. 111 is the same as (E) of FIG. 96A, and shows the screen of the eighth round (8R) of the big hit.

  In (ii), in the eighth round (8R), the first winning prize notification is performed because the large winning opening count number has exceeded the upper limit value at which the closing of the large winning opening starts and the first threshold (for example 10) is reached. It is done. In the first over prize notification, the display device 41 displays the character A (蛙) and its line (for example, "wow!"). At the same time, the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit the voice of the character A (for example, "Wow!"). In addition, as a display or voice in the first over winning notification, it may be notified more directly that the big winning opening count number has reached the first threshold (for example, “wow! 10 achievements!”).

  In (S), in the eighth round, since the special winning opening count number exceeds the first threshold and reaches the second threshold (for example, 11), the second over winning notification is executed. In the second over prize notification, the display device 41 displays the character B (snake) and its serif (for example, “Collar!”). At the same time, the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit the voice of the character B (for example, "KOLLER!"). In addition, as a display or voice in the second over prize notification, it may be notified more directly that the big winning opening count number has reached the second threshold (for example, “11 is too much. Coller!” ).

  (S) of FIG. 111 is the same as (F) of FIG. 96A, and shows the screen of the last round (16R) of the big hit.

  (Seo in FIG. 111 corresponds to (G) in FIG. 96B, but the display device 41 in the end at the end of the special game state (big hit) over wins the big winning opening during one big hit The number of winning balls (number of winning balls) acquired by the player is displayed as “224 cars” as the number of winning balls. Here, “both” means the number, but “both” does not have to correspond exactly to the number as long as the number is reflected. For example, it is also possible to display "112" with "two" as two units.

  Note that by displaying the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls) acquired by the over winning, the player can have a sense of superiority that a large number of over winnings can be generated, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when it is confirmed that the number of balls obtained by the over-winning is extremely large, a person in charge of a hole such as a person in charge of a hall may or may have made a fraudulent act or the player has made an illegal act. Therefore, the player can be marked as a caution target person.

  In the ending screen of (S), although the number of obtained balls is displayed as “2016,” it corresponds to 14 prize balls × 9 counts (count number upper limit value) × 16 rounds = 2016. is there. That is, the number of obtained balls obtained is the number of obtained balls finally obtained in one big hit (2240) minus the number of balls obtained by the over winning (the number of raised balls). Furthermore, the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls) acquired by the winning of the general winning hole 35 during the jackpot is displayed as "extra". Here, 10 prize balls × about 3 prizes per 1 R × 16 R = 480 are exemplified as the number of balls obtained by winning on the general prize port 35.

  Incidentally, in (S) of FIG. 111, a right-handed display (“right-handed! →”), which is a notification instructing the player to hit the right, which is not shown in (K) of FIG. 96B, is ending. It is also being run. Here, the right-handed display is information related to the player's operation on the operation unit (increasing the turning operation amount of the operation handle 24), and therefore, the right-handed display is displayed on the front side prior to other displays. There is. Here, the right-handed display as information related to the player's operation may be displayed darkly, the other display may be lightly displayed, and another display may be displayed if the display range of the other display and the right-handed display overlap. Does not have to be displayed. Further, when the display ranges of the other display and the right-handed display overlap, those displays may be displayed alternately. That is, by displaying information to be displayed based on a preset priority when various displays are mixed, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying the display content. Further, the other displays are effect image display in which a shooting star flows and display in the speech display portion 770a, but may include display in the character 770 or the big hit history display portion 760.

  (T) of FIG. 111 corresponds to (G) of FIG. 96B, and shows the display screen when the specific gaming state (high probability state or time saving state) “RUSH” is generated after the big hit state ends. The right-handed display is still being performed.

[Hole / player setting mode processing]
FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the procedure of hole / player setting mode processing (B1010 in FIG. 78) according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 112, an over prize setting process (B4001) is added to the hall / player setting mode process (FIG. 95) of the third embodiment, but the other steps are the same and have the same step numbers. And the explanation is omitted.

  For example, when a predetermined operation of the effect button 25 is performed at a predetermined timing or a predetermined switch on the back side of the gaming machine 10 is operated, the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B2703 is “Y ), And can enter the hole setting mode (B2704-B2716).

  Following the hall LED luminance adjustment process (B2707), the effect control device 300 executes an over prize setting process (B4001), and then executes a liquid crystal luminance adjustment process (B2708). In the over winning setting process, a second threshold value is set to warn that an abnormal over winning (excess winning) is made.

[Display screen of hole setting mode]
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 in the hole setting mode. By screen drawing based on the screen drawing start setting (B2704), various adjustment displays (meters, gauges, etc.) for performing various adjustments, menu displays for various selections, and the like are displayed on the display device 41.

  The various adjustment displays include a volume setting display 861 for selecting and setting the volume, a brightness setting display 863 for selecting and setting the LED brightness, an over prize warning setting display 865 for selecting and setting the second threshold, and a liquid crystal brightness ( There is a liquid crystal brightness setting display 867 for selecting and setting the brightness of the display device 41). In the menu display, a power saving setting display 869 for performing selection setting of power saving, a logo color setting display 871 for selecting and setting an issuing color of a logo feature, etc., an operation selected for finalizing the selection setting The setting confirmation operation display 873 for confirming the setting when there is a setting confirmation operation of the person (operation for pressing the production button 25), and the factory setting display 875 for performing selection setting of whether to set to the factory default. is there.

  In addition, on the display screen in the hole setting mode, an operation method display 877 indicating the operation method of the effect button 25 and a fourth symbol setting display 879 for setting the fourth symbol of the special view fluctuation display game are displayed. The fourth symbol (fourth special symbol) is the left (first special symbol), the right (second special symbol), or the middle (third special symbol) on the display device 41 in the decorative special symbol variation display game. The special symbol other than the symbol (identification information) is fluctuated by repetition (flickering) of lighting display and extinguishing display, etc., to indicate that the special figure variation display game is being executed. The variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by the display device 41 or another sub display device, or an LED lamp.

  In the over prize warning setting display 865, the meter is displayed by one scale (one step) by default, and indicates a default value of the second threshold. Since the first threshold differs depending on the model (spec) of the gaming machine 10, the default value of the second threshold also varies depending on the model (spec) of the gaming machine 10. The effect control device 300 can set the default value of the second threshold and the first threshold in the model setting process (B 1302 in FIG. 88 or 102) in accordance with the received model specification command (model information). As described above, since the default value of the second threshold is a value corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, selection and setting of the second threshold can be simplified.

  For example, if the first threshold for over winning is 10, the default value for the second threshold is 11. The operator (in particular, the attendant of the game arcade) displays the over prize warning setting display 865 in a specific display mode (highlight display (refer to black frame)) by the touch operation of the effect button 25 in the vertical direction. The value of the second threshold is increased or decreased by the direction touch operation. When the effect button 25 is touch-operated to the right, the meter displayed is increased to two scales (two stages) in the over prize warning setting display 865, and the second threshold value 12 is displayed beside the meter. The meter can be adjusted on a 1 to 5 scale (1 to 5 steps). When the setting confirmation operation display 873 is selected by the vertical touch operation of the effect button 25 and the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 (operation of pressing the effect button 25) is performed, the selected second threshold is fixed. In this manner, the second threshold can be flexibly set (changed) in accordance with the intention of the game hall (hall).

  The following configuration is also possible as a modification of the sixth embodiment described above.

  The over winning notification (the first over winning notification or the second over winning notification) is executed each time the over winning occurs, but when the special winning opening count number reaches the first threshold or the second threshold ( The over winning notification may be performed only immediately after), and the over winning notification may not be performed when the large winning opening count number is other than the first threshold and the second threshold.

  In a special gaming state consisting of a predetermined number of round games, the first over prize notification or the second over prize notification may be executed only in a specific round (specific round game). In particular, in the final round, since the time until the ending is short, it is not necessary to execute the first over prize notification or the second over prize notification so as not to overlap with the ending.

  Also, the game control apparatus 100 can transmit a payout command (FIGS. 83 and 101) to the game arcade internal control device (hall computer) as an external device, and the external device can execute the over prize notification process of FIG. . In this case, in the external device, it is not necessary to execute the first over winning notification, but the second over winning notification is performed.

  Furthermore, the over winning notification of the sixth embodiment can be applied not only to the over winning of the big winning opening but also to the over winning of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second start winning opening). For example, in a predetermined gaming state (specific gaming state, general charge support state, etc.), the effect control device 300 sets the number of winnings on the second start winning opening to a reference value (one time the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 is opened). For example, the first over prize notification is performed when the first threshold (for example, three) larger than two is reached, and the second over prize notification is performed when the second threshold (for example, four) is reached. You may In addition, the effect control device 300 counts the number of winnings on the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second start winning opening) as a count number by receiving a payout command (FIG. 83, FIG. 101) from the game control device 100. The over winning notification process of FIG. 109 can be applied. As a result, also with regard to the normal fluctuation winning device 37, it is possible to execute different over winning notification in two steps, and to warn against an abnormal over winning (over winning) while enhancing the interest of the game.

[Operation and effect of the sixth embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 is in a predetermined gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game or spread figure variation display game) is a predetermined result. And a specific gaming state (general power support state)) can be generated. The fluctuation winning device (the special fluctuation winning device 39 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37) is in the open state (opened state, operating state) in the predetermined gaming state, and is more than the closed state (non-opened state, non-operating state) in the open state. It becomes easy to win the game ball. The detection means (count switch 39a (large winning opening switch) and starting opening 2 switch 37a) detect winning of the game ball on the variable winning device.

  Furthermore, the game control means (game control device 100) produces information (big winning opening count command and payout command) regarding the winning of the game ball when the detection of the game ball to the variable winning device is detected by the detection means. It transmits to a control means (effect control apparatus 300). The first notification means (B3805 in FIG. 109) of the effect control means (effect control device 300) has the number of winnings of the game ball on the variable winning device (or the number of transmissions of information related to the game ball winning) of one. When the first threshold value is reached in the open state, the first excess prize notification (first over prize notification) is executed. The second notification means (B3806 in FIG. 109) of the effect control means (effect control device 300) reaches a second threshold value in which the number of times the gaming ball has won the variable winning device is greater than the first threshold value in one open state. When it is determined, the second over-winning notification (second over-winning notification) is executed. For example, unlike the notification mode of the first excess prize notification, the notification mode of the second excess prize notification may be a warning.

  The number of winnings is abnormally large and the possibility of chance is low when the number of winnings of the game ball on the variable winning device exceeds the upper limit (specified number, reference value) or the first threshold and becomes equal to or greater than the second threshold. . However, according to the above configuration, when such an abnormal overtone winning (over winning) occurs, a warning can be issued by the second overcoming prize notification (second over prize notification).

  In the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can change the second threshold according to an operation (touch operation etc.) on the operation means (effect button 25) operable by the player. It is. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the second threshold for warning in accordance with the intention of the game hall (hall).

  Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) determines that the number of winnings on the variable winning device is equal to or more than the first threshold in one predetermined game state (special game state or specific game state). The number of award balls paid out is totaled (B 3803 in FIG. 109), and the total number of award balls is displayed on the display means (display device 41) at the end of the predetermined gaming state. Therefore, the player can know how much the over winning can be generated in the predetermined gaming state, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, a person in charge of a hole such as a person in charge of a hole may have made a possibility that a player may be irregularly hit or a wrongdoing, if the total number indicating the number of payouts obtained by over winning is extremely large. I can recognize sex.

Seventh Embodiment
The seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as the configurations of the first to sixth embodiments.

  In the seventh embodiment, the effect control device 300 temporarily stops the effect mode of the decoration special view change display game as the effect (change effect) during the change by the above-mentioned change effect setting process (B1905 in FIG. 92). Set to include swing fluctuation). In addition, the fluctuation production setting process (B1905 of FIG. 92) etc. which the production control apparatus 300 performs comprise a temporary stop execution means.

  FIG. 114 is a timing chart for explaining the movement state of each decorative special symbol (identification information: left symbol, right symbol, middle symbol) in the decorative special view variable display game according to the seventh embodiment. At the start of the decorative special figure variation display game, the left symbol 891 (first special symbol), the right symbol 892 (second special symbol), and the middle symbol 893 (third special symbol) all start to change. Then, after a predetermined time Ta has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the left symbol 891 is temporarily stopped, and the temporarily stopped left symbol (first stop symbol) is shaken and fluctuates due to the vibration operation. After that, this swing fluctuation becomes a notice effect for giving notice that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state when the right symbol 892 is stopped. For example, reach is generated by increasing the swing width (motion width) of the swing fluctuation after the left symbol 891 temporarily stops, as compared with the case where the decorative special-pattern variation display game is stopped without the reach being generated. The player is notified that there is a possibility of doing so.

  Next, after a predetermined time Tb from the start of fluctuation, the right symbol 892 temporarily stops and reaches the reach state, and both the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 and the temporarily stopped right symbol 892 (second stop symbol) shake due to the vibration operation Shake. Then, after a predetermined time Tc has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the middle symbol 893 is temporarily stopped and is in a symbol determination waiting state, the left symbol 891 temporarily stopped, the right symbol 892 temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol 893 temporarily stopped 3 stop pattern) shakes and fluctuates due to the vibration operation. Then, after a predetermined time Td from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation is finished and the three stop symbols are completely stopped and the symbols are determined, and the result (stop symbol) of the decorative special figure variation display game is a big hit result (special result aspect) ) Or finalize the result.

  If the symbol is not determined, the re-variation may be started before the predetermined time Td elapses and the pseudo continuous notice may be made. In particular, in the pseudo continuous advance notice, the re-variation symbol may be temporarily stopped as a middle symbol 893. In the pseudo continuous advance (pseudo continuous production), the decoration special symbol is temporarily stopped in a stop mode other than the special result mode (pseudo stop) and then repeated pseudo fluctuation (re-variation) is repeated several times. An effect is produced as if the display game is being played continuously.

  The time (period) to display the fixed decoration special symbol is the symbol stop display time after the symbol finalization timing Td where the symbol is finalized (for example, the time from Td to the start of the next special pattern variation display game, etc. For example, 600 msec). In the present embodiment, the time (Td-Tc) in the symbol determination waiting state from the middle symbol stop timing Tc at which the middle symbol 893 is temporarily stopped to the symbol determination timing Td is set longer than the symbol stop display time. Therefore, in the symbol determination waiting state, it is possible to make the player sufficiently have a sense of re-evolving expectation.

  FIG. 115 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order according to the seventh embodiment, in which a temporary stop (reach announcement state) of one symbol of (na) is generated from the reach of (iv) It is an example of a screen transition which shows the mode of the decoration special figure change display game until temporary stop (waiting state of symbol determination) of three symbols of (N).

  (N) in FIG. 115 corresponds to immediately after the elapse of a predetermined time Ta, and only the left symbol 891 temporarily stops due to the fluctuation and starts reach notice as the first temporary stop state. At the time of the advance notice of the reach, the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 is fluctuating (oscillating motion) with a large motion width V1 (first motion width). Since the operation width (amplitude) of the left symbol 891 is large, the player can pay attention to know which symbol the right symbol 892 will temporarily reach if it is temporarily stopped.

  The left pattern 891 swings only in the vertical direction (longitudinal direction) centering on the reference position, but instead, a large operating width (amplitude) W1 only in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) You may make a fluctuation of The operation width W1 in the left-right direction may be the same as or different from the operation width V1 in the vertical direction. In addition, when the left symbol 891 vibrates in both the vertical direction and the left and right direction, the vibration in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction may be made the same phase or the opposite phase so as to swing and fluctuate. Furthermore, the left graphic 891 can also move in a circular or elliptical shape by shifting the phase of vibration in the vertical and horizontal directions from the same phase or the opposite phase.

  (D) in FIG. 115 corresponds to immediately after the elapse of a predetermined time Tb, and in the second temporary stop state, the right symbol 892 temporarily stops following the left symbol 891 to generate reach. Here, the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 and the temporarily stopped right symbol 892 vibrate with the second operation width (V2 or W2) to perform swing fluctuation. Since the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 operate with fluctuation, it is possible to inform the player that the temporary stop state is not completely stopped.

  The mode of swing fluctuation (the direction of swing fluctuation of each pattern, the operation width, etc.) of the temporarily stopped left symbol 891 and the temporarily stopped right symbol 892 may be the same or different. If it is the same, the sense of cooperation between the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 enhances the interest of the game, and if different, it is possible to give a surprise to the player.

  The operation width V2 (or the operation width W2 in the left-right direction) of the symbol at the time of reach occurrence is the operation width V1 (or the operation width W1 in the left-right direction) (V1> V2, W1> W2). Therefore, the swing fluctuation in (d) does not disturb the reach effect such as a movie.

  (N) of FIG. 115 corresponds to immediately after the elapse of a predetermined time Tc, and the middle symbol 893 is also temporarily stopped following the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 as a third temporary stop state, and three symbols are displayed. Start shaking. Here, the temporarily stopped left symbol 891, the temporarily stopped right symbol 892, and the temporarily stopped middle symbol 893 vibrate with the third operation width (V 3 or W 3) to perform swing fluctuation. The modes of the swing fluctuation of all the temporarily stopped symbols (the direction and the movement width of the swing fluctuation of each symbol, etc.) may be the same or different. Further, the third operation width may be set in accordance with whether or not the special view variable display game has a special result (big hit). For example, the third operation width may be set so as to be larger than that in the case of a big hit when the result of the decorative feature variation display game is a release. That is, in this case, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation that re-variation is performed even in the case of a break, and to improve the interest of the game.

  The operation width V3 (or the operation width W3 in the left and right direction) of the symbol in the symbol confirmation waiting state is the operation width V1 (or the operation width in the left and right direction) of the symbol at the advance notice of reach It is smaller than W1) (V1> V3 and W1> W3), and is less than the operation width V2 (or the operation width W2 in the left and right direction) in the vertical direction of the symbol when reach of (D) , W2 W W3).

  As described above, the temporary stop execution unit (the change effect setting process, etc.) is configured such that the number of identification information to temporarily stop after the first temporary stop (the previous temporary stop) is larger than the number of the first temporary stop. A stop (after temporary stop) can be executed, and the vibration width of the identification information in the first temporary stop can be set larger than the vibration width of the identification information in the second temporary stop. The first temporary stop (the first temporary stop) is a temporary stop to be executed first, and the second temporary stop (the second temporary stop) is the second temporary stop ((d) in FIG. 115) 1 This corresponds to the first temporary stop ((N) in FIG. 115). The first temporary stop corresponds to the first or second temporary stop ((N) (D) in FIG. 115) when the second temporary stop is the third temporary stop ((N) in FIG. 115).

  As described above, the seventh embodiment embodies the following invention.

  (1) A display device capable of displaying a variable display game (display special pattern variable display game) in which a plurality of identification information (decorative special symbols) are variably displayed, and an effect capable of controlling the display of the variable display game in the display device In the gaming machine provided with control means, the effect control means may perform temporary stop for vibrating and displaying at least one identification information on the display device a plurality of times in one variable display game. The temporary stop execution means is provided with stop execution means (B1905 in FIG. 92, FIG. 114, FIG. 115), the number of identification information for temporary stop after the first temporary stop (eg (N) in FIG. 115) is The second temporary stop (for example, (d) or (n) in FIG. 115) that is larger than the first temporary stop is executed, and the oscillation width (amplitude V1) of the identification information in the first temporary stop is In temporary stop Gaming machine, wherein the vibration width is (amplitude V2 or V3) greater than can be set for that identity.

  (2) The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing, in the display device, a pseudo continuous effect of repeating a temporary stop and a pseudo change after the temporary stop.

  (3) The effect control means sets the vibrating width of the identification information at the temporary stop according to whether or not the variable display game has a special result (big hit). The gaming machine described in 2).

[Operation / Effect of Seventh Embodiment]
In the seventh embodiment described above, the vibration width of the identification information is the second temporary stop performed after the first temporary stop, rather than the first temporary stop (for example, (N) in FIG. 115) performed earlier. (For example, it becomes smaller at (d) or (d) in FIG. 115). Therefore, toward the end (decision of the identification information) to the decoration special figure variation display game, the vibrating width of the identification information in the temporary stop state can be reduced stepwise, and an unprecedented novel effect can be performed, The interest of the game is improved. In the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the interest of the game without considering the vibrating width of the identification information in the temporary stop state.

Modification 1 of Seventh Embodiment
A first modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. 116 is a timing chart for explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol in the decoration special figure variation display game according to the first modification. FIG. 117 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series in the first modification. Note that (d) and (n) in FIG. 117 are the same as (d) and (n) in FIG.

  The first modification of the seventh embodiment shows an example in which the reach develops into the SP reach. As shown in FIG. 117 (D), the right symbol 892 is temporarily stopped at the time Tba from the start of the fluctuation to reach the reach state. After that, at time Tbb, reach develops into SP reach. After SP reach development, in order to display the SP reach effect (movie etc.) at the center of the display screen of the display device 41, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 are respectively upper left and upper right as shown in FIG. Move to the corner of Then, the left pattern 891 and the right pattern 892 moved to the corner are changed from the normal mode to the special mode so as to erase the other while leaving only the numeral part, and perform swing fluctuation in the temporary stop state. That is, the left symbol 891 and the right symbol 892 located at the corner are displayed in the special mode of the reduced size reduced from the normal mode (FIG. 117 (D)) of the normal size and temporarily stopped. After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (N), at the middle symbol temporary stop timing Tc, the three symbols that have reached SP reach and temporarily stopped by vibration reach vibration variation. Here, the left pattern 891 and the right pattern 892 have returned to the normal size.

  Here, the fluctuation effect setting process (B1905 in FIG. 92) and the like executed by the effect control device 300 constitute identification information changing means capable of changing the identification information (the decoration special symbol) from the normal mode to the special mode. . And identification information change means (a change production setting process etc.) performs the 1st temporary stop (the previous temporary stop) before identification information is changed into a special mode, and after identification information is changed into a special mode Execute the second temporary stop (following temporary stop). Therefore, during the time between the first temporary stop and the second temporary stop, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by changing the identification information (the decoration special symbol), and to provide special effects (such as SP reach effects) on the display screen. You can make space for display.

  By the way, in this modification, the first temporary stop (the first temporary stop) corresponds to the second temporary stop ((D) in FIG. 117), and the second temporary stop (the second temporary stop) is the third temporary stop. It corresponds to the stop ((n) in FIG. 117). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first temporary stop (the previous temporary stop) corresponds to the first temporary stop ((na) in FIG. 115), and the second temporary stop (the second temporary stop) is the second or 3 It may correspond to the first temporary stop ((d) (d) of FIG. 117).

  In addition, time (Td-Tc) of the symbol determination waiting state is set longer than time (Tbb-Tba) from time Tba to time Tbb. Therefore, in the symbol determination waiting state, it is possible to make the player sufficiently have a sense of re-evolving expectation.

  Moreover, in FIG. 116, the operation width (V1, V2, W1, W2, V3, W3) in the swing fluctuation of the left symbol 891 temporarily stopped, the right symbol 892 temporarily stopped, and / or the middle symbol 893 temporarily stopped is As the value is larger, the duration (period) in which the fluctuation continues may be set shorter. On the other hand, as the operation width in the sway fluctuation is smaller, the time (period) in which the sway fluctuation continues may be set longer. For example, the duration of the swing fluctuation is increased in inverse proportion to the movement width of the swing fluctuation. That is, since the player's expectation that the swing variation of the decoration special symbol continues is high when the swing motion of the swing variation is large, the time of the swing variation is set short. When the fluctuation movement of the fluctuation is small, the sense of expectation that the fluctuation continues is low, so the time of fluctuation is set longer. As a result, the symbol determination timing can be appropriately adjusted, and the expectation of the big hit can be maintained while the expectation of the big hit player is lost.

[Modification 2 of the seventh embodiment]
A second modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. FIG. 118 is a timing chart for explaining the movement state of each decoration special symbol in the decoration special figure variation display game according to the modification example 2. (A) is a case where the result of the special drawing variation display game is a big hit variation And (B) shows the case of out-of-focus variation in which the result of the special-figure variation display game is out. FIG. 119 is a display screen of the display device 41 in the symbol determination waiting state in the second modification, and (N-1) shows a case where the result of the decorative special-image variation display game is a big hit, (N-2). Shows the case where the result of the decoration special figure variation display game is lost. Note that (n-1) and (n-2) in FIG. 119 correspond to (n) in FIG.

  If the result of the special view variation display game becomes a big hit rather than the case of becoming a big hit, the movement time of the fluctuation fluctuation from the temporary stop of the middle symbol to the timing of the symbol determination (period of symbol determination waiting state) And / or at this operating time, the operating range of the fluctuation may be increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation that re-variation is performed even in the case of a break, and to improve the interest of the game.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 118, when the symbol determination timing when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit and the symbol determination timing is Tdb and Tdb, respectively, the period of the symbol determination waiting state Tdb-Tc) may be longer than the symbol determination waiting period (Tda-Tc) in the case of a big hit. As shown in (n-1) and (n-2) of FIG. 119, in the symbol determination waiting state, the operation width of the swing fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol is the direction of the operation widths V4 and W4 in the case of coming off, It may be larger than the operation widths V3 and W3 in the case of a big hit (V4> V3 and W4> W3). Note that the operating widths V4 and W4 in the case of detachment may be larger than the operating widths V2 and W2 in the reach state (V4> V2 and W4> W2), or may be smaller than the operating widths V2 and W2 in the reach state ((4) V4 ≦ V2, W4 ≦ W2).

  As shown in (nu-3) and (nu-4) of FIG. 120, the second modification may be applied to the case of a big hit without re-lottery and the case of big hit with re-lottery. That is, even when the jackpot of (nu-1) (nu-2) in FIG. 119 and the outlier are replaced by the jackpot without relottery and the jackpot with relottery, respectively, the modification 2 is applied. Good. In addition, re-lottery is, for example, changing a normal big hit symbol (or a probability variation big hit symbol) temporarily stopped temporarily once again to a positive variation big hit symbol (or a normal big hit symbol) when re-lottery wins. Say

  In (Nu 3) of FIG. 120, the probability variation big hit symbol is displayed as, for example, "seven, seven, seven", and in (Nd-4) of FIG. 120, usually the big hit symbol is displayed as "two, two, two". It is done. In the symbol determination waiting state, the operation width of the swing fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol is larger than the operation widths V3 and W3 for the big hit without re-lottery for the operation widths V4 and W4 for the big hit with re-lottery You may enlarge (V4> V3, W4> W3). As a result, in the case of a jackpot with a re-lottery, it is possible to notify the player of the possibility of re-variation due to the re-lottery.

Eighth Embodiment
The eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 133. FIG. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to seventh embodiments.

  FIG. 121A is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 according to the eighth embodiment. In the eighth embodiment, the CPU 111 a is shown as the CPU core 102. The CPU core 102 is configured as a Z80-based CPU. In the eighth embodiment, the CPU core 102 has a register configuration different from that of the related art (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233285).

CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) shown in FIG. 121A has a width of 8 bits, W register 1201A, A register 1202A, B register 1204A, C register 1205A, D register 1207A, E register 1208A, H register 1210A,
An L register 1211A is provided.

  These general purpose registers can also be used as WA register 1203A (pair register, register pair) having a width of 16 bits by combining W register 1201A and A register 1202A. Similarly, BC register 1206A (pair register, register pair) combining B register 1204A and C register 1205A, DE register 1209A (pair register, register pair) combining D register 1207A and E register 1208A, H register 1210A It is also possible to use an HL register 1212A (a pair register, a register pair) combining the L register 1211A and the L register 1211A.

  Furthermore, the CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) includes an IX register 1231a and an IY register 1232a each having a width of 16 bits. The IX register 1231a and the IY register 1232a are used as an index when the instruction interpretation / execution circuit 1242 described later accesses data. Also, as described later, the IY register 1232a can be used as a top address specification register for setting the top address of the RAM 111c (storage unit for work area) in the address space (or memory space).

  These general purpose registers form one general purpose register group (register group of register bank 0) 1220A. On the other hand, the CPU core 102 includes another general purpose register group (register group of register bank 1) 1220 B having the same (or similar) configuration as the general purpose registers included in the register group 1220 A of register bank 0.

  The register group 1220B of the register bank 1 includes W registers 1201B to L registers 1211B having the same function as the W registers 1201A to L registers 1211A of the register bank 0. Similar to the register bank 0, these registers can also be used as 16-bit registers as the WA registers 1203B to HL registers 1212B. The register group 1220B of the register bank 1 is provided with an IX register 1231b and an IY register 1232b having the same function as the IX register 1231a and the IY register 1232a.

  Furthermore, the CPU core 102 is provided with a flag register 1200 having a width of 8 bits.

  The flag register 1200, which will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 121B, stores an operation result using the register. Further, a register bank selector (RBS) 1301 (described later in FIG. 121B) of the flag register 1200 selects which of the two general purpose register groups 1220A and 1220B is to be used as an operation target.

  Each register belonging to the register group selected by the register bank selector (RBS) 1301 is used for calculation by an instruction interpretation / execution circuit 1242 described later. On the other hand, each of the registers belonging to the non-selected register group holds the value until the value of the register bank selector (RBS) 1301 is changed to be a selection target.

  The CPU core 102 also includes a DP register 1230. The DP register 1230 can be used, for example, to store the start address of the data area (for user program) of the ROM 111b in the address space (or memory space). In the data area, various tables, data, and the like are stored.

  Furthermore, the CPU core 102 includes an SP register 1233 functioning as a stack pointer and a PC register 1234 functioning as a program counter, each having a width of 16 bits.

  The stack pointer 1233 indicates the position of the area when storing data (or retrieving data) in the stack area. The program counter 1234 indicates an address at which an instruction executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 described later is stored.

  The instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 executes the game control program and performs arithmetic processing using each register in the CPU core 102. Specifically, the data stored in the address indicated by the program counter 1234 is read out by the ROM 111b, and the read data is regarded as a code, and an instruction corresponding to the code is executed. The instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 interprets and executes an instruction included in a predetermined instruction set.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the CPU core 102 (CPU 111a) itself is illustrated as the arithmetic processing means, but in the CPU core 102, the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 mainly performs the function of the arithmetic processing means There is. The RAM 111c is an update information storage unit that stores information updated by the arithmetic processing unit (CPU 111a and CPU core 102), and can store and hold the stored information even if a power failure occurs due to a backup power supply. It becomes an important holding and storage means.

  The instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 corresponds to an instruction of the game control program (game control program), via the access circuit 1243, the address bus 721, and the data bus 722, the ROM 111b outside the CPU core 102 (user program Data may be exchanged with the ROM), the RAM 111c (user work RAM), and other circuits. The address bus 721 is configured by a 16-bit signal line, and the CPU core 102 outputs the designated address to the address bus 721 and is stored in the designated address (the address of the ROM 111 b, the RAM 111 c, etc.) via the data bus 722. Input and output data.

  The instruction interpretation / execution circuit 1242 stores the address at which the next instruction is stored in the program counter 1234 each time the instruction of the ROM 111b is executed one by one. In this manner, the game control program is sequentially executed by repeating the execution of the instruction and the update of the program counter 1234. When the interrupt signal from the interrupt control circuit 724 provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is received, the value of the program counter 1234 is switched to the value of the address of the interrupt processing set in advance.

  The internal bus 1235 transmits and receives data to and from the registers provided in the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 and the CPU core 102.

  The initial value setting circuit 1241 is a circuit that sets an initial value in hardware in each register provided in the CPU core 102.

  When the built-in reset circuit 1240 receives a reset signal from the security circuit 725 provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, it activates the initial value setting circuit 1241 and sets an initial value in each register provided in the CPU core 102. The instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 is activated.

  FIG. 121B is a view for explaining the configuration of the flag register 1200 according to the eighth embodiment. The value of each bit of the flag register 1200 is set by the instruction interpretation / execution circuit 1242 in FIG. 121B.

  The interrupt master permission flag (IMF) 1300 is a flag for setting permission or rejection of interrupt processing by the interrupt signal, and is enabled when set (the value is "1") and prohibited when cleared (the value is "0"). .

  The register bank selector (RBS) 1301 is a flag for selecting which of the two general-purpose register groups 1220A and 1220B to use when the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 in FIG. 121A performs arithmetic processing, and is set (value Is “1”), the register group 1220 B of the register bank 1 is cleared, and the register group 1220 A of the register bank 0 is selected by the clear (value “0”).

  Overflow flag (VF) 1302 is set (the value is “1”) when a overflow occurs in the general-purpose register to be operated by a predetermined operation, and cleared otherwise (the value is “0”). .

  The sine flag (SF) 1303 is set (the value is “1”) when the most significant bit of the general-purpose register to be calculated becomes “1” by a predetermined operation, and cleared (the value is “0”) otherwise. Ru.

  The half carry flag (HF) 1304 is set (value is “1”) when a carry or a borrow occurs in the fourth bit of the general purpose register to be operated as a result of performing an 8-bit operation. Otherwise, it is cleared (value is "0").

  The carry flag (CF) 1305 is set (the value is "1") when a carry or a borrow occurs according to a predetermined operation, and cleared otherwise (the value is "0"). .

  The zero flag (ZF) 1306 is set (the value is “1”) when the predetermined calculation result is “0”, and cleared (the value is “0”) otherwise.

  The jump status flag (JF) 1307 is set (the value is “1”) when at least one of the carry flag (CF) 1305 and the zero flag (ZF) 1306 is set. Alternatively, even when the arithmetic processing is not performed, when the value of the general-purpose register becomes "00h", the value is set ("1"). If none of these conditions is met, it is cleared (the value is “0”).

  When the CPU core 102 is reset, all bits of the flag register are set to 0.

  FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a power-on process performed by each device (game control apparatus 100, payout control apparatus 200, and effect control apparatus 300) when the power of game machine 10 is switched on in the eighth embodiment. .

  Specifically, FIG. 122 (A) is a flowchart of the power-on process of the gaming control apparatus 100, and FIG. 122 (B) is a flowchart of the power-on process of the payout control apparatus 200. C) is a flowchart of power-on processing of the effect control device 300.

  First, processing upon power-on of the game control apparatus 100 (FIG. 122A) will be described. The power-on process is not performed by the game control program stored in the ROM 111b (see FIG. 3), but is performed by various hardware (hardware around the CPU core 102) of the game control apparatus 100. It is a process.

  First, the game control device 100 transmits a reset signal output from the power supply device 400 (A10101).

  This reset signal is supplied from the power supply device 400 via the Schmitt buffer 125 to the security circuit 725 (see FIG. 121A) provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM access regulation circuit (see FIG. 121) provided in the gaming microcomputer 111. It is input to the reset terminal of the flip flop circuit in not shown and the reset terminal of the serial communication circuit (not shown) provided in the gaming microcomputer 111. The gaming microcomputer 111 transmits data by serial communication to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by the serial communication circuit. Specifically, when the power is turned on, a voltage equal to or less than a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) is applied to the reset terminals for a predetermined time, and a reset signal is input. The reset signal is not input by applying the voltage of

  When the reset signal is input from the power supply device 400, the security circuit 725 continues to output the reset signal to the reset terminal of the CPU core 102 until the security check process described later is completed, and waits for activation of the CPU core 102. Let

  The reset signal is supplied from the power supply apparatus 400 via the Schmitt buffer 125 to various input ports (first input port 122 etc.) and various output ports (second output port 134, third output port 135-1, 135-2, the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137) are input to the reset terminals.

  When the reset signal is input to the reset terminal of the serial communication circuit, the voltage levels of the input terminal and the output terminal of the serial communication circuit are controlled to be low, and the serial communication circuit is initialized by the hardware ( A10102). Also, when a reset signal is input to the reset terminals of various output ports, they are all set to 0, and the various output ports are initialized by the hardware (A10102).

  Next, the RAM access prohibition circuit provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a RAM write prohibition state in which the writing to the RAM 111c is restricted (A10103). By generating the RAM write inhibition state when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the RAM 111 c from being updated at an incorrect timing.

  Next, the security circuit 725 (FIG. 121A) to which the reset signal has been input executes a self-diagnosis process (A10104). The self-diagnosis process is a process of determining whether the security circuit 725 is initialized.

  When it is determined by the self-diagnosis processing that the security circuit 725 is initialized, the security circuit 725 executes the security check processing (A10105). The security check process is a process of judging the legitimacy of the program stored in the ROM 111b (see FIG. 3) using the legitimacy confirmation information stored in the HW parameter ROM (not shown) of the gaming microcomputer 111. is there.

  When the security check process is executed in the process of step A10105, the game control device program start preparation process is performed. At this time, the security circuit 725 starts the CPU core 102 by stopping the reset signal output to the reset terminal of the CPU core 102. Therefore, the game control apparatus program start preparation process is executed by the CPU core 102. The game control apparatus program start preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the power-on process (FIG. 122 (B)) of the payout control device 200 will be described. The payout control device 200 includes various input ports, various output ports, and the like in addition to the microcomputer having the same configuration as the gaming microcomputer 111.

  First, the payout control device 200 transmits the reset signal output from the power supply device 400 via the Schmitt buffer 132 (A10111). The process of step A10111 is the same as the process of step A10101.

  Then, when the reset signal is input to the reset terminal of the serial communication circuit of the payout control device 200, the voltage level of the input terminal and the output terminal of the serial communication circuit is controlled to be low, and the serial communication circuit is initialized by hardware. (A10112). Also, when a reset signal is input to the reset terminals of the various output ports of the payout control device 200, they are all set to 0, and the various output ports are initialized by hardware (A10112).

  Next, the RAM access restriction circuit 640 of the payout control device 200 generates a RAM write prohibition state in which writing to the RAM 214 is restricted (A10113). The specific description of the process of step A10113 is the same as the process of step A10103.

  Next, the security circuit 725 of the payout control device 200 to which the reset signal has been input executes a self-diagnosis process (A10114). The specific description of the process of step A10114 is the same as the process of step A10104.

  When it is determined by the self-diagnosis processing that the security circuit 725 is initialized, the security circuit 725 executes the security check processing (A10115). The specific description of the process of step A10115 is the same as the process of step A10105.

  Then, the payout control device 200 executes an initialization process when the power is turned on (A10116). The initialization process at power-on is a process of initializing the RAM and the like, and is executed by the CPU of the microcomputer of the payout control device 200. Also, before initializing the RAM, the RAM write inhibit state generated in the process of step A10113 is released, and the RAM enters the RAM write enable state.

  Next, the payout control device 200 generates a state where it can receive an instruction from the game control device 100 (A10117). Then, the CPU of the payout control device 200 determines whether the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is an initialization command (A10118). If it is determined in the process of step A10118 that the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is not the initialization command (the result of A10118 is "N"), the process waits until the initialization command is fetched.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is the initialization command (the result of A10118 is “Y”), the payout control device 200 executes the initialization process at the start of communication ( A10119) The processing shifts to the payout control device main processing.

  Next, the power-on process (FIG. 122 (C)) of the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4) will be described.

  First, the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4) receives the reset signal output from the power supply device 400 (A10121). The process of step A10121 is the same as the process of step A10101.

  Then, when a reset signal is input to the effect control device 300, the output port of the effect control device 300 and the serial communication circuit (interface chip (command I / F) 331) are initialized by hardware (A10122).

  Then, the effect control device 300 executes an initialization process when the power is turned on (A10123). The initialization process at power on is a process of initializing the RAM 322 and the like, and is executed by the CPU 311.

  Next, the effect control device 300 generates a state capable of receiving an instruction from the game control device 100 (A 10124). Then, it is determined whether the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is an initialization command (A10125).

  If it is determined that the command transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 is not an initialization command (the result of A10125 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 stands by until an initialization command is fetched.

  On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is an initialization command (the result of A10125 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs initialization processing at the start of communication. Is executed (A10126), and the process shifts to an effect control apparatus main process.

  FIG. 123 is a flow chart for explaining a game control program start preparation process of the eighth embodiment. The first half of the game control device program start preparation process (until the reset address is set in the program counter 1234) is not the process executed by the game control program stored in the ROM 111b (see FIG. 3), but the CPU core This processing is executed by the initial value setting circuit 1241 (see FIG. 121A) included in 102.

  When the CPU core 102 receives the reset signal from the security circuit 725, the built-in reset circuit 1240 operates the initial value setting circuit 1241. At this time, the built-in reset circuit 1240 causes the operation of the instruction interpretation / execution circuit 1242 to stand by until the initial value setting circuit 1241 sets an initial value in each register.

  When the initial value setting circuit 1241 starts operation, the initial value "29FFh" is set in the stack pointer 1233, the initial value "2800h" (the start address of the RAM 111c) is set in the IY registers 1232a and 1232b, and the initial value is set in the DP register 1230 Set the value "5000h" (the start address of the data area (for user program) of the ROM 111b), set the reset address "4000h" in the HL register 1212A, and the value "00h" (16 bits) in the other registers. The value "0000h" is set in the register (A10201). The reset address may be "0000h".

  Next, the initial value setting circuit 1241 sets the program counter 1234 to the value of "4000h" which is the reset address (A10202). Thus, initial values are set to the respective registers. Next, when the built-in reset circuit 1240 operates the command interpretation and execution circuit 1242 which has been on standby, the command interpretation and execution circuit 1242 shows the address indicated by the program counter 1234 (corresponding to the reset address of the ROM 111b storing the game control program) Start program execution from The processing after the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 starts executing the program will be described in the game control device main processing of FIG. 124A.

  124A and 124B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing according to the eighth embodiment. The main processing is executed by the game control device 100. The same processes as those of the main process (FIGS. 5A and 5B) according to the first embodiment have the same step numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIGS. 124A and 124B, steps A1004, A1013, A1015, A1034, A1038, A1039, and A1045 in FIGS. 5A and 5B are deleted, and steps A10301 to A10304 and A10401 to A10405 are newly provided.

  In step A10301, the game control apparatus 100 sets the start address ("2800h" in this case) of the RAM 111c in a predetermined register (IY register 1232a). In step A10302, the game control apparatus 100 sets the start address (here, "5000h") of the data area (for user program) of the ROM 111b in a predetermined register (DP register 1230).

  Thus, by setting the start address of the RAM 111c and the start address of the data area of the ROM 111b in a predetermined register as a reference address, the address designation in the subsequent code (instruction) is relative to the reference address and the offset address There are cases where it is sufficient to use (difference to the reference address). In this case, if the relative address or offset address is limited to a range that can be represented by one byte (corresponding to the lower address of the two-byte address "xxxxh"), the number of bytes of the code (machine language instruction) decreases The entire program becomes compact and the storage capacity required to store in the ROM 111b is also reduced.

  The processing from step A1001 to A10302 can be omitted because it is executed by the hardware (initial value setting circuit 1241) also in the game control device program start preparation processing (FIG. 123), but it can be omitted. By executing the setting process also in the program, it is possible to operate the CPU 111a normally even in a noise environment.

  In step A10303, the game control apparatus 100 sets the writing permission state of a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or an EEPROM. In the eighth embodiment, the RWM may be always in the read permission state.

  In step A10304, the game control apparatus 100 sets a serial communication circuit (for use in communication with the effect control apparatus 300 and the payout control apparatus 200) of the game microcomputer 111.

  After prohibiting the interruption in step A10401, the gaming control apparatus 100 executes an initial value random number updating process (A1035) and a random number updating process 2 (A10402). The random number updating process 2 (FIG. 126) of the eighth embodiment is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game, but is different from the random number updating process 2 of the first embodiment. I will mention later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (A1036), and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. If it is (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1036 (A10404) . Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks has not continued (the result of A10404 is "N"), the process returns to step A1037, and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (when the result of A10404 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that the power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 outputs all. Output off data to the port (A1040).

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1037 is "N"), the gaming control apparatus 100 permits the interruption (A10403), returns to the process of step A10401, and prohibits the interruption. That is, if a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process, the random number updating process 2 and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed during the interruption prohibited period from step A10401 to A10403.

  There is no change or destruction of information in the register (data stored in the register) by interrupt processing such as timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 125) during the interrupt prohibited period in which interrupts are prohibited, and the initial value random number update processing The random number update process 2 and the power failure monitoring signal can be checked normally. On the other hand, the transition period from step A10403 to A10401 is the interrupt permission period during which the interrupt is permitted. However, since processing other than the interrupt processing is not executed in this interrupt permission period, the information in the register is changed by the interrupt processing. There is no problem even if there is an etc.

  As in the first embodiment (FIG. 5B), when the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check are performed during the interrupt permission period (steps A1034 to A1039), the interrupt process is performed by the interrupt process. Switch the register bank 0 used in the main process to the register bank 1 used in the interrupt process (A1003, A1301) to avoid the information being changed or destroyed (A1003, A1301). The register information used in the process is saved (PUSH) in the stack area of the RAM 111 c. However, in the eighth embodiment, it is not necessary to switch register banks or save register information at the time of interrupt processing. That is, in the eighth embodiment, there is no problem using only the register bank 0 basically.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process according to the eighth embodiment. The timer interrupt process is executed by the game control device 100. The same processing as that of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) according to the first embodiment is assigned the same step number and the description is omitted.

  In FIG. 125, A1301 and A1302 of FIG. 8 are deleted, and steps A10501 and A10502 are newly provided.

  In step A10501, the game control apparatus 100 sets the start address “2800h” of the RAM 111c in a predetermined register (IY register) as in step A10301. In step A10502, the game control apparatus 100 sets the start address "5000h" of the data area (for user program) of the ROM 111b in a predetermined register (DP register) as in step A10302. Thus, by setting the start address of the RAM 111c in the address space (or memory space) and the start address of the data area of the ROM 111b in a predetermined register as a reference address, the address specification in the subsequent code (instruction) is performed. In some cases, this can be done with a relative address from the reference address or an offset address (difference with respect to the reference address), and the number of bytes (storage capacity) of the code (machine language instruction) decreases.

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart of the random number updating process 2 according to the eighth embodiment. The random number updating process 2 is executed by the game control device 100. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3. The random number updating process 2 according to the eighth embodiment is executed by an unconventional instruction (code) (see FIG. 141 described later) included in an instruction set which can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242. It is simplified from the random number update process 2 of the embodiment (FIG. 14).

  The game control apparatus 100 first increments (increases by 1) the fluctuation pattern random number 1 and updates it (A 10601). Here, the variation pattern random number 1 is a data size of 2 bytes and circulates in the range of 0 to 65535.

  Next, the game control device 100 increments (increases by 1) the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and updates (A10602), and then decrements (decreases by 1) the fluctuation pattern random number 3 and updates (A10603). The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is 1 byte, and it circulates in the range of 0 to 240 and returns to 0 after reaching 240. The fluctuation pattern random number 3 is 1 byte, and circulates in the range of 238 to 0, and returns to 238 after reaching 0.

  Since none of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the seventh embodiment has an upper limit value, the values become random numbers.

  In the present specification, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are stored in a storage area (random number generation area) of the RAM 111 c which is an information storage unit for storing various information, but other memory such as a memory in the random number generation circuit It may be stored in the information storage unit.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process according to the eighth embodiment. The hard random number acquisition process is executed by the game control device 100. The same processing as that of the hard random number acquisition processing (FIG. 23) according to the first embodiment is assigned the same step number and the description is omitted.

  In FIG. 127, step A10701 is newly provided in place of step A2805 in FIG. In step A10701, the address of the target hard random number latch register is prepared. The hard random number latch register is provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and holds hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by the random number generation circuit. The address of the hard random number latch register is used to extract a big hit random number in the special view start port switch common processing (FIG. 128) described later.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view starting opening switch common process according to the eighth embodiment. The special figure starting opening switch common processing is executed by the game control device 100. In addition, the same step number is attached | subjected to the process same as the special figure starting port switch common process (FIG. 24) which concerns on 1st Embodiment, and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In FIG. 128, Step A10801 is provided instead of Step A2901-A2904 in FIG. 24, Step A10802 is provided instead of A2909 in FIG. 24, and Step A10803 is provided instead of A2910 and A2911 in FIG. Step A10804 is provided instead of A2913 and A2914.

  In step A10801, the game control apparatus 100 updates the number of times of starting opening signal output by +1 (increase by 1) up to a predetermined value (here, 255). As will be described later, the process of step A10801 is executed using only one instruction (unconventional instruction) provided in the instruction set to be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area by +1 update. Then, when the number of times of starting opening signal output is "255", the value after updating becomes "0".

  In step A10802, the game control apparatus 100 extracts the big hit random number from the area (A10701) of the hard random number latch register prepared in the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 127) and saves it in the big hit random number storage area of the RAM 111c.

  In step A 10803, the gaming control apparatus 100 extracts the jackpot symbol random number and saves it in the jackpot symbol random number storage area.

  In step A10804, the game control device 100 extracts a small hit symbol random number and saves it in the small hit symbol random number storage area.

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special-image hold information determination process according to the eighth embodiment. The special figure suspension information determination process is executed by the game control device 100. The same processes as those of the special-image hold information determination process (FIG. 25) according to the first embodiment are assigned the same step numbers, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In FIG. 129, step A10901 is added to FIG. 25, steps A10902 and A10903 are provided instead of A3007 of FIG. 25, and steps A10904 and A10905 are provided instead of A3012 of FIG.

  In step A10901, the gaming control apparatus 100 loads a jackpot random number from the target area for use in the jackpot determination process (A3004). Here, the target area is the random number storage area (Special figure 1 reserve storage area or special view 2 reserve storage area) related to suspension (first start storage) of Special Figure 1 or suspension (second start storage) of Special Figure 2 The latest pending area of).

  In step A10902, the gaming control apparatus 100 loads a jackpot symbol random number from the target area. Here, the target area is the latest hold area of the random number storage area regarding the hold (first start storage) of Special Figure 1 or the hold (second start store) of Special Figure 2. Then, stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired (A10903).

  In step A10904, the game control apparatus 100 loads a small hit symbol random number from the target area. Here, the target area is that the result of the special view 2 variable display game does not have a small hit, so the latest hold of the random number storage area (the special view 1 reserve storage area) related to the hold (first start memory) of the special view 1 Area of Then, stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number is acquired (A10905).

  FIGS. 130 to 133 are program lists showing a program structure of part of the game control program executed by the CPU 111a (CPU core 102) of the game control apparatus 100 according to the eighth embodiment. Each program list is a list of instructions in assembly language (source code) corresponding to Z80, which is an 8-bit microprocessor, and stored in ROM 111b (game control program storage means) except pseudo instructions (instructions for assembler) etc. Correspond one-to-one to machine language instructions (machine code). Each instruction is included as a machine language instruction in the instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242.

  Descriptions of instructions (codes) in each program list are, from the left, "line number" attached for convenience, "mnemonic" indicating the operation content (operation content) of the instruction, "operand" for the instruction target, convenience of explanation It is divided into "comments" attached for The instructions in the program list are basically executed in the order of line numbers (from small to large) from the top to the bottom of the program list, unless there is an instruction for calling a subroutine or a jump instruction (branch instruction).

  FIG. 130 is a program list showing a program structure of part of the main process (FIG. 124A) according to the eighth embodiment.

  The line number 0510 is an instruction (code) corresponding to A1001 of the main process (FIG. 124A), and interrupts the interrupt (code “DI”).

  The line number 0520 corresponds to A1002 in the main processing, and loads the value “29FFh” as a stack pointer into the SP register (code “LD SP, 29FFH”).

  Row number 0530 corresponds to A1003 of the main processing, and loads 0 into the register bank selector (RBS) (code “LD RBS, 0”). Thus, register bank 0 is set.

  The line number 0540 corresponds to A10301 in the main processing, and loads “2800h” as the start address of the RAM 111 c into the IY register (code “LD IY, 2800 H”).

  The line number 0550 corresponds to A10302 in the main processing, and loads “5000h” as the start address of the data area (for user program) of the ROM 111b in the DP register (code “LD DP, 5000 h”).

  Line numbers 0560 and 0570 correspond to A1005 of the main processing. At line number 0560, the value corresponding to the label C_SHOT_NG (the value representing the stop of emission) is loaded into the A register (code "LD A, C_SHOT_NG").

  In the line number 0570, the numerical value of the A register is output to the port C_OUT01 (that is, the port of the numerical value corresponding to the label C_OUT01) (code "OUT (C_OUT01), A").

  The line number 0580 corresponds to A1006 of the main processing, and inputs a numerical value from the port C_INPUT 1 (that is, the port of the numerical value corresponding to the label C_INPUT 1) to the A register (code “IN A, (C_INPUT 1)”).

  Line numbers 0610 and 0620 correspond to A1031 in the main process (FIG. 124B). At line number 0610, the address (numerical value corresponding to label D_CTCTBL) of the data table (CTCTBL) necessary for activating or using the CTC circuit is made a relative address (D_CTCTBL-5000H) and loaded into the HL register (code "LQDD HL, D_CTCTBL-5000H"). The relative address is an address based on the top address "5000h" of the data area for the user program.

  The LQDD instruction uses the relative address (essentially 1 byte) instead of the absolute address (2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space for the operands, so the number of machine language instructions is 1 compared to the normal LD instruction. Decrease by bytes (3 bytes to 2 bytes). Although the relative address is originally 2 bytes, the mnemonic (machine language instruction part) is made different according to the value of the upper byte of the relative address, so the relative address is substantially the lower byte (1 byte). It can be shown.

  At line number 0620, a subroutine (label P_DEVSET) for setting a device (CTC circuit in this case) is called (code "CALLR P_DEVSET"). The "CALLR" instruction is an instruction that can reduce the number of bytes required from the conventional CALL instruction. The “CALLR” instruction is converted into a 2-byte machine language instruction when calling processing earlier than a predetermined address value (for example, 4C00h), and 3 bytes when calling processing after the predetermined address value. Converted into machine language instructions.

  The CPU core 102 (instruction interpreting and executing circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing the "LQDD" instruction or the "CALLR" instruction.

  Line numbers 0630 and 0640 correspond to A1032 in the main process (FIG. 124B). At line number 0630, the address (numerical value corresponding to label D_RNDSET) of the data table (RNDSET) necessary for activating or using the random number generation circuit is made a relative address (D_RNDSET-5000H), and is loaded into the HL register ( Code "LQDD HL, D_RNDSET-5000 H"). The relative address is an address based on the top address "5000h" of the data area for the user program.

  At line number 0640, a subroutine (label P_DEVSET) for setting a device (here, a random number generation circuit) is called (code "CALLR P_DEVSET").

  Row numbers 0650 to 0730 correspond to A1033 of the main processing, and sequentially store various initial value random numbers (here, initial values at power-on) while updating the address in a predetermined area of the RAM 111c.

  At line number 0650, the numerical value corresponding to the label R_RNDZINI is loaded into the HL register. The label R_RNDZ INI indicates the numerical value of the start address of a predetermined area in the RAM 111 c where various initial value random numbers are stored.

  At row number 0660, the value (here, lower byte) of a predetermined register "C_SRND0_L" in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code "IN A, (C_SRND0_L)"). The predetermined register is soft random number register 0.

  In line number 0670, after the value of A register is loaded (stored) as the big hit symbol initial value random number to the start address of the predetermined area in RAM, the address in the HL register is updated from the start address to the next address (code “ LQD (HL +), A "). "HL +" means updating the address in the HL register to the next address after loading. Since the jackpot symbol initial value random number is 1 byte and the A register to be loaded (stored) is also 1 byte, the address value in the HL register is incremented by +1.

  In this "LQD" instruction, after the value is stored in the area (in RAM) corresponding to the address (numerical value) set in the HL register (may be another register), the value of the HL register is updated (here, +1 update). As a result, values can be continuously stored in continuous areas (in the RAM), and it becomes unnecessary to calculate storage addresses as in the prior art. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpreting and executing circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit that executes this "LQD" instruction.

  In row number 0680, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND1_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “IN A, (C_SRND1_L)”).

  In line number 0690, after the value of A register is loaded (stored) in the area of the address currently stored (stored) in the HL register as the small hit symbol initial value random number, the address in the HL register is the next address Update to ("LQD (HL +), A"). Since the small hit symbol initial value random number is 1 byte, the address value in the HL register is incremented by 1.

  In row number 0700, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND2_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code “IN A, (C_SRND2_L)”).

  In line number 0710, the value of A register is loaded as the initial random number per hit into the area of the address currently stored (stored) in the HL register, and then the address in the HL register is updated to the next address (Code "LQD (HL +), A"). Since the per-initial value random number is one byte, the address value in the HL register is incremented by one.

  In the row number 0720, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND3_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code "IN A, (C_SRND3_L)").

  In the row number 0730, the value of the A register is loaded (stored) in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register as a hit symbol initial value random number. Here, since there is no initial value random number to be stored next, the address stored in the HL register is not updated (code “LD (HL), A”).

  The line number 0750 is an instruction corresponding to A10401 of the main processing, and interrupts the interrupt (code “DI”).

  The line number 0760 is an instruction corresponding to A1035 in the main process, and calls a subroutine (label P_RNDINI) for executing the initial value random number update process (code “CALLR P_RNDINI”).

  The line number 0770 is an instruction corresponding to A10402 of the main process, and calls a subroutine (label P_RNDINC2) for executing the random number update process 2 (code “CALLR P_RNDINC2”).

  At row number 0780, the values of the W register are cleared and set to 0 by taking the exclusive OR of the values of the W register (code “XOR W, W”).

  Row numbers 0800 to 0820 correspond to A1037 of the main processing, and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. In the row number 0800, a numerical value is input to the A register from the port C_INPUT 1 where the power failure monitoring signal comes in (code “IN A, (C_INPUT 1)”).

  In the row number 0810, the value of the A register and the value C_PDWNSW indicating that the power failure monitoring signal is off (for example, 00000001B in negative logic) are ANDed (code "AND A, C_PDWNSW"). The calculation result of the logical product of row number 0810 is zero if the power failure monitoring signal is on (for example, 00000000 B in negative logic) and the power failure is occurring.

  At line number 0820, when the operation result of line number 0810 is zero (Z) (ie, when a power failure occurs), jump to an address in ROM (address of ROM 111b, branch destination) corresponding to label MAIN 90 (conditional branch) And execute the instruction after line number 0860 (code "JR Z, MAIN 90"). If the operation result of the line number 0810 is not zero (Z) (i.e., a power failure has not occurred), the instruction of the line number 0830 is entered. When the operation result is zero, the zero flag (ZF) is set.

  The line number 0830 is an instruction corresponding to A10403 of the main processing, and permits an interrupt (code “EI”).

  The line number 0840 corresponds to the transition from A10403 to A10401 of the main processing, jumps to the address in the ROM (address in the ROM 111b) corresponding to the label MAIN 70, and executes the instruction after the line number 0750 (code “JR MAIN 70 ").

  Row numbers 0860 to 0880 correspond to A10404 in the main processing, and it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks.

  In the row number 0860, when the power failure monitoring signal is in the on state (power failure occurrence state), the value of the W register indicating the number of times of detection of the on state is updated by +1 (increased by 1) (code "INC W").

  In the row number 0870, the value of the W register is compared with "2" which is the number of checks (code "CP W, 2"). If the value of the W register is smaller than the number of checks, the carry flag (CF) is set as the result of the comparison (C). At line number 0880, when the carry flag (CF) is set (when the number of times of detection of the on state does not reach the number of checks), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to the label MAIN 80, and line number 0800 or later. Execute the instruction (code "JRC, MAIN80"). When the carry flag (CF) is not set (when the number of times of detection of the on state reaches the number of checks), the process moves to the line number 0890.

  The line number 0890 corresponds to A1040 of the main processing, and calls a subroutine P_OUTCLR which outputs off data to all output ports (code “CALLR P_OUTCLR”).

  FIG. 131 is a program list showing a program structure of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 125) according to the eighth embodiment.

  The line number 1000 is a label P_TINT indicating timer interrupt processing. The row number 1010 corresponds to A10501 of the timer interrupt processing, and loads “2800h” as the start address of the RAM 111 c into the IY register (code “LD IY, 2800 H”).

  The line number 1020 corresponds to A10502 in the timer interrupt process, and loads “5000h” as the top address of the data area (for user program) of the ROM into the DP register (code “LD DP, 5000 H”). The instructions of line number 1010 and line number 1020 can be omitted because they have already been executed in the main process (line number 0540 and line number 0550 in FIG. 130).

  In line numbers 1030 to 1140, subroutines corresponding to steps A1303 to A1314 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 125) are called by the "CALLR" instruction. The line number 1150 is a “RETI” instruction for returning from the timer interrupt process to the main process.

  FIG. 132 is a program list showing a program structure of part of the start port switch monitoring process (FIG. 22) according to the eighth embodiment.

  A row number 1500 is a label (P_SIDOSW) corresponding to the start opening switch monitoring process, and indicates an in-ROM address (head address) of a program module corresponding to the start opening switch monitoring process. The starting opening switch monitoring process is a subroutine called by the "CALLR" instruction in the special figure game process (FIG. 21).

  The line number 1510 corresponds to A2701 of the starting opening switch monitoring processing, loads the address (number corresponding to label D_SIDCHK1) of the starting opening 1 prize monitoring table as a relative address (D_SIDCHK1-5000H) and loads it into the HL register ( Code "LQDD HL, D_SIDCHK 1-5000H"). In this way, the starting opening 1 prize monitor table is prepared.

  The line number 1520 corresponds to A2702 of the starting opening switch monitoring process, and the subroutine (label P_HRNDGET) of the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 23) is called by the “CALLR” instruction (code “CALLR P_HRNDGET”).

  The line number 1530 corresponds to A2703 of the starting opening switch monitoring process, and there is no starting opening winning on the target starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) and the carry flag (CF) is not set (in the case of NC) Jump to a ROM address corresponding to the label SIDOSW 20 (conditional branch) (code "JR NC, SIDOSW 20"). The carry flag (CF) is set if there is a starting hole winning at step A2806 of the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 23).

  Line numbers 1540 and 1550 correspond to A2704 of the start port switch monitoring process. At line number 1540, do the values stored in the address “IY + R_TGAMEFLG” compare with the value of the label C_JTN indicating that it is in the special-purpose time zone (in the general public support state) and match (T: true), It is determined whether they do not match (F: false) (code "CHK (IY + R_TGAMEFLG), C_JTN"). In the case of a match (T), for example, a predetermined flag is set.

  The address “IY + R_TGAMEFLG” is an addition address obtained by adding the offset address corresponding to the label R_TGAMEFLG to the value “2800h” of the IY register. The offset address is a relative address (difference address) based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. Here, the offset address is limited to a range that can be represented by one byte (corresponding to the lower address of the two-byte address “xxxxh”), and the code “CHK (IY + R_TGAMEFLG), C_JTN” of line number 1540 is a three-byte instruction. be able to. Thereby, the program capacity (code amount) can be reduced. When the offset address is not used, the address is 2 bytes, and the instruction of the row number 1540 is an instruction of 4 bytes.

  Line number 1550 jumps (conditional branch) to the address in the ROM corresponding to label SIDOSW10 when the special drawing time is short, that is, when the comparison result of line number 1540 is coincident (T), line number 1590 Execute the following instruction (code "JRS T, SIDOSW 10").

  The line number 1560 corresponds to A2705 of the starting opening switch monitoring processing, and loads a right-handed instruction notification command (numeric value corresponding to label C_RIGHTCOM) into the BC register (code “LD BC, C_RIGHTCOM”).

  The line number 1570 corresponds to A2706 of the starting opening switch monitoring process, and calls and executes a subroutine (P_COMSET) of the rendering command setting process (code “CALLR P_COMSET”).

  The line number 1590 corresponds to A2707 of the starting opening switch monitoring process, and the address (label D_T1HOINF) of the table for setting the information of the hold by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) is a relative address (D_T1HOINF-5000H). , HL register (code "LQDD HL, D_T1HOINF-5000H").

  The line number 1600 corresponds to A2708 of the starting opening switch monitoring processing, and calls and executes a subroutine (label P_TSIDOSW) of the special view starting opening switch common processing (code "CALLR P_TSIDOSW").

  FIG. 133A is a program list showing a partial program structure of hard random number acquisition processing (FIG. 127) according to the eighth embodiment.

  A line number 2000 is a label (P_HRNDGET) corresponding to hard random number acquisition processing, and indicates an in-ROM address (head address) of a program module corresponding to hard random number acquisition processing. The hard random number acquisition process is a subroutine called by the “CALLR” instruction in A2702 and A2710 of the start opening switch monitoring process (FIG. 22).

  The line number 2010 corresponds to A2801 of hard random number acquisition processing, and clears the carry flag (CF) to zero (code “CLR CF”) as start-up-no-go information without start-up winning.

  The line numbers 2020 to 2040 correspond to A2802 of the hard random number acquisition processing, and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch. At line number 2020, after the value stored in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (for example, in the data area of the ROM) is loaded into the A register, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address. (Code "LD A, (HL +)"). The address currently stored (stored) in the HL register is set by the line number 1510 of the start port switch monitoring process (FIG. 132). Then, the value stored in the area of the address is switch bit data (determination value other than zero) of the target switch, and is, for example, "00000001B". The target switch is the start port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the start port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710.

  In row number 2030, the rising edge information is acquired from the address R_SWCTL + 2 where the rising edge information is stored in the switch control area in which the information on the target switch is stored, and the logical product is taken with the switch bit data (determination value) of the A register. Then, it is determined whether or not the switch has been turned on (code "AQND A, (R_SWCTL + 2)"). The switch control area is a storage area for storing detection states of various switches provided in the gaming machine for each timer interrupt, and is provided in the RAM 111 c in the present embodiment. The rise information is information indicating that the target switch has changed from off to on.

  R.sub .-- SWCTL is the head address of the switch control area, the information of the logical level described later is stored in the first address R.sub .-- SWCTL + 1 from the head address, and the rising edge information is stored in the second address R.sub .-- SWCTL + 2 from the head address. When the target switch changes from off to on, the target bit changes from 0 to 1 among the 8 bits of data of the address R_SWCTL + 2.

  When there is no winning (entering) in the target starting port (starting port 1 or 2) and the target switch is off, the rising information (target bit) corresponding to the target switch is zero, and the operation result ( AND) becomes zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set. If the rise information is the same as the switch bit data (determination value) (for example, "00000001B" and the target switch bit is turned on), the operation result (logical AND) is other than zero (for example, "00000001B") And the zero flag (ZF) is not set.

  The "AQND" instruction can determine whether the switch is turned on or not without executing the instruction to acquire the value stored in the switch control area in the register. Since the on / off determination of the switch is performed without using the register, the determination can be made reliably even if a failure occurs in the register. In addition, since the instruction to acquire the value stored in the switch control area in the register becomes unnecessary, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpreting and executing circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit that executes this "AQND" instruction.

  At line number 2040, when the operation result (logical product) becomes zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set, the subroutine is ended, and the process is returned to the start port switch monitoring process (code "RET Z"). That is, when there is no winning on the target starting port (starting port 1 or 2) and the target switch is off, the processing returns to the starting port switch monitoring process.

  FIG. 133B is a time chart illustrating a procedure of detecting “rising information” which is the rising of a switch. Note that f in the figure is an interrupt cycle, and a timer interrupt occurs at the beginning of the interrupt cycle. Also, d represents a delay time. The rise of the switch, that is, the determination as to whether or not the switch is turned on, is performed in the input processing of A1303 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 125). The first physical level, the second physical level, the logic level, and the rising information, which will be described below, are updated each time a timer interrupt occurs, and are organized for each switch provided in the gaming machine to be in the switch control area. It is memorized.

  First, rising (23401) and falling (23402) of the switch will be described. If the level of the detection signal of the switch is different from the previously set first physical level (from the low level to the high level or from the high level) in the input / output process (A1303 in FIG. 125) when the timer interrupt occurs (Change to low level), newly set the first physical level to the level of the detection signal. Then, after the predetermined delay time d has elapsed, when the detection signal of the switch is different from the previously set second physical level, the second physical level is set to the level of the detection signal. The first physical level and the second physical level only differ in detection timing.

  At this time, if the first physical level and the second physical level match, it is determined that the detection signal has changed, and the level is set as the logic level. Then, when the logic level changes from the low level to the high level, the rising information is set to ON until the delay time elapses from the occurrence of the next timer interrupt. That is, after the rising information is set to on, it is set to off at the next timer interrupt occurrence.

  In addition, when the signal levels of the first physical level and the second physical level are different, that is, as indicated by 23403, the level of the detection signal of the switch at the time of detecting the first physical level and at the time of detecting the second physical level. Are different from each other, it is configured not to change the logic level as noise is generated.

  Referring back to FIG. 133A, row number 2050 corresponds to A2803 in the hard random number acquisition process, and the random number latch register status is input to the A register from port C_HRDCNT (that is, the port with the number corresponding to label C_HRDCNT). (Code "IN A, (C_HRDCNT)").

  Row numbers 2060 and 2070 correspond to A2804 in the hard random number acquisition processing, and it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register. At line number 2060, the logical AND of the judgment value (judgment data) stored in the area of the address (for example, in the data area of the ROM) currently stored in the HL register at the present time and the value of the A register is taken (code "AND" A, (HL +) "). Thereafter, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address ("HL +"). The judgment value is other than zero, for example “00000010 B”, and the operation result (logical AND) of row number 2060 is zero when the random number latch register status which is the value of A register does not match the judgment value, and the zero flag (ZF) Is set and the random number latch register status matches the determination value, the flag becomes non-zero (eg, "00000010B") and the zero flag (ZF) is not set. In addition, when latch data does not exist in the target random number latch register, the bit of the random number latch register status corresponding to the target random number latch register is 0, and the random number latch register status does not match the determination value. Product) will be zero.

  In row number 2070, if the operation result of row number 2060 is zero (Z) (ie, there is no latch data in the target random number latch register), the subroutine is ended and control is returned to the starting opening switch monitoring processing (code "RET Z").

  The line number 2080 corresponds to A10701 of the hard random number acquisition processing, and is stored in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (for example, in the data area of the ROM) in order to prepare the address of the target hard random number latch register. Load the value (address of the target hard random number latch register) into the E register (code "LDE, (HL)").

  At line number 2090, a carry flag (CF) is set as a starting opening prize presence information indicating that there is a starting opening prize, corresponding to A2806 of the hard random number acquisition processing (code "SET CF").

  At line number 2100, the subroutine is ended, and the process returns to the start port switch monitoring process (code "RET").

  As described above, the code generally described as "AQND r, (R_SWCB)" takes the logical product of the judgment value stored in the register r and the value (rise information) of the switch control area of the address R_SWCB. Thus, the detection state of the switch (switch bit on / off) can be determined. In the present embodiment, R_SWCB is the address of the rising edge information of the switch control area. When a switch is detected, a predetermined bit (switch bit) of the rising information is turned on.

  The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation / execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit that executes the code "AQND r, (R_SWCB)".

[Operation and Effect of Eighth Embodiment]
According to the eighth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game based on the detection state of predetermined switches (various switches and sensors such as the gate switch 34a, the start opening 1 switch 36a, and the start opening 2 switch 37a). The game control means (game control apparatus 100) is provided which performs game control for generating a game state in which a bonus is given to the player when the variable display game has a special result. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group (a plurality of general purpose registers) A register bank (0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. The update information storage means is assigned addresses of a plurality of bytes, and the information identifies the information stored in the update information storage means by the addresses. The update information storage means includes a switch control area provided corresponding to the predetermined address and capable of storing the detection state of the switch. The arithmetic processing means stores in the storage area based on the value of the storage area and the determination value stored in the predetermined general purpose register without storing the value of any storage area of the update information storage means in the general purpose register. It is configured to be able to execute an instruction (for example, “AQND A, (R_SWCTL + 2)”) capable of determining the state of the received value. The arithmetic processing means determines the detection state of the switch according to this instruction. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may include this instruction.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the switch is turned on or not without executing an instruction to acquire the value stored in the switch control area into the general-purpose register. Since the determination of the switch is performed without using a general purpose register, the determination can be made reliably even if a failure occurs in a general purpose register other than a predetermined general purpose register. In addition, since the instruction to acquire the value stored in the switch control area in the register becomes unnecessary, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced.

[Ninth embodiment]
The ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 135. FIG. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to eighth embodiments.

  FIG. 134A is a program list showing a program structure of a part of special view start port switch common processing (FIG. 128) according to the ninth embodiment.

  A line number 2500 is a label (P_TSIDOSW) corresponding to the special view start opening switch common processing, and indicates an in-ROM address (start address) of a program module corresponding to the special view start opening switch common processing. The special view starting opening switch common processing is a subroutine called by the “CALLR” instruction in A2708 and A2715 of the starting opening switch monitoring processing (FIG. 22).

  The line number 2510 corresponds to A10801 of the special view starting opening switch common processing. When the code “IQCP (IY + R_SIDOSIG), 255” of line number 2510 is smaller than 255, the value (IY + R_SIDOSIG) stored in the area of addition address “IY + R_SIDOSIG” as an absolute address in the address space is “IQCP”. To +1, and if not smaller than 255, substitute 0 to initialize the value (IY + R_SIDOSIG). The value (IY + R_SIDOSIG), which is the number of times of starting opening signal output, is added up to 255 as the upper limit. The “IQCP” instruction is described in detail in the program list (FIG. 141) described later. The value (IY + R_SIDOSIG), which is the number of times the starting opening signal is output, may be kept at 255 instead of returning to 0 as in A2901 to A2904 in FIG.

  Row numbers 2520 to 2550 correspond to A2905 of the special view start port switch common process. At line number 2520, the value stored in the pending information table (area of the address of the HL register at the present time) is loaded into the W register as the offset address of the pending number area (code “LD W, (HL +)”). After that, the address in the current HL register is updated to the next address. For example, if the target starting port is the starting port 1, the address in the HL register at the present time (for example, in the data area of the ROM) is the value loaded at line number 1590. The holding information table (A2707, A2714) is a table (for example, ROM) in which information on holding by winning to the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) or the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37, starting opening 2) is set. In the data area of

  In the row number 2530, the value (number of reservations) stored at the addition address IY + W is loaded into the A register (code “LD A, (IY + W)”). The addition address IY + W is obtained by adding the value stored in the W register (offset address of the number of pending areas) and the value stored in the IY register (RAM head address “2800 h”). The addition address IY + W is an absolute address of the hold number area. That is, in the line number 2530, the number of pending areas in the pending number area is stored in the A register, but the number of pending areas (the number of starting memories) at the current point is updated by +1 with the current winning with line number 2560 (A2906). The number of pendings before

  In row number 2540, the number of pending A registers is compared with the upper limit (4 in this case), and the carry flag (CF) is set if it is smaller than the upper limit, and the carry flag (CF) is set if the upper limit is exceeded. Not set (Code "CP A, 4").

  At line number 2550, when the number of reservations reaches the upper limit value and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the process returns to the start port switch monitoring process (FIG. 22) (code "RET NC").

  The line number 2560 corresponds to A2906 of the special view starting opening switch common processing. In line number 2560, the number of pending areas corresponding to the address IY + W in RAM is updated by +1 as the target special figure pending number (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number) (code “IQNC” (IY + W) ". The in-RAM address IY + W is an address obtained by adding the value stored in the IY register and the value stored in the W register.

  The instruction “IQNC” does not store the 1-byte value stored in the address destination area in the register (at least the general purpose register) of FIG. 121A (the value stored in the address destination area It is an instruction to directly +1 update (add by 1) without taking it into a register). Therefore, by using the instruction "IQNC", it is not necessary to write three codes, that is, loading to a register, addition processing by a register, and loading to an address destination area, and the program can be compared to the conventional program. It becomes compact. Further, direct addition of the value stored in the address destination area by "IQNC" does not cause a problem even when interrupt processing occurs because a general purpose register is not used.

  Row numbers 2570 to 2600 correspond to A2907 of the special view starting opening switch common processing. At line number 2570, the pending count (the pending count before +1 update) stored in the A register is loaded to the C register (code "LD C, A").

  At line number 2580, the value stored in the area of the address of the HL register at the current point (starting opening winning flag) is loaded into the B register (code "LD B, (HL +)"). That is, the starting opening winning flag (value indicating the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) is acquired from the hold information table. Thereafter, the value in the HL register is updated to the next address (HL +).

  In line number 2590, the value (starting opening winning flag) stored in B register is loaded into the area (in RAM) of addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG (code “LQD (IY + R_SIDOFLG), B. Addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG is IY register The value corresponding to the label R_SIDOFLG is added to the value (RAM start address “2800h”) stored in the.

  At line number 2600, the value of the BC register is saved in the stack area of the RAM (code "PUSH BC").

  Row numbers 2610 to 2650 correspond to A2908 of the special view starting opening switch common processing. At line number 2610, the value stored at the address stored in the current HL register (the number of bytes for one hold (7 or 8)) is loaded into the W register (code "LD W, (HL +)"). That is, the number of bytes (7 or 8) for one hold is acquired from the hold information table. After that, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address.

  In addition, as shown in special figure 1 reserve storage area of RAM 111c in FIG. 135A, big reserve random number storage area of each reserve of special figure 1 reserve storage area, big hit random number of 2 bytes, big hit design random number of 1 byte, 1 byte Small hit symbol random number, 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1, 1-byte fluctuation pattern random number 2, 1-byte fluctuation pattern random number 3 are stored, and the byte allocated for each special figure 1 reservation (first start memory) The number (number of pending bytes) will be 8 bytes. On the other hand, as shown in the special figure 2 reserve storage area of the RAM 111c in FIG. 135B, the big figure random number storage area of each reserve of the special figure 2 reserve storage area is a big hit random number of 2 bytes, a big hit symbol random number of 1 byte, 2 bytes Fluctuation pattern random number 1, 1-byte fluctuation pattern random number 2, 1-byte fluctuation pattern random number 3 are stored, and the number of bytes (number of reserved bytes) allocated to each special figure 2 reservation (second start storage) is 7 It becomes a byte. Since there is no small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game, the small hit symbol random number of 1 byte is not stored in the random number storage area of each reserve of the special figure 2 reserved storage area.

  In the row number 2620, the number of pending bytes (7 or 8) stored in the W register is multiplied by the number of pending addresses stored in the A register (0 to 3 which is the pending number before updating), and the WA register Stores the calculation result (number of pendings × number of pending bytes) (code “MUL W, A”). Since the operation result is from 0 to 24, the operation result is substantially stored in the low-order byte A register. Note that the number of reservations is the number of starting storages (the number of starting storages), and the number of pending bytes is the number of bytes allocated for each holding (for each starting storage).

  At line number 2630, the value (the address of the random number storage area) stored at the address stored in the current HL register is loaded into the L register (code "LDL, (HL)"). That is, the address (head address) of the random number storage area is acquired from the hold information table. The start address of the random number storage area (pending storage area) is 2830 h in the special view 1 pending storage area (FIG. 135A) and 2850 h in the special view 2 pending storage area (FIG. 135 B).

  At line number 2640, the value stored in register A (number of reservations × number of reserved bytes) is added to the start address of the random number storage area stored in register L (code “ADD L, A”). As a result of the addition, the value of the L register becomes the address of the area corresponding to the number of holdings (+1 number of holdings before updating), that is, the top address of the holding random number storage area generated by the current winning. For example, if the reserve generated by the current prize is reserve 3, the address of the area corresponding to the reserve number for the special figure 1 reserve storage area (FIG. 135A) will be 30h + 2 x 8 = 40h in offset address (lower byte), In the special figure 2 reserved storage area (FIG. 135B), the offset address (lower byte) is 50h + 2 × 7 = 5Eh.

  In the line number 2650, the numerical value "28h" is loaded into the H register as the upper address of the address of the area corresponding to the number of reservations (code "LD H, 28 H").

  Row numbers 2660 to 2670 correspond to A10802 of the special view starting opening switch common processing. In line number 2660, the value stored in the 2-byte area (2-byte big hit random number) is input from the address stored in the E register (the address of the target hard random number latch register) (code “INW WA, (E) ").

In the line number 2670, the big hit random number of the WA register in the area (in the RAM) of the address currently stored in the HL register at the current time, that is, the holding random number storage area (area corresponding to the holding number) Load (memory) (code "LQD (HL +), WA"). Thereafter, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address ("HL +"). Since the big hit random number is 2 bytes, for example, if the address stored in the current HL register is 2840h, the next address is 2842h. The lower byte (value of A register) of the big hit random number is stored in the RAM area of the address smaller than the upper byte (value of W register).

  Thus, in the code "LQD (HL +), WA", the address in the HL register is automatically updated to the next address which is the next storage destination, so the next time in the continuous RAM area such as the random number storage area There is no need for an instruction to calculate the address of the storage destination of. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program also decreases.

  Row numbers 2680 to 2690 correspond to A10803 of the special view starting opening switch common processing. In the row number 2680, the value (here, lower byte) of a predetermined register "C_SRND0_L" in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code "IN A, (C_SRND0_L)"). The predetermined register is soft random number register 0.

  At line number 2690, the value of the A register as a big hit symbol random number is loaded into the area of the address stored in the current HL register (code "LQD (HL +), A"). Thereafter, the address in the current HL register is updated to the next address ("HL +"). Since the jackpot symbol random number is one byte, for example, if the address stored in the current HL register is 2842h, the next address is 2843h.

  Row numbers 2700 to 2710 correspond to A2912 of the special view starting opening switch common processing.

  In line No. 2700, does the value in register B match as the starting opening winning flag (value indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) in comparison with the numerical value (value indicating special figure 1) corresponding to the label C_SIDO1? (T) Determine whether it does not match (F) (code “CPJ B, C_SIDO1”). In the case of a match (T), for example, a predetermined flag is set.

  In row number 2710, in the case where the comparison result of row number 2700 does not match (F), that is, when the target starting opening is starting opening 2 (when the starting opening winning flag indicates special figure 2), the label TSIDOSW10 is displayed. Jump to a corresponding ROM address (conditional branch) and execute the instruction after line number 2750 (code "JRS F, TSIDOSW10"). This is because there is no small hit in the special view 2 variable display game, and there is no need to acquire and store a small hit symbol random number.

  Row numbers 2720 to 2730 correspond to A10804 of the special view starting opening switch common processing. At row number 2720, the value of a predetermined register "C_SRND1_L" in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code "IN A, (C_SRND1_L)").

  At line number 2730, the value of the A register is loaded as a small hit symbol random number into the area of the address stored in the current HL register (code "LQD (HL +), A". Thereafter, in the current HL register) The address is updated to the next address ("HL +") Since the large and small symbol random number is 1 byte, for example, if the address stored in the current HL register is 2843h, the next address is 2844h.

Row numbers 2750 to 2780 correspond to A2915 of the special view starting opening switch common processing. In the row number 2750, the value (that is, the variation pattern random number 1) stored in the area (in the RAM) of the addition address IY + R_RNDHEN1 is loaded into the WA register (code “LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN1)”). The addition address is obtained by adding the value (RAM head address “2800h”) stored in the IY register to the value (offset address of the generation area in which the variation pattern random number 1 is generated) corresponding to the label R_RNDHEN1. The addition address IY + R_RNDHEN1 is an absolute address of a generation area in which the variation pattern random number 1 is generated.

  Here, the offset address R_RNDHEN1 is limited to a range that can be represented by one byte, and the code “LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN1)” of the row number 2750 can be a two-byte instruction. Thereby, the program capacity (code amount) can be reduced. When the offset address is not used, the address is 2 bytes and the instruction of the row number 2750 is a 3 byte instruction.

  In the line number 2760, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of the WA register is loaded from the address currently stored in the HL register into the 2-byte area (in the RAM) (code "LQD (HL +), WA"). Thereafter, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address ("HL +"). Since the variation pattern random number 1 is 2 bytes, for example, if the address stored in the current HL register is 2844h, the next address is 2846h.

  In the row number 2770, the value (that is, the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) stored in the 2-byte area (in the RAM) from the addition address IY + R_RNDHEN2 is loaded into the WA register (code “LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN2)”). The addition address is obtained by adding the value (RAM head address “2800h”) stored in the IY register to the value (offset address of the generation area in which the variation pattern random number 2 is generated) corresponding to the label R_RNDHEN2. The addition address IY + R_RNDHEN2 is an absolute address of a generation area in which the variation pattern random number 2 is generated. The generation area in which the variation pattern random number 2 (1 byte) and the variation pattern random number 3 (1 byte) are generated is continuous, and has a total of 2 bytes. Therefore, it is possible to load the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 into the WA register simultaneously with one instruction.

  In the line number 2780, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of the WA register are loaded into the area (2 bytes in the RAM) of the address currently stored in the HL register (code "LD (HL), WA"). For example, if the address stored in the current HL register is 2846h, the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are loaded to 2846h and 2847h.

  The line number 2790 corresponds to A2916 in the special view start port switch common process, and calls the subroutine (label P_THOINF) of the special figure hold information determination process (FIG. 129) (code "CALLR P_THOINF").

  Row numbers 2800 to 2820 correspond to A2917 of the special view starting opening switch common processing. At line number 2800, the value of the BC register is restored from the stack area of the RAM (code "POP BC"). The value of the B register is the starting opening winning flag (value showing the special figure 1 or the special figure 2), and the value of the C register is the number of reservations (number of reservations before updating by +1).

  At line number 2810, the numerical value corresponding to the label C_THOMD (numerical value indicating the special figure suspension mode) is added to the value of the B register (code "ADD B, C_THOMD").

  At line number 2820, 2 is added to the value of the C register (code "ADD C, 2").

  The line number 2830 corresponds to A2918 of the special view starting opening switch common processing. Calls and executes a subroutine (P_COMSET) of effect command setting processing (code "CALLR P_COMSET"). The effect command setting process is executed based on the values of the B register and the C register.

  At line number 2840, the process returns to the start port switch monitoring process (FIG. 22) (code "RET").

  As described above, a code generally described as “LQD (qq +), r (or dd)” is an area in the RAM indicated by the address value set in the pair register qq (in particular, a random number storage area) as a storage instruction. After storing the value of the register r (or pair register dd), the address value of the pair register qq is added and updated by a predetermined addition value to obtain the next address value. Here, r is an arbitrary register, and qq and dd (different from qq) are an optional pair register. The predetermined addition value corresponds to the number of bytes of the register, which is 1 for the register r and 2 for the pair register dd. A pair register composed of two registers is also called a register pair.

  The CPU core 102 (instruction interpreting and executing circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit that executes the code "LQD (qq +), r (or dd)".

[Operation and effect of the ninth embodiment]
According to the ninth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game by establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, entry or passage of the game ball to the start winning area or the gate), and the variable display game is a special result. The game control means (game control apparatus 100) which performs game control which generates the special game state which gives a privilege to a player when it becomes is provided. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group (registers) including a plurality of registers. Banks 0 and 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. The register group includes a plurality of register pairs each configured of two registers. An address of a plurality of bytes is assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address. The storage means (for example, the CPU 111a of the game control apparatus 100) extracts random numbers based on establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, entry or passage of the game ball to the start winning area or gate) and executes the variation display game Can be stored in the random number storage area of the update information storage unit (for example, the RAM 111c). The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) stores the value stored in the predetermined register pair or the predetermined register in one of the storage areas of the update information storage means corresponding to the address set in the other register pair. After that, the storage instruction is configured to be executable to update the address set in the other register pair. The arithmetic processing means stores the random number stored in the predetermined register pair or the predetermined register in the random number storage area of the update information storage means according to the storage instruction. The storage instruction is, for example, “LQD (HL +), WA” or “LQD (HL +), A”. An instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may include such storage instructions.

  Since the address of the storage destination is automatically updated by the storage instruction, when storing values continuously in a continuous storage area (for example, an area in the RAM), calculation of the address of each storage destination conventionally required in the past There is no need for instructions for Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program also decreases.

  Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, when the random numbers are continuously stored in the random number storage area (for example, the area in the RAM), an instruction for calculating the address of each storage destination, which was conventionally required, becomes unnecessary. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program also decreases.

Modification of the ninth embodiment
FIG. 134B is a program list showing a partial program structure of the special view start port switch common process (FIG. 128) according to the modification of the ninth embodiment. The same line numbers are assigned to the codes having the same contents as in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment, and the description will be omitted.

  The row numbers 2500 to 2670 are the same as in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment, but in the row number 12010 executed next to the row number 2670, the values of the WA register and the WA ′ register are exchanged (code “ XQCH WA, WA '"). In the present embodiment, the WA register is the WA register 1203A (table register) of the register bank 0, and the WA 'register is the WA register 1203B (back register) of the register bank 1. As a result, the big hit random number (2 bytes) stored in the WA register of register bank 0 at this time is put in the WA 'register of register bank 1 before the value of WA register 1203A of register bank 0 is changed (destructed) It can be temporarily evacuated.

  When calling the subroutine (label P_THOINF) of the special-graph hold information determination process at line number 2790, the values of the WA register as the pair register and the value of the WA 'register are exchanged again (code "XQCH WA, WA'"). Thereby, the big hit random number saved (stored) in the WA 'register of register bank 1 is returned to the WA register of register bank 0 (immediately before execution) when the special view suspension information determination process is executed ), It can be used in the jackpot determination process of the special map suspension information determination process. Then, since it is not necessary to take out (read out) the big hit random number from the random number storage area of the RAM in the special view holding information determination process, the program capacity (the number of codes and the code amount) can also be reduced. Further, since the data is not saved in the stack area of the RAM, an increase in the RAM capacity can be prevented.

  Line number 12020 and line number 12030 are the same as line number 2690, but in order to be able to use the jackpot symbol random number acquired in row number 2680 in the special figure reservation information determination process later, the jackpot symbol random number is A In addition to the register, it is also stored in the E register (code "LD E, A").

  Row numbers 12040 and 12050 are the same as row number 2730, but in order to be able to use the small hit symbol random number acquired in row number 2720 in the later-described special view holding information determination process, the small hit symbol random number Is stored in the D register in addition to the A register.

  As described above, the code generally described as “XQCH dd, dd ′” corresponds to the value of the pair register dd of the first register bank (for example, register bank 0) and the pair register dd as an exchange instruction. The value of the pair register dd ′ of the second register bank (eg, register bank 1) to be exchanged is exchanged. Therefore, the big hit random number (2 bytes) stored in the pair register dd of the first register bank can be temporarily saved in the pair register dd 'of the second register bank. Then, the saved big hit random number can be returned (returned) to the pair register dd of the first register bank at a desired timing, and can be used. Furthermore, it is possible to save without using the stack area of the RAM. Therefore, since there is no need for an instruction to take out (read out) the big hit random number from the random number storage area of the RAM in the special view hold information determination process or the like, the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced. A pair register composed of two registers is also called a register pair.

  The CPU core 102 (instruction interpreting and executing circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit that executes the code "XQCH dd, dd '".

[Operations and effects of the modification of the ninth embodiment]
According to the modification of the ninth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game by establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, entering or passing of the game ball to the start winning area or the gate), and the variable display game The game control means (game control apparatus 100) which performs game control which generates a special game state which gives a privilege to a player when a special result is obtained is provided. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program, and information updated by the arithmetic processing means Update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) to be stored. The game control means comprises a first group of registers (e.g., register bank 0) and a second group of registers (e.g., register bank 1) consisting of a group of registers having the same configuration as the first group of registers. The arithmetic processing means exchanges the value stored in the first register group and the value stored in the second register group, and causes the exchange instruction (for example, the “XQCH” instruction) to be stored in each register group. Configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means extracts a random number (big hit random number) used for lottery of whether to generate a special gaming state in the variable display game based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and extracts the extracted random number as a first register. In the state of being stored in the group, the random number stored in the first register group is saved in the second register group by the exchange instruction. The arithmetic processing means restores to the first register group the random number saved in the second register group by the exchange instruction before making a priori determination whether or not to generate the special game state based on the random number. Perform predetermination using the random numbers returned to the registers of.

  Therefore, it is possible to temporarily save the value (for example, the big hit random number) stored in the first register group (for example, the register bank 0) by the exchange instruction to the second register group (for example, the register bank 1) . Then, the value saved (for example, the big hit random number) can be returned (restored) to the first register group at a desired timing and used by the exchange instruction. Therefore, the value stored in the first register group can be saved without using the stack area of the RAM. Further, since the value can be saved in the second register group, an instruction to take out (read out) this value from the RAM is unnecessary, so the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced. In particular, the exchange instruction can be applied to the random number which is an important value in the game control, and the random number can be saved from the first register group to the second register group for protection. The random number saved at a desired timing such as immediately before the predetermination is restored to the first register group, and the predetermination is performed using the random number returned to the first register group. Therefore, the first register group can be used freely until a desired timing after being evacuated.

Tenth Embodiment
The tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 136A. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as the configurations of the first to ninth embodiments.

  FIG. 136A is a program list showing a program structure of a part of the special-image hold information determination process (FIG. 129) according to the tenth embodiment.

  A line number 3000 is a label (P_THOINF) corresponding to the special map hold information determination process, and indicates the ROM address (head address) of the program module corresponding to the special figure hold information determination process. The special figure reservation information determination process is a subroutine called by the "CALLR" instruction in A2916 (line number 2790 of FIG. 134) of the special figure start port switch common process (FIG. 128).

  Row numbers 3010 to 3050 correspond to A3001 of the special-image suspension information determination process.

  In the line number 3010, the address (value corresponding to the label R_T2HORYU) corresponding to the number-of-retentions storage area of the special view 2 number of reservations is loaded into the DE register (code "LDY DE, R_T2 HORYU"). R_T2HORYU is an offset address based on the value "2800h" of the IY register, and it is sufficient to designate only the lower address of the number-of-holds storage area as R_T2HORYU. Therefore, although the conventional code (machine language instruction) for loading a value into the DE register is 3 bytes, the code (machine language instruction) according to this "LDY" instruction is 2 bytes.

  In line number 3020, a value “R_T2RNDMEM minus 7 (number of reserved bytes for special figure 2 suspension) from the start address (numerical value corresponding to label R_T2RNDMEM) of the special figure 2 reserved random number storage area (Special figure 2 reserve storage area) -7 "is loaded to the HL register as a value (reference value) associated with the address of the random number storage area reserved for the special figure 2 (code" LDY HL, R_T2 RNDMEM-7 ").

  At line number 3030, the number of pending bytes "7" for the special view 2 pending is loaded to the W register (code "LD W, 7").

  At line number 3040, the starting opening winning flag stored in the area (within the RAM) of addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG is compared with the numerical value (value indicating special figure 1) corresponding to label C_SIDO1 (code “CP (IY + R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1 "). The addition address is obtained by adding the value corresponding to the label R_SIDOFLG to the value stored in the IY register (the RAM start address “2800 h”). If the starting opening winning flag indicates special drawing 1 and the comparison result is in agreement, the zero flag is set (Z), and if the starting opening winning flag indicates special drawing 2 and the comparison result does not match, the zero flag is not set (NZ).

  At line number 3050, when the starting opening winning flag indicates the special figure 2 and the zero flag is not set (NZ), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to the label THOINF10 (conditional branch) and execute the instruction after line number 3140 (Code "JR NZ, THOINF10"). That is, if there is no winning of the starting opening 1, it branches.

  Row numbers 3060 to 3100 correspond to A3002 of the special-image suspension information determination process.

  At line number 3060, the address corresponding to the label R_T1HORYU corresponding to the number-of-retentions storage area of the special view 1 number of reservations is loaded into the DE register (code "LDY DE, R_T1 HORYU").

  At line number 3070, a value “R_T1RNDMEM minus 8 (number of reserved bytes for special figure 1 suspension) from the start address (numerical value corresponding to label R_T1 RNDMEM) of the special figure 1 reserved random number storage area (Special figure 1 reservation storage area) -8 "is loaded to the HL register as a value (reference value) associated with the address of the random number storage area reserved for the special view 1 (code" LDY HL, R_T1 RNDMEM-8 ").

  At line number 3080, the value of the W register, which is 7 at present, is updated by 1 (increased by 1) to make the number of reserved bytes “8” for the special figure 1 suspension (code “INC W”).

  In line number 3090, as in line number 1540, the value stored in address “IY + R_TGAMEFLG” is compared with the value of label C_JTN indicating that the special signal time is short (during general public support state) (code “CHK (code IY + R_TGAMEFLG), C_JTN "). If the special pattern time is short and the comparison results match, the operation result is not zero and the zero flag is not set (NZ). If the special time is short and the comparison results do not match, the zero flag is set. (Z).

  At line number 3100, when the special figure time is short, that is, when the comparison results match (NZ), the process returns to the special figure starting port switch common process (FIG. 128) (code "RET NZ").

  Row numbers 3110 to 3120 correspond to A3003 of the special-image suspension information determination process.

  In the row number 3110, the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAME” is compared with the value of the label C_TFAN indicating that the big hit is in the middle or the small hit (code “CP (IY + R_TGAME), C_TFAN”). Here, the offset address corresponding to the label R_TGAME indicates an area in the RAM storing the special figure game process number (A2606) based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. The value of the label C_TFAN is the special figure game processing number "3" of the fanfare / during interval processing. If the jackpot is medium or small, and the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAME” is 3 or more, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), and the jackpot or the small hit is less than 3 or less. , The carry flag (CF) is set (C).

  In the row number 3120, when the big hit or the small hit is in progress and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the process returns to the special view start port switch common processing (FIG. 128) (code "RET NC").

  Row numbers 3140 to 3170 correspond to A10901 of the special-image suspension information determination process.

  In line No. 3140, the number of reservations (number of special figures 1 or 2) stored in the number-of-holds storage area corresponding to the address of the DE register is loaded into the A register (code “LD A, (DE ))).

  In the row number 3150, the number of pending bytes (7 or 8) stored in the W register, and the number of pending in the A register (Special Figure 1 pending number or Special Figure 2 pending number) (here, 1 to 4) Is stored in the WA register (number of pendings × number of pending bytes) (code “MUL W, A”). Since the operation result is 7 to 31, the operation result is substantially stored in the lower byte A register.

  At line number 3160, the value of the WA register is saved to the stack area of the RAM (code "PUSH WA").

  In the row number 3170, the value (2 bytes) of the area (2 bytes) corresponding to the total address value HL + A is loaded (read) to the WA register (code “LQD WA, (HL + A)”). The total address value is the sum of the value of the HL register and the value of the A register (number of pendings × number of pending bytes). The value of the HL register is a value obtained by subtracting the number of pending bytes from the start address of the random number storage area, and is a value related to the random number storage area. The value of the A register is the number of holdings × the number of holding bytes, which is a value based on the product of the number of holdings (the number of starting memories) and the number of bytes allocated for each holding (every starting memories).

  Alternatively, the value of the HL register may be set as the start address of the random number storage area, and the value of the A register may be set as (number of reservations-1) x number of reserved bytes.

  Here, the total address value HL + A is the leading address of the most recently generated random number storage area of the latest hold (the leftmost in FIGS. 135A and 135B). Then, although the big hit random number of the latest hold is stored in the area corresponding to the total address value, the lower byte of the latest hold big hit random number is acquired in the A register and the upper byte is read in the W register (read out) .

  The line number 3180 corresponds to A3004 of the special view pending information determination process, and calls a subroutine (label P_BHITJUD) of the big hit determination process (code “CALLR P_BHITJUD”). In the big hit determination process, it is determined whether or not a big hit based on the latest pending big hit random number.

  Row numbers 3190 to 3200 correspond to A3005 of the special-image hold information determination process. At line number 3190, the value of the WA register saved in the stack area at line number 3160 is returned from the stack area to the WA register (code "POP WA").

  In row number 3200, if the result of the big hit determination processing is not a big hit (if the carry flag is not set (in the case of NC)), label for performing processing after row number 3300 (processing after A3008 in FIG. 129). Jump to an address in the ROM corresponding to THOINF 30 (conditional branch) (code "JRNC, THOINF30").

  Line numbers 3210 to 3240 correspond to A3006 of the special-image hold information determination process. At line number 3210, the address (head address) of the jackpot symbol random number check table D_ZCHKTBL1 for the special figure 1 is loaded into the DE register (code "LD DE, D_ZCHKTBL1").

  The line No. 3220 is the same code as the line No. 3040, and the starting opening winning flag stored in the area (within the RAM) of the addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG is compared with the numerical value (value showing special figure 1) corresponding to the label C_SIDO1. (Code “CP (IY + R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1”).

  At line number 3230, when the starting opening winning flag indicates special figure 1 and the zero flag is set (Z), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to the label THOINF 20 (conditional branch) to execute the instruction after line number 3260 Execute (code "JR Z, THOINF20"). That is, if it is a winning of the starting opening 1, it branches.

  At line number 3240, the address (head address) of the jackpot symbol random number check table D_ZCHKTBL2 for the special figure 2 is loaded to the DE register and overwritten (code "LD DE, D_ZCHKTBL2").

  Line numbers 3260 to 3270 correspond to A10902 of the special-image hold information determination process. At line number 3260, 2 is added to the value of the A register (code "ADD A, 2"). A value obtained by adding “2” to (number of pendings × number of pending bytes) is stored in the A register.

  In the row number 3270, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the total address value HL + A is loaded (read) into the A register (code “LQD A, (HL + A)”). Currently, the total address value is the sum of the value of the HL register (the start address of the random number storage area minus the number of pending bytes) and the value of the A register (number of pending × number of pending bytes + 2). The value of the HL register is a value associated with the random number storage area, and the value of the A register is a value based on the product of the number of pending and the number of bytes allocated for each pending. Here, the total address value is obtained by adding “2” to the head address of the latest pending random number storage area that has occurred most recently. In the area corresponding to the total address value, the most recently generated big hit symbol random number of the latest hold is stored, but the latest pending big hit symbol random number is acquired (read out) in the A register.

  Row numbers 3280 to 3290 correspond to A10903 in the special-image suspension information determination process.

  In the row number 3280, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the total address value DE + A is loaded (read) into the A register (code "LQD A, (DE + A)"). The total address value is the sum of the value stored in the DE register (big hit symbol random number check table top address) and the value of the A register (big hit symbol random number). Then, since stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is stored in the area corresponding to the total address value, the latest symbol holding stop symbol information is acquired (read out) in the A register. Thus, stop symbol information is acquired corresponding to the big hit symbol random number.

  At line number 3290, a jump is made to an address in the ROM corresponding to the label THOINF 100 (code "JRTHOINF 100").

  As described above, the code generally described as “LQD qq (or r ′), (dd + r)” is an address specified based on the value of the dd register and the value of the r register as the read instruction (here, Then, the value (random number) of the in-RAM area (random number storage area) indicated by the total address dd + r is stored in the pair register qq (or register r ′). Note that r and r 'are arbitrary registers, and r' may be different from or the same as r. qq and dd are arbitrary pair registers, and qq may be different from or the same as dd. The total address value dd + r is the sum of the value of the pair register dd (the reference address derived based on the top address of the random number storage area) and the value of the r register (the number of pending times x the value derived based on the number of pending bytes). Yes, you can specify the address (area) of a specific random number for each hold. A pair register composed of two registers is also called a register pair.

  Therefore, unlike the prior art, it is not necessary to execute a code for directly calculating the address where the random number is stored each time it is desired to acquire a specific random number of each hold, and the address can be efficiently specified and specified. Random numbers can be obtained efficiently, and the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced.

  Note that a code “LQD qq (or r ′), (for an instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242) in the CPU core 102 to acquire the value stored in the address in the RAM specified from the values of the pair register dd and the register r A dedicated logic circuit may be provided to perform "dd + r)".

[Operation and Effect of Tenth Embodiment]
According to the tenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game by establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, entering or passing of the game ball to the start winning area or the gate), and the variable display game is a special result. The game control means (game control apparatus 100) which performs game control which generates the special game state which gives a privilege to a player when it becomes is provided. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group (registers) including a plurality of registers. Banks 0 and 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. The register group includes a plurality of register pairs each configured of two registers. An address of a plurality of bytes is assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address. The storage unit (for example, the CPU 111a of the game control apparatus 100) extracts the random number based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition and stores it in the random number storage area of the update information storage unit (for example, RAM 111c) as the right to execute the variable display game. it can. Arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a), the value of one of the storage areas of the update information storage means corresponding to the address designated based on the predetermined register and the value stored in the predetermined register pair is one register or A read instruction to be stored in one register pair is configured to be executable. The arithmetic processing means reads out the random number stored in the random number storage area of the update information storage means according to the read command. The read instruction is, for example, “LQD WA, (HL + A)” or “LQD A, (HL + A)”. An instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may include such a read instruction.

  By such a read instruction, there is no need to execute an instruction for directly calculating the address where the value is stored every time the value of any storage area is to be acquired, and the address of any one of the storage areas is required. And the value stored in the area can be efficiently obtained, and the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced.

  For example, the value associated with the address of the random number storage area is stored in a predetermined register pair (e.g., HL register), and the predetermined register (e.g., A register) is allocated for each number of start stores and each start store. A value based on the product of the number of bytes is stored.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, it is not necessary to execute an instruction to directly calculate the address at which the random number is stored whenever it is desired to acquire the random number in any one of the random number storage areas. The address of the area and the random number stored in the area can be efficiently obtained, and the code amount of the entire game control program can be reduced.

Modification of Tenth Embodiment
FIG. 136B is a program list showing a partial program structure of the special view hold information determination process (FIG. 129) according to the modification of the tenth embodiment. The same line numbers are assigned to the codes having the same contents as in FIG. 136A of the tenth embodiment, and the description will be omitted.

  The modification of the tenth embodiment is a special-graph suspension information determination process that is executed corresponding to the case where the special-view starting opening switch common process (FIG. 134B) of the modification of the ninth embodiment is executed. In the special view starting port switch common process of FIG. 134B, the big hit random number is temporarily saved in the WA ′ register, and when the special view hold information determination process is executed (immediately before execution), the original WA register is restored. . Therefore, processing for extracting the big hit random number from the random number storage area of the RAM in the special view holding information determination processing of FIG. 136B (processing from line number 3000 to line number 3030 in FIG. 136A, processing from line number 3060 to line number 3080) And the process from line number 3130 to line number 3170 is unnecessary.

  The line numbers 13010 and 13020 are similar to the line numbers 3040 and 3050 in FIG. 136A.

  In line number 13010, does the value of B register match as the starting opening winning flag (value showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) and compare it with the numerical value (value showing special figure 1) corresponding to label C_SIDO1? (T) Determine whether it does not match (F) (code “CPJ B, C_SIDO1”).

  In the row number 13020, when the comparison result of the row number 13010 does not match (F), that is, when the target starting opening is the starting opening 2 (when the starting opening winning flag indicates special figure 2), the label THOINF10 is displayed. Jump to a corresponding ROM address (conditional branch) and execute the instruction after line number 3180 (code "JRS F, THOINF10").

  In the row number 3180, the subroutine (label P_BHITJUD) of the big hit determination process is called, and the big hit determination process is executed using the big hit random number of the WA register. As described above, it is not necessary to take out (read) the big hit random number from the random number storage area of the RAM in the big hit determination process.

  The line numbers 13030 to 13060 correspond to the line numbers 3210 to 3240.

  At line number 13030, the relative address (head address) of big hit symbol random number check table D_ZCHKTBL1 for special figure 1 is loaded to the HL register (code "LQDD HL, D_ZCHKTBL1-5000H").

  In line No. 13040, as in line No. 13010, the value of B register is compared with the value corresponding to label C_SIDO1 (the value indicating special figure 1) as the starting opening winning flag (value indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) Then, it is determined whether they match (T) or not match (F) (code "CPJ B, C_SIDO1").

  In the row number 13050, when the comparison result of the row number 13040 is a match (T), that is, when the target starting opening is the starting opening 1 (when the starting opening prize flag indicates special figure 1), Jump to a corresponding ROM address (conditional branch) to execute an instruction after line number 13070 (code "JRS T, THOINF20").

  At line number 13060, the relative address (head address) of the jackpot symbol random number check table D_ZCHKTBL2 for the special figure 2 is loaded into the HL register (code "LQDD HL, D_ZCHKTBL1-5000H").

  In the row number 13070, the jackpot symbol random number stored in the E register in the row number 12020 of FIG. 134B is stored in the A register (LD A, E). Therefore, it is not necessary to take out (read out) the jackpot symbol random number from the random number storage area of the RAM in the special view reservation information determination process.

  In the row number 13080, stop symbol information is acquired corresponding to the big hit symbol random number, as in the row number 3280 in FIG. 136A. In the row number 13080, the value of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the total address value HL + A is loaded (read) to the A register (code "LQD A, (HL + A)"). The total address value is the sum of the value stored in the HL register (the top address of the big hit symbol random number check table) and the value of the A register (the value of the big hit symbol random number). Then, since stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is stored in the area corresponding to the total address value, the latest symbol holding stop symbol information is acquired in the A register.

[Operations and effects of the modification of the tenth embodiment]
According to the tenth embodiment, the big hit determination processing of the special view reservation information determination processing is executed using the big hit random number saved by the code generally described as “XQCH dd, dd ′”. As described above, it is not necessary to take out the big hit random number from the random number storage area of the RAM in the big hit determination process, and the program capacity (the number of codes and the code amount) can be reduced.

Eleventh Embodiment
The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to tenth embodiments.

  FIG. 137 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the change start information setting process (FIG. 40) according to the eleventh embodiment.

  A row number 3500 is a label (P_TSTASET) corresponding to the change start information setting process, and indicates an in-ROM address (head address) of a program module corresponding to the change start information setting process.

  Row numbers 3510 to 3580 correspond to A4601 of the change start information setting process. In the row number 3510, the value (variation symbol discrimination flag) of the variation symbol discrimination flag area of the address “IY + R_TZINF” is compared with the value corresponding to the label C_TZ1HEN (value indicating special figure 1) (code “CP (IY + R_TZINF), C_TZ1HEN "). The label R_TZINF indicates the offset address of the variation symbol determination flag area based on the value “2800 h” of the IY register. If the variation symbol discrimination flag indicates the special figure 1 and the comparison result matches, the zero flag is set (Z), and if the variation symbol distinction flag indicates the special figure 2 and the comparison result does not match, the zero flag is not set (NZ).

  In the line number 3520, when the variation symbol discrimination flag indicates the special figure 2 and the comparison result does not match (NZ), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to the label TSTASET10 (conditional branch) and execute the instruction after the line number 3570 Execute (code "JR NZ, TSTASET10").

  Line number 3530 is an area (2 bytes) of an address obtained by adding 4 to the start address (numerical value corresponding to label R_T1 RNDMEM, for example, 2830 h) of the random number storage area (Special figure 1 reservation storage area) of In the random number storage area, the area of fluctuation pattern random number 1 of reserve 1 to be digested (for example, the areas of addresses 2834h and 2835h in FIG. 135A) is cleared (code “CQLRW (R_T1 RNDMEM + 4)”).

  In line number 3540, an area (2 bytes) of an address obtained by adding 6 to the start address (numerical value corresponding to label R_T1 RNDMEM, for example, 2830 h) of the random number storage area (Special figure 1 reservation storage area) of Of the random number storage areas, areas of variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of reserve 1 to be digested (for example, areas of addresses 2836 h and 2837 h in FIG. 135A) are cleared (code “CQLRW (R_T1 RNDMEM + 6)”).

  Special figure 1 In the reserve storage area, the big hit random number, big hit symbol random number and small hit symbol random number of the hold 1 to be digested are already cleared (A3604, A4022, A4023), and further from the change pattern random number 1 of the hold 1. By clearing the random number storage area of 3, the random number storage area can be shifted (pending shift) (A4613).

  At line number 3550, a jump is made to an address in the ROM corresponding to the label TSTASET 20 (code "JRTSTASET20").

  In line number 3570, an area (2 bytes) of an address obtained by adding 3 to the start address (numerical value corresponding to label R_T2 RNDMEM, for example, 2850 h) of the random number storage area (Special figure 2 reservation storage area) of Of the random number storage area, the area of fluctuation pattern random number 1 of reserve 1 to be digested (for example, 2853h and 2854h in FIG. 135B) is cleared (code “CQLRW (R_T2 RNDMEM + 3)”).

  In line number 3580, an area (2 bytes) of an address obtained by adding 5 to the start address (numerical value corresponding to label R_T2RNDMEM, for example 2850h) of the random number storage area for special figure 2 (special figure 2 reserve storage area) Of the random number storage areas, the area of fluctuation pattern random number 1 of reserve 1 to be digested (for example, 2855h and 2856h in FIG. 135B) is cleared (code “CQLRW (R_T2 RNDMEM + 5)”).

  Special figure 2 In the reserve storage area, the big hit random number and big hit symbol random number of the reserve 1 to be digested are already cleared (A3703, A4116), and the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of reserve 1 are further cleared By doing this, the random number storage area can be shifted (pending shift) (A4613).

  The line number 3600 corresponds to A4602 of the change start information setting process, and loads the top address “D_TZENTIM-5000H” of the first half change time value table expressed by the relative address into the HL register (code “LQDD HL, D_TZENTIM-5000H ").

  The line numbers 3610 to 3650 correspond to A4603 in the change start information setting process. In the row number 3610, the first half variation number (for example, 1 to 10) is loaded into the B register from the first half variation number area (A4316) indicated by the addition address IY + R_TZENNUM (code “LQDB, (IY + R_TZENNUM)”). The label R_TZENNUM is an offset address of the first half change number area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register.

  In the row number 3620, the value of the B register is updated by 1 (subtracted by 1) (code "DEC B"). The value of the B register is, for example, a value of 0 to 9, and can also be used to prepare a fluctuation command (MODE).

  In the row number 3630, the value of the B register (for example, the value of 0 to 9) is added to the value of the HL register (the first address of the first half variation time value table) (code "ADD HL, B").

  At line number 3640, the value of register B (for example, the value of 0 to 9) is added to the value of register HL (code "ADD HL, B").

  The instruction of row number 3630 and row number 3640 adds a double value (for example, an even value from 0 to 18) of the value of B register to the top address of the first half variation time value table in which the first half variation time values are arranged. Be done. This is because it is necessary to add an even value because the first half fluctuation time value is 2 bytes. After the instruction of the row number 3640 is executed, the value stored in the area (2 bytes in the ROM) of the address stored in the HL register becomes the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number.

  In the row number 3650, the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is loaded (acquired) from the area of the address stored in the HL register at this time into the WA register (code "LD WA, (HL)").

  The line number 3660 corresponds to A4604 of the change start information setting process, and loads the top address “D_TKOUTIM-5000H” of the second half change time value table represented by the relative address into the HL register (code “LQDD HL, D_TKOUTIM-5000H ").

  The line numbers 3670 to 3720 correspond to A4605 and A4606 in the change start information setting process. In the row number 3670, the second half variation number (for example, 1 to 10) is loaded into the C register from the second half variation number area (A4310) indicated by the addition address IY + R_TKOUNUM (code “LQD C, (IY + R_TKOUNUM))”. The label R_TKOUNUM is an offset address of the latter half variable number area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register.

  At line number 3680, the value of the C register is updated by 1 (subtracted by 1) (code "DEC C"). The value of the C register is, for example, a value of 0 to 9.

  In the row number 3690, the value of the C register (for example, the value of 0 to 9) is added to the value of the HL register (the start address of the second half variation time value table) (code "ADD HL, C").

  At line number 3700, the value of the C register (for example, the value of 0 to 9) is added to the value of the HL register (code "ADD HL, C").

  The instruction of row number 3690 and row number 3700 adds a value (for example, an even value from 0 to 18) twice the value of C register to the start address of the second half variation time value table in which the second half variation time values are arranged. Be done. This is because it is necessary to add even values because the latter half fluctuation time value is 2 bytes. After the instruction of the line number 3640 is executed, the value stored in the area (2 bytes in the ROM) of the address stored in the HL register becomes the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number.

  At line number 3710, the value of the C register is updated by 1 (added by 1) and can also be used to prepare a change command (ACTION) (code "INC C").

  In the row number 3720, the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number acquired from the area of the address stored in the HL register at the current point is added to the WA register (code "ADD WA, (HL)"). In the WA register, the total fluctuation time value (first half fluctuation time value + second half fluctuation time value) is stored.

  Row number 3730 corresponds to A4607 of the variation start information setting process, and the value of WA register (addition value (total variation time value by instruction of row number 3720) is the special figure game processing timer area (addition address = IY + R_TGAME + 1) It is stored in a 2-byte area (code “LQD (IY + R_TGAME + 1), WA”). Here, R_TGAME + 1 is an offset address of the special figure game processing timer area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. The special figure game processing timer area is a 2-byte area of an address IY + R_TGAME + 1 and an address IY + R_TGAME + 2.

  In the row number 3740, the value corresponding to the label C_THMD_C0 is added to the value of the B register (code “ADD B, C_THMD_C0”).

  The line number 3750 corresponds to A4610 of the change start information setting process, and calls and executes a subroutine (P_COMSET) of the effect command setting process (code “CALLR P_COMSET”).

  As described above, the code generally described as "CQLRW (R_THIT_MEM)" is a clear instruction, as a part of the random number storage area, the area of the address value R_THIT_MEM, and clear data (for example, zero value) in the register of FIG. Clear (at least not using general purpose registers) without storing The registers in FIG. 121A are general-purpose registers (W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register, IX register, IY register) outside the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242 and so on. It is a special purpose register (flag register, DP register, SP register, PC register). Therefore, even if a failure occurs in the register, the random number stored in a part of the random number storage area can be reliably cleared. In the related art, the random number storage area is cleared by executing an instruction to store clear data (for example, zero value) in a register or an instruction to store the stored clear data in a random number storage area. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program is also reduced.

[Operation and Effect of Eleventh Embodiment]
According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game by establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, entry or passage of the game ball to the start winning area or the gate), and the variable display game is a special result. The game control means (game control apparatus 100) which performs game control which generates the special game state which gives a privilege to a player when it becomes is provided. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group (a plurality of general purpose registers) A register bank (0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. An address of a plurality of bytes is assigned to the update information storage means, and the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address. The storage means (for example, the CPU 111a of the game control apparatus 100) can extract random numbers and store them in the random number storage area of the update information storage means as the right to execute the variable display game based on establishment of predetermined start conditions. The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) is configured to be able to execute a clear instruction (for example, a "CQLRW" instruction) for clearing a part of the storage area of the update information storage means without using a general purpose register. The arithmetic processing means clears the random number storage area of the update information storage means by the clear instruction. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may include a clear instruction.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, there is no need to execute an instruction to store clear data (for example, zero value) in a general-purpose register or an instruction to store stored clear data in a random number storage area. Even if it occurs, the random numbers stored in part of the random number storage area can be cleared with certainty. In addition, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  Further, according to the eleventh embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) stores a game control program, and further includes storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) having a data area for storing data for the game control program. The game control program comprises arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing, and a register (DP register) for storing the start address of the data area in the address space of the arithmetic processing means. The data area includes at least a fluctuation time value table including fluctuation time values related to the fluctuation display game. The arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute an instruction (for example, “LQDD HL, D_TKOUTIM-5000H”) for specifying an area in a data area by a relative address based on the head address stored in the register (DP register). Be done. The arithmetic processing means designates the address of the fluctuation time value table by this instruction. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may include such an instruction.

  As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, data is not an absolute address (for example, 2 bytes) from the head of the address space but a relative address (for example, 1 byte) based on the head address of the data area stored in the register. The address of the fluctuation time value table in the area can be specified. Therefore, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction (machine language code) is reduced, and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced. In particular, since the fluctuation time value table has two tables of the former half fluctuation time value table and the latter half fluctuation time value table, and is often referred to, there are many benefits of code amount reduction.

[12th embodiment]
A twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to eleventh embodiments.

  FIG. 138 is a program list showing a program structure of part of the gate switch monitoring process (FIG. 62) according to the twelfth embodiment.

  A row number 4010 is a label (P_GATESW) corresponding to the gate switch monitoring process, and indicates the in-ROM address (head address) of the program module corresponding to the gate switch monitoring process.

  Row numbers 4020 and 4030 correspond to A7701 of the gate switch monitoring process. In the row number 4020, the rising information of the target switch (here, the gate switch 34a) is acquired from the address R_SWCTL + 2, and the switch is turned on by taking the logical product with the switch bit data (determination value) corresponding to the label C_GATE. It is judged whether or not it is (code "CHK (R_SWCTL + 2), C_GATE"). Here, the switch control area is a storage area in which detection states of various switches provided in the gaming machine are stored for each timer interrupt. The rise information (see FIG. 133B) is information indicating that the target switch (here, the gate switch 34a) changes from off to on. In the area of the address R_SWCTL + 2, rising information in the switch control area in which information on the target switch (here, the gate switch 34a) is stored is stored.

  When there is no passage of the game ball in the common view start gate 34 and the gate switch 34a is off, the rising information (target bit) corresponding to the gate switch 34a is zero, the operation result (logical AND) becomes zero, and the zero flag (ZF) is set. If the rising edge information is the same as the switch bit data (decision value) (for example, when the switch bit is turned on with "00000100B"), the operation result (logical AND) becomes other than zero (for example, "00000100B") , The zero flag (ZF) is not set.

  At line number 4030, when the operation result (logical AND) becomes zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set, the subroutine is ended and the routine returns to the common-play game processing (FIG. 61) (code "RET Z" ). That is, when there is no passage of the gaming ball to the common drawing start gate 34 and the gate switch 34a is off, the common drawing game processing (FIG. 61) is returned to.

  Row numbers 4040 to 4070 correspond to A7702 of the gate switch monitoring process. In line number 4040, as in line numbers 1540 and 3090, the value stored in address “IY + R_TGAMEFLG” is compared with the value of label C_JTN indicating that it is in the special transmission mode (in the general public support state) ( Code "CHK (IY + R_TGAMEFLG), C_JTN"). If the special pattern time is short and the comparison results match, the operation result is not zero and the zero flag is not set (NZ). If the special time is short and the comparison results do not match, the zero flag is set. (Z).

  At line number 4050, if the special figure time is short, that is, if the comparison results match (NZ), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to the label GATESW 10 (conditional branch) and execute the instruction after line number 4110 Is executed (code "JR NZ, GATESW10").

  In the row number 4060, like the row number 3110, the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAME” is compared with the value of the label C_TFAN indicating that the big hit is in the middle or the small hit (code “CP (IY + R_TGAME), C_TFAN” ). Here, the offset address corresponding to the label R_TGAME indicates an area in RAM (special figure game process number area) storing the special figure game process number (A2606) with reference to the value “2800h” of the IY register. The value of the label C_TFAN is the special figure game processing number "3" of the fanfare / during interval processing. If the jackpot is medium or small, and the value stored in the address “IY + R_TGAME” is 3 or more, the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), and the jackpot or the small hit is less than 3 or less. , The carry flag (CF) is set (C).

  In row number 4070, when the big hit is in the middle or the small hit and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), jump (conditional branch) to the address in the ROM corresponding to the label GATESW10. Execute the instruction (code "JR NC, GATE SW 10").

  The line number 4080 corresponds to A7703 of the gate switch monitoring process, and loads a left-handed instruction notification command (numerical value corresponding to the label C_LEFTCOM) into the BC register (code “LD BC, C_LEFTCOM”).

  The line number 4090 corresponds to A7704 of the gate switch monitoring process, and calls and executes a subroutine (P_COMSET) of the effect command setting process (code “CALLR P_COMSET”).

  Row numbers 4110 to 4130 correspond to A 7705 of the gate switch monitoring process. At line number 4110, the A register is loaded with the value (general drawing reservation number) stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area (within the RAM) of the addition address IY + R_FHORYU (code “LQD A, (IY + R_FHORYU)”). The label R_FHORYU is an offset address of the common drawing reservation number storage area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register.

  In row number 4120, the carry flag (CF) is set if the number of pending drawings in A register is compared with the upper limit (4 in this case) and the carry flag (CF) is smaller than the upper limit. Do not set) (code "CP A, 4").

  At line number 4130, when the general drawing reserve number reaches the upper limit value and the carry flag (CF) is not set (NC), the processing returns to the common drawing game process (FIG. 61) (code “RET NC”).

  The line number 4140 corresponds to A 7706 of the gate switch monitoring process, and updates the general drawing reservation number which is the value of the common drawing reservation number area in the RAM address IY + R_FHORYU by +1 (code “IQNC (IY + R_FHORYU)”). The in-RAM address IY + R_FHORYU is an addition address obtained by adding the value “2800h” stored in the IY register and the value corresponding to the label R_FHORYU. Here, the value of 1 byte (general drawing reservation number) stored in the general drawing reservation number area of the address IY + R_FHORY can be directly +1 updated without storing it in the register (at least general purpose register) of FIG. 121A.

  Row numbers 4150 to 4170 correspond to A7707 of the gate switch monitoring process. At line number 4150, the top address (numerical value corresponding to label R_FRNDMEM) of the random number storage area (general drawing reserve storage area) for general drawing suspension is loaded into the HL register (code "LDY HL, R_FRNDMEM").

  In row number 4160, the value of A register is added to the value of A register to double the value of A register (0 to 3 which is the general reservation pending number before updating). A "). As a result, the value of the A register becomes a value of 0 to 6.

  In the row number 4170, the value of the A register (values of 0 to 6) is added to the value of the HL register (the start address of the general drawing reserve storage area) (code "ADD HL, A"). At this point in time, the value of the HL register is the address of the hit random number storage area for the most recently generated latest common picture hold.

  Row numbers 4180 to 4190 correspond to A7708 of the gate switch monitoring process. In row number 4180, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND2_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register as a random number (code “IN A, (C_SRND2_L)”).

  At line number 4190, the address in the HL register is loaded after the value of the A register is loaded (stored) in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register at this point (the latest random number storage area for random number storage). Is updated to the following address (code "LQD (HL +), A"). Since the random number is 1 byte and the A register to be loaded (stored) is also 1 byte, the address value in the HL register is incremented by 1.

  At line number 4200, the value of a predetermined register (C_SRND3_L) in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register as a hit symbol random number (code "IN A, (C_SRND3_L)").

  In line number 4210, the value of A register is loaded (stored) in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register as the hit symbol random number (the symbol random number storage area for latest popular drawing suspension) (code “LD ( HL), A "). Here, since there is no random number to be stored next, the address stored in the HL register is not updated.

  At line number 4220, the routine returns to the common drawing game process (FIG. 61) (code "RET").

  As described above, the code generally described as “CHK (R_SWCB), n” takes the logical product of the judgment value n and the value (rise information) of the switch control area to obtain the detection state of the switch (switch bits Can be determined. Note that R_SWCB is an address of rise information of the switch control area. When a switch is detected, a predetermined bit (switch bit) of the rising information is turned on. The "CHK" instruction can determine whether the switch is turned on or not without executing the instruction to acquire the value stored in the switch control area in the register. Since the determination of the detection state of the switch is performed without using the register, the determination can be made reliably even if a failure occurs in the register. In addition, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpreting and executing circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit that executes the code "CHK (R_SWCB), n".

[Operations and effects of the twelfth embodiment]
According to the twelfth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game based on the detection states of predetermined switches (various switches and sensors such as the gate switch 34a, the start opening 1 switch 36a, and the start opening 2 switch 37a). The game control means (game control apparatus 100) is provided which performs game control for generating a game state in which a bonus is given to the player when the variable display game has a special result. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group (a plurality of general purpose registers) A register bank (0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. The update information storage means is assigned addresses of a plurality of bytes, and the information identifies the information stored in the update information storage means by the addresses. The update information storage means includes a switch control area provided corresponding to the predetermined address and capable of storing the detection state of the switch. The arithmetic processing means does not store the value of any storage area of the update information storage means in the general-purpose register, and based on the value of the storage area and a predetermined determination value, the state of the value stored in the storage area is A determinable instruction (for example, “CHK (R_SWCTL + 2), C_GATE”) can be executed. The arithmetic processing means determines the detection state of the switch according to this instruction. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may include this instruction.

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the detection state of the switch can be determined without executing an instruction to acquire the value stored and stored in the switch control area in the general purpose register. Since the determination of the detection state of the switch is performed without using the general purpose register, the determination can be made surely even if a failure occurs in the general purpose register, and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

13th Embodiment
A thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to twelfth embodiments. The thirteenth embodiment relates to a program structure of various editing processes.

  FIG. 139A is a program list showing a program structure of part of the segment LED editing process (FIG. 72) according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 139B is a program list showing a conventional program structure of LED editing processing.

  The line number 4500 in FIG. 139A is a label (P_SEGEDIT) corresponding to the segment LED editing process, and indicates the in-ROM address of the program module corresponding to the segment LED editing process.

  The line number 4510 corresponds to step A9201 of the segment LED editing process (FIG. 72), and updates the value (flashing control timer) of the area of the addition address IY + R_DSPTIM by +1 (code “IQNC (IY + R_DSPTIM)”). The label R_DSPTIM is an offset address of the blink control timer area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. Here, the value of 1 byte stored in the area of the addition address IY + R_DSPTIM (the number of general drawing reservations) can be directly updated by +1 without storing it in the register (at least the general purpose register) of FIG. 121A.

  Line numbers 4520 and 4530 correspond to A9202 of the segment LED editing process. In the row number 4520, it is determined whether or not the value of the area of the addition address IY + R_DSPTIM (flashing control timer) matches the output ON timing 20h as a blinking control timer area (code “CHK (IY + R_DSPTIM), 20H”). That is, the logical product of 20h indicating the output ON timing is taken, and it is determined whether a predetermined bit of the blink control timer area (in this case, bit 5 is the least significant bit 5) is 0 or 1. The output on timing 20h (00100000B) is 32 in decimal and corresponds to 128 ms (= interrupt cycle (4 ms) × 32). Since the value of the area of the addition address IY + R_DSPTIM is incremented by 1 every 4 ms, the bit 5 repeats alternating changes of 0 and 1 every 128 ms, and the desired timing can be known by performing the comparison and determination. it can. If the comparison determinations match (T), for example, a predetermined flag is set.

  At line number 4530, if the blinking control timer matches the output on timing, that is, if the comparison result of line number 4520 is coincident (T), jump (conditionally branch) to the address in ROM corresponding to label EDIT10. , Line number 4570 and subsequent instructions (code "JRS T, EDIT 10").

  Line numbers 4540 and 4550 correspond to A9204 of the segment LED editing process. In line number 4540, the top address (numerical value corresponding to label D_FHOLED2) of common drawing reservation number display table 2 is made a relative address (D_FHOLED2-5000H), and is loaded into the HL register (code "LQDD HL, D_FHOLED2-5000H" ). As a result, the common drawing reservation number display table 2 is set. The relative address is an address based on the head address "5000h" of the data area (in the ROM) for the user program.

  This "LQDD" instruction uses the relative address (substantially 1 byte) rather than the absolute address (2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space for the operand, so the number of machine language instructions is greater than that of a normal LD instruction. Decrease by one byte (e.g. decrease from 3 bytes to 2 bytes). Although the relative address (for example, 000h to BFFh) is originally 2 bytes, if the mnemonic (machine language instruction unit) is different corresponding to the value (for example, 0 to B) of the upper byte of the relative address, it is substantially The relative address can be indicated by the lower byte (1 byte).

  At line number 4550, a jump is made to a ROM address corresponding to the label EDIT 20 (code “JR EDIT 20”).

  The line number 4570 corresponds to A9203 of the segment LED editing process, and loads the start address (numerical value corresponding to label D_FHOLED1) of the common drawing reservation number display table 1 as a relative address (D_FHOLED1-5000H) into the HL register (Code "LQDD HL, D_FHOLED 1-5000 H"). As a result, the common drawing reservation number display table 1 is set.

  The line numbers 4590 to 4630 correspond to A 9205 of the segment LED editing process. In line number 4590, as in line number 4110, A register is loaded with the value (number of general drawing reservation holdings) stored in common drawing reservation number storage area (within RAM) of addition address IY + R_FHORYU (code “LQD A, ( IY + R_FHORYU) "). The label R_FHORYU is an offset address of the common drawing reservation number storage area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. The addition address IY + R_FHORYU is obtained by adding the offset address corresponding to the label R_FHORYU to the value (RAM head address “2800h”) stored in the IY register. The offset address is a relative address (difference address) based on the value “2800h” of the IY register.

  The offset address is limited to a range that can be represented by one byte (corresponding to the lower address of the two-byte address “xxxxh”), and the code “LQD A, (IY + R_FHORYU)” of the line number 4590 can be a two-byte instruction. . This can reduce the program capacity. When the offset address is not used, the address is 2 bytes, and the instruction of the line number 4590 is an instruction of 3 bytes.

  In line number 4610, the value (1 byte) of the area (1 byte) corresponding to the total address value HL + A is loaded (read) to the A register as display data corresponding to the common drawing reservation number (code “LQD A, (HL + A)” ). The total address value is the sum of the value of the HL register (the start address of the common drawing reservation number display table) and the value of the A register (the common drawing reservation number). At line number 4610, display data is acquired from the common drawing reservation number display table in correspondence to the common drawing reservation number.

  Here, display data corresponding to the common drawing reserve number will be described with reference to FIG. 139C. FIG. 139C (I) shows the lighting modes (lighting, extinguishing, blinking) of the lamps D15 and D16 of the common view holding display 56. FIG. 139C (II) shows a common drawing reservation number display table 1 and 2. In the common drawing reservation number display tables 1 and 2, display data (1 byte) corresponding to the common drawing reservation numbers 1 to 4 are arranged and stored for each 1 byte sequentially from the top address. Therefore, display data corresponding to the common drawing reservation number is stored in the total address which is the sum of the start address of the common drawing reservation number display table and the common drawing reservation number.

  If the number of reservations is 0 to 2, the display data will be the same in both tables of the number of general-purpose drawings suspension display table 1 and 2, so the general-image suspension display 56 does not blink, but if the number of reservations is 3 to 4, Since the display data of the figure holding number display table 1 and the display data of the common drawing holding number display table 2 are different, the common drawing hold display 56 blinks. Assuming that bit 0 is the lowest, in the present embodiment, bit 5 of display data is set to ON “1” when light D15 is turned on, and bit 4 of display data is turned ON when light D16 is turned on. It is set to "1". For example, when the common drawing reservation number is 2, the display data is "00110000B", the bit 4 and the bit 5 are on "1", and the lamps D15 and D16 of the common drawing reservation display 56 are turned on. When the general drawing hold indicator 56 flashes with the number of reservations 3-4, lamp D15 (or lamp D16) lights up while bit 5 (or bit 4) of the blink control timer area becomes 1 at output ON timing. , D0 (or the lamp D16) is turned off while it is 0.

  In the row number 4620, the value of the area of the addition address IY + R_SEGDAT + 3 as a segment area (1 byte) of the common drawing reservation display 56 is ANDed with “11001111B”, and the bits 4 and 5 of the data of the segment area are zeroed out. (Code "AQND (IY + R_SEGDAT + 3), 11001111 B").

  At line number 4630, the value of A register is saved (set) in the segment area (area of addition address IY + R_SEGDAT + 3) of the common drawing suspension display 56 as display data corresponding to the common drawing suspension number (code “OR (IY + R_SEGDAT + 3) , A ").

  In the program module of the conventional structure shown in FIG. 139B, two codes “LD HL, R_DSPTIM” and “IQNC (HL)” of line numbers 5010 and 5020 correspond to the code “IQNC (IY + R_DSPTIM)” of line number 4510 of FIG. It corresponds. Note that "IQNC (HL)" is not a conventional instruction. While the code of line number 4510 in FIG. 139A is 2 bytes in machine language “AA 77”, these 2 instructions require 4 bytes in total, and the program capacity is increased. In particular, in the row number 5010, R_DSPTIM is used as an absolute address (2-byte "2877h") rather than an offset address (1-byte "77h"), which causes an increase in program capacity. As shown in FIG. 139B, in the machine language stored in the ROM, the first byte of the 2-byte address is the lower byte, and the second byte is the upper byte.

Also, in the program module of the conventional structure (FIG. 139B), the code “LD A, (R_FHORYU)” of line number 6000 is the code “LQD of line number 4590 of FIG. 139A”.
A, corresponding to (IY + R_FHORYU). In the row number 6000, R_FHORYU is used not as an offset address (1 byte “61 h”) but as an absolute address (2 bytes “2861 h”), so the number of bytes of code increases by 1 byte more than the row number 4590. Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program also increases.

  Also, in the program module of the conventional structure (FIG. 139B), the code “LD HL, D_FHOLED2” of line number 5050 and the code “LD HL, D_FHOLED1” of line number 5080 respectively correspond to the code “LQDD” of line number 4540 of FIG. This corresponds to the code "LQDD HL, D_FHOLED 1-5000H" of HL, D_FHOLED2-5000H "and line number 4570. In the code of line number 5050 and line number 5080, address specification is performed not by relative address (difference with reference address "5000h", for example, "3F" "37") but by absolute address (for example "503F" "5037") The number of bytes of code has been increased by 1 byte (from 2 bytes to 3 bytes). Therefore, the code amount of the entire game control program also increases.

  Further, in the program module of the conventional structure (FIG. 139B), the number of programs increases from line number 6000 to 6070 because there is no code “LQD A, (HL + A)” of line number 4610 in FIG.

  Furthermore, in the program module of the conventional structure (FIG. 139B), two codes “LD A, (R_SEGDAT + 3)” and “AND 11001111 B” of line numbers 6040 and 6050 are used. Code “AQND (IY + R_SEGDAT + 3) of line number 4620 of FIG. , 11001111 B ". In the line numbers 6040 and 6050, since two codes are used, the number of bytes of the code is increased by one more than the line number 4620.

  FIG. 140 is a program list showing a program structure of a part of the external information editing process (FIG. 75) according to the thirteenth embodiment.

  The line number 5500 is a label (P_INFEDIT) corresponding to the external information editing process, and indicates the ROM address (head address) of the program module corresponding to the external information editing process.

  Line numbers 5510 to 5530 correspond to A9501 to A9502 of the external information editing process. At line number 5510, the value stored in the glass frame open error area (within the RAM) of the addition address IY + R_GLASS is loaded to the A register (code “LQD A, (IY + R_GLASS)”). The label R_GLASS is an offset address of the glass frame open error area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. As for the value of the glass frame open error area (1 byte), a predetermined bit is set to "1" when a glass frame open error is occurring.

  At line number 5520, the logical sum of the value stored in the main frame open error area (in the RAM) of the addition address IY + R_WAKU and the value of the A register is calculated (code "OR A, (IY + R_WAKU)"). The label R_WAKU is an offset address of the main body frame open error area based on the value “2800h” of the IY register. The value of the main body frame open error area (1 byte) is set to “1” when the main body frame open error is occurring.

  At line number 5530, if there is a glass frame open error or a main body frame open error and the logical sum is not zero (F), jump to the address in ROM corresponding to the label INFEDIT10 (conditional branch) and line number 5570 or later Execute the instruction (code "JRS F, INFEDIT 10").

  The line number 5540 corresponds to A9503 and A9504 of the external information editing process. At line number 5540, the value of the area of address R_INFDAT2 as the external information output data area (1 byte) and the value for clear (clear data) “11001111B” are ANDed, and the door / frame open signal and security signal The off data is saved in the external information output data area (code "AQND (R_INFDAT2), 11001111 B"). The external information output data area is an abnormality control area that indicates the detection state (abnormal signal on / off) of various abnormalities for each bit. Bit 4 of the external information output data area (abnormal control area) is a bit to set the abnormal state (ON) of the door / frame open signal, and bit 5 is a bit to set the abnormal state (ON) of the security signal. Here, it is cleared to zero.

  At line number 5550, a jump (conditional branch) to an address in the ROM corresponding to the label INFEDIT 20 is performed, and an instruction after line number 5600 is executed (code "JR INFEDIT 20").

  A line number 5570 corresponds to A9505 of the external information editing process. In line number 5570, the logical sum of the value of the external information output data area (area of address R_INFDAT2) and the on data “00010000B” of the door / frame open signal is calculated to obtain an external information output data area (abnormal control area). Save the ON data of the door / frame open signal (set ON) (Code “OQR (R_INFDAT2), 00010000B”).

  The line number 5580 corresponds to A9506 of the external information editing process. In line No. 5580, the test signal output data area (abnormal control area) is calculated by OR operation of the value of the test signal output data area (area of address R_SKNDAT) and the on data “01000000B” of the gaming machine error state signal. Save the on data of the gaming machine error status signal (set to on) (Code "OQR (R_SKNDAT), 01000000B").

  A line number 5600 corresponds to A9507 of the external information editing process. In row number 5600, if the value (security signal control timer) of the security signal control timer area of addition address IY + R_SECUTIM is not 0, -1 is updated, and if it is 0, 0 is maintained (code “DQCP (IY + R_SECUTIM), 0” ). The label R_SECUTIM is an offset address of the security signal control timer area. This "DQCP" command decreases the value stored in the security signal control timer area without acquiring it to the camera.

  The line number 5610 corresponds to A9508 of the external information editing process. At line number 5610, when the operation result of line number 5600 is zero (Z), that is, when the security signal control timer is 0, jump (conditional branch) to the address in ROM corresponding to label INFEDIT 30 and line number 5640. Execute the following instructions (code "JR Z, INFEDIT 30").

  The line number 5620 corresponds to A9509 of the external information editing process. The security signal on data "00100000B" is saved (on setting) in the external information output data area (abnormal control area) of the address R_INFDAT2 (code "OQR (R_INFDAT2), 00100000B").

  As described above, the code generally described as "AQND (R_ERR), ... 0 ... B" is a value stored in the abnormality control area (in the RAM) indicated by the address value of the label R_ERR. And the clear value (clear data) “... 0... B” to clear a predetermined bit of the abnormality control area. Each bit in the abnormality control area indicates that a predetermined abnormality (error signal) has occurred. Therefore, the bit indicating that an abnormality has occurred can be cleared without executing an instruction to acquire the value stored in the abnormality control area into the register. Therefore, even if a failure occurs in the register, the bit indicating that the failure has occurred in the failure control area can be cleared with certainty. In addition, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  Also, as described above, a code generally described as "OQR (R_ERR), ... 1 ... B" is stored in the abnormality control area (in RAM) indicated by the address value of the label R_ERR. The logical sum of the above value and the value for setting (setting data) “... 1... B” is calculated, and a predetermined bit in the abnormality control area is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to turn on the bit indicating that an abnormality has occurred without executing an instruction to acquire the value stored in the abnormality control area in the register. Therefore, even if a failure occurs in the register, the bit indicating that the failure has occurred in the failure control area can be reliably set on. In addition, the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  In the CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242), the code “AQND (R_ERR),... 0... B” or the code “OQR (R_ERR),. A dedicated logic circuit may be provided to perform the

[Operations and effects of the thirteenth embodiment]
According to the thirteenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game by establishing predetermined start conditions (for example, entering or passing of the game ball to the start winning area or the gate), and the variable display game is a special result. The game control means (game control apparatus 100) which performs game control which generates the special game state which gives a privilege to a player when it becomes is provided. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and a register group (a plurality of general purpose registers) A register bank (0, 1) and update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) in which information updated by the arithmetic processing means is stored. The update information storage means is assigned addresses of a plurality of bytes, and the information identifies the information stored in the update information storage means by the addresses. The update information storage means is provided corresponding to a predetermined address, and includes an abnormality control area indicating the detection state of the abnormality of the gaming machine in bit units. The arithmetic processing means is configured to be capable of executing an instruction (for example, an “OQR” instruction) for setting a predetermined bit of any storage area of the update information storage means without using a general purpose register. The arithmetic processing means sets a predetermined bit of the abnormality control area of the update information storage means according to this command when an abnormality of the gaming machine is detected. An instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may include such an instruction.

  As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, even if a failure occurs in the general purpose register, the bit in the failure control area can be reliably set to indicate that the failure has occurred. And since the instruction to store the value of the abnormality control area in the register is unnecessary, the code amount of the whole game control program is reduced.

  Further, according to the thirteenth embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) includes a memory means (for example, ROM 111b) having a data area for storing the game control program and storing data for the game control program. . The game control apparatus 100 includes a register (DP register) for storing the start address of the data area in the address space of the arithmetic processing means. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) is an instruction (for example, an instruction in the area within the data area designated by a relative address based on the head address stored in the register (DP register). "LQDD HL, D_FHOLED2-5000H").

  Therefore, an instruction specifying an area in a data area not by an absolute address (for example, 2 bytes) from the head of the address space but by a relative address (for example, 1 byte) based on the head address of the data area stored in the register. Can be used. Therefore, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction (machine language code) is reduced, and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  Further, according to the thirteenth embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) is provided with a head address specification register (IY register) for storing the head address of the update information storage means in the address space of the arithmetic processing means. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpreting and executing means (instruction interpreting and executing circuit 1242) is an instruction for specifying the area in the update information storage means by the offset address based on the head address stored in the head addressing register. For example, "LQD A, (IY + R_FHORYU)" is included.

  Therefore, the area in the update information storage means is not based on the absolute address (for example, 2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space but on the offset address (for example 1 byte) based on the start address of the update information storage means stored in the register. You can use an instruction to specify. Therefore, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction (machine language code) is reduced, and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced.

  Furthermore, the storage means (for example, the CPU 111a of the game control apparatus 100), on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined start condition, upholds the number area of update information storage means up to the predetermined upper limit number. Can be stored. The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) designates any storage area of the update information storage means by the offset address based on the head address stored in the head address designation register, and the value of the storage area is specified as a predetermined general purpose. It is configured to be able to execute an instruction (for example, “LQD A, (IY + R_FHORYU)”) for reading out to a register. The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) reads the number of starting storages stored in the number-of-retentions area by this instruction.

  Therefore, the hold in the update information storage unit is not based on the absolute address (for example, 2 bytes) from the beginning of the address space but by the offset address (for example, 1 byte) based on the start address of the update information storage unit stored in the register. You can use an instruction to specify a number area. Therefore, the number of bytes of the machine language instruction (machine language code) is reduced, and the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced. In particular, since the number-of-retentions area is often referred to in various processes of the game control program, there are many benefits of code amount reduction.

Fourteenth Embodiment
In the conventional gaming machine, the CPU executes a conditional branch and each execution content at the branch destination by combining a plurality of instructions, but in the present embodiment, each instruction at the conditional branch and the branch destination is executed by one instruction. Make the CPU execute the contents. As a result, even if the control content is the same as in the conventional case, the code amount of the program can be made smaller than in the conventional case, and in the ROM storing the program, the capacity required for storing the program code can be made compact. . The configurations other than those described below may be the same as the configurations of the first to thirteenth embodiments. The following description is given with reference to the program code (program list).

  FIG. 141 is a program list describing a part of the program structure according to the fourteenth embodiment. Here, the program code of the random number updating process 2 using instructions specific to the present embodiment will be described as an example, and three instructions (mnemonic) of “IQNCW”, “IQCP”, and “DQCP” which are the gist of the present embodiment Mainly about. The random number update process 2 is labeled "P_RNDINC2" and is called in step A10402 of the main process (FIG. 124A) and step A1307 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 125).

  The code “IQNCW (R_RNDHEN1)” of the line number 6010 corresponds to A10601 of the random number update process 2 (FIG. 126). This code is a content (instruction) which adds +1 to the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (R_RNDHEN1) which is a 2-byte random number as it is 2 bytes by an instruction (mnemonic) "IQNCW". Here, R_RNDHEN1 is a label indicating the start address of the random number area where the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is stored (stored), and R_RNDHEN2 appearing below stores the fluctuation pattern random number 2 (stored) R_RNDHEN3 is a label indicating the address of the random number area, and R_RNDHEN3 is a label indicating the address of the random number area where the variation pattern random number 3 is stored (stored). The random number area is also called a random number counter area because the random numbers are added or subtracted in the random number area. Note that, in this specification, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are stored in the storage area of the RAM 111c, which is an update information storage unit in which information updated by the arithmetic processing unit (CPU 111a and CPU core 102) is stored. It may be stored in other information storage means (except for the register).

  In other words, the instruction “IQNCW” uses the 2-byte value stored in the address destination area without using the register (at least the general purpose register) of FIG. 121A (the value stored in the address destination area). It is an instruction to add +1 directly to the register of FIG. The storage area corresponding to the address is called an address destination area or an address destination. For this reason, by using the instruction "IQNCW", it is not necessary to write three codes, that is, loading to a register, addition processing by a register, and loading to an address destination, and the program is compact compared to the conventional program. Become. Also, adding directly the value stored in the address destination by "IQNCW" does not use the register, so prohibits interrupt processing from occurring between the load to the register and the load to the address destination, There is no need to save to the stack or switch banks when enabling interrupts. Note that the registers in FIG. 121A are general-purpose registers (W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register IX register, IY register) outside the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242. And special purpose registers (flag register, DP register, SP register, PC register).

  As described later, as an instruction similar to "IQNCW", there is an instruction "DQECW" which decrements a predetermined 2-byte area, and "DQECW" does not use the register (at least general purpose register) of FIG. 121A. Is an instruction to directly subtract -1 the 2-byte value stored in the address destination area. Further, as an instruction similar to "IQNCW" which is an addition instruction for a 2-byte address destination, there is an instruction "IQNC" described above which is an addition instruction for a 1-byte address destination, and an instruction similar to "DQECW" There is an instruction "DQEC" which is a subtraction instruction for the 1-byte area of the address destination.

  The code “IQCP (R_RNDHEN2), 240” of the line number 6030 corresponds to A10602 in FIG. In this code, when the value of R_RNDHEN2 (value of fluctuation pattern random number 2 stored at the address destination) is smaller than 240 by the instruction “IQCP”, the value of R_RNDHEN2 is updated by +1 addition (increment processing), and R_RNDHEN2 Is not smaller than 240, the variable pattern random number 2 is initialized by substituting 0 into R_RNDHEN2. That is, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 circulates in the range of 0 to 240 with 240 as the upper limit, and returns to 0 after reaching 240.

  The instruction “IQCP” will be described again. The front of the comma in the operand is defined as the target value (the value stored in the address destination), and the rear of the comma is defined as the judgment value (here, 240). It is determined whether the value stored in the address where the value is smaller than the determination value, and if smaller, the value stored in the target address is incremented, and if not smaller, 0 is used as the initial value It is an instruction which substitutes in the value stored in the address which becomes and initializes.

  Conventionally, in order to execute the instruction, a code ("JP", "JR", etc.) that divides the condition and divides the condition into cases where R_RNDHEN2 is smaller than 240 and not smaller than 240 is described It had been. Furthermore, as a branch destination instruction of the condition, a coat that increments R_RNDHEN2 is described when R_RNDHEN2 is smaller than 240, and a code that substitutes 0 in R_RNDHEN2 is described when R_RNDHEN2 is not smaller than 240. The That is, conventionally, at least three codes (instructions) have been described, but in the present embodiment, the program capacity is reduced because they are described by one code. For example, although the machine language instruction of the code “IQCP (vw), n” (vw is a direct value of the address) in the case of directly specifying the address is 5 bytes, the address is an arbitrary register qq (= WA, BC) , DE, HL, IX, IY) The machine language instruction of code “IQCP (qq), n” in the case of specifying address indirectly after entering temporarily becomes 3 bytes (However, the instruction to load the address into the pair register qq Will be required).

  The code “DQCP (R_RNDHEN3), 238” of the row number 6050 corresponds to A10603 in FIG. This code substitutes 238 for R_RNDHEN3 and initializes R_RNDHEN3 when the value of R_RNDHEN3 (value of fluctuation pattern random number 3 stored at the address destination) is 0 by an instruction “DQCP”, and other than that In the case (i.e., other than 0), the value of R_RNDHEN3 is updated by 1 subtraction (decrement processing). That is, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 circulates in the range of 238 to 0 with 238 as the upper limit, and returns to 238 after the decrement result reaches 0 (the initial value of 238 is set). As described above, in the instruction "DQCP", the value of the area of the predetermined address is determined as 0, and when the value of the area of the predetermined address is 0, the numerical value designated by the operand is stored in the predetermined area.

  Explaining the instruction "DQCP" again, the front of the comma is the target value (the value stored in the address destination), and the rear of the comma is the initial value (here, 238) and stored in the target address. If the value is not 0, the value stored in the target address is decremented. If the value is 0, the initial value is stored in the target address. It is an instruction that substitutes and initializes the value.

  Similar to the "IQCP" instruction, the "DQCP" instruction also allows the contents described in the conventional at least three codes to be described in one code. Further, since “DQCP” and “IQCP” are to cause the CPU core 102 to execute the content of an instruction (in the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) without using the registers 1220A and 1220B, as in “IQNCW”, The setting of interrupt prohibition is unnecessary, or the PUSH and POP instructions of the value of the register become unnecessary, or the bank switching becomes unnecessary. The CPU core 102 (in the instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit that executes instructions of “DQCP”, “IQCP”, and “IQNCW”.

  Here, regarding the three instructions “IQNCW”, “IQCP”, and “DQCP” that are the gist of this embodiment, the codes for updating the random numbers have been described, but “IQNCW”, “IQCP”, and “DQCP” May be used to update timers and counters, respectively.

  Furthermore, “IQNCW” may add the address value itself, and “IQCP” and “DQCP” respectively determine the address value itself and initialize the address value according to the result of the determination / address value It can be added (increased) or subtracted (decreased).

  Further, the program code of the random number update process 2 mentioned here is an example for realizing the control contents in the random number update process 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 1 updates the random value by increment, and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 increments The random number value is updated by and the random number value is updated by decrementing the fluctuation pattern random number 3. However, in updating each random number value, it is possible to arbitrarily combine the instruction to increment or the instruction to decrement .

  FIG. 142 is a program list describing a part of the special figure game process according to the fourteenth embodiment. Here, as an example, while explaining the program code of special figure game processing which uses the command peculiar to this embodiment, one command (mnemonic) called “DQECW” which is the gist of the present embodiment will be mainly described. . The special view game process corresponds to the label “P_TGAMEPRC” and is called in step A1309 of the timer interrupt process (FIGS. 8 and 125).

  The code of line number 6510 corresponds to A2601 of the special figure game process (FIG. 21). This code is the content of calling a subroutine (starting opening switch monitoring processing) corresponding to the label "P_SIDOSW".

  The code of line number 6520 corresponds to A2602 in FIG. This code is the content of calling a subroutine (big winning opening switch monitoring processing) corresponding to the label "P_CNTSW".

  The code “DQCPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0” of the row number 6540 corresponds to A2603 in FIG. As described above, the label R_TGAME indicates the address (here, the absolute address) of the special figure game process number area storing the special figure game process number (A2606), and the address “R_TGAME + 1” obtained by adding 1 to the address is The top address (here, the absolute address) of the special-figure game processing timer area which is a 2-byte area is shown. This code is an instruction for the area of the address “R_TGAME + 1”. Specifically, if the value of the address destination area of R_TGAME + 1 is not 0, the value of the special figure game processing timer which is a 2-byte numerical value is updated by -1, and if the value of the address destination area is 0, It is an instruction which substitutes the numerical value (= 0) designated by the operand as the value of the special figure game processing timer and maintains 0. As described above, in the instruction "DQCPW", the value of the area of the predetermined address is determined as 0, and when the value of the area of the predetermined address is 0, the numerical value designated by the operand is stored in the predetermined area. A code using an addition address “DQCPW (IY + R_TGAME + 1), 0” can also be used. The code “DQCPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0” using an absolute address as “R_TGAME + 1” is 6 bytes in a machine language instruction, whereas the code “DQCPW (IY + R_TGAME + 1), 0” uses an offset address as “R_TGAME + 1”. Is 5 bytes in machine language instruction, and the number of bytes (capacity) is small.

  The code of line No. 6550 corresponds to A2604 in FIG. 21 and the label of line No. 6610 is labeled “TGAMEPRC10 if the value of the destination of the address of R_TGAME + 1 (special pattern game processing timer area) is not 0 (if time is not up). Jump to the address in the ROM corresponding to “” and execute the instruction after the line number 6620. Otherwise (if time is up) the code of the next line is read.

  The code of line number 6570 corresponds to A2605 in FIG. 21, and is the content of loading the top address D_TGAMEPRC of the special figure game sequence branch table into the HL register.

  The codes of line numbers 6580 to 6600 correspond to A2606 and A2607 in FIG.

  At line number 6580, the value (special figure game process number) stored in the special figure game process number area (within RAM) of addition address IY + R_TGAME is loaded into A register (code "LQD A, (IY + R_TGAME)") . The label R_TGAME is an offset address of the special figure game process number area based on the value “2800H” of the IY register.

  At line number 6590, the special figure game process number which is the value of the A register is doubled.

  At line number 6600, first, the sum address HL + A is obtained by adding the value of the A register after being doubled to the start address of the special figure game sequence branch table stored in the HL register. The reason for doubling is that since the branch destination address value in the special figure game sequence branch table is 2 bytes, it is necessary to add an even value (the special figure game process number includes an odd value).

  And the code "CALL (HL + A)" of the line number 6600 is the content of the subroutine call by the processing number according to the branch destination address value stored in the area of the total address HL + A (area in the special figure game sequence branch table). is there. Note that the value of the HL register is not changed to (the value of the HL register + the value of the A register) by this code, and the value of the top address of the special figure game sequence branch table is maintained. The subroutine call corresponds to A2608 to A2618 in FIG. The branch destination address value is the start address of the subroutine. In the present embodiment, in the branch processing of the special figure game sequence table in the special figure game processing, the instruction of “CALL (HL + A)” refers to the subroutine with reference to the branch destination address value stored in the area of the total address HL + A. Although it has been described to make a call, "CALL (HL + A)" may be used in the branch processing of the common drawing game sequence table in common drawing game processing. That is, "CALL (HL + A)" is used as a code of A7607 of the common drawing game process shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the code of line number 6620 corresponds to A2619 of FIG. 21, and the code of line number 6630 corresponds to A2620 of FIG. The code of line number 6650 corresponds to A2621 of FIG. 21, and the code of line number 6660 corresponds to A2622 of FIG.

  Here, to describe the instruction “DQCPW” again, the front of the comma is the target value (the 2-byte value stored in the address destination), and the rear of the comma is the initial value (0 in this case), It is an instruction to determine whether the target value is 0 or not, decrement the target value if it is not 0, and substitute the initial value into the target value if it is 0. “DQCPW” is a 2-byte version of the above-mentioned “DQCP” instruction. That is, it is an instruction to directly determine 2 bytes of the target value and directly -1 update the target value from the 2-byte value according to the result of the determination.

  In addition, “IQCPW” as a 2-byte version instruction of “IQCP” is also specifically devised in the present invention for operating the area storing a 2-byte value, and 2 bytes of the target value are It is an instruction that makes a direct determination, and directly +1 updates the value of interest from the 2-byte value according to the result of the determination. That is, in the "IQCPW" instruction, the upper limit value is defined, and +1 is directly updated when the 2-byte value stored in the predetermined area is smaller than the upper limit value, and the 2-byte value is reached when the upper limit value is reached. Return to 0.

  FIG. 143 is a program list describing a part of the special figure game sequence branch table according to the fourteenth embodiment. As described above, the special view game sequence branch table is labeled "D_TGAMEPRC" and is referred to for the special view game processing subroutine call.

  Although there is a mnemonic "DW" in the code, this mnemonic is a pseudo instruction that instructs the assembler that one stage of the table is 2-byte data.

  In FIG. 143, the special figure game sequence branch table is shown as a group of pseudo instructions for setting a subroutine name (label) in association with a branch destination address value, but in fact, the special figure game sequence The branch table is a list of branch destination address values (start addresses of subroutines) which are sequentially set (stored) in the ROM 111b by these instruction groups. That is, the special figure game sequence branch table in the ROM 111b is obtained by replacing the labels (P_TUSUL, P_TSTOP, etc.) in FIG. 143 with branch destination address values.

  The pseudo instruction of line number 7010 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2608 in FIG. 21, and the pseudo instruction of line number 7020 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2609. The pseudo instruction of line number 7030 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2610, and the pseudo instruction of line number 7040 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2611. The pseudo instruction of line number 7050 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2612, and the pseudo instruction of line number 7060 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2613.

  The pseudo instruction of line number 7070 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2614, and the pseudo instruction of line number 7080 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2615. The pseudo instruction of line number 7090 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2616, and the pseudo instruction of line number 7100 corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2617. The pseudo instruction corresponds to the setting of the branch destination address value of the subroutine of A2618.

[Operations and effects of the fourteenth embodiment]
According to the fourteenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game by establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, entering or passing of the game ball to the start winning area or the gate), and the variable display game is a special result. The game control means (game control apparatus 100) which performs game control which generates the special game state which gives a privilege to a player when it becomes is provided. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program, and information updated by the arithmetic processing means Update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) to be stored. The update information storage means is assigned addresses of a plurality of bytes, and the information identifies the information stored in the update information storage means by the addresses. The update information storage means is provided corresponding to a predetermined address, and is a random number area capable of storing 2-byte random number value (for example, variation pattern random number 1) for determining the aspect of the variation display game, or game control And a 2-byte timer area capable of storing a 2-byte timer value (for example, the value of the special-purpose game processing timer) that counts on the progress of. The arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute an addition instruction (eg, “IQNCW (R_RNDHEN1)”) for adding the 2-byte value stored at the target address without storing it in the general purpose register. In addition, the arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute a subtraction instruction (for example, “DQCPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0”) for subtracting the 2-byte value stored at the target address without storing it in the general-purpose register. The arithmetic processing means is a random number value of 2 bytes in a random number area (for example, a random number generation area of variation pattern random number 1) or an 2 bytes of a 2-byte timer area (for example, special pattern game processing timer area) Add or subtract the timer value of.

  The addition instruction or the subtraction instruction is, for example, “IQNCW”, “DQECW”, “IQCPW”, “DQCPW”. An instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may include such a read instruction. The add or subtract instruction directly adds (increases) the value (the value stored in the storage area of the address destination) or the target value of the instruction without storing it in the general purpose register, that is, without using the general purpose register. It is an instruction to subtract (decrease). Note that “IQCP”, “DQCP”, “IQNC”, and “DQEC” are addition instructions or subtraction instructions that add or subtract 1-byte value stored in the target address without storing in the general purpose register. The same effects as “DQECW”, “IQCPW”, and “DQCPW” are exhibited.

  The random number counter area when using either an addition or subtraction instruction such as “IQCP”, “DQCP”, “IQNC”, “DQEC”, “IQNCW”, “DQECW”, “IQCPW”, “DQCPW” or the like for updating the random number value In order to increase or decrease the random number counter without acquiring the value stored in the (random number area) into the general-purpose register, the random number counter is not updated due to a failure of the general-purpose register, and the random number is biased. It can be avoided to occur. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpreting and executing circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing these instructions. In addition, the code by these instructions is not limited to the code (for example, “IQCP (vw), n”) in the case of directly specifying the address by the direct value vw, but also to the arbitrary register qq (= WA, BC, DE, HL). , IX, IY) and then indirectly specify an address (eg, “IQCP (qq), n”).

  In addition, when any of the above-mentioned addition instruction or subtraction instruction is used for updating the timer, it is possible to avoid a situation where the progress of the game does not progress without the timer being updated due to the malfunction of the register. In the case of using it, it is possible to avoid the situation where the occurrence of winnings is not reflected, and the time saving does not end at the predetermined number of start times and continues.

  In addition, although a plurality of codes have conventionally been required to be described as a feature of these add or subtract instructions, this embodiment can represent one code and can reduce program capacity. . For example, the "IQCP" instruction requires only 5 bytes for one code, and the "IQCPW" instruction requires only 6 bytes for one code, but does not require multiple codes, so the program as a whole is compact. And the program capacity decreases.

  In addition, since the value targeted for the instruction (the value stored at the address destination) is directly added (increased) or subtracted (decreased) without using a general-purpose register, the period during which the processing represented by the one code is executed It is not necessary to set the prohibition of interrupts to protect the value of the general-purpose register, and it is possible to reduce the program capacity (of the amount of code required for the setting of interrupt prohibition and the setting of interrupt permission).

  Furthermore, in order to add or subtract the target value of the instruction without using the general-purpose register, the value of the general-purpose register is saved to the stack or the register bank is switched during execution of the processing represented by the one code. It is not necessary to protect the value of the general purpose register, and the program capacity (of the amount of code for saving and restoring the value of the general purpose register or the amount of code for switching the bank and returning the bank) can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, according to the fourteenth embodiment, the update information storage means is provided corresponding to a predetermined address, and can store a random number value for determining the aspect of the variable display game (a random number counter area (for example, A random number area (random number generation area) of random numbers 2 and 3. The arithmetic processing means compares the value stored in the target address with a predetermined determination value without storing the value in the general purpose register, and as a result of comparison, If the predetermined determination value is smaller, the increment process is performed on the value stored in the target address, and if the comparison result shows that the predetermined determination value is not smaller, the target address is selected. It is configured to be able to execute an increment instruction (eg, “IQCP (R_RNDHEN2), 240”) that initializes the stored value. The value of the random number counter area is compared with a predetermined judgment value, and when the predetermined judgment value is smaller, the value of the random number counter area is incremented, and when the predetermined judgment value is not smaller, Initialize the value of the random number counter area.

  Alternatively, the arithmetic processing means determines whether or not the value stored in the target address is zero without storing the value in the general purpose register, and if the result of the determination is affirmative, the target address is It is possible to execute a decrement instruction (eg, “DQCP (R_RNDHEN3), 238”) that executes a process of decrementing the value stored in the target address if the stored value is initialized and the determination result is negative. Configured The arithmetic processing means determines whether or not the value of the random number counter area is zero by the decrement instruction, and if it is zero, initializes the value of the random number counter area, and if not, sets it to the value of the random number counter area. Execute the decrement process.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, by using an increment instruction or a decrement instruction, loading to a general-purpose register, addition processing or comparison processing (determination processing) in a general-purpose register, random number counter area (address destination area) The need to write three pieces of code, such as loading, makes the program more compact and reduces the program capacity compared to conventional programs. In addition, direct addition or direct subtraction of the value stored in the random number counter area (area at the address destination) by an increment instruction or decrement instruction causes a problem even when interrupt processing occurs, since a general-purpose register is not used. There is no advantage.

  Further, according to the fourteenth embodiment, the game control program storage means includes a table area including a plurality of storage areas specified by one address. For example, the table area is an area for storing the special figure game sequence branch table in the data area. The table area stores, for each storage area, an address of a subroutine selected along with the progress of the game. The game control means includes a first register for storing the top address of the table area and a second register for storing a value acquired according to the progress of the game. The arithmetic processing means derives an address value obtained by adding the value stored in the second register (corresponding to the special figure game processing number) to the value stored in the first register (start address value of the table area), and the derived address It is configured to be able to execute an instruction (eg, “CALL (HL + A)”) that calls processing of the address stored in the value. The arithmetic processing means calls the subroutine of the address stored in the specific storage area in the table area to control the progress of the game according to this command. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may include such an instruction.

  As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment, the subroutine call can be executed without providing an instruction for calculating the address of the subroutine alone, so that the program capacity (code amount) can be reduced.

[Fifteenth embodiment]
In the fifteenth embodiment, “CQPW” and “CQHKW” which are instructions for comparing the value stored in the address destination with a predetermined value without storing the value in the register (at least general purpose register) of FIG. 121A will be described. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourteenth embodiments. The following description is given with reference to the program code (program list).

  FIG. 144 is a program list describing a part of the program structure according to the fifteenth embodiment. Here, as an example, a program code corresponding to a modified example 1 of the special figure game process using an instruction specific to the present embodiment will be described, and an instruction “CQPW” as a gist of the present embodiment will be mainly described.

  The code of the modification 1 of the special view game process in the fifteenth embodiment is, in particular, the special view game process in the fourteenth embodiment shown in FIG. 142 from the line number 7540 to the line number 7570 corresponding to A2603 to A2604 in FIG. Because it differs from the code of, it will be described below.

  Specifically, the code "CQPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0" of the row number 7540 is set to the 2-byte special view game processing timer area corresponding to the address "R_TGAME + 1" (here, the absolute address) by the instruction "CQPW". It is the content (instruction) which compares the value (value used as judgment object) of a special figure game processing timer memorized with a comparison value (here 0).

  The instruction “CQPW” is defined as the value to be judged (value to be judged) before the comma in the operand, and is defined as the comparison value (here 0) after the comma. Then, as a result of comparing the determination target value and the comparison value, it is an instruction to determine whether the determination target value and the comparison value are the same or not.

  The code “JR Z, TGAMEPRC10” of the line number 7550 jumps to the label TGAMEPRC10 (address corresponding to the label TGAMEPR) when the determination result is the same (when the special-pattern game processing timer is up). It is the content.

  The code “DQECW (R_TGAME + 1)” of the line number 7560 is stored in the 2-byte area when the result of the above determination is not the same (when the special view game processing timer is not up). Is a process of updating by -1 (subtracting one) from the value of.

  The code "JR NZ, TGAMEPRC20" of the line number 7570 is the content to jump to the code labeled TGAMEPRC 20 when the result of the above determination is not the same.

  As described above, “CQPW” is an instruction that compares the defined determination target value with a predetermined comparison value and returns the determination result (comparison result) as to whether the value is the same or not.

  FIG. 145 is a program list of the second variation of the special view game process according to the fifteenth embodiment. Here, the "CQHKW" instruction coded on line number 8040 will be described. Note that the code of the second variation of the special view game process differs from the code of the first variation of the special view game process shown in FIG. 144 only in the line number 8040.

  The code “CQHKW (R_TGAME + 1)” of line number 8040 is an instruction to determine (confirm) whether the value of the special feature game processing timer stored in the 2-byte area is a predetermined value by the instruction “CQHKW”. is there. For example, 0 is defined as the predetermined value (predetermined set value). Therefore, the code has contents to determine whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is zero.

  Then, as a result of determination by CQHKW, if the value of the timer is equal to 0, jump to TGAMEPRC10 (by the code of line number 8050), and if not identical, update the value of the timer by -1 (code of line number 8060) ), Jump to TGAMEPRC 20 (by code of line number 8070).

  Both “CQPW” and “CQHKW” are instructions that can execute the determination processing without loading the value of the address destination area into the register, load the value of the address destination area into the register and make the determination, and address destination The code amount can be made compact because the code for storing in the area of is not necessary. In addition, since the two instructions do not both need a code for protecting the register, nor need to switch banks, the program capacity can be reduced. In the above description, a code in which the address is directly specified by the absolute address “R_TGAME + 1” as the “CQPW” instruction or “CQHKW” instruction (6 bytes “CQPW (R_TGAME + 1), 0” by machine language instruction or 4 by machine language instruction) Although the byte "CQHKW (R_TGAME + 1)" is used, the number of bytes in the machine instruction can be reduced by one byte by using the addition address IY + R_TGAME + 1 having "R_TGAME + 1" as the offset address ("CQPW (IY + R_TGAME + 1"). ), 0 "," CQHKW (IY + R_TGAME + 1) ", etc. are used).

[Operations and effects of the fifteenth embodiment]
According to the fifteenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game by establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, entering or passing of the game ball to the start winning area or the gate), and the variable display game is a special result. The game control means (game control apparatus 100) which performs game control which generates the special game state which gives a privilege to a player when it becomes is provided. The game control means includes a game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, an arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program, and information updated by the arithmetic processing means Update information storage means (for example, RAM 111c) to be stored. The update information storage means is assigned addresses of a plurality of bytes, and the information identifies the information stored in the update information storage means by the addresses. The update information storage means is provided corresponding to the predetermined address, and includes a timer area (for example, a special-purpose game processing timer area) capable of storing a timer value to count on the progress of the game control. The arithmetic processing means is configured to be able to execute a comparison instruction (for example, a “CQPW” instruction) that compares the value stored at the target address with a predetermined comparison value without storing the value in the general-purpose register. The timer value in the timer area is compared with a predetermined comparison value. Alternatively, the arithmetic processing means can execute a determination instruction (for example, "CQHKW" instruction) for determining whether the value stored at the target address is identical to a predetermined set value without storing the value in the general purpose register. According to the determination command, it is determined whether the timer value of the timer area is equal to a predetermined set value. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may include such comparison instructions and determination instructions.

  As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, when one of the comparison instruction ("CQPW" instruction) and the determination instruction ("CQHKW" instruction) is used for updating the timer, the timer is not updated due to the general purpose register failure. Can prevent the progress of the game from proceeding. In the case where the comparison instruction ("CQPW" instruction) and the determination instruction ("CQHKW" instruction) are used to update the counter (rotational speed area or high probability change frequency area), the occurrence of winning is not reflected, a predetermined start It is possible to prevent the situation where the time saving state or the definite variation state continues without ending with the number of times. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpreting and executing circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit that executes these comparison instructions and determination instructions.

  In addition, since the value targeted for the instruction (the value stored in the address destination area) is directly compared or determined without storing in the general-purpose register, that is, without using the general-purpose register, the one code represents It is not necessary to set the prohibition of the interrupt to protect the value of the general purpose register in the period of executing the processing, and the program capacity can be reduced by that amount (the code amount of the entire game control program is reduced).

  Further, since the general purpose register is not used, there is no need to save the value of the general purpose register to the stack or to switch the register bank to protect the value of the general purpose register, and the program capacity can be reduced accordingly (game control Reduce the amount of code in the whole program).

Sixteenth Embodiment
In the sixteenth embodiment, as a data compression method with which a Z80-based CPU for a game machine can execute arithmetic processing, a novel compression method and a method of reading the same will be described. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifteenth embodiments.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining a conventional data table in describing the compression method of the sixteenth embodiment. Here, as one example, a code of assembly language corresponding to a conventional second half variation group table is also shown.

  The latter half fluctuation group table is a table for distributing fluctuation pattern random number 1 which circulates values from 0 to 65535, and random numbers from 0 to 61999 without reach fluctuation, 62000 to 64499 as normal reach system, 64500 to 65099 SP1 It is a table referred to by 2-byte distribution processing in order to distribute system reach, 65100 to 65399 to SP2 system reach, and 65400 to 65535 to SP3 system reach.

  Among the latter half fluctuation group table, as shown in line number 8500, table 1 for special figure 1 is labeled “D_KOUGRP_T1HZ1”, and is a table in which data contents consisting of 1 stage with 4 bytes are assembled in 5 stages ( Table format). From the left side, the code of each line is described as pseudo instruction (DW), distribution value, table name, and in the right side of the comment column of the data table, machine language code (in ROM) to be paired with code in assembly language The data of

  Specifically, the assembly language code “DW 62000, D_KOU_HZ01” of line number 8530 is a pseudo instruction that the allocation value is also 2 byte data in response to the random number value being 2 bytes. "DW" is specified to the assembler. Also, the numerical value to be subtracted from the random number value is 62000, and the table corresponding to the distribution is a table name "D_KOU_HZ01". Although detailed description is omitted here, the content of the change is further determined with reference to D_KOU_HZ01.

  The machine language code (machine language data) corresponding to the assembly language code of line number 8530 is "5A00 30F2005B", and "5A00" means an address in the ROM from which data is read. In the ROM, 1 byte of data (2 digits in hexadecimal notation) is stored per address, and the subsequent 8-digit machine language code "30F2005Bh" is actually stored from address 5A00h to address 5A03h. It is data of "30h", "F2h", "00h" and "5Bh". Then, the eight-digit machine language code is divided into "30F2h" and "005Bh".

  Here, since the high order and low order are interchanged, “30F2” replaces the low order two digits “F2h” and the high order two digits “30h” and reads as “F 230 h” the instruction interpretation execution circuit 1242 and “F 230 h” Corresponds to the distribution value "62000". In addition, “5B00h”, which is obtained by replacing upper and lower order, with “005B” means an address corresponding to D_KOU_HZ01.

  Subsequently, the machine language code of line number 8540 has the address corresponding to D_KOU_HZ02 of “5B02h” and the distribution value of “09C4h”.

  In the machine language code of the line number 8550, the address corresponding to D_KOU_HZ03 is “5B06h”, and the distribution value is “0258h”. In the machine language code of the line number 8560, the address of D_KOU_HZ04 is “5B10h”, and the distribution value is “012Ch”. In the machine language code of line number 8570, the address corresponding to D_KOU_HZ05 is "5B16h", and the distribution value is "0088h".

  Here, each address of the data table is "5B00h", "5B02h", "5B06h", "5B10h", "5B16h" sequentially from the top of the table to the 5th row (from line number 8530 to line number 8570). It is. Since the first digit "5h" is common among these five addresses, 4-bit data corresponding to "5h" is deleted and stored in the ROM, and when read, 4-bit data corresponding to "5h" is stored. It is the compression method of the present embodiment that is to supplement and execute arithmetic processing. Specifically, this will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 148.

  FIG. 147 shows a latter half variation group table of the sixteenth embodiment, and also shows corresponding assembly language code. The label name is “D_KOUGRP_T1HZ1” which is the same as the conventional second half variation group table shown in FIG. 146, and the special figure 1 is the table 1 for deviation.

  The pseudo-instruction BTA {16, 12} described in the row number 9030 is 8 bits ×, with the binary data in the table set to 16 bits (8 bits × 2) and 12 bits (12 bits plus 12 bits). It represents that the assembler creates data as a set of 2).

  The numerical part of BTA {16, 12} is an example, and the corresponding pseudo instruction is described in the form of BTA {numerical value 1, numerical value 2}, and the assembler reads the number of bits of numerical value 1 and the number of bits of numerical value 2 in order specify. Such a reading format is continued until the code "ENDBTA" of line number 9140. Numerical value 1 and numerical value 2 are arbitrary numbers of 1 to 16.

  Next, the data configuration of one stage in the table will be described. The code “62000, D_KOU_HZ01-5000H” of line number 9040 describes D_KOU_HZ01-5000H, which is a relative address of 62000, which is a 2-byte numerical value, and the table (second-half fluctuation selection table) of the reference destination (D_KOU_HZ01) -5000 H is the reference of the first stage data. That is, since the address 5000H at the head of the data is stored in the DP register (table pointer), the address designated by the row number 9040 may be a difference from the address stored in the DP register. Therefore, the assembly language is conveniently described as D_KOU_HZ01-5000H.

  If this is confirmed by the machine language code, the machine language code corresponding to the assembly language code in the first stage is "30F200h" from address 5A00h to 5A02h and "4Bh" at address 5A03h. Among them, “F230h”, which is the upper and lower order of “30F200h”, is 62000 as the distribution value, and “00h” is the difference “B00h” with the address “5000H” designated by the DP register excluding “B” It is a value. Further, "4Bh" stored at the address 5A03h is a numerical value obtained by combining the first stage data and the second stage data as described later. Therefore, only the data stored at the address 5A03h is described here with a line feed.

  Similarly, from the address of the table of the second row where the distribution value is 2500 to the address of the table of the fifth row where the distribution value is 136, all are indicated by relative addresses minus 5000h. The relative address is a value (associated value) associated with the distribution value in the table. That is, as described above, since the first digit "5h" is common among the addresses "5B00h", "5B02h", "5B06h", "5B10h" and "5B16h" from the top of the table, they are deleted. In addition, since "Bh" which is the second digit of the address is common, by deleting "5Bh" in the first digit and the second digit, it is also possible to compress data of 4 bits per stage. It is.

  It is the following FIG. 148 which visualized this intelligibly. FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining the compression method of the sixteenth embodiment. The left side of the figure illustrates the interpretation of the pseudo instruction BTA {16, 12} by the assembler, and the right side of the figure illustrates compressed data stored in the ROM.

  First, the data content in the first row of the table and storage in the ROM will be described. Describing the point of moving the viewpoint from the left side to the right side of the figure, the data content of the first row of the table is “0B00h” of the relative address of the table corresponding to the distribution value “F230h”. When this is expressed as a binary number, "F230h" is "111100000110000B", and "0B00h" is "0000101100000000B".

  Although the reference destination address of the latter half variation selection table as an absolute address of the first stage of the table described in FIG. 146 is “5B00h”, in this embodiment, it is assumed that 5000h is stored in the DP register (table pointer). Therefore, the relative address in each row of the table is the absolute address minus 5000 h.

  Next, actual data stored in the ROM will be described. “111100000110000 B” corresponding to “F 230 h” is divided into 1 byte, and the lower 8 bits “00110000 B” are in address 5A00 h in ROM (arrow 1 in FIG. 148) and the upper 8 bits “11110010 B” Is stored at address 5A01h (arrow 2 in FIG. 148). This is a part corresponding to "16" among BTA {16, 12}.

  Further, “30h” and “F2h” are hexadecimal notations of data stored in the address 5A00h and the address 5A01h.

  Further, "0000101100000000B" corresponding to "0B00h" is divided into 1 byte, and the lower 8 bits "00000000B" are stored in the address 5A02h. Just as arrow 3 in FIG. 148 corresponds.

  Next, the upper 8 bits can be divided into the upper 4 bits "0000B" and the subsequent 4 bits "1011B". Then, the upper 4 bits "0000B" are deleted (compressed), and the 4 bits "1011B" following the upper 4 bits "0000B" are stored in the lower 4 bits of the address 5A03h (arrow 4).

  That is, although the relative address of the result obtained by subtracting 5000 h from "5B00h" which is the absolute address in the first row of the table is "0B00h", the upper first digit "0" of this numerical value "0" B00h " Since the upper 4 bits "0000B" correspond to "," the upper 4 bits "0000B" are deleted. The above is the description of the storage of the first stage data of the table in the ROM.

  Next, storage of data in the second stage of the table will be described. The binary data of "09C4h" corresponding to the distribution value 2500 in the table data of the second row is "00001001110000100B". The binary data can be divided into upper 4 bits, middle 8 bits and lower 4 bits. The lower 4 bits are stored in the upper 4 bits of the address 5A03h.

  That is, the first stage data "1011B" is stored as the lower 4 bits at the address 5A03h (arrow 4), and the second stage data "0100B" is stored as the upper 4 bits (arrow 5) ). Therefore, part of the table data of the first stage and part of the table data of the second stage are stored in combination at address 5A03h (arrows 4 and 5).

  Subsequently, in the second stage table data, the middle 8 bits "10011100B" are stored at address 5A04h (arrow 6), and the upper 4 bits "0000B" are stored in the lower 4 bits of address 5A05h .

  Subsequently, the binary data of "0B02h" corresponding to the relative address of the table data of the second stage is "0000101100000010B". Here too, the binary data can be divided into upper 4 bits, middle 8 bits and lower 4 bits.

  The upper 4 bits "0000B" are the first address of the relative address "0" B02h, which is the numerical value obtained by subtracting 5000 h from "5B02h" which is the absolute address in the second row of the table. It has been deleted because it corresponds to "0".

  The lower 4 bits "0010B" are stored in the upper 4 bits of the address 5A05h (arrow 8), and the middle 8 bits "10110000B" are stored in the address 5A06h (arrow 9). The above is the description of the storage of the second stage data of the table in the ROM.

  Then, similarly to the first and second stages, the table data of the third stage is deleted as a relative address and the portion common to other table data is deleted and stored in the ROM, and finally the table data for five stages Are stored in the area of addresses 5A00h to 5A11h of the ROM.

  Here, replenishment of the shortage binary data will be described.

  As for the data of the reference destination address (second-half variation selection table address) in the fifth row, which is the bottom row of the table, the lower 8 bits "00010110B" are stored in the address 5A10h (arrow 10), and the middle 4 bits "1011B" Is stored as the lower 4 bits in the address 5A11h (arrow 11), and the upper 4 bits "0000" are deleted.

  Under this condition, only the lower 4 bits of data are stored at address 5A11h, and the storage state of data in the ROM falls into an irregular state. It is automatically replenished by the interpretation of the command (arrow 12).

  In the present embodiment, the data corresponding to "5h" is common because the first digit "5h" of the addresses "5B00h", "5B02h", "5B06h", "5B10h" and "5B16h" is common. Although compressed, "Bh", which is the second digit of the address, is common, so compressing 4 bits per stage is also possible by compressing "5Bh" in the first and second digits. .

[Operations and effects of the sixteenth embodiment]
As described above, since a portion common to each reference address (relative address in the present embodiment) of the table is compressed and stored in the ROM, originally 4 bytes which is the capacity per stage of table data Since a storage area of 20 bytes is required as a capacity of 5 stages of the data, the ROM capacity can be reduced because the storage area is a total of 18 bytes from 5A00h to 5A11h.

  In addition, when storing data in the ROM, if it is not based on a certain rule (for example, a certain number of bits, a certain bit length) for each type of data, the number of bits for reading by the CPU 111a I don't know, I can't read it (I can't interpret it). Thus, the read range is defined in consideration of the range of bit lengths common to all related similar tables. The definition is a code of the above BTA {numerical value 1, numerical value 2}, and in this embodiment, as an example, all binaries of the latter half fluctuation group table (including not only for special figure 1 but also for special figure 2) As data (binary data), 16 bits (corresponding to numerical value 1) as the distribution value and 12 bits (corresponding to numerical value 2) as the address of the latter half variation selection table are defined.

Seventeenth Embodiment
In the seventeenth embodiment, reading of data compressed and stored in the ROM will be described. In the present embodiment, as reading of compressed data by the CPU 111a (CPU core 102), any instruction from the designated bit position starting from bit 0 of the address pointed to by the DP register (table pointer) is made by the instruction "LQDB". Data of bit length can be read out. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to sixteenth embodiments.

  FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining a data reading format of the seventeenth embodiment. Here, the data from address 5A00h to address 5A10h is read by the code "LQDB BC, (HL) .16", and the data at address 5A11h is read by the code "LQDB HL, (HL) .12".

  The LQDB instruction is described in the format "LQDB register name, (register name). Read bit length", and the address value stored in the DP register is the register pair (pair register) of (register name) after the comma. Starting from bit 0 of the address value calculated by adding the stored value (number of bits), the data of the read bit length is read out and stored in the register pair of the register name before the comma. The register pairs of register names may be different register pairs or the same register pair. If the number of bits is small, what the register name indicates may be a single register instead of a register pair. In a single register, the read bit length is an arbitrary bit length of 1 to 8, and in the register pair, the read bit length is an arbitrary bit length of 1 to 16. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpretation / execution circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit that executes an LQDB instruction.

  First, assuming that the address value 5000h is specified in the DP register and that the value obtained by converting A00h by 8 and converted to the number of bits is stored in the HL register, the address 5A00h and the address 5A01h are stored. Will be described. The read command here is "LQDB BC, (HL) .16".

  Since the address value stored in the DP register is 5000h and the value of HL is A00h, the process of reading 16-bit data from 5A00h obtained by adding A00h to 5000h is executed. The (A00h * 8) -th bit counted from bit 0 of 5000h indicated by the arrow 13 is the starting point of reading. In FIG. 149, A00h is described as A00h * 8 in the sense that A00h is multiplied by 8 for bit conversion (bit conversion), but the details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The 1-byte data stored at address 5A00h is "00110000B", and the 1-byte data stored at address 5A01h is "11110010B", and the 11-bit length of this data is "111100000100010000B". (Arrow 14). The data is represented by F230h in hexadecimal, and the read 16-bit data is stored in the BC register. F230h corresponds to the distribution value of 62000.

  Next, a case will be described where distribution proceeds and the address of the second half of the variation selection table on the last line is read out with the code “LQDB HL, (HL) .12”. Here, it is assumed that the address value stored in the DP register remains at 5000 h, and the value of (HL register) is A10 h * 8.

  Since the address value stored in the DP register is 5000h and the value of HL is A10h * 8 when executing the instruction, 12 bits are read from bit 0 of 5A10h obtained by adding A10h to 5000h. To be executed. Although the data read out here is "1011000001010B" (arrow 15), since the HL register of the storage destination has an area of 2 bytes, "0000 B for the missing 4 bits with respect to the 2 byte area. Is supplemented as part of the interpretation of the LQDB instruction (arrow 16).

  The data "0000101100010110B" read from the address 5A10h and the address 5A11h by the replenishment of the "0000B" is 0B16h in hexadecimal notation and is stored in the HL register.

  Subsequently, program contents for reading compressed data by the LQBD instruction will be described with reference to actual codes.

  FIG. 150 is a program list of fluctuation pattern setting processing according to the seventeenth embodiment. The program list of the fluctuation pattern setting process described here will be described as a program module of the calling source of the 2-byte distribution process described below.

  The code “LD HL, (HL)” of the line number 10020 corresponds to A4302 in FIG. 37, and is the content for acquiring the address of the second half fluctuation pattern group table.

  The code “LD WA, (DE)” of the line number 10030 corresponds to A4303 in FIG. 37, and is the content for rotating the variation pattern random number from the target area.

  The code "CALLR P_SELW" of the line number 10050 corresponds to A4305 in FIG. 37, and is a content to call 2-byte distribution processing as a subroutine.

  FIG. 151 shows a program list of conventional 2-byte distribution processing. It is a module called by the above variation pattern setting process, but is a process executed in a system in which data stored in the ROM is not compressed. The 2-byte distribution process is labeled "P_SELW".

  The code of line number 10510 corresponds to A4401 of FIG. 38, and the value stored in the address of the second half fluctuation pattern table fetched into the HL register in the fluctuation pattern setting process of the calling source is the same as the code without distribution (C_NOTHING) It is the content which compares and determines whether it is. If they are the same, the zero flag is set as the determination result (Z).

  The code of line number 10520 corresponds to A4402 in FIG. 38, and jumps to the part labeled SELW 20 if the code is not distributed, or reads the code of the next line if the code is not distributed. .

  The codes of line number 10590 and line number 10600 as one partition labeled SELW20 correspond to A4407 in FIG. 38, and are updated to the address (absolute address of the second half variation selection table) of the data corresponding to the distributed result The content is

  Row numbers 10530 to 10570 which become one section labeled SELW 10 correspond to the loop processing (A4403 to A4406) in FIG. The code “SUB WA, (HL)” of row number 10540 corresponds to A4403 and A4404 in FIG. 38, and the distribution value acquired from the latter half fluctuation group table is the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1 stored in the WA register It is the contents to subtract from.

  The code “JRC, SELW20” of line number 10550 corresponds to A4405 in FIG. 38, and jumps to SELW20 if the result of subtraction is smaller than 0, otherwise the code of the next line Is the content to read.

  The code “ADD HL, 4” of the row number 10560 corresponds to A4406 in FIG. 38, and is the content to be updated to the address of the next stage of the table by adding 4 bytes to the address value of the second half variation group table.

  The code “JR SELW10” of the line number 10570 also corresponds to A4406 in FIG. 38, and is a content for jumping to SELW10.

  Next, the program contents of the seventeenth embodiment for reading out data compressed by the LQDB instruction will be described. FIG. 152 is a program list of 2-byte distribution processing according to the seventeenth embodiment. The 2-byte distribution process of the seventeenth embodiment is also labeled “P_SELW” and is called by the above variation pattern setting process. The portion of the label SELW10 corresponds to the loop processing from A4403 to A4406 in FIG. 38, and the portion of the label SELW20 corresponds to A4407 in FIG.

  The code “SQLA HL, 3” (conversion instruction) of the row number 11010 is content to shift the 16-bit address value stored in the HL register to the left by 3 bits. The 3-bit left shift effectively lowers the lower 13 bits of binary data to the power of 2 (eight times). That is, the address value stored in the HL register is multiplied by 8 to convert it into the number of bits (the address value is converted into bits).

  The code “LQDB BC, (HL). 16” (read instruction) of line number 11020 is an instruction to read data stored in the ROM after compressing it as an instruction specific to this embodiment, and as described above, Starting from bit 0 of the indicated address, data of 16 bits which is a designated bit length is taken into the BC register.

  The code “CQP BC, C_NOTHING” of the line number 11030 is the content to be judged by comparing whether the value stored in the BC register is the same as the code without distribution (C_NOTHING). If they are the same, the zero flag is set as the determination result (Z).

  The code “JR Z, SELW 20” of the line number 11040 jumps to the SELW 20 if it is a non-allocation code (jumps to the code of the line number 11110), and in such a case, the next line is read.

  First, the SELW 20 part will be described. The code “ADD HL, 12” of the line number 11120 is the content of adding 12 to the bit-converted value stored in the HL register.

  The code “LQDB HL, (HL). 12” (read instruction) of the line number 11130 is a content for loading 12-bit binary data out of the values stored in the HL register into the HL register. Thereby, the relative address of the second half variation selection table is acquired in the HL register.

  The code “ADD HL, 5000H” of line number 11140 is updated to the address (absolute address of the second half variation selection table) of the data corresponding to the distributed result by adding the value 5000h of the DP register to the address value of the HL register The content is

  Next, it returns to the part of SELW10. The code “LQDB BC, (HL). 16” of the line number 11060 is the content of reading the next 16-bit distribution value data.

  The code "SUB WA, BC" of the line number 11070 is the contents of subtracting the distribution value from the random value.

  The code “JRC, SELW20” of line 11080 jumps to SELW20 if the result of subtraction is negative (jumps to the code of line 11110), otherwise the next line is read. is there.

  The code "ADD HL, 16 + 12" of the line number 11090 is the contents to add the number of bits stored in the HL register by 16 + 12 bits. As a result, the HL register stores a bit-converted address (corresponding to the position of bit 0 of the distribution value) at which the next distribution value is stored.

  The code “JR SELW10” of the line number 11100 is the content to be returned to the beginning of the loop processing.

[Operations and effects of the seventeenth embodiment]
According to the seventeenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variable display game by establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, entering or passing of the game ball to the start winning area or the gate), and the variable display game is a special result. The game control means (game control apparatus 100) which performs game control which generates the special game state which gives a privilege to a player when it becomes is provided. The game control means includes game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, and operation processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program. The game control program storage means stores data for each storage area to which one address is allocated. The arithmetic processing means uses a conversion instruction (for example, "SQLA HL, 3") for calculating a bit conversion value obtained by integrating the address values of the storage area read out from the game control program storage means by a predetermined number. A read instruction for reading a predetermined bit length (for example, “LQDB BC, (HL). 16”) can be executed. Data of a predetermined bit length is a distribution value for distributing the mode of the variable display game and a value associated with the distribution value. The arithmetic processing means reads the distribution value and the value associated with the distribution value according to the read instruction, and selects the form of the variable display game based on the value associated with the distribution value. Derive address. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may include such conversion instruction and read instruction. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpreting and executing circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing these instructions. For example, the value associated with the distribution value is the address (relative address in FIG. 147 and FIG. 148) of the second half variation selection table.

  As described above, in the seventeenth embodiment, the conversion instruction is performed, for example, to shift the address value taken into the register to the left by 3 bits, that is, convert the bit by the operation of multiplying eight by three which is two. Address value can be calculated. Also, this read instruction can read data as a reference point for reading a specific bit.

  Further, by combining the address value stored in the DP register and the bit-converted address value, a further specific bit in the 1-byte area of the address destination specified by the DP register can be used as the starting point of reading.

  In addition, since the bit length to be read can be set according to the compression format that indicates the number of bits deleted from the original data, the compressed data is read, and then as 2-byte length data. It can be restored.

  Further, according to the seventeenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variation display game by establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, entry or passage of the game ball to the start winning area or the gate), and the variation display game is A game control means (game control apparatus 100) is provided which performs game control for generating a special game state in which a bonus is given to a player when a special result is obtained. The game control means includes game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, and operation processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program. The game control program storage means stores binary data of a specific bit length for each storage area to which one address is allocated. The arithmetic processing means divides binary data into a bit length smaller than a specific bit length and reads it from a plurality of storage areas with consecutive addresses, and divides the binary data of 0 for less than the specific bit length by division. In addition, it is configured to be able to execute a read instruction (eg, “LQDB HL, (HL). 12”) for reading as a specific bit length. Data of a specific bit length is a distribution value for distributing the mode of the variable display game or a value associated with the distribution value. The arithmetic processing means reads the distribution value or the value associated with the distribution value according to the read instruction. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may include such a read instruction. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpreting and executing circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing this read instruction. For example, the value associated with the distribution value is the address (relative address in FIG. 147 and FIG. 148) of the second half variation selection table.

  As described above, in the seventeenth embodiment, when reading compressed data, the length of data when read is 8 bits, based on a 1-byte length (8-bit length (specific bit length)). If not, since the arithmetic processing means can compensate 0 data for all of the missing bit numbers (digits), the compressed data (data deleted by compression) is automatically restored.

Eighteenth Embodiment
In the eighteenth embodiment, compression of a bit number (bit length) which is not a divisor or a multiple of 8 bits will be described as reading of compressed data using an LQDB instruction. In this embodiment, an example of compressing 11 bits of 32-bit data will be described as an example. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to seventeenth embodiments.

  FIG. 153 is a second half variation group table of the eighteenth embodiment, and also shows the corresponding assembly language code. The label name is “D_KOUGRP_T1HZ1” which is the same as that of the second half variation group table shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and the special figure 1 is the table 1 for deviation.

  In the latter half fluctuation group table of the sixteenth embodiment, since the absolute address (address of the latter half fluctuation selection table) of each stage is “5B00h”, “5B02h”, “5B06h”, “5B10h”, and “5B16h”, the first digit among them The data corresponding to the "5h" was compressed due to the common "5h". On the other hand, in the eighteenth embodiment, based on the absolute address value (D_KOU_HZ01) of the first stage table, the relative address values of the second and subsequent stage tables are the result of subtracting the absolute address value of the previous stage. The differential address value is stored. The difference address value is a value (associated value) associated with the distribution value in the table. The absolute address of the first table is 5B00h (D_KOU_HZ01), and the absolute address of the fifth table is 5B16h (D_KOU_HZ05), so the difference is 5 bits of 16h (10110 B in binary notation). Eleven bits are compressed leaving a minute.

  Further, in the second half fluctuation group table of the eighteenth embodiment, the table data of the first stage is not compressed, and the table data of the second stage to the fifth stage is compressed. Therefore, the pseudo instruction "BTA" is coded in the line number 9540 following the line number 9530 in which the table of the first stage is coded, in order to create data in the second stage through the fifth stage of data by the assembler. ing.

  The assembly language code “DW D_KOU_HZ01-5000H, 62000” of line number 9530 corresponds to the first stage table (without reach) in the non-compressed state, and the 2-byte numeric value of the distribution value of 62000 and the reference destination D_KOU_HZ01-5000H, which is an address of a table (second half variation selection table), is described. Note that 5000h is stored in the DP register. When the machine language code (machine language data) created by the code of the line number 9530 is confirmed, “00h”, “5Bh”, “30h” and “F2h” are stored as data of 4 bytes from the address 5A00h. Among them, “00h” stored at address 5A00h, “5Bh” stored at address 5A01h, and “30h” stored at address 5A02h and “F2h” stored at address 5A03h are respectively upper and lower It is as above-mentioned that it replaced | exchanged.

  The pseudo instruction “BTA {5, 16}” of line number 9540 is a content specifying that the data read length is 5 bits long and 16 bits long. The second half fluctuation group table of this embodiment differs from the second half fluctuation group table of the sixteenth embodiment in that the reference address of the table is described first for each row, and then the distribution value is described. The details will be described in the next FIG. 154, but it is 5 bits as the address to which the table reference address is stored, and 16 bits are read as the distribution value.

  The code “D_KOU_HZ02-D_KOU_HZ01, 2500” of line number 9550 compresses the difference between the address value of the first stage table from the address value of D_KOU_HZ02 which is the second stage table (normal reach type) and the sorting value Coded as previous source data.

  Similarly, the code “D_KOU_HZ03-D_KOU_HZ02, 600” of line number 9560 is a difference obtained by subtracting the address value of the second stage table from the address value of D_KOU_HZ03 which is the third stage table (SP1 system) and the sorting value And are coded as the original data before compression.

  Similarly, the code “D_KOU_HZ04-D_KOU_HZ03,300” of line number 9570 is a difference obtained by subtracting the address value of the third stage table from the address value of D_KOU_HZ04 which is the fourth stage table (SP2 system) and the sorting value And are coded as the original data before compression.

  Similarly, the code “D_KOU_HZ05-D_KOU_HZ04, 136” of line number 9580 is a difference obtained by subtracting the address value of the fourth stage table from the address value of D_KOU_HZ05 which is the fifth stage table (SP3 system) and the sorting value And are coded as the original data before compression. Then, the specified range of the read format of compressed data in assembly language is ended by the code "ENDBTA" of the line number 9590.

  Next, compression of data according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining the compression method of the eighteenth embodiment.

Here, the address value of "D_KOU_HZ01" is 5B00h, the address value of "D_KOU_HZ02" is 5B02h, the address value of "D_KOU_HZ03" is 5B06h, the address value of "D_KOU_HZ04" is 5B10h, and the address value of "D_KOU_HZ05" is 5h. In the case, “D_KOU_HZ02-D_KOU_HZ01” is the difference “02h”, “D_KOU_HZ03-D_KOU_HZ02” is the difference “04h”, “D_KOU_HZ04-D_KOU_HZ03” is the difference “0Ah”, “D_KOU_HZ01”
Z05-D_KOU_HZ04 "is the difference" 06h ".

  Therefore, it is possible to compress 12 bits while leaving 4 bits of “0Ah” (1010 in binary notation), but in the other table not illustrated, the 4 bits may not be enough to represent differences. Also in FIG. 154, 11 bits are compressed leaving 5 bits.

  Subsequently, data in the second stage of the table read by the assembler by pseudo instruction BTA {5, 16} will be described.

  Among the data in the second row of the table, “02h”, which is “D_KOU_HZ02-D_KOU_HZ01”, is originally “0002h”, and thus is “0000000000000010B” in binary notation. Among these, the upper 11 bits are compressed, and the lower 5 bits “00010B” are stored as the lower 5 bits of the address 5A04h (arrow 17 in FIG. 154).

  Next, among the data of the second stage of the table, 2500 of the distribution value is expressed as “1001110001000100 B” in binary notation. Since the storage capacity for the upper 3 bits still remains at the previous address 5A04h, the 16-bit data is divided into the lower 3 bits, the middle 8 bits and the upper 5 bits. Then, the lower 3 bits "100B" are stored as the upper 3 bits in the address 5A04h (arrow 18). That is, with the address 5A04h, with the differential address value “00010B” as the lower bit, the data “10000010 B” is stored together with “100B” which is a part of the binary data of the distribution value.

  Also, among the allocation value "1001110001000100B", the middle 8 bits "10001000B" are stored at address 5A05h (arrow 19), and the upper 5 bits "10011B" are stored as the lower 5 bits of address 5A06h (Arrow 20).

  Next, since the storage capacity for the upper 3 bits remains at address 5A06h of the ROM, the lower 3 bits "100B" of "04h" which is "D_KOU_HZ03-D_KOU_HZ02" of the data in the third row of the table Is stored as the upper 3 bits of the address 5A06h (arrow 21). Therefore, the address 5A06h is stored by combining a part of the second stage table data and a part of the third stage table data.

  In the next 3rd row of the table and the 4th row of the data, 11 bits of the differential address value are deleted to make it 5 bits long, and the distribution value is 16 bits long, and the ROM is a 1-byte storage area. Are stored to each address destination of. At this time, table data of 5 bit length and 16 bit length is appropriately divided and stored in the ROM so that all 8 bits are filled in each address destination.

  Next, the storage state of the data in the fifth row of the table in the ROM will be described. Among the data in the fifth row of the table, “D_KOU_HZ05-D_KOU_HZ04” is “06h” (0110 in binary notation), and the 5-bit length of this is “00110B”, but the least significant bit is divided And stored in the address 5A0Bh, and the upper 4 bits "0011B" are stored as the lower 4 bits in the address 5A0Ch (arrow 22).

  Subsequently, among the data in the fifth row of the table, the binary data "0000000010001000B" of the sorting value 136 is divided into lower 4 bits, middle 8 bits and upper 4 bits, and the lower 4 bits "1000 B" is the address The upper 4 bits are stored in 5A0Ch (arrow 23), and the middle 8 bits are stored in address 5A0Dh (arrow 24).

  Then, the upper 4 bits “0000 B” are stored as the lower 4 bits in the address 5A0Eh (arrow 25), but since the capacity for the upper 4 bits is free in the address 5A0Eh, the corresponding portion has 4 bits 0 data "0000 B" is supplemented (arrow 26).

  FIG. 155 is a diagram for explaining a reading format of data of the eighteenth embodiment by the CPU 111a. Here, the data from address 5A00h to address 5A0Dh is read by the code "LQDB BC, (HL +). 16", and the data at address 5A0Eh is read by the code "LQDB C, (HL +). 5".

  First, assuming that the address value 5000h is specified in the DP register and that the value obtained by converting A02h by 8 and stored in bit is stored in the HL register, the data stored in the address 5A02h and the address 5A03h Will be described. The read instruction here is “LQDB BC, (HL +). 16”. The code is added with (HL +) and “plus” as compared with the code in FIG. 149, but this is the content that adds the number of bits read to the HL register after reading to the BC register It is.

  Since the address value stored in the DP register is 5000h and the value of the HL register is A02h when executing the instruction, a process of reading 16 bits from 5A02h obtained by adding A02h to 5000h is executed. The (A02h * 8) -th bit counted from bit 0 of 5000h shown by the arrow 27 is the starting point of reading. A02h * 8 is based on a 3-bit left shift operation by the above-mentioned SQLA instruction.

  The 1-byte data stored at address 5A02h is "00110000B", and the 1-byte data stored at address 5A03h is "11110010B", and the 11-bit length of this data is "111100000110000B". (Arrow 28). The data is represented by F230h in hexadecimal, and the read 16-bit data is stored in the BC register.

  Then, since “F230h” is read out to the BC register, the HL register becomes “5020h” which is 5010h + 16 by adding 16 which is the read bit length. Here, 5010h is the number of bits (A02h * 8). Since 5020h = A04h * 8 remainder 0, the next read position is from bit 0 of the address 5A04h (arrow 29). Here, 5020h (20512 in decimal notation) is a value obtained by multiplying A04h (2564 in decimal notation) by eight, and all calculations here are calculations after bit conversion.

  Next, distribution proceeds, and a case will be described where the data stored in the address 5A0Bh and the address 5A0Ch in the second half variation selection table are read by the code "LQDB C, (HL +). 5". Here, it is assumed that the address value stored in the DP register remains at 5000 h and the value of the HL register is A0Bh * 8 + 7.

  Since the address value stored in the DP register is 5000h and the value of HL is A0Bh * 8 + 7 on execution of the instruction, bit 7 (arrow 30) of “5A0Bh” which is A08h * 8 + 7 in 5000h is read It becomes a starting point. Then, a process of reading 5 bits from bit 7 of “5A0Bh” is executed by the instruction. Since the data length stored in bit 7 of the address 5A0Bh is only 1 bit, the lower 4 bits are read from the next address 5A0Ch as the additional 4 bits (arrow 31).

  The data read out here is "00110 B" (arrows 30 and 31) corresponding to the difference "06h", but the C register of the storage destination has an area of 1 byte, so For the missing 3 bits, "000B" is supplemented as part of the interpretation of the LQDB instruction (arrow 32).

  Then, since the difference “06h” is read out to the C register, the HL register becomes “5064h” which is 505Fh + 5, which is the addition of 5 which is the read bit length (arrow 33). Since 5064h = A0Ch * 8, the next read position is from bit 4 of the address 5A0Ch. “505 Fh” is a value of A0Bh * 8 + 7.

  In FIG. 155, the distribution value in the first row of the table is arranged in ROM without using the assembler's pseudo instruction "BTA", but the LQDB instruction does not depend on the arrangement of such table data, but any data area It is possible to read data of an arbitrary number of bits (with an arbitrary bit length of 1 bit to 16 bits) from the position.

  FIG. 156 is a program list of 2-byte distribution processing of the eighteenth embodiment. The 2-byte distribution process of this embodiment is also labeled “P_SELW” and is called by the fluctuation pattern setting process (FIG. 150). The portion of the label SELW10 corresponds to the loop processing from A4403 to A4406 in FIG. 38, and the portion of the label SELW20 corresponds to A4407 in FIG.

  The code “LD DE, (HL +)” of the line number 11510 is content for loading the address of the latter half variation group table as a reference into the DE register from the area corresponding to the address stored in the current HL register. The address of the second half fluctuation group table as a reference is a reference address of D_KOU_HZ01 (address of the second half fluctuation selection table), 5B00h when using an absolute address, and 0B00h when using a relative address. After that, the value of the HL register is updated.

  The code “CQPW (HL), C_NOTHING” of the line number 11520 is the content to be judged by comparing whether the updated data at the address destination is identical to the code without distribution (C_NOTHING).

  The code “JR Z, SELW 20” of the line number 11530 is a content that jumps to the part of the SELW 20 if it is a non-allocation code, and otherwise reads the next line.

  The code “SQLA HL, 3” of the row number 11540 is content to shift the 16-bit address value stored in the HL register to the left by 3 bits. By the 3-bit left shift, the lower 13 bits of binary data are substantially raised to the power of 2 (eight times), and the address value is converted into bits.

  First, the SELW 20 part will be described. The code “LD HL, DE” of the line number 11620 loads the address value stored in the DE register into the HL register, and the address value of the data corresponding to the distributed result ( It is content to be updated to the address value of the latter half variation selection table).

  Next, return to the part of SELW 10. The code “LQDB C, (HL +). 5” (addition read instruction) of line number 11560 is the next bit position stored in the HL register (the read start position in ROM is indicated by the number of bits). This is the content to read 5-bit data and store in C register. As shown in FIG. 155, one of the differences “02h”, “04h”, “0Ah”, and “06h” is stored in the C register. Thereafter, the bit position stored in the HL register is updated by adding the number of bits read.

  The code "ADD DE, C" of the line number 11570 is the content of adding the difference stored in the C register to the value of the DE register. In this manner, the differences "02h", "04h", "0Ah" and "06h" are sequentially added to the address 5B00h (or relative address 0B00h) of the second half fluctuation group table as a reference and added to the value of the DE register. It will go.

  The code “LQDB BC, (HL +). 16” (addition read instruction) of line number 11580 is the next bit position stored in the HL register (the read start position in the ROM is indicated by the number of bits). The contents of 16 bits of data are read into the BC register. Thereafter, the bit position stored in the HL register is updated by adding the number of bits read. The distribution value is stored in the BC register as shown in FIG.

  The code "SUB WA, BC" of the line number 11590 is the contents of subtracting the distribution value from the random value. By repeatedly executing the code of the line number 11590, the distribution values 62000, 2500, 600, 300, and 136 are sequentially subtracted from the random value.

  The code “JRNC, SELW10” of the line number 11600 is the content of returning to the beginning of the loop processing if the result of subtraction does not become negative, and reading the next line if it becomes negative. When the result of subtraction becomes negative, updating of the value of the DE register in row number 11570 is discontinued, and the value of the address value of the data (address value of the second half variation selection table) corresponding to the distributed result is final Will be obtained by the value of the DE register.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157, the reference address value of the table of each stage is not the difference between the reference address value of the table of the previous stage and the reference address value of the table one stage earlier (FIG. 153). The present invention can also be applied to the case of difference with reference address value. That is, "D_KOU_HZ02-D_KOU_HZ01" is coded in the second row of the second half of the variation group table labeled "D_KOUGRP_T1HZ1", and "D_KOU_HZ03-D_KOU_HZ01" is coded in the third row. Further, the fourth embodiment may be applied to the case where “D_KOU_HZ04-D_KOU_HZ01” is coded in the fourth row, and “D_KOU_HZ05-D_KOU_HZ01” is coded in the fifth row.

  Then, in the case of FIG. 157, the difference values “02h”, “04h”, “0Ah”, and “06h” described in the left table of FIG. 154 are replaced with “02h”, “06h”, “10h”, “16h” And apply the present embodiment.

[Operations and effects of the eighteenth embodiment]
Thus, according to the eighteenth embodiment, the gaming machine executes the variation display game by establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, entering or passing of the game ball to the start winning area or the gate), and the variation display A game control means (game control device 100) is provided which performs game control for generating a special game state in which a bonus is given to a player when a game results in a special result. The game control means includes game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) for storing a game control program, and operation processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) for performing predetermined arithmetic processing by the game control program. The game control program storage means stores data for each storage area to which one address is allocated. The arithmetic processing means calculates a bit conversion value obtained by integrating the address values of the storage area read out from the game control program storage means by a predetermined number (for example, "SQLA HL, 3") and the bit conversion value An addition read instruction (for example, "LQDB") which calculates a value obtained by adding a value corresponding to a predetermined bit length to a bit conversion value by designating a predetermined bit length to be read as a start position) and reading data of the predetermined bit length. BC, (HL +). 16 ") is configured to be executable. The data of the predetermined bit length is a distribution value for allocating the aspect of the variable display game or a value associated with the distribution value. The arithmetic processing means reads out the distribution value or the value associated with the distribution value according to the addition reading instruction. The instruction set that can be interpreted and executed by the instruction interpretation and execution means (instruction interpretation and execution circuit 1242) may include such conversion instruction and addition read instruction. The CPU core 102 (instruction interpreting and executing circuit 1242) may be provided with a dedicated logic circuit for executing these instructions. For example, the value associated with the distribution value is the address (the difference address value in FIGS. 153 and 154) of the second half variation selection table.

  As described above, in the eighteenth embodiment, data can be read from any position in the data area with an arbitrary bit length of 1 bit length to 16 bit length by the addition read instruction (LQDB instruction).

  Therefore, by setting the reading position according to the state of the data arranged in the ROM and setting the reading bit length, it is possible to read compressed data and restore the data, and compress (delete Bit length can be arbitrarily determined. In addition, after the distribution value or the value associated with the distribution value is read out by the addition read instruction, the next read position is set without executing another instruction by the executed addition read instruction. Continuous read can be easily performed.

  In addition, when the data read out continuously by an arbitrary bit length becomes a bit length less than 8 bits or 16 bits, 0 data is automatically generated for the missing digit (the missing bit number). Thus, the data can be read out as 8-bit or 16-bit data regardless of the compression state of the data arranged in the ROM.

Nineteenth Embodiment
A nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 164. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eighteenth embodiments.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
The hard random number acquisition process according to the nineteenth embodiment is the same as the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 127) according to the eighth embodiment.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
FIG. 158 is a flowchart of a process of the special view starting opening switch common process according to the nineteenth embodiment. The special figure starting opening switch common processing is executed by the game control device 100. In addition, the same step number is attached | subjected to the process same as the special figure starting opening switch common process (FIG. 128) which concerns on 8th Embodiment.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates the start opening signal output count by +1 (incremented by 1) up to a predetermined value (255 in this case) as the upper limit (A10801), and among the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a It is determined whether the number of to-be-updated special views (number of starting memories) corresponding to the monitored starting opening switch is smaller than the upper limit (A2905).

If the number of to-be-updated special views is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special view starting port switch common processing is ended.
In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special views is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of to-be-updated special views (to-special number 1 or special number 2) is updated by 1 Then (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special views reserved (A2908), and the decoration corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special plots A special figure reservation number command is prepared as a rendering command (A2917), and a rendering command setting process (A2918) is executed.

Specifically, for example, when the starting opening switch to be monitored is the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1), and the number of reserved special views 1 is "4", the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special drawing As the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reservations, the address of the area for number of reservations 4 in the special figure 1 random number storage area (Fig. 159) of RWM, ie, the random number storage area (the first start memory) of special figure 1 The address of the area for number of reservations 4 in the special drawing 1 reservation storage area) is calculated.
In addition, for example, when the starting opening switch to be monitored is the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 2), and the special figure 2 holding number is "4", the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special drawing holding number Address of the area for holding number 4 in the special figure 2 random number storage area (Fig. 159) of RWM, that is, the random number storage area (special figure for the second starting memory) of special figure 2 (2) The address of the area for number of reservations 4 in the area for storage of area 2) is calculated.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2915).
Specifically, when the address of the area for number of reservations 4 in the special figure 1 random number storage area of RWM is calculated in step A2908, for example, as shown in FIG. 159, the variation pattern of the area for number of reservations 4 The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is saved in the random number 1 storage area, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is saved in the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area for the hold number 4 area, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is stored in the hold number 4 area Pattern random number 3 is saved.

Next, the game control apparatus 100 extracts the big hit random number from the area (A10701) of the address (A10701) of the hard random number latch register prepared in the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 127) and saves it in the big hit random number storage area of RWM (A10802).
Specifically, when the address of the area for number of reservations 4 in the special figure 1 random number storage area of RWM is calculated in step A2908, for example, as shown in FIG. 159, the big hit random number is prepared in step A10701. It is extracted from the area of the address of the hard random number latch register, and is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the area for the number of pending four.

Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 extracts the jackpot symbol random number from the random number area (predetermined register in the random number generation circuit), and saves it in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (A10803).
Specifically, when the address of the area for holding number 4 in the special figure 1 random number storage area of RWM is calculated in step A2908, for example, as shown in FIG. 159, the big hit symbol of the area for holding number 4 A big hit symbol random number is saved in the random number storage area.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2912).
When it is not a winning to the start winning opening 36 (result of A2912 is "N"), the special figure reservation information decision processing is executed (A2916), it ends special processing starting mouth switch common processing.
On the other hand, if it is a winning on the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is "Y"), small hit symbol random numbers are extracted from the random number area (predetermined register in the random number generation circuit), and RWM small hit symbols After saving in the random number storage area (A10804), the special figure holding information determination process is executed (A2916), and the special figure starting port switch common process is ended.
Specifically, when the address of the reserve number 4 area in the special figure 1 random number storage area of RWM is calculated in step A2908, for example, as shown in FIG. 159, the small hit of the reserve number 4 area A small hit symbol random number is saved in the symbol random number storage area.

  While the result of the special figure 1 variable display game has a small hit, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game has no small hit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 159, in the RWM random number storage area, each area of reserved number 1 area to reserved number 4 area in the special figure 1 random number storage area is an area of 8 bytes each. Among the random number storage areas of RWM, each area of the area for number of reservations 1 to the area for number of reservations 4 in the special figure 2 random number storage area is an area of 7 bytes.

  FIG. 160 is a program list showing a program structure of a part of the special view starting opening switch common process (FIG. 158) according to the nineteenth embodiment. The same line numbers are assigned to the codes having the same contents as in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment, and the description will be omitted.

The line numbers 2500 to 2590 and the line numbers 2610 to 2650 are the same as in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment. That is, in FIG. 160, the line number 2600 in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment is deleted.
The line numbers 22010 to 22030 are the same as the line numbers 2810 to 2830 in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment.

  The row numbers 22040 to 22070 are similar to the row numbers 2750 to 2780 in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment, and correspond to step A2915 of the special view starting opening switch common process (FIG. 158).

  That is, in step A2915 of the special view start port switch common process (FIG. 158), first, fluctuation pattern random number 1 is extracted from the random number area (generation area where fluctuation pattern random number 1 is generated) and loaded to WA register ( Row number 22040) The variation pattern random number 1 of the WA register is loaded into the variation pattern random number 1 storage area of RWM (row number 22050). Next, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 are extracted from the random number area (the generation area in which the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 are generated) and loaded to the WA register (row number 22060). The fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 of the WA register are loaded into the pattern random number 2 storing area and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storing area (line number 22070). Therefore, the random numbers set in the WA register at the end of step A 2915 of the special view starting opening switch common processing (FIG. 158) are the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3.

Row number 22080 to row number 22100 correspond to step A10802 of the special view starting opening switch common process (FIG. 158).
In the row number 22080, the value stored in the 2-byte area (2-byte big hit random number) from the address stored in the E register (the address of the target hard random number latch register) is input to the WA register (code "INW WA, (E)").

In the line number 22090, the big hit random number of the WA register is stored in the area (in the RAM) of the address currently stored in the HL register at the current time, that is, the holding random number storage area (the area corresponding to the number of holdings) Load (store) (Code "LQD (HL +), WA"). Thereafter, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address ("HL +").
In the row number 22100, the DE register is loaded (stored) the jackpot random number of the WA register (code "LD DE, WA"). As a result, the big hit random number is stored not only in the WA register but also in the DE register.

  That is, in step A10802 of the special view start port switch common process (FIG. 158), the big hit random number is extracted from the hard random number latch register and loaded to the WA register (row number 22080). The big hit random number of the register is loaded (line number 22090), and the big hit random number of the WA register is loaded into the DE register (line number 22100). Therefore, the random numbers set in the WA register and the random numbers set in the DE register at the end of step A10802 of the special view start port common processing (FIG. 158) are both big hit random numbers.

  Row numbers 22110 to 22120 are the same as row numbers 2680 to 2690 in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment, and correspond to step A10803 of the special view starting opening switch common process (FIG. 158).

Row numbers 22130 to 22140 correspond to step A2912 of the special view starting port switch common process (FIG. 158).
In line No. 22130, does the start-up winning flag stored in the area (within the RAM) of the addition address IY + R_SIDOFLG match the numerical value (value indicating Special Figure 1) corresponding to the label C_SIDO1 (T)? It is judged whether it does not match (F) (code "CPJ (IY + R_SIDOFLG), C_SIDO1"). In the case of a match (T), for example, a predetermined flag is set.
Row number 22140 corresponds to label TSIDOSW10 if the comparison result of row number 22130 does not match (F), that is, the target starting opening is starting opening 2 (when the starting opening winning flag indicates special figure 2) Jump to a ROM address to be executed (conditional branch) and execute the instruction after line number 22180 (code "JRS F, TSIDOSW10"). This is because there is no small hit in the special view 2 variable display game, and there is no need to acquire and store a small hit symbol random number.

Row numbers 22150 to 22160 correspond to step A10804 of the special view start port switch common process (FIG. 158).
At row number 22150, the value of a predetermined register "C_SRND1_L" in the random number generation circuit is input to the W register (code "IN W, (C_SRND1_L)").
In row number 22160, the value of W register is loaded as a small hit symbol random number into the area of the address stored in the current HL register (code "LQD (HL +), W". Thereafter, in the current HL register) Update the address to the next address ("HL +").

That is, in step A10803 of the special view starting opening switch common process (FIG. 158), the big hit symbol random number is extracted from the random number area (predetermined register in the random number generation circuit) and loaded to the A register (row number 22110), The jackpot symbol random number of the A register is loaded into the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (line number 22120).
Also, in step A10804 of the special view starting opening switch common process (Fig. 158), small hit symbol random numbers are extracted from the random number area (predetermined register in the random number generation circuit) and loaded into the W register (row number 22150) The small hit symbol random number of the W register is loaded into the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (line number 22160).
Therefore, the random number set in the DE register is the big hit random number, and the random number set in the A register is the big hit symbol random number at the end of step A10804 of the special view starting opening switch common processing (FIG. 158) The random number set in the W register is a small hit symbol random number.

The line number 22180 is the same as the line number 2790 in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment. That is, line number 22180 corresponds to step A2916 of the special view start port switch common process (FIG. 158), and calls the subroutine (label P_THOINF) of the special view hold information determination process (FIG. 25 in the case of this embodiment) Code "CALLR P_THOINF").
The line number 22190 is the same as the line number 2840 in FIG. 134A of the ninth embodiment. That is, at line number 22190, the process returns to the start opening switch monitoring process (FIG. 22) (code "RET").

  As described above, in the nineteenth embodiment, the random number set in the DE register is a big hit random number at the start of the special view reservation information determination process (step A2916) of the special view starting opening switch common process (FIG. 158). The random number set in the A register is a big hit symbol random number, and the random number set in the W register is a small hit symbol random number (except when the target starting port is the starting port 2).

[Special map reservation information determination process]
The special map reservation information determination process according to the nineteenth embodiment is the same as the special map reservation information determination process (FIG. 25) according to the first embodiment.

[Operations and effects of the nineteenth embodiment]
In the case of the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, in the random number storage area of RWM, big hit random number → symbol random number (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) → variation pattern random number (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2 and fluctuation pattern random numbers 3) are stored in order.

  Then, in the case of the eighth embodiment, in the special view reservation information determination process (FIG. 129), the big hit random number is loaded from the target area in the random number storage area of RWM (step A10901), and the big hit random number is determined big hit. Used for processing (step A3004), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the target area of the RWM random number storage area (step A10902), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A10903) The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the target region of the RWM random number storage region (step A10904), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number is acquired (step A10905).

Further, in the case of the eighth embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process (FIG. 37) of the special figure holding information determination process, the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target area of the RWM random number storage area and prepared ( Step A4303) The variation pattern random number 1 is used for 2-byte distribution process (step A4305) or distribution process (step A4306), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target area in the RWM random number storage area and prepared. (Step A4308), the variation pattern random number 2 is used for distribution processing (step A4309), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target area of the RWM random number storage area and prepared (step A4314) The variation pattern random number 3 is used for distribution processing (step A4315).
That is, in the eighth embodiment, the jackpot random number value, the symbol random number value, and the variation pattern random number value used for the prior determination (pre-reading determination) are values read out from the RWM random number storage area.

On the other hand, in the case of the nineteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 158, the variation pattern random number (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, variation pattern random number 3) → big hit random number → symbol in the random number storage area of RWM. It is stored in the order of random numbers (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number).
Then, in the case of the nineteenth embodiment, in the special view holding information determination process (FIG. 25), the process of loading the big hit random number from the target area of the random number storage area of RWM (step A10901) is not performed. The process (step A3004) is performed. And, in this big hit judgment processing, the value of the DE register (big hit random number value) is used.

Further, in the case of the nineteenth embodiment, in the special view reservation information determination process (FIG. 25), the process of loading the jackpot symbol random number from the target area of the RWM random number storage area is not performed (step A10902) but is stopped. A process of acquiring symbol information (step A3007) is performed. Then, in this process, stop symbol information corresponding to the value of the A register (big hit symbol random number value) is acquired.
Further, in the case of the nineteenth embodiment, in the special view holding information determination process (FIG. 25), the small hit symbol random number is not loaded from the target area of the RWM random number storage area (step A10904). A process of acquiring stop symbol information (step A3012) is performed. Then, in this process, stop symbol information corresponding to the value (small hit symbol random number value) of the W register is acquired.
Therefore, in the case of the nineteenth embodiment, the value of the big hit random number for the pre-read target, the value of the big hit symbol random number for the pre-read target, and the value of the small hit symbol random number for the pre-read target are not read from the random number storage area of RWM (FIG. 159) .

In addition, in the case of the nineteenth embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process (FIG. 37) of the special figure holding information determination process, the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target area of the RWM random number storage area and prepared ( Step A4303) The variation pattern random number 1 is used for 2-byte distribution process (step A4305) or distribution process (step A4306), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target area in the RWM random number storage area and prepared. (Step A4308), the variation pattern random number 2 is used for distribution processing (step A4309), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target area of the RWM random number storage area and prepared (step A4314) The variation pattern random number 3 is used for distribution processing (step A4315).
Therefore, in the case of the nineteenth embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment etc., the value of the fluctuation pattern random number to be read ahead is read out from the random number storage area (FIG. 159) of the RWM.

  That is, in the nineteenth embodiment, the variation pattern random number value used for the predetermination (prefetch determination) is a value read from the RWM random number storage area (FIG. 159), but the big hit random number value used for the predetermination (prefetch determination) The symbol random number value is not the value read from the RWM random number storage area (FIG. 159) but the value of the register (in the case of this embodiment, the value of the DE register, the value of the A register, the value of the W register).

In order to read out a desired random number from the random number storage area of RWM, it is necessary to calculate the address of the area where the desired random number is stored, but as in the nineteenth embodiment, it is read out from the random number storage area of RWM. By reducing the number of random numbers, the burden on the address calculation process can be reduced, and the storage capacity of data for the address calculation process can be reduced.
Also, as shown in FIG. 159, random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, variation pattern random numbers) read from the random number storage area of the RWM are not read from the random number storage area of the RWM (in the case of the present embodiment, big hit random number, symbol) The address calculation becomes easy by storing in an area closer to the beginning than the random number).

  Furthermore, random numbers not read from the RWM random number storage area (big hit random number, symbol random number in the case of the present embodiment) are registered in the register later than random numbers (fluctuating pattern random number in the present embodiment) read from the RWM random number storage area. It is memorized. That is, a random number in which the value of the register is used in the predetermination is stored in the register immediately before performing the predetermination. Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot random number and the symbol random number for which the value of the register is used in advance determination, the register (DE register A, It is stored in the register, W register). Therefore, since it is easy to protect the state in which the random number (the random number for which the value of the register is used in advance determination) is set in the register, there is no need to set up a program in consideration of the use situation of the register etc. Efficiency is improved.

  According to the nineteenth embodiment described above, a variable display game (special view variable display game) is performed in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. In the case of a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives the player a gaming value when the player wins, a plurality of random numbers are extracted based on the establishment of the start condition and the register (in the case of this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern random number is the WA register, The big hit random number is stored in the WA register and DE register, the big hit symbol random number is stored in the A register, the small hit symbol random number is stored in the W register), and the random number stored in the relevant register is stored in the random number storage area of the storage unit (game control apparatus 100) Random number storage control means (game control apparatus 100) and the random number stored in the random number storage control means, the variable display game corresponding to the random number is executed (In this embodiment, JP diagram starting opening switch common processing) pre determination process for determining before being provided with pre-determination means that performs a (game controller 100), the. The first type of random number (big hit random number, big hit random number, big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number in the case of the present embodiment) and the second type random number (in the present embodiment, the variation pattern random number) And the prior determination means reads the first type random number from the register and performs the prior determination process, while reading the second type random number from the random number storage area and performs the prior determination process; Two types of random numbers are stored in an area of the random number storage area that precedes the area that stores the first type of random number.

Therefore, in order to read out the desired random number from the random number storage area, it is necessary to calculate the address of the area in which the desired random number is stored, but as in this embodiment, the number of random numbers read from the random number storage area As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the address calculation process and to reduce the storage capacity of data for the address calculation process. Therefore, the burden of prior determination processing (special drawing starting opening switch common processing) can be reduced.
Furthermore, the random number read out from the random number storage area (the variation pattern random number in the case of the present embodiment) is headed more than the random number not read out from the random number storage area (the big hit random number, the big hit random number, the small hit pattern random number in the present embodiment) Address calculation becomes easy by storing in an area close to. Therefore, the burden of prior determination processing (special drawing starting opening switch common processing) can be reduced.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, the first type random number includes a jackpot random number for determining whether or not to derive a special result, and the second type random number includes the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display game. It is possible to configure so as to include a variation pattern determination random number for determination (in the case of this embodiment, variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3).

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to effectively reduce the burden of the prior determination process (the special view starting opening switch common process).
The big hit random number may be a second type of random number.
The jackpot symbol random number may be a second type of random number.
Also, the small hitting symbol random number may be a second type of random number.
The variation pattern random number may be a first type of random number.

Further, the variation pattern random number value used for the predetermination may not be a value read from the RWM random number storage area, but may be a value re-extracted from the corresponding random number area (a generation area where the variation pattern random number is generated).
In addition, the symbol random number (big hit symbol random number value, small hit symbol random number value) used for the prior determination is not the register value (in the case of this embodiment, the value of the A register, the value of the W register), but the corresponding random number area It may be a value extracted again from (a predetermined register in the random number generation circuit).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 161, a work area for prior determination is provided in the RAM 111c etc. separately from the random number storage area of RWM, and hard random numbers are provided in step A10802 of the special view starting port switch common process (FIG. 158). A big hit random number is extracted from the area of the address of the hard random number latch register prepared in step A10701 of the acquisition process (FIG. 127), and the big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM. It is also possible to configure to save temporarily in the judgment work area. When configured in this way, the jackpot random number value used for the prior determination is not the value of the register (the value of the DE register in the case of the present embodiment), but is a value read from the prior determination work area such as the RAM 111c. Good.

In addition, when configured in this way, the symbol random number values (big hit symbol random number value, small hit symbol random number value) used for the prior determination are the register values (in the case of this embodiment, the value of A register, the value of W register) It may be a value read from a random number storage area of RWM, or may be a value re-extracted from a corresponding random number area (a predetermined register in a random number generation circuit).
In addition, when configured in this way, the variation pattern random number value used for the prior determination may be a value read from the RWM random number storage area, or the corresponding random number area (generation area where the variation pattern random number is generated) It may be a value extracted again from Here, for example, line number 22040 (“LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN1)”) and line number 22060 (“LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN2)” of the special view start port switch common process (FIG. 160) during the special view reserve information determination process. By executing the same instruction as)), it is possible to extract again the fluctuation pattern random value used for the predetermination from the corresponding random number area (the generation area in which the fluctuation pattern random number is generated).

  That is, according to the nineteenth embodiment described above, a variable display game (special view variable display game) is variably displayed based on satisfaction of the start condition, and the result of the variable display game is a special result. In a gaming machine provided with gaming control means (gaming control apparatus 100) for performing gaming control to generate a special gaming state for giving a gaming value to a player when the game becomes, the game control means stores a gaming control program Game control program storage means, operation processing means for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, update information storage means for storing information updated by the operation processing means, and a register group including a plurality of operation registers And a head address designation register for storing the head address of the update information storage means in the address space of the arithmetic processing means, An address of a plurality of bytes is allocated to the information storage means, the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address, and the information is updated by the offset address based on the head address stored in the head address designation register. An instruction capable of designating any storage area of the information storage means and reading out the value of the storage area to a predetermined calculation register is configured to be executable, and the calculation processing means generates a plurality of random numbers based on the satisfaction of the start condition. Extract and store in a predetermined operation register (in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern random number is WA register, the big hit random number is WA register and DE register, the big hit symbol random number is A register, the small hit symbol random number is W register), A random number storage control means for storing the random number stored in the calculation register in the random number storage area of the update information storage means And prior determination processing (in the case of the present embodiment, special view starting opening switch common processing) for determining the random number extracted by the random number storage control means before the variable display game corresponding to the random number is executed. And a pre-determination unit to perform. The first type of random number (big hit random number, big hit random number, big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number in the case of the present embodiment) and the second type random number (in the present embodiment, the variation pattern random number) And the prior determination means reads out the first type random number from the operation register and performs the prior determination processing, while extracting the second type random number again according to the instruction and performing the prior determination processing. It is possible to configure to do.

Even with this configuration, in order to read out a desired random number from the random number storage area, it is necessary to calculate the address of the area in which the desired random number is stored, but as in this embodiment, the random number By reducing the number of random numbers read from the storage area, it is possible to reduce the load on the address calculation process and to reduce the storage capacity of data for the address calculation process. Therefore, the burden of prior determination processing (special drawing starting opening switch common processing) can be reduced.
Note that “re-extract according to the instruction and perform pre-determination processing (that is, extract the variation pattern random value used for pre-determination again from the corresponding random number area (the generation area in which the variation pattern random number is generated)) , During special processing reserve information determination processing, line number 22040 (“LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN1)”) and line number 22060 (“LQD WA, (IY + R_RNDHEN2)”) of special processing starting port switch common processing (FIG. 160) It is not limited to executing the same instruction. For example, similar instructions ("LQD A, (IY + R_RNDHEN2)", "LQD B, (IY + R_RNDHEN3)", etc.) in which the register to read is changed to line number 22040 or line number 22060, etc. It is also possible to configure so as to perform re-extraction and pre-determination processing according to the instruction.

  Here, at the time of predetermination, the variation pattern random number is read from the RWM random number storage area (FIG. 159), and the big hit random number and the symbol random number are not read from the RWM random number storage area (FIG. 159). Not only the jackpot random number and the symbol random number are also read out from the RWM random number storage area (FIG. 159). That is, the variation pattern random number value, the big hit random number value, and the symbol random number value used for determination at the start of variation are values read out from the RWM random number storage area (FIG. 159).

  Specifically, in the nineteenth embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment etc., the big hit flag 1 setting process of the special view 1 change start process (FIG. 30) and the big hit flag 2 setting process of the special view 2 change start process ( In FIG. 31), the big hit random number is loaded from the target area in the random number storage area of RWM, and preparation (read big hit random number and setting in a predetermined register) (steps A3603, A3702) It clears (step A3604, A3703), and uses the said big hit random number value in big hit judgment processing (step A3605, A3704).

Also, in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 34) and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 35) Load the big hit symbol random number from the area (read the big hit symbol random number and set it in a predetermined register) (steps A4002 and A4102), obtain and save the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number (steps A4004 and A4104) Then, the target area is cleared to 0 (steps A4022 and A4116).
Also, in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (Fig. 34) of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the target area in the random number storage area of RWM. The stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved (step A4013), and the target area is cleared to 0 (step A4023).

  Also, in the fluctuation pattern setting process (Fig. 37) of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target area in the random number storage area of RWM and preparation (variation pattern The random number 1 is read out and set in a predetermined register (step A4303), and the variation pattern random number 1 is used for 2-byte distribution processing (step A4305) or distribution processing (step A4306). Load the fluctuation pattern random number 2 from the target area, prepare (read the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and set it in a predetermined register) (step A4308), and use the fluctuation pattern random number 2 for distribution processing (step A4309). Load fluctuation pattern random number 3 from the target area of the random number storage area of Is set) to a predetermined register reads the emissions random number 3 (step A4314), used to process distributing the variation pattern random 3 (step A4315). Then, in the fluctuation start information setting process (FIG. 40) of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, these target areas are cleared (step A4601) and the random number storage area is shifted (step A4613) ), Clear the free space after shift (step A4614).

Thus, at the start of the change, for example, as shown in FIG. 162, the random number stored in the area for the number 1 for holding in the random number storage area of the RWM to the area for the number 1 for holding The jackpot random number of the variation target and the symbol random number of the variation target are read out, and various determinations at the start of the variation are performed.
Then, after the processing for clearing the holding number 1 area to 0, the processing for shifting the random number storage area of the RWM is performed. For example, at the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1, when the area for number of reservations 4 in the special figure 1 random number storage area of RWM is filled, each random number of the area for number of reservations 2 is The random number in the hold number 3 area is shifted to the hold number 2 area, and each random number in the hold number 4 area is shifted to the hold number 3 area. After that, processing is performed to clear 0 the number of pending areas 4 that has become free.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 163, it is also possible to configure the fluctuation suspension area at a position closer to the top of the random number storage area of the RWM than the area for the number 1 suspension. By configuring in this way, after all the contents of the storage area subject to change (that is, the area for number of reservations 1) are shifted to the change holding area, the random number of the change holding area is used to start the change. Various determinations can be made.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 163, first, the process of shifting the RWM random number storage area (for example, at the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 and holding 4 in the special figure 1 random number storage area of the RWM). If the storage area is filled, each random number of the storage area for number 1 is shifted to the variable storage area, and each random number of the area for storage number 2 is shifted to the area for storage number 1, and the area for storage number 3 The process of shifting each random number to the hold number 2 area, shifting each random number of the hold number 4 area to the hold number 3 area), and clearing 0 the hold number 4 area which became a free area I do. Then, the values of the random numbers stored in the fluctuation reserve area from the fluctuation reserve area in the RWM random number storage area (that is, the fluctuation pattern random number of the fluctuation target, the big hit random number of the fluctuation target, and the symbol random number of the fluctuation target) After the readout, various determinations at the start of the fluctuation can be performed using the read out value, and the fluctuation suspension area can be cleared to 0.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 164, it is possible to provide a variable suspension work area in the RAM 111 c or the like separately from the RWM random number storage area. By configuring in this way, after all the contents of the storage area subject to change (that is, the area for the number of reservations 1) are shifted to the work area for suspension of fluctuation, fluctuation is started using the random number of the work area for suspension of fluctuation It becomes possible to make various judgments at the time.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 164, first, when it is at the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1, each random number of the area for number of reservations 1 in the special figure 1 random number storage area of RWM The random number is shifted to the work area for suspension of fluctuation such as the RAM 111 c etc. when shifting to the working area and when it is at the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2, the area for number of holding 1 in the special figure 2 random number storage area of RWM. However, since there is no small hit in the result of the special figure 2 variation display game, when it is at the start of variation of the special figure 2, the small hitting symbol random number storage area of the variation reserve work area such as the RAM 111c is used. I will not.

  Thereafter, the process of shifting the RWM random number storage area (for example, at the time of start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 and the reserved number 4 area in the special figure 1 random number storage area of the RWM is filled) Shift each random number of the area for number 1 to the area for number of reservations, shift each random number of the area for number 3 for reservations to the area for number 2 for reservations, and shift each random number of the area for number 4 for reservations to the area for number 3 Processing is performed, and processing for clearing 0 the area for number of reservations 4 which has become an empty area is performed. Then, the values of the random numbers stored in the work area for suspension of fluctuation (that is, the fluctuation pattern random number for fluctuation target, the big hit random number for fluctuation target, and the symbol random number for fluctuation target) are read out from the operation area for suspension of fluctuation After that, it is possible to make various determinations at the start of the fluctuation using the read value and to clear the fluctuation suspension work area to zero.

Modification of the nineteenth embodiment
A modification of the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 168.
In the nineteenth embodiment, the big hit random number and the symbol random number (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) are configured to be generated using the random number generated in the random number generation circuit.
However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock at a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the symbol random number is a CTC output having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is the processing unit of the program. It is a so-called "low speed counter" updated based on (CTC (CTC 2) different from CTC (CTC 0) of timer interrupt processing). Further, in the symbol random number, a so-called "initial value changing method" is employed in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of the random number.
That is, in the nineteenth embodiment, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the symbol random number (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) is a random number updated by hardware and software.

Also in this modification, the big hit random number and the symbol random number (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) are configured to be generated using the random number generated in the random number generation circuit.
However, the symbol random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" which is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, similarly to the big hit random number. Note that each of the random numbers is a random type update in which all values in the range appear separately without duplication until one round, but may be a counter type update by +1 or -1.
That is, in this modification, the symbol random number (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) is a random number which is updated only by hardware, similarly to the big hit random number. That is, in the present modification, the big hit random number and the symbol random number are hard random numbers (hardware random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, when the gaming ball passes through the starting opening, hard random numbers (big hit random numbers) automatically generated by the random number generation circuit are stored in the hard random number latch register. That is, in the nineteenth embodiment, since the big hit random number is extracted from the random number generation circuit at the start winning combination and stored in the hard random number latch register, in order to extract the big hit random number from the hard random number latch register in advance. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, the hard random number acquisition process (FIG. 127) is executed.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, even if the gaming ball passes through the starting opening, the value of the random number counter (hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit, ie, big hit random number) is not stored in the hard random number latch register. That is, in the present modification, since the big hit random number is not stored in the hard random number latch register at the start winning, hard random number acquisition processing is not executed. In the case of this modification, the big hit random number is extracted from the random number generation circuit (specifically, a predetermined register in the random number generation circuit) at the time of predetermination, similarly to the symbol random number (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number). Be done.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process according to the modification of the nineteenth embodiment. The starting opening switch monitoring process is executed by the game control device 100. The same processing as that of the starting opening switch monitoring processing (FIG. 22) according to the first embodiment is assigned the same step number and the description is omitted.
In FIG. 165, steps A 2702 and A 2710 in FIG. 22 are deleted. That is, as described above, in the present modification, the hard random number acquisition process is not executed.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing a procedure of common processing of special view starting opening switch according to a modification of the nineteenth embodiment. The special figure starting opening switch common processing is executed by the game control device 100. The same steps as in the special view start port switch common process (FIG. 158) according to the nineteenth embodiment are denoted by the same step numbers and description thereof will be omitted.
In FIG. 166, steps A10805 and A10806 are provided instead of step A10802 of FIG.

After performing the process of step A2908, the game control apparatus 100 extracts the big hit random number from the random number area (predetermined register in the random number generation circuit) (step A10805), and performs the process of step A2917.
Further, after performing the process of step A2915, the game control apparatus 100 saves the big hit random number extracted in step A10805 in the big hit random number storage area of RWM (A10806), and performs the process of step A10803.

FIG. 167 is a program list showing a program structure of part of the start port switch monitoring process (FIG. 165) according to the modification of the nineteenth embodiment. Note that the same line numbers are assigned to the codes having the same contents as in FIG. 132 of the eighth embodiment, and the description will be omitted.
The line numbers 1500 to 1510 and the line numbers 1540 to 1610 are the same as in FIG. 132 of the eighth embodiment.

The row numbers 21010 to 21030 correspond to A2703 of the starting opening switch monitoring process (FIG. 165).
At line number 21010, after the value stored in the area of the address currently stored in the HL register (for example, in the data area of the ROM) is loaded into the A register, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address. (Code "LD A, (HL +)"). The address currently stored (stored) in the HL register is set by the line number 1510.

In row number 21020, rising information is acquired from address R_SWCTL + 2 in which rising information is stored in the switch control area in which information on the target switch is stored, and the logical product is taken with the switch bit data (determination value) of A register. Then, it is determined whether or not the switch has been turned on (code "AND A, (R_SWCTL + 2)").
In the case of row number 21030, if the operation result (logical product) of row number 21020 is zero and the zero flag (ZF) is set, that is, if the target switch is off, to the address in ROM corresponding to label SIDOSW20. Jump (conditionally branch) (Code "JR Z, SIDOSW 20").

FIG. 168 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the special view starting opening switch common process (FIG. 166) according to the modification of the nineteenth embodiment. The same line numbers are assigned to the codes having the same contents as in FIG. 160 of the nineteenth embodiment, and the description will be omitted.
The line numbers 2500 to 2650, the line numbers 22010 to 22070, the line numbers 22130 to 22140, and the line numbers 22170 to 22190 are the same as in FIG. 160 of the nineteenth embodiment.

Row numbers 23010 to 23020 correspond to step A10805 of the special view start port switch common process (FIG. 166).
At row number 23010, the value of a predetermined register "C_HRND0" in the random number generation circuit is input to the WA register (code "INW WA, (C_HRND0)"). The predetermined register is hard random number register 0.
At line number 23020, the value of the WA register is loaded (stored) in the DE register as a big hit random number (code "LD DE, WA"). As a result, the big hit random number is stored not only in the WA register but also in the DE register.

The line number 23030 corresponds to step A10806 of the special view starting opening switch common process (FIG. 166).
In the line number 23030, the big hit random number of the DE register is stored in the area (in the RAM) of the address currently stored in the HL register at the current time, that is, the holding random number storage area (area corresponding to the number of holdings) Load (store) (code "LQD (HL +), DE"). Thereafter, the address in the HL register is updated to the next address ("HL +").

Row numbers 23040 to 23050 correspond to A10803 of the special view start port switch common process (FIG. 166).
At line number 23040, the value of a predetermined register "C_HRND1" in the random number generation circuit is input to the A register (code "IN A, (C_HRND1)"). The predetermined register is the hard random number register 1.
At line number 23050, the value of the A register is loaded as a big hit symbol random number into the area of the address stored in the current HL register (code "LQD (HL +), A"). Thereafter, the address in the current HL register is updated to the next address ("HL +").

Row numbers 23060 to 23070 correspond to A10804 of the special view start port switch common process (FIG. 166).
At row number 23060, the value of a predetermined register "C_HRND2" in the random number generation circuit is input to the W register (code "IN W, (C_HRND2)"). The predetermined register is the hard random number register 2.
At line number 23070, the value of the W register is loaded as the small hit symbol random number into the area of the address stored in the current HL register (code "LQD (HL +), W"). Thereafter, the address in the current HL register is updated to the next address ("HL +").

[Operations and effects of the modification of the nineteenth embodiment]
As in the above-mentioned nineteenth embodiment, in the case of the present modification, as shown in FIG. 166, in the random number storage area of RWM, variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, variation pattern random number 3) → big hit It is stored in the order of random number → symbol random number (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number).
Further, as in the above-described nineteenth embodiment, in the present modification, the variation pattern random value used for the predetermination (prefetch determination) is a value read from the RWM random number storage area, but is used for the predetermination (prefetch determination). The big hit random number value and the symbol random number value are not the values read from the RWM random number storage area but the values of the registers (the values of the DE register, the values of the A register, and the value of the W register in this modification).

Therefore, since the number of random numbers read out from the RWM random number storage area is small, it is possible to reduce the load on the address calculation process and to reduce the storage capacity of data for the address calculation process.
In addition, the random number read from the RWM random number storage area (the variation pattern random number in the case of this modification) is closer to the beginning than the random number not read from the RWM random number storage area (the big hit random number and the symbol random number in the present modification) Since the data is stored in the area, the address calculation becomes easy.
In addition, the random number (big hit random number, symbol random number in the case of this modification) where the value of the register is used in advance determination performs the prior determination (special figure suspension information determination process) before the relevant register (this embodiment In the case, DE register, A register, W register) are stored. Therefore, since it is easy to protect the state in which the random number (the random number for which the value of the register is used in advance determination) is set in the register, there is no need to set up a program in consideration of the use situation of the register Efficiency is improved.

Furthermore, in the present modification, at the time of prior determination, in the order of big hit random number → fluctuation pattern random number (fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, fluctuation pattern random number 3) → symbol random number (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) It is extracted. That is, the symbol random number is extracted after the jackpot random number extraction, and the conditional branch instruction is executed between the jackpot random number extraction and the symbol random number extraction.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 166, in this modification, extraction of the big hit random number (step A10805), extraction of the big hit symbol random number (step A10803) and extraction of the small hit symbol random number (step A10804) In the meantime, the rendering command setting process (step A2918) is executed. The effect command setting process is a process including a conditional branch instruction as shown in FIG.

And, as described above, in the case of the present modification, both the big hit random number and the symbol random number are so-called "high-speed counters" which are updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operation clock. The symbol random number is updated as needed between the extraction of the big hit random number and the symbol random number extraction.
Therefore, since an instruction in which the number of states is not fixed is sandwiched between the extraction of the big hit random number and the extraction of the symbol random number, the symbol random number can be updated more, and the symbol random number corresponding to the big hit random number becomes fixed. Can be avoided. Therefore, since it is not possible to aim a random number, such as deliberately determining a symbol when a hit is drawn, it is possible to effectively prevent fraud.

  According to the modification of the nineteenth embodiment described above, a variation display game (special figure variation display game) is variably displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the result of the variation display game is special. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives the player a gaming value when it results, a plurality of random numbers are extracted based on the establishment of the start condition, and the register (in the case of this modification, the big hit random number is WA Register and DE register, variation pattern random number is stored in WA register, big hit symbol random number is A register, small hit symbol random number is W register), and the random number stored in the relevant register is stored random number of storage means (game control device 100) A random number storage control means (game control apparatus 100) stored in the area, and a random number display game corresponding to the random number, the random number extracted by the random number storage control means (In this modified example, JP-view starting opening switch common processing) pre determination process for determining before being executed includes pre judgment means for performing a (game controller 100), the. The plurality of random numbers include a jackpot random number for determining whether or not to derive a special result, and a jackpot symbol random number for determining the type of identification information for deriving a special result. The random number storage control means extracts the big hit symbol random number after extraction of the big hit random number (refer to FIG. 166), and the conditional branch instruction (in the case of this modification) between the extraction of the big hit random number and the big hit symbol random number. An effect command setting process (step A2918 in FIG. 166) is executed.

  Specifically, according to the modification of the nineteenth embodiment described above, the gaming machine 10 executes a variation display game (special figure variation display game) in which a plurality of identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition. The game control means (game control apparatus 100) performs game control to generate a special game state for giving a game value to the player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. The game control means stores game control program storage means for storing a game control program, operation processing means for performing required arithmetic processing by the game control program, and update information storage for storing information updated by the operation processing means. And a register group consisting of a plurality of registers, an address of plural bytes is allocated to the update information storage means, the information stored in the update information storage means is specified by the address, and the register group is A plurality of register pairs each consisting of two registers are configured, and the arithmetic processing means corresponds the value stored in a predetermined register pair or a predetermined register to an address set in another register pair. Stored in one of the storage areas of the update information storage means, and the address set in the other register pair is updated. Storage instruction can be executed, and a plurality of random numbers are extracted based on the establishment of the start condition, and a predetermined register pair or a predetermined register (in the case of this modification, the jackpot random number is the WA register and DE register, fluctuation pattern The random number is stored in the WA register, the big hit symbol random number is stored in the A register, and the small hit symbol random number is stored in the W register), and the random number stored in the register pair or register is the storage instruction (row number 22050, row number 22070 in FIG. 168, The random number storage control means stored in the random number storage area of the update information storage means by the instruction of line number 23030, line number 23050, line number 23070), and the random number extracted by the random number storage control means Pre-determination processing to determine before the game is executed (in the case of this modification, the special view starting port switch And a, and pre-determining means for processing). The plurality of random numbers include a jackpot random number for determining whether or not to derive a special result, and a jackpot symbol random number for determining the type of identification information for deriving a special result. The random number storage control means extracts the big hit symbol random number after extraction of the big hit random number (refer to FIG. 166), and the conditional branch instruction (in the case of this modification) between the extraction of the big hit random number and the big hit symbol random number. An effect command setting process (step A2918 in FIG. 166) is executed.

  Therefore, by interposing an instruction in which the number of states does not become fixed between the extraction of the big hit random number and the extraction of the big hit symbol random number, it is possible to avoid that the big hit symbol random number corresponding to the big hit random number becomes fixed. Therefore, since the random number can not be targeted, cheating can be effectively prevented.

Further, in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment, the plurality of types of random numbers further include fluctuation pattern determination random numbers (the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in this modification) for determining the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display game. Included, the random number storage control means (game control apparatus 100) is configured to extract the variation pattern determination random number after the extraction of the big hit random number, and to extract the big hit symbol random number after the extraction of the variation pattern determination random number. Is possible (see FIG. 166).
By being configured in this manner, since the jackpot symbol random number can be updated more, it is possible to more effectively prevent fraud.

Further, in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment, the big hit random number and the big hit symbol random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit, and the prior determination processing (in the case of this modified example, common processing of special view starting opening switch) Can be extracted from the random number generation circuit.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent fraud more effectively.

  The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and alterations are possible within the scope of the technical idea, and it is apparent that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, it is also possible to combine a plurality of embodiments and modifications.

  Furthermore, the register in the code of each embodiment can be replaced with another register, for example, not only the addition address "IY + ..." but also "IX + ..." and "HL + ..." can be used. And when a plurality of registers are used in the code of each embodiment, the combination of a plurality of registers may be arbitrary and may be replaced, for example, the code “LQD B, (DE +)” (stored in DE register Code to update the address value of the DE register after storing the value of the area of the specified address value in the B register) or the code “AQND C, (WA +)” (value of the area of the address value stored in the WA register It is also possible to use a code that updates the address value of the WA register after computing the logical product of the register values.

  In addition, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines such as pachislot machines other than pachinko machines (for example, those in which the character ratio and the payout rate can be defined).

20th Embodiment
A twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 173. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to nineteenth embodiments.

[Dumped ball performance monitoring common processing]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in place of the common ball performance monitoring process shown in FIG. 18, common ball game performance monitoring shown in FIG. 169 is performed. In addition, the same step number is attached | subjected to the process same as the ball | bowl performance monitoring process which concerns on 1st Embodiment.

  In this output ball performance monitoring common process, first, the value of the discharged ball number area is loaded (step A11001), and the value of the acquired ball number area is loaded (step A11002). Next, the payout rate is calculated (step A11003), and the calculated payout rate is saved in the payout rate storage area 1 (step A11004).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated payout rate is 100 or more (step A11005). If it is less than 100 (step A11005; N), the segment data corresponding to the payout rate is saved in the segment area ( Step A11006). If it is 100 or more (step A11005; Y), segment data for "99" blinking display is saved in the segment area (step A11007). As a result, the payout rate at the present time is displayed on the payout rate display section 67.

  Thereafter, a command corresponding to the payout rate is prepared (step A11008), effect command setting processing is performed (step A2309), and signal data relating to the payout rate is saved in the test signal output data area (step A2310).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the number of discharged balls is 60000 or more (step A11009), and if it is less than 60000 (step A11009; N), the processing from step A2313 is performed. On the other hand, when the number of discharged balls is 60000 or more (step A11009; Y), the value of the output rate storage area 2 is saved in the output rate storage area 3 (step A11010), and the current output rate is output. It saves in the ball ratio storage area 2 (step A11011). Then, the acquired ball number area is cleared to 0 (step A2311), the discharged ball number area is cleared to 0 (step A2312), and the processing of step A2313 and the subsequent steps is performed.

  In the payout rate storage area, three areas of the payout rate storage areas 1 to 3 are provided. Among these, the payout rate storage area 1 is an area for storing the payout rate calculated in step A11003. In addition, the withdrawal rate storage areas 2 and 3 are areas for storing the withdrawal rate when the number of discharged balls reaches 60000, and the exit rate storage area 2 comes out when it reached 60000 last time. It is an area for storing the ball ratio, and the ball-out rate storage area 3 is an area for storing the ball-out rate when reaching 60000 pieces before the previous time. As a result, it is possible to store the withdrawal rate when the number of balls discharged for the last two past has reached a predetermined number.

  That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms a use game value acquiring means capable of acquiring the amount of used game value (the number of discharged balls) which is the game value used for the game, and the added game which is the game value granted to the player It is a means to acquire granted gaming value that can acquire the amount of value (the number of earned balls). In addition, every time a predetermined period of time elapses (here, the number of discharged balls reaches 60000), the amount of used game value acquired by the used game value acquisition means in the predetermined period and the predetermined period The calculating means is a calculating means for calculating a ratio value (disbursed rate) of the amount of the granted gaming value acquired by the granted gaming value acquiring means in the above. In addition, while the game control device 100 forms a storage means for storing the ratio value calculated by the calculation means a predetermined number of times, whether the ratio value stored in the storage means is within a predetermined reference range (normal range) To determine the

[Main processing]
Also, in place of the main process shown in FIG. 5B, the main process shown in FIG. 170 is performed. The same processing as the main processing according to the first embodiment is assigned the same step number. In the main processing, performance determination processing (step A11021) is performed.

Performance judgment processing
FIG. 171 shows the performance determination process. In this performance determination process, first, the value of the payout rate storage area 2 is acquired (step A11031), the number of repetitions is set (step A11032), and 0 is set as an abnormality determination value (step A11033). The number of repetitions set here is “2” which is the number of areas of past data of the payout rate.

  Next, it is determined whether the obtained payout rate is in the normal range (step A11034), and when it is in the normal range (step A11034; Y), the process proceeds to step A11036. If the normal range is not satisfied (step A11034; N), the abnormality determination value is updated by +1 (step A11035), and the process proceeds to step A11036.

  Thereafter, the value of the next payout rate storage area is acquired (step A11036). Here, the value of the payout rate storage area 3 is acquired. Then, the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step A11037), and it is determined whether the number of repetitions is 0 (step A11038). If the number of repetitions is not 0 (step A11038; N), that is, if the determination is not made on all the past data of the payout rate, the process proceeds to step A11034. In this case, it is determined whether or not the pop-out rate obtained in step A11036 is within the normal range. If the number of repetitions is 0 (step A11038; Y), that is, if the determination is made for all past data of the payout rate, it is determined whether the abnormality determination value is 0 (step A11039).

  If the abnormality determination value is 0 (step A11039; Y), that is, if all the past data of the payout rate is within the normal range, the performance determination process is ended. If the abnormality determination value is not 0 (step A11039; N), that is, if at least one of the past data of the payout rate is not within the normal range, an abnormality determination command according to the abnormality determination value is displayed on the presentation control board It transmits to apparatus 300) (step A11040), and ends performance judging processing. Therefore, when at least one of the ratio values stored in the storage unit is not within the reference range, the game control apparatus 100 indicates abnormality information (abnormality determination command) to the effect control unit (effect control apparatus 300). ) As a transmission means.

  Although the above-mentioned normal range (reference range) can be set arbitrarily, it is taken as a range of 10-60, for example. If the payout rate is less than 10, it is considered that the number of obtained balls is extremely small with respect to the number of discharged balls, and it is difficult to win various prize winning openings. Further, when the payout rate exceeds 60, it is a situation where the number of obtained balls is extremely large with respect to the number of discharged balls, and it is considered that winning into various winning openings becomes too easy. In addition, if the payout rate exceeds 60, it may be considered that the act of fraudulently acquiring a prize ball has been carried out due to fraud.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 172 shows the one-shot system command processing (step B1212) in the received command analysis processing shown in FIG. 80 performed by the effect control device 300. In the one-shot system command processing, first, it is determined whether the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (step B3001). If the MODE section indicates a model designation command (step B3001; Y), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (step B3002), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE section does not represent a model designation command (step B3001; N), it is next determined whether the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (step B3003). Then, if the MODE unit represents a command for initializing the RAM (step B3003; Y), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying of RAM initialization and the like is executed (step B3004), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. .

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command for initializing the RAM (step B3003; N), it is next determined whether the MODE unit represents a command at the time of power failure recovery (step B3005). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a command at the time of power failure recovery (step B3005; Y), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (step B3006), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE section does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery (step B3005; N), it is next determined whether the MODE section represents an abnormality determination command that constitutes performance abnormality information (step B3007). . Then, if the MODE section does not indicate an abnormality determination command (step B3007; N), processing corresponding to each other command is performed although illustration is omitted.

  If the MODE section indicates an abnormality determination command (step B3007; Y), a notification mode is set according to the abnormality determination value included in the abnormality determination command (step B3008), and the performance abnormality notification manages the notification time. An initial value is set to the timer (step B3009), and the one-shot command processing ends.

  The notification of abnormality based on the reception of the abnormality determination command is performed by a notification unit that is not a rendering device used for rendering a game. The notification unit is provided with LEDs capable of emitting light of a plurality of light emission colors controlled by the effect control device 300, and is provided at a position where it can be viewed in the closed state of the front frame 12 to open the front frame 12. It is possible to confirm the abnormality even without it. By causing the notification unit to emit light in different emission colors according to the abnormality determination value (here, 1 or 2), it is possible to notify of the number of values having abnormality and the abnormality of the falling-out rate. For example, when the abnormality determination value is 1, light is emitted in yellow, and when the abnormality determination value is 2, light is emitted in red. In addition, when the abnormality determination value is 0, the light may not be emitted or may be emitted in green.

  In addition, the performance abnormality notification timer manages a time of abnormality notification, sets a predetermined initial value at the start of the notification, and ends the abnormality notification with the passage of time corresponding to the initial value. It is. Thus, the notification is ended after the notification is performed for a predetermined time from the reception of the abnormality determination command. In this way, when preparing for the opening of the game arcade, abnormality notification is performed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the abnormality notification can be finished at the opening time, and the store clerk of the game arcade becomes abnormal. While being able to confirm, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality being known to the player.

  The configuration of the notification unit is not limited to the above-described one, and any configuration may be used as long as it can notify the number of abnormal values and the number of abnormal values. Also, the number of abnormality determination values may not be notified. In addition, abnormality notification may be performed using a rendering device used for rendering of a game. In the case of performing notification by the rendering device, notification is performed by the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, the operation of the panel effect device 44, and the output of sound by the speakers 19a and 19b. Also in this case, the notification mode is made different according to the abnormality determination value, and the number of values having abnormality and the number of abnormality is made available.

  In addition, although it has been stated that the abnormality notification is ended by the passage of a predetermined time by the performance abnormality notification timer, the abnormality notification may be ended by a trigger other than the passage of the predetermined time. For example, the start of the special view variation display game, the operation of the effect button 25, the reception of a predetermined command, the operation of a specific operation unit inoperable by the player, and the like can be mentioned.

  In addition, although the number of past data of the dispensing rate to be storable is two, only the latest one past data may be storable, or three or more past data may be storable. When three or more pieces of past data are stored, all pieces of past data may be targets of abnormality determination, or only some pieces of past data may be targets of abnormality determination. Further, the current payout rate stored in the payout rate storage area 1 may also be a target of the abnormality determination. However, since there is a high possibility of becoming an abnormal value when the aggregation period is short, for example, it may be a target of abnormality determination only when a fixed period such as 10000 or more discharged balls has elapsed.

  Further, although the payout rate in the period until the number of discharged balls reaches 60000 or more is stored as the past data, this period can be set arbitrarily. In addition, this period may not be a period depending on the number of discharged balls, and may be, for example, a period from elapse of a fixed time or power on to shut off.

  Further, although the abnormality notification is performed when the power is turned on, the abnormality notification may be performed at timing other than this. Further, the abnormality notification may be performed based on the operation of the specific operation unit which the player can not operate. Even when the abnormality notification is performed at a timing other than when the power is turned on, the timing of the abnormality notification may be controlled by setting the timing of the abnormality determination and the transmission timing of the abnormality determination command to a predetermined timing. The notification may be started at a predetermined timing based on the information of the abnormality determination command received by the effect control device 300 in advance.

  Further, although the abnormality determination is performed in the game control apparatus 100, the information on the payout rate may be transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300, and the abnormality determination may be performed in the effect control apparatus 300. . Further, the game control device 100 may transmit information on the number of discharged balls and the number of obtained balls to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 may calculate the payout rate to make an abnormality determination.

  In addition, the game control apparatus 100 may notify of an abnormality. In this case, performance determination processing shown in FIG. 173 is performed instead of the performance determination processing shown in FIG. In this performance judgment processing, when the abnormality judgment value is not 0 (step A11039; N), the notification mode according to the abnormality judgment value is set (step A11051), and the performance abnormality notification timer managing the notification time is initialized to the initial value. The setting is made (step A11052). Note that these processes are the same as steps B3008 and B3009 shown in FIG. Further, the effect control device 300 does not perform the processing of step B3007 to step B3009 of FIG. The notification unit that performs the abnormality notification may use the batch display device 50, or may be provided with a dedicated notification unit controlled by the game control apparatus 100.

  In addition, although it is reported that the payout rate is an abnormal value, other values may be stored for a predetermined period in the past, and the abnormal notification may be performed as described above. good. The predetermined period may be a period until the number of discharged balls reaches 60000 as in the case of the payout rate, or may be a period different from the payout rate.

  As the target value, there is an accessory ratio calculated in the first embodiment. As the feature ratio, of the total number of balls (total number of balls) obtained by winning in the winning opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 until the present, during the jackpot state (ie during the fanfare and ending) In (excluded), the ratio (%) of the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls by character) obtained by winning in the special winning opening (so-called continuous character ratio) can be mentioned. In this case, for example, the case where it exceeds 60% is regarded as abnormal. Also, the ratio of the number of winning balls obtained by winning in the special winning opening and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (so-called combination ratio (general combination ratio) generally used) good. In this case, for example, the case where 70% is exceeded is regarded as abnormal. Also, it may be a ratio (large winning opening ratio) of the number of winning balls (in big hit state and small hit state) obtained by winning in the big winning opening among the total winning balls number (total number of winning balls) .

  In addition, even if notification of abnormal values is performed for two or more values among the payout rate and the item ratio, even if notification can be made to distinguish how many data of abnormal values are in which value. It is good, and it may be informed only that there is an abnormal value without distinction. Further, the type of value to be notified of abnormality may be selected by operating a switch or the like.

  From the above, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is centrally controlled in the gaming machine that generates a state advantageous to the player. The control means (game control apparatus 100) and effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) for controlling effects based on information from the game control means are provided, and the game control means is the game value used for the game Usage game value acquisition means (game control device 100) capable of acquiring the amount of use game value, and provision game value acquisition means (game control device 100) capable of acquiring the amount of provision game value which is the game value given to the player And each time a predetermined period has elapsed, the amount of used gaming value acquired by the used gaming value acquisition means in the predetermined period, and the granted game acquired by the granted game value acquisition means in the predetermined period Calculation means (game control apparatus 100) for calculating the ratio value of the amount of value, storage means (game control apparatus 100) for storing the ratio value calculated by the calculation means for a predetermined number of times, and stored in the storage means If at least one of the determination means (game control apparatus 100) for determining whether the ratio value is within the predetermined reference range and the ratio value stored in the storage means is not within the reference range And the effect control means performs notification by a predetermined notification device based on the reception of the abnormality information. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the performance of the gaming machine is appropriate.

  Further, the notification device is a device different from the effect device (display device 41, frame decoration device 18, panel decoration device 46, panel effect device 44, speakers 19a, 19b) capable of executing game effects. Therefore, the abnormality can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, the notification device is a rendering device capable of executing a rendering of a game. Therefore, the rendering device can be used as the notification device, and the cost can be reduced.

  It has a main frame (front frame 12) that covers the front of the gaming machine and can be converted to a closed state or an open state, and is closed when playing a game, and the notification device has the main frame closed. It will be provided in the position which can be visually recognized in a state. Therefore, the abnormality can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, when at least one of the ratio values stored in the storage unit is not within the reference range, the effect control unit is configured to transmit the abnormality information when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the performance of the gaming machine is appropriate at the time of opening preparation of the game arcade.

  Further, the effect control means starts the notification based on the reception of the abnormality information, and ends the notification based on the passage of a predetermined period. Therefore, the notification can be automatically ended when the game arcade is opened, and the player can be prevented from being notified of an abnormality.

  The transmission control means may further include transmission means for transmitting information on the number of ratio values out of the reference range among the ratio values stored in the storage means to the effect control means, the effect control means receiving the abnormality information Based on this, it is possible to make a notification by a predetermined notification device, and it becomes possible to make the notification mode different according to the number of ratio values that are not within the reference range. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the performance of the gaming machine is appropriate.

[Twenty-first embodiment]
A twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to twentieth embodiments.

[Dumped ball performance monitoring common processing]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in place of the common ball performance monitoring process shown in FIG. 18, a common ball game performance monitoring process shown in FIG. 174 is performed. In addition, it is basically the same as the ball exit performance monitoring process shown in FIG. 169 of the twentieth embodiment, and the same process is denoted with the same step number.

  In this output ball performance monitoring common process, it is determined whether the number of acquired balls is 300 or more (step A11061), and when it is less than 300 (step A11061; N), the processes after step A2313 are performed. On the other hand, if the number of acquired balls is 300 or more (step A11061; Y), it is determined whether the number of discharged balls is within the reference range (step A11062).

  If the discharged ball number is not within the reference range (step A11062; N), the switch abnormality 2 error flag is set to ON (step A11063), and the processes after step A2313 are performed. If the discharged ball number is within the reference range (step A11062; Y), the switch abnormality 2 error flag is set to off (step A11064), and the processes after step A2313 are performed.

  That is, the amount of granted gaming value acquired by the granted gaming value acquiring means capable of obtaining the amount of granted gaming value, which is the gaming value granted to the player, by the gaming control apparatus 100 reaches a predetermined amount (300 here). It is a counting means for counting the amount of use game value acquired by the use game value acquisition means capable of acquiring the amount of use game value which is the game value used for the game in the period up to the period. Further, the game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining whether the amount of used game value counted by the counting means is within a predetermined reference range.

  The switch abnormality 2 error flag is a flag that is set when the abnormality detection signal 2 is received in the first embodiment, and is a flag that indicates a disconnection state such as disconnection of a switch connector. In the present embodiment, the switch abnormality 2 error is not based on the abnormality detection signal 2 but is an error when the number of discharged balls is not within the reference range. If the number of balls discharged is not within the reference range, it is possible that either the out ball detection switch 65 or the switch of the winning opening is in a broken state and the detection signal of the game balls can not be received. If it is not within the range, it is assumed that the wire is disconnected.

  Although the above-mentioned reference range can be set up arbitrarily, it is taken as a range of 10-3000, for example. If the number of discharged balls is less than 10, the number of discharged balls is extremely smaller than the number of obtained balls, and a defect such as disconnection of the out ball detection switch 65 may be considered. Further, when the number of discharged balls exceeds 3,000, the number of discharged balls is extremely large relative to the number of obtained balls, and a defect such as disconnection of the sensor at the winning opening may be considered.

  In the present embodiment, the gate switch 34 serving as detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine, the winning opening switches 35a and 35b, the special winning opening switch 39a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a and the board radio wave sensor 62 When a disconnection is detected in the proximity I / F 121, the abnormality detection signal 1 is output, and the switch abnormality 1 error flag is turned on. Then, based on this, it is determined that a switch abnormality 1 error is made in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process, and the disconnection can be detected also from this point. Of course, the out ball detection switch 65 is also one of the detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine, and a detection signal is input to the CPU 111A via the proximity I / F 121, and the proximity I / F 121 detects disconnection. The abnormality detection signal 1 may be output to

  The switch 1 abnormality error and the switch abnormality 2 error are set for abnormality notification by the gaming machine state check process (see FIG. 19) in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. If the switch abnormality 1 error flag or the switch abnormality 2 error flag is in the on state, it is determined that the switch abnormality 1 error or the switch abnormality 2 error has occurred, and the effect control switch 300 turns on the switch abnormality error state command Is transmitted and an error notification of disconnection is performed.

  That is, the game control apparatus 100 serves as a control means for receiving a signal from the detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine, and serves as a disconnection detection means for detecting disconnection of the connection with the detection means. Then, the game control device 100 or the effect control device 300 functions as a disconnection notification unit for notifying when the disconnection detection unit detects that the connection with the detection unit is disconnected.

  The error notification of the switch 1 abnormality error and the switch abnormality 2 error is performed by the notification unit which is not the rendering device used for the rendering of the game as in the twentieth embodiment, but may be performed by the rendering device. In addition, the game control apparatus 100 may perform error notification.

  Also, when the number of discharged balls is within the reference range, it is determined that the out ball detection switch 65 etc. is not broken in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process by turning off the switch abnormality 2 error flag. It becomes. If it is determined in the previous determination that the switch abnormality 2 error has occurred, the state OFF command of the switch abnormality 2 error is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the gaming machine state check processing, and the error notification based on the switch abnormality 2 error ends. It will be done. It should be noted that the error notification based on the switch abnormality 2 error may be ended by a release operation by a staff member of the game arcade.

  The situation in which the number of discharged balls determined to be a switch abnormality 2 error is out of the standard range may occur even if an act of causing the prize ball to be illegally issued due to a fraudulent action, Considering that there is a possibility of such a malfunction of the gaming machine, it is not the notification of the fraud but the notification of the disconnection, not to give the player who is playing the game a sense of discomfort. If a notification of disconnection is given, the attendant of the game shop will confirm it, so it is possible to find out even if it is a fraudulent act.

  Although the number of balls acquired as a trigger for determining the switch abnormality 2 error is set to 300, the present invention is not limited to this and can be arbitrarily set. In addition, the switch ball error 2 error flag is immediately set to the ON state when the number of discharged balls is within the reference range, but the switch abnormality occurs when the judgment ball is continuously out of the reference range at a plurality of determination opportunities. (2) The error flag may be turned on. Further, the determination may not be performed in a game state in which the number of acquired balls tends to increase, such as a special game state or a general power support state, or a reference range for these game states may be used.

  Moreover, although the normal range of the number of discharge balls when the number of acquired balls reaches 300 is set to 10 to 3000, it is not limited to this. For example, the switch abnormality 2 error may be determined only when the number of discharged balls when the number of obtained balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300) is zero. By doing this, it is possible to make the switch abnormality 2 error only a state in which the sensor for clearly detecting the number of discharged balls is disconnected. Also, when the number of ejected balls when the number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined number is 0, it is judged as a switch abnormality 2 error (broken wire error), and when the number of ejected balls is 1 or more and less than 10, the switch abnormality 3 error ( It may be an error in which an abnormality including a disconnection is assumed. That is, a plurality of abnormal ranges may be set, and an abnormality notification corresponding to the corresponding abnormal range may be performed.

  Further, the reference range may be set based on a value obtained by dividing the number of acquired balls by the maximum number of balls. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of winning balls for one winning is 15 and the number of winning balls is 300/15 for the maximum winning balls = 20. Do. If the number of balls discharged when the number of obtained balls reaches 300 is less than 20, the number of balls obtained will reach 300 even if all the drained balls are in the winning opening for generating the maximum number of balls. It does not reach and a disconnection error etc. is suspected. In addition, when a decimal point generate | occur | produces by said calculation result, when setting a reference range, it is set as the number which rounded up the decimal point or less. For example, when the switch abnormality 2 error is determined from the discharged ball number when the obtained ball number reaches 100, the number of obtained game balls is 100100the maximum winning ball number ≒ 7, so less than 7 In the case of, a disconnection error occurs.

  Also, the configuration of the present embodiment can be applied to the configuration of the above-mentioned twentieth embodiment. In this case, in the present embodiment, the number of acquired balls and the number of discharged balls for monitoring the occurrence of the switch abnormality 2 error is managed separately from the number of acquired balls and the number of discharged balls for calculating the withdrawal rate. . Then, when the number of discharged balls used to monitor the rate of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60000), only the number of obtained balls and the number of discharged balls used to monitor the rate of balls are cleared to 0, and switch abnormality 2 error monitoring When the number of balls acquired for use reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300), only the number of acquired balls and the number of discharged balls used for monitoring the switch abnormality 2 error are cleared to zero. Further, as in the twentieth embodiment, the number of acquired balls and the number of discharged balls for calculating the withdrawal rate is cleared to 0 when the number of discharged balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60000), and is acquired in this process The occurrence of the switch abnormality 2 error may be monitored from the number of discharged balls during the period until the number of balls increases by 300.

  From the above, the game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, it is the gaming value used for the game in the gaming machine that generates a state advantageous to the player Usage game value acquisition means (game control device 100) capable of acquiring the amount of use game value, and provision game value acquisition means (game control device 100) capable of acquiring the amount of provision game value which is the game value given to the player And the counting means (game control apparatus 100) for counting the amount of use game value acquired by the use game value acquisition means in a period until the amount of the provision game value acquired by the provision game value acquisition means reaches a predetermined amount And determining means (game control apparatus 100) for determining whether or not the amount of used gaming value counted by the counting means is within a predetermined reference range. And thus it is possible to perform the notification by a predetermined alarm device when it is determined that there is no. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the performance is appropriate, and to notify of an abnormality of the gaming machine.

  Further, detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine (gate switch 34, winning opening switches 35a, 35b, big winning opening switch 39a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, board radio wave sensor 62, out ball detection switch 65), and the control means is a disconnection detection means (game control apparatus 100) for detecting disconnection of the connection with the detection means, and the disconnection detection means And disconnection notification means (game control apparatus 100, effect control apparatus 300) for giving notification when it is detected that the connection with the detection means has been disconnected, and the disconnection notification means is not within the reference range by the determination means In the case where it is determined, the notification is performed on the assumption that the connection with the detection means is disconnected. Therefore, it is possible to notify of an abnormality of the gaming machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of. Also, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described embodiments and modifications can be combined as appropriate and applied.

  Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

10 gaming machine 12 front frame (main frame)
18 Frame decoration device (rendering device)
19a, 19b Speaker (rendering device)
41 Display device (effect device)
44 Board effect device (effect device)
46 Panel decoration device (rendering device)
100 game control device (game control means, use game value acquisition means, grant game value acquisition means, calculation means, storage means, determination means, transmission means)
300 Effect control device (effect control means)

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
Game control means for controlling the game in an integrated manner;
Providing effect control means for controlling an effect based on information from the game control means;
The game control means
A use game value acquisition unit capable of acquiring an amount of use game value which is a game value used for the game;
Granted game value acquiring means capable of acquiring an amount of a granted game value which is a game value granted to a player;
Every time a predetermined period elapses, the amount of the used gaming value acquired by the used gaming value acquiring means in the predetermined period, and the amount of the granted gaming value acquired by the provided gaming value acquiring means in the predetermined period, Calculating means for calculating the ratio value of
Storage means for storing the ratio value calculated by the calculation means a predetermined number of times;
Determining means for determining whether the ratio value stored in the storage means is within a predetermined reference range;
And transmission means for transmitting abnormality information to the effect control means when the power of the gaming machine is turned on when at least one of the ratio values stored in the storage means is not within the reference range,
The effect control means is
A gaming machine characterized by performing notification by a predetermined notification device based on receiving the abnormality information. The effect control means is
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the notification is started based on the reception of the abnormality information, and the notification is ended based on the passage of a predetermined period.